SlideShare a Scribd company logo
176
Most read
200
Most read
218
Most read
STAAD.Pro 2006


     GETTING STARTED

          AND

        TUTORIALS




                    A Bentley Solutions Center

                    www.reiworld.com
                    www.bentley.com/staad
STAAD.Pro 2006 is a suite of proprietary computer programs
of Research Engineers, a Bentley Solutions Center. Although
every effort has been made to ensure the correctness of these
programs, REI will not accept responsibility for any mistake,
error or misrepresentation in or as a result of the usage of
these programs.




                      RELEASE 2006, Build 1005

               © 2006 Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved.



                             Published July, 2007
About STAAD.Pro

STAAD.Pro is a general purpose structural analysis and design program with
applications primarily in the building industry - commercial buildings, bridges and
highway structures, industrial structures, chemical plant structures, dams, retaining
walls, turbine foundations, culverts and other embedded structures, etc. The program
hence consists of the following facilities to enable this task.

1.   Graphical model generation utilities as well as text editor based commands for
     creating the mathematical model. Beam and column members are represented using
     lines. Walls, slabs and panel type entities are represented using triangular and
     quadrilateral finite elements. Solid blocks are represented using brick elements.
     These utilities allow the user to create the geometry, assign properties, orient cross
     sections as desired, assign materials like steel, concrete, timber, aluminum, specify
     supports, apply loads explicitly as well as have the program generate loads, design
     parameters etc.
2.   Analysis engines for performing linear elastic and pdelta analysis, finite element
     analysis, frequency extraction, and dynamic response (spectrum, time history,
     steady state, etc.).
3.   Design engines for code checking and optimization of steel, aluminum and timber
     members. Reinforcement calculations for concrete beams, columns, slabs and shear
     walls. Design of shear and moment connections for steel members.
4.   Result viewing, result verification and report generation tools for examining
     displacement diagrams, bending moment and shear force diagrams, beam, plate and
     solid stress contours, etc.
5.   Peripheral tools for activities like import and export of data from and to other
     widely accepted formats, links with other popular softwares for niche areas like
     reinforced and prestressed concrete slab design, footing design, steel connection
     design, etc.
6.   A library of exposed functions called OpenSTAAD which allows users to access
     STAAD.Pro’s internal functions and routines as well as its graphical commands to
     tap into STAAD’s database and link input and output data to third-party software
     written using languages like C, C++, VB, VBA, FORTRAN, Java, Delphi, etc.
     Thus, OpenSTAAD allows users to link in-house or third-party applications with
     STAAD.Pro.
About the STAAD.Pro Documentation
The documentation for STAAD.Pro consists of a set of manuals as described below.
These manuals are normally provided only in the electronic format, with perhaps some
exceptions such as the Getting Started Manual which may be supplied as a printed book
to first time and new-version buyers.

All the manuals can be accessed from the Help facilities of STAAD.Pro. Users who
wish to obtain a printed copy of the books may contact Research Engineers. REI also
supplies the manuals in the PDF format at no cost for those who wish to print them on
their own. See the back cover of this book for addresses and phone numbers.

Getting Started and Tutorials : This manual contains information on the contents of
the STAAD.Pro package, computer system requirements, installation process, copy
protection issues and a description on how to run the programs in the package.
Tutorials that provide detailed and step-by-step explanation on using the programs are
also provided.

Examples Manual
This book offers examples of various problems that can be solved using the STAAD
engine. The examples represent various structural analyses and design problems
commonly encountered by structural engineers.

Graphical Environment
This document contains a detailed description of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of
STAAD.Pro. The topics covered include model generation, structural analysis and
design, result verification, and report generation.

Technical Reference Manual
This manual deals with the theory behind the engineering calculations made by the
STAAD engine. It also includes an explanation of the commands available in the
STAAD command file.

International Design Codes
This document contains information on the various Concrete, Steel, and Aluminum
design codes, of several countries, that are implemented in STAAD.

The documentation for the STAAD.Pro Extension component(s) is available separately.
Part - I

Getting Started


System Requirements
     Installation
       Start-up
Tutorial Staad-Pro
Table of Contents



1. Introduction                       1
2. Hardware Requirements              2
3. Contents of the STAAD.Pro CD       4
4. Installation                       6
5. Copy Protection Device             15
6. Running STAAD.Pro                  17
7. Running STAAD.etc                  19
8. Running Sectionwizard              20
9. Running STAAD.foundation           21
10. Running Mesher                    22
Tutorial Staad-Pro
1


1. Introduction

          STAAD.Pro is an analysis and design software package for
          structural engineering. This manual is intended to guide users who
          are new to this software as well as experienced users who want
          specific information on the basics of using the program.

          Part-I of this manual describes the following:

               •   Hardware Requirements
               •   Contents of the STAAD.Pro CD
               •   Installation
               •   Copy Protection Device
               •   Running STAAD.Pro

          Part II of this manual contains tutorials on using STAAD.Pro. The
          tutorials guide a user through the processes of:

               •   Creating a structural model. This consists of generating
                   the structural geometry, specifying member properties,
                   material constants, loads, analysis and design
                   specifications, etc.
               •   Visualization and verification of the model geometry
               •   Running the STAAD analysis engine to perform analysis
                   and design
               •   Verification of results - graphically and numerically
               •   Report generation and printing
               •   Inter-operability. In other words, using STAAD.Pro in
                   conjunction with other programs created by REI, such as
                   STAAD.etc.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up
2



    2. Hardware Requirements

             The following requirements are suggested minimums. Systems
             with increased capacity provide enhanced performance.

             •   PC with Intel-Pentium or equivalent.
             •   Graphics card and monitor with 1024x768 resolution, 256
                 color display (16 bit high color recommended).
             •   128 MB RAM or higher.
             •   Windows NT 4.0 or higher operating system. Windows 95,
                 Windows 98 & Windows Me are no longer supported. The
                 program works best on Windows 2000 and XP operating
                 systems.
             •   Sufficient free space on the hard disk to hold the program and
                 data files. The disk space requirement will vary depending on
                 the modules you are installing. A typical minimum is 500MB
                 free space.
             •   A multi-media ready system with sound card and speakers is
                 needed to run the tutorial movies and slide shows.

             Note: Additional RAM, disk space, and video memory will
             enhance the performance of STAAD.Pro.

             Starting with STAAD.Pro Version 2001, the size of structures that
             the program can handle has been increased significantly. As a
             result of this, the minimum amount of physical + virtual memory
             required by the program also has increased to over 600MB. Users
             may need to ensure that adequate amounts of virtual memory are
             available, and in Windows NT and 2000 systems, parameters such
             as paging file sizes should be large enough or span over multiple
             drives if the free space on any one drive runs low.

             Another issue to keep in mind is the location of the “TEMP”
             parameter as in the “SET TEMP” environment variable in
             Windows NT and 2000 systems. While performing calculations,
             depending on the structure size, the program may create gigantic
             scratch files which are placed in the folder location associated with
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up

                                                                                               3
                      the “TEMP” parameter. Users may wish to point the “SET TEMP”
                      variable to a folder on a drive that has disk space sufficiently large
                      to accommodate the requirements for large size structures.

                      Note: The user must have a basic familiarity with Microsoft
                      Windows systems in order to use the software.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up
4



    3. Contents of the STAAD.Pro CD

             Typically, a startup screen appears when the CD is placed in the
             drive. If it does not, you may initiate it by running SPROCD.EXE
             located at the root folder of the CD (This can be done by clicking
             on the file named SPROCD.EXE from Windows Explorer). The
             SPROCD Title screen appears as shown in Figure 1.




                             Figure 1: The SPROCD Title Screen


             The choices offered by the Title screen are described below:

             Install STAAD Structural Suite
             This is the installation module containing the programs
             STAAD.Pro Version 2006, STAAD.etc, Sectionwizard and
             STAAD.foundation. STAAD.etc is a program that enables design of
             structural components such as base plates, bolt groups, cantilever
             retaining walls, rectangular footings, etc. Sectionwizard is a
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up

                                                                                                 5
                      program for calculating properties such as area, moments of
                      inertia, section modulii, torsional constants, etc., of various cross
                      sections. STAAD.foundation is a program for designing reinforced
                      concrete pile caps and pile groups, mat foundations, individual
                      footings, etc. In order to use STAAD.etc, Sectionwizard and
                      STAAD.foundation to their full capability, users must have
                      purchased them as additional items of software. In the absence of a
                      valid license to use them, those modules will work only in a
                      demonstration mode.

                      The installation procedure is explained in detail in the next
                      section.

                      View STAAD.Pro Manuals

                      This takes the user to another screen which displays links to
                      various STAAD.Pro manuals.

                      Note: STAAD.beam is not a part of the STAAD.Pro family of products.
                      You need to purchase it separately.

                      Install STAAD.beam
                      STAAD.beam is a utility type of program for designing simple steel
                      beams. Its usefulness lies in its ease of use, and its ability to create
                      reports of the detailed calculations that goes into the design of
                      members per standard codes like AISC ASD and AISC LRFD.

                      Exit
                      Exits the SPROCD program.

                      All online documentation that comes with the program is created in
                      HTML format. These may be accessed using any Internet browser
                      such as Microsoft’s Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.

                      A set of multi-media movies which demonstrate the procedure for
                      using STAAD.Pro are accessible after installing the program. They
                      can be accessed from the Help menu of the main screen of the
                      program. These too can be viewed using a web browser.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up
6



    4. Installation

               If you receive a document titled Installation Notes, it will
               supercede all other related instructions.

               Close all applications before installing STAAD.Pro. Typically, a
               startup screen appears when the CD is placed in the drive. If it
               does not, you may initiate it by running SPROCD.EXE located at
               the root folder of the CD (This can be done by clicking on the file
               named SPROCD.EXE from Windows Explorer). For an
               explanation of the different facilities offered by the SPROCD
               program, please refer to the previous section.

               Note: In Windows NT, Windows 2000, and Windows XP systems,
               you have to log in with administrative rights before commencing
               installation.

               To commence installation, select the option named Install STAAD
               Structural Suite. Standard installation procedure available with any
               software running on Microsoft Windows is followed and hence is
               self-explanatory.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up

                                                                                           7
                      Users installing the commercial version of the program will
                      encounter the following screen.




                                   Figure 2: Customer Information & Serial Number


                      If an older version of STAAD.Pro has already been installed in the
                      machine, the serial number information will show up automatically
                      in this dialog box. If STAAD.Pro is being installed for the first
                      time in the machine, the Serial number box will be blank. In that
                      case, enter the serial number provided in the CD case.

                      If you are under Bentley Select Contract, you will be asked to
                      confirm that you will be using a Bentley SELECT License by
                      checking the box titled ‘I am under Bentley Select Contract’. This
                      will provide the serial number that is required for this method of
                      security only.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up
8
    When this box is checked, the following confirmation message box
    will be displayed.




                    Figure 2a: Customer Information

    One of the initial screens you will encounter is the one shown in
    Figure 3. It pertains to the type of software security system that
    you purchased with STAAD.Pro. SELECT XM system refers to
    Bentley’s SELECT Server based licensing system .A Local
    Security generally refers to a hardware lock, which is an adapter-
    like device that is placed on the parallel or USB port of your
    computer. It could also be a software based system (instead of a
    hardlock), in which case, it will be a software license which binds
    STAAD.Pro to the specific computer you are installing it on.
    Network Security refers to a system that supports simultaneous
    multiple-user access. A separate instruction document containing
    the steps for network installations is provided to users who
    have opted for this latter type. Please refer to the file
    "Quickstart.pdf" located in the CD for further description of these
    systems.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up

                                                                                          9




                                        Figure 3: Selection of security system type


                      If you have purchased SELECT XM license for the products,
                      please refer to Quick Start & Troubleshooting Guide to understand
                      how to install and configure SELECT XM licenses. If you do not
                      have SELECT XM license information, you can still choose the
                      “SELECT XM License” option during installation. The program
                      will run in Trial Mode for 15 days. You should complete the
                      SELECT XM License configuration within that period.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up
10
     If you choose Local Security, you are asked to select the type of
     hardware lock supplied to you, or the software license if that is
     applicable. The name of the lock is engraved on the cover of the
     lock. Make sure the type of lock you choose from Figure 4 matches
     that name. This is absolutely necessary to ensure that the program
     functions to its full capacity.

     Please note that if you do not have a license for STAAD.etc,
     Sectionwizard and/or STAAD.foundation, they will work only in
     the Demonstration mode.




                  Figure 4: Selection of Local Security type
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up

                                                                                        11
                      You may install the program in any folder of your choice. A
                      default folder name is supplied to you.




                                       Figure 5: Selection of the Installation Folder
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up
12
     The next dialog box seeks confirmation from you as to whether
     you wish to install all the programs shown in the list. Advanced
     Mesher is a standalone program for generating finite element
     meshes for panel type entities like walls and slabs and is available
     for those who want advanced meshing facilities besides those
     which are built into the STAAD.Pro software. OpenSTAAD is a
     library of functions which enables users to access input and output
     data from their STAAD.Pro projects for extraction into their own
     applications. While Advanced Mesher and OpenSTAAD are free
     utilities supplied along with STAAD.Pro, the remainder of the
     programs in the list require your copy-protection device/system to
     support those. If you do not wish to have any specific item(s)
     installed, uncheck the associated box.




                   Figure 6: Selection of programs to install
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up

                                                                                            13
                      You also have to choose a default unit system. This is to ensure
                      that the length and force units frequently used by you will be
                      available upon entry into the program each time. This is known as
                      the base unit system, and mainly affects the units in which results
                      are displayed, as well as default values for certain quantities.
                      Please refer to one of the tutorials for additional information on
                      these. Of course, it is always possible for you to change the base
                      unit system within the program, at run-time, as frequently as you
                      please.




                             Figure 7: Selection of Default Unit System for STAAD.Pro
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up
14
     Towards the end of the installation process, a message resembling
     the one shown in Figure 8 will appear. It is pertinent only to users
     who have received this program as an upgrade from earlier
     versions of STAAD.Pro, and are already using a security device
     with those versions. For those users, their hardware lock also
     needs to be upgraded to enable it to work with STAAD.Pro 2006.
     That process is done electronically - called re-programming the
     lock - and there is no need to physically replace the lock (in most
     of the cases).




               Figure 8: Information regarding upgrade of lock


     After the installation is complete, please restart your machine for
     the changes to take effect.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up

                                                                                              15


5. Copy Protection Device

                      As explained in the previous section, a copy protection device in
                      the form of a Select XM License, a hardware lock, or a software
                      license, is required to run STAAD.Pro, STAAD.etc,
                      STAAD.foundation and Sectionwizard.

                      If you are using a hardware lock, it must be inserted in the parallel
                      port of your computer and must remain there during the entire
                      duration that you are in one of the programs. If any other device,
                      such as printer cable, hardware lock for other software, etc., is
                      attached to the parallel port, we recommend that you attach the
                      STAAD.Pro / STAAD.etc hardware lock in front of such devices.
                      In case you have multiple locks, and cannot stack them for any
                      reason, REI can replace your parallel port type with a USB type of
                      lock.

                      The hardware lock is configured for the programs and modules that
                      you have purchased. If you install one of the programs or modules
                      that is not supported by the hardware lock, that component may
                      not be accessible, or will be operable only as a Demonstration
                      version.

                      The hardware lock driver(s) are automatically installed during the
                      installation process. For computers running on Windows NT,
                      Windows 2000, or Windows XP, you must have administrative
                      rights before installing the program to enable proper installation of
                      the hardware lock driver files.

                      As can be seen from the tutorials in the later sections of
                      this book, STAAD.Pro consists of various modules, each
                      designed to perform a certain type of task in the model
                      generation, analysis and result verification process.
                      Version 2006 requires the hardlock to be in place during
                      the entire time that any and all of these tasks are being
                      performed.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up
16
     In other words, from the moment you start the program
     till the moment you exit it, the lock has to be in place. If
     the lock is detached at any time in between, the program
     will stop running, and request that you re-attach the lock.
     In the event that you are unable to, it will provide the
     opportunity to save the work and exit the program. To
     resume your work, you will have to put the lock back in
     the port and re-start the program.

     Another important aspect to note is that if you are
     upgrading from an earlier version of STAAD.Pro such as
     2000, 2001 or 2002, one of the following is applicable with
     regards to the lock:

        a. The upgrade package should contain a new lock
           which replaces your old lock.
        b. The upgrade package should contain information
           outlining how you can re-program your earlier lock
           so that it becomes compatible with STAAD.Pro
           2006.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up

                                                                                    17


6. Running STAAD.Pro

                      Click on the STAAD.Pro icon from the STAAD.Pro 2006 program
                      group.




                                                 Figure 9: Starting STAAD.Pro
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up
18
     The STAAD.Pro main screen appears as shown in below.




                     Figure 10: The STAAD.Pro screen


     If you are a first time user who is unfamiliar with STAAD.Pro, we
     suggest that you go through the tutorials shown in Section II of
     this manual.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up

                                                                                           19


7. Running STAAD.etc

                      To launch the STAAD.etc program, click on the STAAD.etc icon.




                                                 Figure 11: Starting STAAD.etc

                      For help on using this program, we suggest that you go through the
                      STAAD.etc Documentation accessible by clicking on its icon
                      shown in the above figure.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up
20



     8. Running Sectionwizard

              To launch Sectionwizard, choose one of the programs from the
              Sectionwizard menu.




                          Figure 12: Starting Sectionwizard

              For help on using this program, please go through Sectionwizard
              Help shown in the above figure.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up

                                                                                  21


9. Running STAAD.foundation

                      To launch STAAD.foundation, click on the STAAD.foundation
                      icon.




                                          Figure 13: Starting STAAD.foundation

                      For help on using this program, please go through the
                      STAAD.foundation Documentation shown in the above figure.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up
22



     10. Running Mesher

              To launch Mesher, click on the Mesher icon.




                                  Figure 14: Starting Mesher

              Information on using this program is available from the Help
              menus of the program.
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up

                                                 23
System Requirements, Installation and Start-up
24
Part - II

Tutorials
s
Table of Contents
Introduction                                                          1
1. Tutorial Problem 1: 2D Portal Frame                               1-1

    1.1    Methods of creating the model                             1-2
    1.2    Description of the Tutorial Problem                       1-3
    1.3    Starting the Program                                      1-5
    1.4    Creating a New Structure                                  1-10
    1.5    Creating the Model using the Graphical Interface          1-13
           1.5.1    Generating the Model Geometry                    1-16
           1.5.2    Switching On Node And Beam Labels                1-23
           1.5.3    Specifying Member Properties                     1-26
           1.5.4    Specifying Material Constants                    1-32
           1.5.5    Changing the Input Units of Length               1-33
           1.5.6    Specifying Member Offsets                        1-35
           1.5.7    Printing Member Information in the Output File   1-40
           1.5.8    Specifying Supports                              1-43
           1.5.9    Viewing the model in 3D                          1-48
           1.5.10   Specifying Loads                                 1-50
           1.5.11   Specifying the Analysis Type                     1-60
           1.5.12   Specifying Post-Analysis Print Commands          1-62
           1.5.13   Short-listing the Load Cases to be used in
                    Steel Design                                     1-66
           1.5.14   Specifying Steel Design Parameters               1-68
           1.5.15   Re-specifying the Analysis Command               1-74
           1.5.16   Re-specifying the Track Parameter                1-75
           1.5.17   Specifying the Check Code Command                1-76
    1.6    Viewing the Input Command File                            1-79
    1.7    Creating the Model using the Command File                 1-82
    1.8    Performing Analysis/Design                                1-91
    1.9    Viewing the Output File                                   1-94
    1.10   Post-Processing                                           1-102
           1.10.1 Going to the Post-Processing Mode                  1-103
           1.10.2 Annotating the Displacements                       1-106
           1.10.3 Displaying Force/Moment Diagrams                   1-111
           1.10.4 Annotating the Force/Moment Diagram                1-114
           1.10.5 Changing the Degree of Freedom for which
                  Forces Diagram is Plotted                          1-117
           1.10.6 Displaying the Dimensions of The Members           1-120
2. Tutorial Problem 2: RC Framed Structure                                      2-1

   2.1    Methods of creating the model                                         2-2
   2.2    Description of the Tutorial Problem                                   2-3
   2.3    Starting the Program                                                  2-6
   2.4    Creating a New Structure                                              2-11
   2.5    Elements of the STAAD.Pro Screen                                      2-14
   2.6    Building the STAAD.Pro Model                                          2-15
          2.6.1    Generating the Model Geometry                                2-16
          2.6.2    Changing the Input Units of Length                           2-28
          2.6.3    Specifying Member Properties                                 2-30
          2.6.4    Specifying Geometric Constants                               2-36
          2.6.5    Specifying Material Constants                                2-38
          2.6.6    Specifying Supports                                          2-41
          2.6.7    Specifying Loads                                             2-46
          2.6.8    Specifying the Analysis Type                                 2-63
          2.6.9    Short-listing the load cases to be used in Concrete Design   2-65
          2.6.10   Specifying Concrete Design Parameters                        2-67
          2.6.11   Specifying Design Commands                                   2-71
   2.7    Viewing the Input Command File                                        2-74
   2.8    Creating the Model using the Command File                             2-77
   2.9    Performing the Analysis and Design                                    2-85
   2.10   Viewing the Output File                                               2-88
   2.11   Post-Processing                                                       2-96
          2.11.1  Going to the Post-Processing Mode                             2-97
          2.11.2  Viewing the Deflection Diagram                                2-99
          2.11.3  Switching between load cases for viewing the
                  deflection diagram                                            2-101
          2.11.4 Changing the size of the deflection diagram                    2-105
          2.11.5 Annotating Displacements                                       2-108
          2.11.6 Changing the units in which displacement values are
                  annotated                                                     2-111
          2.11.7 The Node Displacement Table                                    2-114
          2.11.8 Displaying Force/Moment Diagrams                               2-119
          2.11.9 Switching between load cases for viewing the
                  Force/Moment diagram                                          2-122
          2.11.10 Changing the size of the Force/Moment diagram                 2-126
          2.11.11 Changing the degree of freedom for which forces diagram
                  is plotted                                                    2-129
          2.11.12 Annotating the Force/Moment diagram                           2-131
2.11.13 Changing the units in which Force/Moment values
                   are annotated                                                  2-134
           2.11.14 Beam Forces Table                                              2-137
           2.11.15 Viewing the Force/Moment diagrams from the
                   Beam | Graphs Page                                             2-141
           2.11.16 Restricting the load cases for which results are viewed        2-145
           2.11.17 Using Member Query                                             2-147
           2.11.18 Producing an on-screen Report                                  2-152
           2.11.19 Taking Pictures                                                2-155
           2.11.20 Creating Customized Reports                                    2-157


3. Tutorial Problem 3: Analysis of a slab                                         3-1
   3.1    Methods of creating the model                                           3-2
   3.2    Description of the tutorial problem                                     3-3
   3.3    Starting the program                                                    3-6
   3.4    Creating a new structure                                                3-11
   3.5    Elements of the STAAD.Pro screen                                        3-14
   3.6    Building the STAAD.Pro model                                            3-15
           3.6.1    Generating the model geometry                                 3-16
           3.6.2    Changing the input units of length                            3-53
           3.6.3    Specifying Element Properties                                 3-55
           3.6.4    Specifying Material Constants                                 3-61
           3.6.5    Specifying Supports                                           3-62
           3.6.6    Specifying Primary Load Cases                                 3-67
           3.6.7    Creating Load Combinations                                    3-77
           3.6.8    Specifying the analysis type                                  3-82
           3.6.9    Specifying post-analysis print commands                       3-85
   3.7    Viewing the input command file                                          3-89
   3.8    Creating the model using the command file                               3-91
   3.9    Performing the analysis and design                                      3-98
   3.10   Viewing the output file                                                 3-101
   3.11   Post-Processing                                                         3-109
           3.11.1   Viewing stress values in a tabular form                       3-110
           3.11.2   Printing the tables                                           3-112
           3.11.3   Changing the units of values which appear in the
                    above tables                                                  3-113
           3.11.4   Limiting the load cases for which the results are displayed   3-115
           3.11.5   Stress Contours                                               3-117
           3.11.6   Animating stress contours                                     3-123
           3.11.7   Creating AVI Files                                            3-124
3.11.8 Viewing plate results using element query        3-127
          3.11.9 Producing an onscreen report                     3-131
          3.11.10 Viewing Support Reactions                       3-136


4. Tutorial Problem 4: Interoperability
   (using STAAD.Pro and STAAD.etc)                                 4-1

   4.1   Understanding STAAD.etc                                  4-2
   4.2   Description of the Tutorial Problem                      4-3
   4.3   Using the Interactive Mode in STAAD.Pro                  4-4
   4.4   Designing a Footing based on results from STAAD.Pro      4-9
   4.5   Designing a Base Plate based on results from STAAD.Pro   4-15
   4.7   Saving the Interactive Design as a STAAD.etc File        4-16


5. Frequently Performed Tasks                                     FPT-1
   1     Selecting nodes, beams, plates, etc.                     FPT-1
   2     Viewing the structure from different angles              FPT-8
   3     Switching on labels for nodes, beams, plates, etc.       FPT-12
   4     Displaying a portion of the model by isolating it
         from the rest of the structure                           FPT-18
   5     Creating Groups                                          FPT-38
   6     Displaying Loads on the screen                           FPT-47
   7     Displaying Load Values on the screen                     FPT-52
   8     Structural Tool Tip Options                              FPT-58
   9     Identifying Beam Start and End                           FPT-62
   10    Plotting from STAAD.Pro                                  FPT-67
Introduction

STAAD.Pro is a general purpose program for performing the
analysis and design of a wide variety of types of structures. The
basic three activities which are to be carried out to achieve that
goal - a) model generation b) the calculations to obtain the
analytical results c) result verification - are all facilitated by tools
contained in the program's graphical environment. This manual
contains four sample tutorials which guide the user through those 3
activities.

The first of those tutorials demonstrates these processes using a
simple two-dimensional steel portal frame. It is a good starting
point for learning the program. If you are unfamiliar with
STAAD.Pro, you will greatly benefit by going through this tutorial
first.

For the second tutorial, we have chosen a reinforced concrete
frame. We generate the model, perform the analysis, and design the
concrete beams and columns. It contains extensive details on the
various facilities available for visualization and verification of
results.

The modelling and analysis of a slab is demonstrated in the third
tutorial. Slabs, and other surface entities like walls are modelled
using plate elements. Large surface entities may have to be defined
using several elements and this sometimes requires a tool called a
mesh generator. This tutorial shows the simple techniques as well
as the mesh generation method for generating the finite element
model of the slab. It also explains the methods by which one can
check the results for plate elements.

A tutorial which demonstrates the inter-operability features
between STAAD.Pro and STAAD.etc. is presented in the fourth
tutorial. STAAD.etc is a set of modules which can be used to
perform component designs such as for a rectangular footing, base
plate, cantilever retaining wall, moment connection, bolt group,
etc. Users who have purchased STAAD.etc in addition to
STAAD.Pro may go through this tutorial to familiarize themselves
with the process of utilizing STAAD.etc to perform secondary
analysis and design tasks on a structure for which the primary
analysis and design is done using STAAD.Pro.
1-1




Tutorial Problem 1: 2D Portal Frame

                                                            Section          1
        This chapter provides a step-by-step tutorial for creating a 2D
        portal frame using STAAD.Pro. This tutorial covers the following
        topics.

        •   Starting the Program
        •   Creating a New Structure
        •   Creating Joints and Members
        •   Switching On Node and Beam Labels
        •   Specifying Member Properties
        •   Specifying Material Constants
        •   Specifying Member Offsets
        •   Printing Member Information
        •   Specifying Supports
        •   Specifying Loads
        •   Specifying the Analysis Type
        •   Specifying Post-Analysis Print Commands
        •   Specifying Steel Design Parameters
        •   Performing Analysis and Design
        •   Viewing the Output File
        •   Verifying results on screen – both graphically and numerically
1-2   Tutorial 1

      1.1 Methods of creating the model

                   There are two methods of creating the structure data:

                       a. using the command file
                       b. using the graphical model generation mode, or graphical
                          user interface (GUI) as it is usually referred to.

                   The Command File is a text file which contains the data for the
                   structure being modeled. This file consists of simple English-
                   language like commands. This command file may be created
                   directly using the editor built into the program, or for that matter,
                   any editor which saves data in text form, such as Notepad or
                   WordPad available in Microsoft Windows.

                   This command file is also automatically created behind the scenes
                   when the structure is generated using the Graphical User Interface.
                   The graphical model generation mode and the command file are
                   seamlessly integrated. So, at any time, you may temporarily exit
                   the graphical model generation mode and access the command file.
                   You will find that it reflects all data entered through the graphical
                   model generation mode. Further, when you make changes to the
                   command file and save it, the GUI immediately reflects the changes
                   made to the structure through the command file.

                   Both methods of creating our model are explained in this tutorial.
                   Section 1.3 through 1.6 explain the procedure for creating the file
                   using the GUI. Section 1.7 describes creation of the command file
                   using the STAAD.Pro text editor.
Tutorial 1   1-3

1.2 Description of the tutorial problem

          The structure for this project is a single bay, single story steel
          portal frame that will be analyzed and designed. The figure below
          shows the structure.


                                           2.5 KIP/FT

          10 KIP    2                                              3
                                    W14 x 34     2




                         W12 x 35                       W12 x 35       15' - 0"

                                                               3
                         1



                                                                   4
                     1




                                           20' - 0"


                                         Figure 1. 1

          An input file called "Tut-01-portal.std" containing the input data
          for the above structure has been provided with the program. This
          file contains what would otherwise have resulted had we followed
          the procedure explained in Section 1.7.
1-4   Tutorial 1

                      BASIC DATA FOR THE STRUCTURE

                   ATTRIBUTE            DATA
                   Member properties    Members 1 & 3 : W12X35

                                        Member 2 : W14X34

                   Material Constants   Modulus of Elasticity : 29000 ksi

                                        Poisson's Ratio : 0.30

                   Member Offsets       6.0 inches along global X for member 2 at both ends

                   Supports             Node 1 : Fixed

                                        Node 4 : Pinned

                   Loads                Load case 1 : Dead + Live
                                        Beam 2 : 2.5 kips/ft downward along global Y

                                        Load case 2 : Wind From Left
                                        10 kips point force at Node 2

                                        Load case 3 : 75 Percent of (DL+LL+WL)
                                        Load Combination - L1 X 0.75 + L2 X 0.75

                   Analysis Type        Linear Elastic (PERFORM)

                   Steel Design         Consider load cases 1 and 3 only.

                                        Parameters: Unsupported length of compression
                                        flange for bending : 10 ft for members 2 and 3, 15 ft
                                        for member 1.

                                        Steel Yield Stress : 40 ksi

                                        Perform member selection for members 2 and 3
Tutorial 1   1-5

1.3 Starting the program
         Select the STAAD.Pro icon from the STAAD.Pro 2006 program
         group.




                                  Figure 1. 2
1-6   Tutorial 1

                   The STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment will be invoked and the
                   following screen comes up.




                                                Figure 1. 3


                   This New dialog box will come up every time we start the program.
                   To turn this feature off, simply uncheck the Display this dialog box
                   at the Startup box at the lower left hand corner. This feature can be
                   turned on again at a later time when File | New is invoked from the
                   main menu.
Tutorial 1   1-7
Note about the unit system :

There are two base unit systems in the program which control the
units (length, force, temperature, etc.) in which, values,
specifically results and other information presented in the tables
and reports, are displayed in. The base unit system also dictates
what type of default values the program will use when attributes
such as Modulus of Elasticity, Density, etc., are assigned based on
material types – Steel, Concrete, Aluminum – selected from the
program’s library (Please refer to Section 5 of the STAAD.Pro
Technical Reference Manual for details). These two unit systems
are English (Foot, Pound, etc.) and Metric (KN, Meter, etc.).

If you recall, one of the choices made at the time of installing
STAAD.Pro is this base unit system setting. That choice will serve
as the default until we specifically change it.

The place from where we can change this setting is under the File |
Configure menu. To get to that option, first close down the dialog
box shown in the earlier figure by clicking on Cancel. Then, click
on the File | Configure menu option (see figure below) and choose
the appropriate unit system you want. For this tutorial, let us
choose the English units (Kip, Feet, etc.).




                            Figure 1. 4
1-8   Tutorial 1




                                               Figure 1. 5


                   Click on the Accept button to close the above dialog box.
Tutorial 1   1-9
Following this, select File | New once again.




                            Figure 1. 6

The dialog box shown in Figure 1.3 will re-appear.
1-10   Tutorial 1

       1.4 Creating a new structure
                    1.   In the New dialog box, we provide some crucial initial data
                         necessary for building the model.

                         The structure type is to be defined by choosing from among Space,
                         Plane, Floor and Truss. A Space type is one where the structure,
                         the loading or both, cause the structure to deform in all 3 global
                         axes (X, Y and Z). In a Plane type, the geometry, loading and
                         deformation are restricted to the global X-Y plane only. A Floor
                         type is a structure whose geometry is confined to the X-Z plane. A
                         Truss type of structure carries loading by pure axial action. Truss
                         members are deemed incapable of carrying shear, bending and
                         torsion. For our model, let us choose Plane.

                         We choose Foot as the length unit and Kilo Pound as the force
                         unit in which we will start to build the model. The units can be
                         changed later if necessary, at any stage of the model creation.

                         We also need to provide a name in the File Name edit box. This is
                         the name under which the structure data will be saved on the
                         computer hard disk. The name “Structure?” (? will be a number) is
                         recommended by the program by default, but we can change it to
                         any name we want. Let us choose the name PORTAL.

                         A default path name - the location on the computer drive where the
                         file will be saved – is provided by the program under Location. If
                         you wish to save the file in a different location, type in the name,
                         or click the    button and specify the desired path.

                         After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.
Tutorial 1   1-11




                                  Figure 1. 7

2.   In the next dialog box, we choose the tools to be used to initially
     construct the model. Add Beam, Add Plate or Add Solid are,
     respectively, the starting points for constructing beams, plates or
     solids. Open Structure Wizard provides access to a library of
     structural templates which the program comes equipped with.
     Those template models can be extracted and modified
     parametrically to arrive at our model geometry or some of its parts.
     If the model is to be created initially using the STAAD command
     language, the Open STAAD Editor box can take us to the STAAD
     editor. Please remember that all these options are also available
     from the menus and dialog boxes of the GUI, even after we dismiss
     this dialog box.

     Note: If you wish to use the Editor to create the model, choose
     Open STAAD Editor, click Finish, and proceed to Section 1.7.
1-12   Tutorial 1

                    For our model, let us check the Add Beam option. Click on the
                    Finish button. The dialog box will be dismissed and the
                    STAAD.Pro graphical environment will be displayed.




                                               Figure 1. 8
Tutorial 1   1-13

1.5 Creating the model using the graphical user
    interface
         In order to generate the model graphically, we have to familiarize
         ourselves with the components of the STAAD.Pro screen. A sample
         of the STAAD.Pro screen is shown in Figure 1.9.

         The screen has five major elements as described below:

         Menu bar
         Located at the top of the screen, the Menu bar gives access to all
         the facilities of STAAD.Pro.

         Toolbar
         The dockable Toolbar gives access to the most frequently used
         commands. You may also create your own customized toolbar.

         Main Window
         This is the largest area at the center of the screen, where the model
         drawings and results are displayed in pictorial form.

         Page Control
         The Page Control is a set of tabs that appear on the left-most part
         of the screen. Each tab on the Page Control allows you to perform
         specific tasks. The organization of the Pages, from top to bottom,
         represents the logical sequence of operations, such as, definition of
         beams, specification of member properties, loading, and so on.

         Each tab has a name and an icon for easy identification. The name
         on the tabs may or may not appear depending on your screen
         resolution and the size of the STAAD.Pro window. However, the
         icons on the Page Control tabs always appear.

         The Pages in the Page Control area depend on the Mode of
         operation. The Mode of operation may be set from the Mode menu
         from the Menu bar.
1-14   Tutorial 1

                    Elements of the STAAD.Pro Screen




                                                       Figure 1. 9
Tutorial 1   1-15
Data Area
The right side of the screen is called the Data Area, where
different dialog boxes, tables, list boxes, etc. appear depending on
the type of operation you are performing. For example, when you
select the Geometry | Beam Page, the Data Area contains the Node-
Coordinate table and the Member-incidence table. When you are in
the Load Page, the contents of the Data Area changes to display the
currently assigned Load cases and the icons for different types of
loads.

The icons in the toolbar as well as in the Page Control area offer
ToolTip help. As we move the mouse pointer over a button, the
name of the button – called a ToolTip – appears above or below the
button. This floating Tool tip help will identify the icon. A brief
description of the icon also appears in the status bar.

We are now ready to start building the model geometry. The steps
and, wherever possible, the corresponding STAAD.Pro commands
(the instructions which get written in the STAAD input file) are
described in the following sections.
1-16   Tutorial 1

                    1.5.1 Generating the model geometry
                          The structure geometry consists of joint numbers, their
                          coordinates, member numbers, the member connectivity
                          information, plate element numbers, etc. From the standpoint of the
                          STAAD command file, the commands to be generated for the
                          structure shown in section 1.2 are :

                                   JOINT COORDINATES
                                   1 0. 0. ; 2 0. 15. ; 3 20. 15. ; 4 20. 0.
                                   MEMBER INCIDENCE
                                   1 1 2;2 2 3;3 3 4

                          Steps:

                     1.   We selected the Add Beam option earlier to facilitate adding beams
                          to create the structure. This initiates a grid in the main drawing
                          area as shown below. The directions of the global axes (X,Y,Z) are
                          represented in the icon in the lower left hand corner of the drawing
                          area.




                                                   Figure 1. 10
Tutorial 1   1-17
2.   A Snap Node/Beam dialog box also appears in the data area on the
     right side of the screen. The Linear tab is meant for placing the
     construction lines perpendicular to one another along a "left to
     right - top to bottom" pattern, as in the lines of a chess board. The
     Radial tab enables construction lines to appear in a spider-web
     style, which makes it is easy to create circular type models where
     members are modelled as piece-wise linear straight line segments.
     The Irregular tab can be used to create gridlines with unequal
     spacing that lie on the global planes or on an inclined plane. We
     will use the Linear tab.

     In our structure, the segment consisting of members 1 to 3, and
     nodes 1 to 4, happens to lie in the X-Y plane. So, in this dialog
     box, let us keep X-Y as the Plane of the grid. The size of the
     model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of
     Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and
     the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. By setting 20 as
     the number of lines to the right of the origin along X, 15 above the
     origin along Y, and a spacing of 1 feet between lines along both X
     and Y (see next figure) we can draw a frame 20ft X 15ft, adequate
     for our structure. Please note that these settings are only a starting
     grid setting, to enable us to start drawing the structure, and they do
     not restrict our overall model to those limits.
1-18   Tutorial 1




                    Figure 1. 11
Tutorial 1   1-19
3.   To start creating the nodes, let us first activate the Snap
     Node/Beam button by clicking on it. Then, with the help of the
     mouse, click at the origin (0, 0) to create the first node.




                                  Figure 1. 12

4.   In a similar fashion, click on the following points to create nodes
     and automatically join successive nodes by beam members.

             (0, 15), (20, 15), and (20, 0)

     The exact location of the mouse arrow can be monitored on the
     status bar located at the bottom of the window where the X, Y, and
     Z coordinates of the current cursor position are continuously
     updated.
1-20   Tutorial 1

                    When steps 1 to 4 are completed, the structure will be displayed in
                    the drawing area as shown below.




                                                Figure 1. 13
Tutorial 1   1-21
5.   At this point, let us remove the grid from the structure. To do that,
     click on the Close button in the Snap Node/Beam dialog box.




                                 Figure 1. 14
1-22   Tutorial 1

                    The grid will now be removed and the structure in the main
                    window should resemble the figure shown below.




                                               Figure 1. 15

                    It is very important that we save our work often, to avoid loss of
                    data and protect our investment of time and effort against power
                    interruptions, system problems, or other unforeseen events. To save
                    the file, pull down the File menu and select the Save command.
Tutorial 1   1-23

1.5.2 Switching on node and beam labels

 1.   Node and beam labels are a way of identifying the entities we have
      drawn on the screen. In order to display the node and beam
      numbers, right click anywhere in the drawing area. In the pop-up
      menu that comes up, choose Labels. Alternatively, one may access
      this option by selecting the View menu followed by the Structure
      Diagrams option from the top menu bar, and the Labels tab of the
      dialog box that comes up.




                                 Figure 1. 16
1-24   Tutorial 1

                    2.   In the Diagrams dialog box that appears, turn the Node Numbers
                         and Beam Numbers on and then click on OK.




                                                   Figure 1. 17
Tutorial 1   1-25
The following figure illustrates the node and beam numbers
displayed on the structure. The structure in the main window
should resemble the figure shown below.




                           Figure 1. 18


If you are feeling adventurous, here is a small exercise for you.
Change the font of the node/beam labels by going to the View menu
and selecting the Options command, and then selecting the
appropriate tab (Node Labels / Beam labels) from the Options
dialog box.
1-26   Tutorial 1

                    1.5.3 Specifying member properties
                          Our next task is to assign cross section properties for the beams
                          and columns (see figure in section 1.2). For those of us curious to
                          know the equivalent commands in the STAAD command file, they
                          are :

                                   MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
                                   1 3 TABLE ST W12X35
                                   2 TABLE ST W14X34

                          Steps:


                     1.   To define member properties, click on the Property Page icon
                          located on the top toolbar.




                                                     Figure 1. 19
Tutorial 1   1-27
Alternatively, one may go to the General | Property page from the
left side of the screen as shown below.




                          Figure 1. 20
1-28   Tutorial 1

                    2.   In either case, the Properties dialog box comes up (see figure
                         below). The property type we wish to create is the W shape from
                         the AISC table. This is available under the Section Database
                         button in the Properties dialog box as shown below. So, let us
                         click on the Section Database button.




                                                   Figure 1. 21
Tutorial 1   1-29
3.   In the Section Profile Tables dialog box that comes up, select W
     Shape under the American option. Notice that the Material box is
     checked. Let us keep it that way because it will enable us to
     subsequently assign the material constants E, Density, Poisson, etc.
     along with the cross-section since we want to assign the default
     values.

     Choose W12X35 as the beam size, and ST as the section type.
     Then, click on the Add button as shown in the figure below.
     Detailed explanation of the terms such as ST, T, CM, TC, BC, etc.
     is available in Section 5 of the STAAD Technical Reference
     Manual.




                                Figure 1. 22

4.   To create the second member property (ST W14X34), select the
     W14X34 shape and click on the Add button.

     After the member properties have been created, let us Close the
     Section Profile Tables dialog box.
1-30   Tutorial 1

                    5.   The next step is to associate the properties we just created with
                         selected members in our model. Follow these steps.

                             a. Select the first property reference in the Properties dialog
                                box (W12X35).
                             b. Make sure that the “Use Cursor to Assign” button is
                                selected under the Assignment Method box.

                             c. Click on the Assign button. The cursor changes to
                             d. Using the cursor, click on members 1 and 3.
                             e. Finally, click on the Assign button again, or click on the
                                ‘Esc’ button on your keyboard to stop the assignment
                                process.




                                                     Figure 1. 23

                    6.   In a similar fashion, assign the second property reference
                         (W14X34) to member 2.
Tutorial 1   1-31
After both the properties have been assigned to the respective
members, our model should resemble the following figure.




                            Figure 1. 24

Let us once again save our structure by pulling down the File menu
and selecting the Save command.
1-32   Tutorial 1

                    1.5.4 Specifying material constants
                         In Section 1.5.3, we kept the Material check box “on” while
                         assigning the member properties. Consequently, the material
                         constants got assigned to the members along with the properties,
                         and the following commands were generated in the command file:

                                 CONSTANTS
                                 E 29000 MEMB 1 TO 3
                                 POISSON 0.3 MEMB 1 TO 3
                                 DENSITY 0.000283 MEMB 1 TO 3
                                 ALPHA 6.5e-006 MEMB 1 TO 3

                         Hence, there is no more a need to assign the constants separately.
                         However, if we hadn’t assign them as before, we could go to the
                         menu option Commands | Material Constants and assign them
                         explicitly as shown in the figure below.




                                                     Figure 1. 25
Tutorial 1   1-33

1.5.5 Changing the input units of length
      For specifying member offset values, as a matter of convenience, it
      is simpler if our length units are inches instead of feet. The
      commands to be generated are:

               UNIT INCHES KIP

      Steps:

 1.   To change the length units from feet to inch, click on the Input
      Units icon from the appropriate toolbar.




                                  Figure 1. 26


      Alternatively, one may select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit
      menu option as shown in the next figure.
1-34   Tutorial 1




                                                    Figure 1. 27

                    2.   In either case, the following dialog box comes up. Set the Length
                         Units to Inch and click on the OK button.




                                                     Figure 1. 28
Tutorial 1   1-35

1.5.6 Specifying member offsets
      Since beam 2 actually spans only the clear distance between the
      column faces, and not the center to center distance, we can take
      advantage of this aspect by specifying offsets. Member 2 is
      OFFSET at its START joint by 6 inches in the global X direction,
      0.0 and 0.0 in Y and Z directions. The same member is offset by
      negative 6.0 inches at its END joint. The corresponding STAAD
      commands are:

               MEMBER OFFSET
               2 START 6.0 0.0 0.0
               2 END -6.0 0.0 0.0

      Steps:

 1.   Since we know that member 2 is the one to be assigned with the
      offset, let us first select this member prior to defining the offset
      itself. Select member 2 by clicking on it using the Beams Cursor
          . The selected member will be highlighted. (Please refer to the
      ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this manual to
      learn more about selecting members.)

 2.   To define member offsets, click on the Specification Page icon
      located in the top toolbar.




                                  Figure 1. 29
1-36   Tutorial 1

                    Alternatively, one may go to the General | Spec Page from the left
                    side of the screen.




                                               Figure 1. 30
Tutorial 1   1-37
3.   In either case, the Specifications dialog box shown below comes
     up. Member Releases and Offsets are defined through the Beam
     button in this dialog box as shown below.




                               Figure 1. 31
1-38   Tutorial 1

                    4.   In the Beam Specs dialog box that opens, select the Offset tab. We
                         want to define the offset at the start node in the X direction. Hence,
                         make sure that the Start option is selected under Location . Then,
                         enter 6.0 in the X edit box. Since we have already selected the
                         member, let us click on the Assign button.




                                                      Figure 1. 32


                    5.   To apply the offset at the end node, repeat steps 3 and 4, except for
                         selecting the End option and providing -6.0 in the X edit box.
Tutorial 1   1-39
After both the Start and End offsets have been assigned, the model
will look as shown below.




                           Figure 1. 33

Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the member.

Let us save the work again by pulling down the File menu and
selecting the Save command.
1-40   Tutorial 1

                    1.5.7 Printing member information in the
                          output file
                          We would like to get a report consisting of information about all
                          the members including start and end joint numbers (incidence),
                          member length, beta angle and member end releases in the STAAD
                          output file. The corresponding STAAD command is:

                                   PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION ALL

                          Steps:

                     1.   Since the information is required for all the members, select all the
                          members by going to Select | By All | All Beams menu option.




                                                       Figure 1. 34
Tutorial 1   1-41
2.   Then, go to Commands | Pre Analysis Print | Member
     Information from the top menu bar as shown in the figure below.




                               Figure 1. 35
1-42   Tutorial 1

                    3.   Notice that the assignment method is set To Selection. Press the
                         OK button in this dialog box.




                                                     Figure 1. 36


                         Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the members.

                         Let us also save our structure again by using the Save option of the
                         File menu.
Tutorial 1   1-43

1.5.8 Specifying Supports
      The specifications of this problem (see section 1.2) call for
      restraining all degrees of freedom at node 1 (FIXED support) and a
      pinned type of restraint at node 4 (restrained against all
      translations, free for all rotations) The commands to be generated
      are :

               SUPPORTS
               1 FIXED ; 4 PINNED

      Steps:

 1.   To create a support, click on the Support Page icon located in the
      top toolbar as shown below.




                                  Figure 1. 37
1-44   Tutorial 1

                    Alternatively, one may go to the General | Support Page from the
                    left side of the screen.




                                              Figure 1. 38
Tutorial 1   1-45
2.   In either case, the Supports dialog box comes up as shown in the
     next figure. Since we already know that node 1 is to be associated
     with a Fixed support, using the Nodes Cursor       , select node 1.
     It becomes highlighted. (Please refer to the ‘Frequently Performed
     Tasks’ section at the end of this manual to learn more about
     selecting nodes.)

3.   Then, click on the Create button in the Supports dialog box as
     shown below.




                                 Figure 1. 39
1-46   Tutorial 1

                    4.   In the Create Support dialog box that opens, select the Fixed tab
                         (which also happens to be the default) and click on the Assign
                         button as shown below. This creates a FIXED type of support at
                         node 1 where all 6 degrees of freedom are restrained.




                                                    Figure 1. 40


                    5.   To create a PINNED support at node 4, repeat steps 2 to 4, except
                         for selecting node 4 and selecting the Pinned tab in the Create
                         Support dialog box.
Tutorial 1   1-47
After the supports have been assigned, the structure will look like
the one shown below.




                            Figure 1. 41


After assigning both the supports, let us save our structure using
the File | Save option.
1-48   Tutorial 1

                    1.5.9 Viewing the model in 3D
                        Let us see how we can display our model in 3D. To do this, either
                        right-click and select Structure Diagrams or go to View |
                        Structure Diagrams menu.




                                                    Figure 1. 42


                        In the ensuing dialog box, the Structure tab page allows you to set
                        up structural view parameters as explained below.

                        The options under 3D Sections control how the members are
                        displayed. Selecting None displays the structure without displaying
                        the cross-sectional properties of the members and elements.
                        Selecting Full Sections displays the 3D cross-sections of members,
                        depending on the member properties. Sections Outline displays
                        only the outline of the cross-sections of members.

                        Let us select Full Sections to draw the 3D sections. You can also
                        change the color of the sections by clicking on the Section Outline
                        color button under the Colors section. Then, click on OK.
Tutorial 1   1-49




                          Figure 1. 43

The resulting diagram is shown below.




                          Figure 1. 44
1-50   Tutorial 1

                    1.5.10 Specifying Loads
                          Three load cases are to be created for this structure. Details of the
                          individual cases are explained at the beginning of this tutorial. The
                          corresponding commands to be generated are listed below.

                                   UNIT FEET KIP

                                   LOADING 1 DEAD + LIVE
                                   MEMBER LOAD
                                   2 UNI GY -2.5

                                   LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT
                                   JOINT LOAD
                                   2 FX 10.

                                   LOAD COMBINATION 3 75 PERCENT OF (DL+LL+WL)
                                   1 0.75 2 0.75

                          Steps:

                          The creation and assignment of load cases involves the following
                          two steps:

                              a.   First, we will be creating all 3 load cases.
                              b.   Then, we will be assigning them to the respective
                                   members/nodes.

                          Creating load cases 1 and 2

                     1.   To create loads, first click on the Load Page icon located on the
                          top tool bar.




                                                      Figure 1. 45
Tutorial 1   1-51
     Alternatively, one may go to the General | Load Page from the left
     side of the screen.




                                   Figure 1. 46

2.   Before we create the first load case, we need to change our length
     units to feet. To do that, as before, utilize the   Input Units icon
     (see section 1.5.5).

     Notice that a window titled “Load” appears on the right-hand side
     of the screen. To create the first load case, highlight Load Cases
     Details and then click on the Add button in the Load dialog box.




                                   Figure 1. 47
1-52   Tutorial 1

                    3.   The Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up.

                         The drop-down list box against Loading Type is available in case
                         we wish to associate the load case we are creating with any of the
                         ACI, AISC or IBC definitions of Dead, Live, Ice, etc. This type of
                         association needs to be done if we intend to use the program's
                         facility for automatically generating load combinations in
                         accordance with those codes. Notice that there is a check box
                         called Reducible per UBC/IBC. This feature becomes active only
                         when the load case is assigned a Loading Type called Live at the
                         time of creation of that case. Please refer to STAAD.Pro 2004
                         Release Report for further details.

                         As we do not intend to use the automatic load combination
                         generation option, we will leave the Loading Type as None. Enter
                         DEAD + LIVE as the Title for Load Case 1 and click on the Add
                         button.




                                                     Figure 1. 48

                         The newly created load case will now appear under the Load Cases
                         Details option.




                                                     Figure 1. 49
Tutorial 1   1-53
     To create the Member load, first highlight DEAD + LIVE. You
     will notice that the Add New Load Items dialog box shows more
     options now.




                               Figure 1. 50

4.   In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Uniform Force
     option under the Member Load item. Specify GY as the Direction,
     enter -2.5 as the Force and click on the Add button.




                               Figure 1. 51
1-54   Tutorial 1

                         The next step is to create the second load case which contains a
                         joint load.

                    5.   Highlight Load Cases Details in the Load dialog box. In the Add
                         New Load Cases dialog box, once again, we are not associating the
                         load case we are about to create with any code based Loading Type
                         and so, leave that box as None. Specify the Title of the second load
                         case as WIND FROM LEFT and click on the Add button.




                                                    Figure 1. 52

                    6.   Next, to create the Joint load, highlight WIND FROM LEFT.




                                                     Figure 1. 53
Tutorial 1   1-55
7.   In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Node option
     under the Nodal Load item. Specify 10 for Fx, and click on the
     Add button.




                                Figure 1. 54
1-56   Tutorial 1

                         Creating load case 3

                         Load cases 1 and 2 were primary load cases. Load case 3 will be
                         defined as a load combination. So, the next step is to define load
                         case 3 as 0.75 x (Load 1 + Load 2), which is a load combination.

                    8.   To do this, once again, highlight the Load Cases Details option. In
                         the Add New Load Cases dialog box, click on the Define
                         Combinations option from the left-hand side. Specify the Title as
                         75 Percent of [DL+LL+WL].




                                                 Figure 1. 55

                         In the Define Combinations box, the default load combination type
                         is set to be Normal, which means an algebraic combination. The
                         other combination types available are called SRSS (square root of
                         sum of squares) and ABS (Absolute). The SRSS type offers the
                         flexibility of part SRSS and part Algebraic. That is, some load
                         cases are combined using the square root of sum of squares
                         approach, and the result is combined with other cases algebraically,
                         as in

                                 A + SQRT(B*B + C*C)
                                 where A, B and C are the individual primary cases.

                         We intend to use the default algebraic combination type (Normal).
Tutorial 1   1-57
9.   In the Define Combinations box, select both load cases from the
     left side list box (by holding down the ‘Ctrl’ key) and click on the
          button. The load cases appear in the right side list box. Then,
     enter 0.75 in the Factor edit box. (These data indicate that we are
     adding the two load cases with a multiplication factor of 0.75 and
     that the load combination results would be obtained by algebraic
     summation of the results for individual load cases.) Press the Add
     button.




                                  Figure 1. 56

     Now that we have completed the task of creating all 3 load cases,
     let us Close the Add New Load Cases dialog box.
1-58   Tutorial 1

                    Our next step is to associate load case 1 with member 2. Follow
                    these steps.

                       a. Select the first load reference in the Load dialog box (UNI
                          GY -2.5 kip/ft).
                       b. Make sure that the “Use Cursor to Assign” button is
                          selected under the Assignment Method box.

                       c. Click on the Assign button. The cursor changes to
                       d. Using the cursor, click on member 2.
                       e. Finally, click on the Assign button again, or type the ‘Esc’
                          button on your keyboard to stop the assignment process.




                                               Figure 1. 57
Tutorial 1   1-59
After the member load has been assigned, the model will look as
shown below.




                             Figure 1. 58

In a similar fashion, assign the second load case (FX 10 kip, ft) to
Node 2.

After assigning the joint load, the model will look as shown below.




                             Figure 1. 59

Let us once again save our model by pulling down the File menu
and selecting the Save command or by holding the ‘Ctrl’ key and
pressing the ‘S’ key.
1-60   Tutorial 1

                    1.5.11 Specifying the analysis type
                          The analysis type we are required to do is a linear static type. We
                          also need to obtain a static equilibrium report. This requires the
                          command:

                                   PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK

                          Steps:

                     1.   To specify the Analysis command, go to Analysis/Print Page from
                          the left side of the screen. By default, the Analysis sub-page from
                          the second row is in focus as shown below.




                                                      Figure 1. 60
Tutorial 1   1-61
2.   In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, make
     sure that the Perform Analysis tab is selected. Then, check the
     Statics Check print option. Finally, click on the Add button
     followed by the Close button.




                                Figure 1. 61

     Let us save the data once again using the File | Save option.
1-62   Tutorial 1

                    1.5.12 Specifying post-analysis print
                           commands
                          We would like to obtain the member end forces and support
                          reactions written into the output file. This requires the
                          specification of the following commands:

                                   PRINT MEMBER FORCES ALL
                                   PRINT SUPPORT REACTION LIST 1 4

                          Steps:

                     1.   The dialog box for specifying the above commands is nested in the
                          Post-Print sub-page of the Analysis/Print page.




                                                    Figure 1. 62
Tutorial 1   1-63
2.   Next, select all the members by rubber-banding around them
     using the mouse.

3.   Click on the Define Commands button in the data area on the right
     hand side of the screen.




                                Figure 1. 63
1-64   Tutorial 1

                    4.   In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, select the
                         Member Forces tab and click on the Assign button followed by
                         the Close button.




                                                    Figure 1. 64


                    5.   Repeat steps 2 to 4 except for selecting both the supports and
                         selecting the Support Reactions tab in the Analysis/Print
                         Commands dialog box. (Recall that the supports can be selected by
                         turning the Nodes Cursor on, holding the ‘Ctrl’ key down, and
                         clicking on the supports.) After clicking on the Assign button,
                         Close the dialog box.
Tutorial 1   1-65
At this point, the Post Analysis Print dialog box should resemble
the figure shown below.




                            Figure 1. 65

Save the work using the File | Save menu option.
1-66   Tutorial 1

                    1.5.13 Short-listing the load cases to be used
                           in steel design
                          The steel design has to be performed for load cases 1 and 3 only
                          per the specification at the beginning of this tutorial. To instruct
                          the program to use just these cases, and ignore the remaining, we
                          have to use the LOAD LIST command.

                          The command will appear in the STAAD file as :

                                   LOAD LIST 1 3

                          Steps:

                     1.   In the menus on the top of the screen, go to Commands | Loading
                          | Load List option as shown below.




                                                       Figure 1. 66
Tutorial 1   1-67
2.   A Load List dialog box comes up. From the Load Cases list box on
     the left, double click on 1: DEAD + LIVE and 3: 75 Percent of
     [DL+LL+WL] to send them to the Load List box on the right, as
     shown below. Then click on the OK button to dismiss the dialog
     box.




                               Figure 1. 67
1-68   Tutorial 1

                    1.5.14 Specifying steel design parameters
                          The specifications listed in section 1.2 of this tutorial require us to
                          provide values for some of the terms used in steel design because
                          the default values of those terms are not suitable. The
                          corresponding commands to be generated are:

                                   PARAMETER
                                   CODE AISC
                                   FYLD 5760 ALL
                                   UNT 10.0 MEMB 2 3
                                   UNB 10.0 MEMB 23
                                   TRACK 2 MEMB 2 3
                                   SELECT MEMB 2 3

                          Steps:

                     1.   To specify steel design parameters, go to Design | Steel Page from
                          the left side of the screen. Make sure that under the Current Code
                          selections on the top right hand side, AISC ASD is selected.




                                                       Figure 1. 68
Tutorial 1   1-69
2.   Click on the Define Parameters button in the Steel Design dialog
     box.




                                Figure 1. 69

3.   In the Design Parameters dialog box that comes up, select the
     FYLD option. Then, provide the Yield Strength as 5760 Kip/ft 2
     and click on the Add button.




                                Figure 1. 70
1-70   Tutorial 1

                    4.   To define the remaining parameters, repeat step 3 except for
                         selecting the parameters and providing the values listed below.

                                            Parameter               Value

                                               UNT                   10

                                               UNB                   10

                                             TRACK                    2




                    5.   When all the parameters have been added, click on the Close
                         button in the Design Parameters dialog box.

                    6.   The next step is to assign these parameters to specific members of
                         the model. From looking at the requirements listed in the beginning
                         of this tutorial, we know that the FYLD parameter is to be assigned
                         to all the members, while the remaining parameters are to assigned
                         to members 2 and 3.

                         As before, use the Use Cursor to Assign method to assign these
                         parameters.




                                                     Figure 1. 71
Tutorial 1   1-71
After all the design parameters have been assigned, the Steel
Design dialog box will look as shown below.




                            Figure 1. 72
1-72   Tutorial 1

                    7.   To specify the SELECT command, click on the Commands button
                         in the Steel Design dialog box as shown below. The SELECT
                         command is an instruction to the program to fetch and assign the
                         least-weight cross-section which satisfies all the code requirements
                         (PASSes) for the member.




                                                     Figure 1. 73
Tutorial 1   1-73
8.   In the Design Commands dialog box that appears, click on the
     SELECT option. Then, click on the Add button followed by the
     Close button.




                                Figure 1. 74

9.   Once again, we need to associate this command with members 2
     and 3. You may either use the Use Cursor to Assign method or
     first select members 2 and 3 and then use the Assign to Selected
     Beams option.

     After the parameters are assigned, click anywhere in the drawing
     area to un-highlight the members.

     Let us save our structure by pulling down the File menu and
     selecting the Save command.
1-74   Tutorial 1

                    1.5.15 Re-specifying the analysis command
                          When the analysis & design engine executes the member selection
                          operation we specified in the previous step, a new set of properties
                          will end up being assigned to those members. This has the effect of
                          changing the stiffness distribution for the entire structure. Since
                          the structure is statically indeterminate, we ought to re-analyze it if
                          we want the nodal displacements, member forces, etc. to reflect
                          this new stiffness distribution. The command to be generated is
                          hence:

                                   PERFORM ANALYSIS

                          Steps:

                     1.   To specify the Analysis command, repeat step 1 of Section 1.5.11
                          of this tutorial. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that
                          comes up, select the Perform Analysis tab. Since we are not
                          interested in a statics check report once again, let us check the No
                          Print option. Finally, click on the Add button followed by the
                          Close button.

                          We should again save the work using File | Save.
Tutorial 1   1-75

1.5.16 Re-specifying the TRACK parameter
      The final calculation we need to do is make sure the current set of
      member properties pass the code requirements based on the up-to-
      date member forces. This will require that we do a code checking
      operation again. To restrict the output produced to a reasonable
      level, we specify the TRACK parameter again as:

               TRACK 1 ALL

      Steps:

 1.   To define and assign 1.0 for the TRACK parameter, repeat steps 1
      to 4 of Section 1.5.14 of this tutorial.
 2.   Next, select all the members by rubber-banding around them
      using the mouse. (Please refer to the ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’
      section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting
      members.) Then, assign this parameter to all the members.
1-76   Tutorial 1

                    1.5.17 Re-specifying the CHECK CODE
                           command
                          The analysis operation carried out in response to the command in
                          Section 1.5.15 will create a new set of member forces. These forces
                          will very likely be quite different from those which were used in
                          the member selection operation (see the commands of section
                          1.5.14). Consequently, we have to verify that the structure is safely
                          able – from the standpoint of the design code requirements – to
                          carry these new forces. A code checking operation, which uses the
                          up-to-date cross sections of the members, and the latest member
                          forces, will provide us with a status report on this issue. The
                          command to be generated is hence:

                                   CHECK CODE ALL

                          Steps:

                     1.   If you have wandered away from the Steel Design page, from the
                          Commands menu on top of the screen, select Design | Steel
                          Design.
Tutorial 1   1-77
2.   Click on the Commands button in the Steel Design dialog box as
     shown below.




                               Figure 1. 75
1-78   Tutorial 1

                    3.   In the Design Commands dialog box that appears, click on the
                         Check Code tab. Then, click on the Add button followed by the
                         Close button.




                                                     Figure 1. 76

                    4.   Since the CHECK CODE command has to be assigned to all the
                         members, the easiest way to do that is to click on the Assign to
                         View button.




                                                     Figure 1. 77

                         We have now completed the tasks for assigning the input for this
                         model. Let us save the file one last time using the File | Save
                         option.
Tutorial 1   1-79

1.6 Viewing the input command file
         Steps:

         Let us now take a look at the data that has been written into the file
         that we just saved earlier. The contents of the file can be viewed
         either by clicking on the STAAD Editor icon or, by going to the
         Edit menu and choosing Edit Input Command File as shown below.




                                  Figure 1. 78




                                  Figure 1. 79
1-80   Tutorial 1

                    A new window will open up with the data listed as shown here:




                                               Figure 1. 80

                    This window and the facilities it contains is known as the STAAD
                    Editor.
Tutorial 1   1-81
We could make modifications to the data of our structure in this
Editor if we wish to do so. Let us Exit the Editor without doing so
by selecting the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not
the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor
window).

As we saw in Section 1.1, we could also have created the same
model by typing the relevant STAAD commands into a text file
using either the STAAD editor, or by using any external editor of
our choice. If you would like to understand that method, proceed
to the next section. If you want to skip that part, proceed to section
1.8 where we perform the analysis and design on this model.
1-82   Tutorial 1

       1.7 Creating the model using the command file
                    Let us now use the command file method to create the model for
                    the above structure. The commands used in the command file are
                    described later in this section.

                    The STAAD.Pro command file may be created using the built-in
                    editor, the procedure for which is explained further below in this
                    section. Any standard text editor such as Notepad or WordPad may
                    also be used to create the command file. However, the STAAD.Pro
                    command file editor offers the advantage of syntax checking as we
                    type the commands. The STAAD.Pro keywords, numeric data,
                    comments, etc. are displayed in distinct colors in the STAAD.Pro
                    editor. A typical editor screen is shown below to illustrate its general
                    appearance.




                                                Figure 1. 81
Tutorial 1   1-83
To access the built-in editor, first start the program using the
procedure explained in Section 1.3. Next, follow step 1 of Section
1.4.




                            Figure 1. 82

You will then encounter the dialog box shown in the figure shown
below. In that dialog box, choose Open STAAD Editor.




                             Figure 1. 83
1-84   Tutorial 1

                    At this point, the editor screen similar to the one shown below will
                    open.




                                                 Figure 1. 84

                    Delete all the command lines displayed in the editor window and
                    type the lines shown in bold below (You don’t have to delete the
                    lines if you know which to keep and where to fill in the rest of the
                    commands). The commands may be typed in upper or lower case
                    letters. Usually the first three letters of a keyword are all that are
                    needed -- the rest of the letters of the word are not required. The
                    required letters are underlined. (“PLANE” = “PLA” = “plane” =
                    “pla”)
Tutorial 1   1-85
    STAAD PLANE PORTAL FRAME

Every STAAD.Pro input file has to begin with the word STAAD.
The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame (in
the XY plane). The remainder of the words are the title of the
problem, which is optional.

If a line is typed with an asterisk in the first column, it signifies
that the line is a comment line and should not be executed. For
example, one could have put the optional title above on a separate
line as follows.

    * PORTAL FRAME

    UNIT FEET KIP

Specify the force and length units for the commands to follow.

    JOINT COORDINATES
    1 0. 0. ; 2 0. 15. ; 3 20. 15. ; 4 20. 0.

Joint numbers and their corresponding global X and Y coordinates
are provided above. For example, 3 20 15. indicates that node 3 has
an X coordinate of 20 ft and a Y coordinate of 15 ft. Note that the
reason for not providing the Z coordinate is because the structure
is a plane frame. If this were a space frame, the Z coordinate would
also be required. Semicolons (;) are used as line separators. In
other words, data which is normally put on multiple lines can be
put on one line by separating them with a semicolon.

    MEMBER INCIDENCE
    1 1 2;2 2 3;3 3 4

The members are defined by the joints to which they are connected.
1-86   Tutorial 1
                        MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
                        1 3 TABLE ST W12X35
                        2 TABLE ST W14X34

                    Members 1 and 3 are assigned a W12X35 section from the built-in
                    AMERICAN steel table. Member 2 has been assigned a W14X34.
                    The word ST stands for standard single section. Sections 5.20.1
                    through 5.20.5 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual explain
                    the convention for assigning member property names.

                        UNIT INCHES
                        CONSTANTS
                        E 29000.0 ALL
                        POISSON 0.3 ALL

                    The length unit is changed from FEET to INCHES to facilitate
                    input of the modulus of elasticity (E). The keyword CONSTANT is
                    required before material properties such as E, density, Poisson’s
                    ratio, coefficient of thermal expansion (ALPHA) etc. can be
                    provided. See Section 5.26 of the STAAD Technical Reference
                    Manual for more information.

                        MEMBER OFFSET
                        2 START 6.0 0. 0.
                        2 END -6.0 0. 0.

                    The beam member is physically connected to the 2 columns at the
                    face of the column, and not at the column centerline. This creates a
                    rigid zone, about half the depth of the columns, at the 2 ends of the
                    beam 2. This rigid zone is taken advantage of using member offsets
                    (It is the user’s choice whether or not he/she wishes to use these).
                    So, the above commands define that member 2 is eccentrically
                    connected or OFFSET at its START joint by 6 inches in the global
                    X direction, 0.0 and 0.0 in Y and Z directions. The same member is
                    offset by negative 6.0 inches at its END joint. See Section 5.25 of
                    the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for more information.
Tutorial 1   1-87
    PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION ALL

The above command is self-explanatory. The information that is
printed includes start and end joint numbers (incidence), member
length, beta angle and member end releases.

    SUPPORTS
    1 FIXED ; 4 PINNED

A fixed support is located at joint 1 and a pinned support (fixed for
translations, released for rotations) at joint 4. More information on
the support specification is available in Section 5.27 of the STAAD
Technical Reference Manual.

    UNIT FT

The length unit is changed to FEET to facilitate input of loads.

    LOADING 1 DEAD + LIVE
    MEMBER LOAD
    2 UNI GY -2.5

The above commands identify a loading condition. DEAD + LIVE
is an optional title to identify this load case. A UNIformly
distributed MEMBER LOAD of 2.5 kips/ft is acting on member 2
in the negative global Y direction. Member Load specification is
explained in Section 5.32 of the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.

    LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT
    JOINT LOAD
    2 FX 10.

The above commands identify a second load case. This load is a
JOINT LOAD. A 10 kip force is acting at joint 2 in the global X
direction.
1-88   Tutorial 1
                        LOAD COMBINATION 3 75 PERCENT OF (DL+LL+WL)
                        1 0.75 2 0.75

                    This command identifies a combination load with an optional title.
                    The second line provides the components of the load combination
                    case - primary load cases and the factors by which they should be
                    individually multiplied.

                        PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK

                    This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis
                    and produce a report of static equilibrium checks. Section 5.37 of
                    the STAAD Technical Reference Manual offers information on the
                    various analysis options available.

                        PRINT MEMBER FORCES ALL
                        PRINT SUPPORT REACTION LIST 1 4

                    The above print commands are self-explanatory. The member
                    forces are in the member local axes while support reactions are in
                    the global axes.

                        LOAD LIST 1 3
                        PARAMETERS
                        CODE AISC
                        UNT 10.0 MEMB 2 3
                        UNB 10.0 MEMB 2 3
                        FYLD 5760 ALL
                        TRACK 2.0 MEMB 2 3
                        SELECT MEMBER 2 3

                    The above sequence of commands is used to initiate the steel
                    design process. The command PARAMETERS is followed by the
                    various steel design parameters. Parameters are specified typically
                    when their values differ from the built-in program defaults.
                    Specifications of the AISC ASD code are to be followed. A
                    parameter list for the AISC code is available in Table 3.1 of the
                    Technical Reference Manual. ALL members have 10 ft
                    unsupported length for the top and bottom flange (UNT and UNB).
                    UNT and UNB are used to compute the allowable compressive
                    stress in bending. The yield strength of steel is specified as 5760
Tutorial 1   1-89
ksf (40 ksi) since it is different from the default value of 36 ksi.
The TRACK parameter controls the level of description of the
output, 2.0 being the most detailed. The LOAD LIST command
lists the load cases (1 and 3) to be used in the design. The SELECT
MEMBER command asks the program to come up with the most
economical section for members 2 and 3 in the context of the above
analysis.

    PERFORM ANALYSIS

When the analysis & design engine executes the member selection
operation we specified in the previous step, a new set of properties
will end up being assigned to those members. This has the effect of
changing the stiffness distribution for the entire structure. Since
the structure is statically indeterminate, we ought to re-analyze it if
we want the nodal displacements, member forces, etc. to reflect
this new stiffness distribution. The above command instructs the
program to do another cycle of analysis.

    PARAMETER
    TRACK 1 ALL

The TRACK parameter is re-specified. It controls the level of
information produced in the steel design output. We have lowered
it from 2.0 we specified earlier to 1.0 since we aren’t interested in
the highest level of detail at this time.

    CHECK CODE ALL

The analysis operation carried out earlier will create a new set of
member forces. These forces will very likely be quite different
from those which were used in the member selection operation.
Consequently, we have to verify that the structure is safely able –
from the standpoint of the design code requirements – to carry
these new forces. A code checking operation, which uses the up-to-
date cross sections of the members, and the latest member forces,
will provide us with a status report on this issue.

    FINISH
1-90   Tutorial 1

                    A STAAD run is terminated using the FINISH command.
                    Save the file and return to the main screen.

                    This concludes the session on generating our model as a command
                    file using the built-in editor. If you wish to perform the analysis
                    and design, you may proceed to the next section of this manual.
                    The on-screen post-processing facilities are explained in Section
                    1.10.

                    (Remember that without successfully completing the analysis
                    and design, the post-processing facilities will not be accessible.)
Tutorial 1   1-91

1.8 Performing Analysis/Design
         STAAD.Pro performs Analysis and Design simultaneously. In
         order to perform Analysis and Design, select the Run Analysis
         option from the Analyze menu.




                                     Figure 1. 85

         If the structure has not been saved after the last change was made,
         you should save the structure first by using the Save command
         from the File menu.

         When you select the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu,
         the following dialog box appears:




                                     Figure 1. 86

         We are presented with the choice of 2 engines : the STAAD engine
         and the STARDYNE Advanced Analysis engine. The STARDYNE
         Analysis engine is suitable for advanced problems such as
         Buckling Analysis, Modal Extraction using various methods, etc.
         However, if the calculations call for steel or concrete design, UBC
         load generation, etc., we have to select the STAAD engine. So, let
         us ensure that the radio button is on the STAAD engine.
1-92   Tutorial 1

                    Click on the Run Analysis button.

                    As the analysis progresses, several messages appear on the screen
                    as shown in the figure below.




                                                Figure 1. 87


                    Notice that we can choose from the three options available in the
                    above dialog box:




                                               Figure 1. 88
Tutorial 1   1-93
These options are indicative of what will happen after we click on
the Done button.

The View Output File option allows us to view the output file
created by STAAD. The output file contains the numerical results
produced in response to the various input commands we specified
during the model generation process. It also tells us whether any
errors were encountered, and if so, whether the analysis and design
was successfully completed or not. Section 1.9 offers additional
details on viewing and understanding the contents of the output
file.

The Go to Post Processing Mode option allows us to go to
graphical part of the program known as the Post-processor. This is
where one can extensively verify the results, view the results
graphically, plot result diagrams, produce reports, etc. Section 1.10
explains the Post processing mode in greater detail.

The Stay in Modelling Mode lets us continue to be in the Model
generation mode of the program (the one we currently are in) in
case we wish to make further changes to our model.
1-94   Tutorial 1

       1.9 Viewing the output file
                    During the analysis process, STAAD.Pro creates an Output file.
                    This file provides important information on whether the analysis
                    were performed properly. For example, if STAAD.Pro encounters
                    an instability problem during the analysis process, it will be
                    reported in the output file.

                    We can access the output file using the method explained at the
                    end of the previous section. Alternatively, we can select the File |
                    View | Output File | STAAD Output option from the top menu.
                    The STAAD.Pro output file for the problem we just ran is shown in
                    the next few pages.




                                                Figure 1. 89
Tutorial 1   1-95
The STAAD.Pro output file is displayed through a file viewer
called SproView. This viewer allows us to set the text font for the
entire file and print the output file to a printer. Use the appropriate
File menu option from the menu bar.




                             Figure 1. 90


By default, the output file contains a listing of the entire Input
also. You may choose not to print the echo of the Input commands
in the Output file. Please select Commands | Miscellaneous | Set
Echo option from the menu bar and select the Echo Off button.

It is quite important that we browse through the entire output file
and make sure that the results look reasonable, that there are no
error messages or warnings reported, etc. Errors encountered
during the analysis & design can disable access to the post-
processing mode – the graphical screens where results can be
viewed graphically. The information presented in the output file is
a crucial indicator of whether or not the structure satisfies the
engineering requirements of safety and serviceability.
1-96   Tutorial 1

                              ****************************************************
                              *                                                  *
                              *           STAAD.Pro                              *
                              *           Version      Bld                       *
                              *           Proprietary Program of                 *
                              *           Research Engineers, Intl.              *
                              *           Date=                                  *
                              *           Time=                                  *
                              *                                                  *
                              *      USER ID:                                    *
                              ****************************************************

                     1.   STAAD PLANE PORTAL FRAME
                     2.   START JOB INFORMATION
                     3.   ENGINEER DATE
                     4.   END JOB INFORMATION
                     5.   INPUT WIDTH 79
                     6.   UNIT FEET KIP
                     7.   JOINT COORDINATES
                     8.   1 0 0 0; 2 0 15 0; 3 20 15 0; 4 20 0 0
                     9.   MEMBER INCIDENCES
                    10.   1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4
                    11.   DEFINE MATERIAL START
                    12.   ISOTROPIC STEEL
                    13.   E 4.176E+006
                    14.   POISSON 0.3
                    15.   DENSITY 0.489024
                    16.   ALPHA 6.5E-006
                    17.   DAMP 0.03
                    18.   END DEFINE MATERIAL
                    19.   MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
                    20.   1 3 TABLE ST W12X35
                    21.   2 TABLE ST W14X34
                    22.   CONSTANTS
                    23.   MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 TO 3
                    24.   UNIT INCHES KIP
                    25.   MEMBER OFFSET
                    26.   2 START 6 0 0
                    27.   2 END -6 0 0
                    28.   SUPPORTS
                    29.   1 FIXED
                    30.   4 PINNED
                    31.   UNIT FEET KIP
                    32.   LOAD 1 DEAD + LIVE
                    33.   MEMBER LOAD
                    34.   2 UNI GY -2.5
                    35.   LOAD 2 WIND FROM LEFT
                    36.   JOINT LOAD
                    37.   2 FX 10
                    38.   LOAD COMB 3 75 PERCENT OF {DL+LL+WL]
                    39.   1 0.75 2 0.75
                    40.   PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK

                             P R O B L E M   S T A T I S T I C S
                             -----------------------------------

                     NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS =     4/     3/   2
                     ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH=     1/     1/      6 DOF
                     TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES =    2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM =   7
                     SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX =       1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS
                     REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE =     12.0/ 3884.9 MB, EXMEM = 488.4 MB


                           STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO.        1
                           DEAD + LIVE

                    ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD   ( KIP   FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING    1 )
                        SUMMATION FORCE-X   =         0.00
                        SUMMATION FORCE-Y   =       -47.50
                        SUMMATION FORCE-Z   =         0.00

                      SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
                      MX=           0.00 MY=            0.00 MZ=              -475.00
Tutorial 1   1-97



***TOTAL REACTION LOAD(   KIP   FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING      1 )
      SUMMATION FORCE-X   =         0.00
      SUMMATION FORCE-Y   =        47.50
      SUMMATION FORCE-Z   =         0.00

    SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
    MX=           0.00 MY=            0.00 MZ=               475.00


 MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( INCH /RADIANS) (LOADING            1)
           MAXIMUMS    AT NODE
    X = 1.82363E-01        2
    Y = -1.46578E-02       3
    Z = 0.00000E+00        0
    RX= 0.00000E+00        0
    RY= 0.00000E+00        0
    RZ= -4.82525E-03       2


          STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO.        2
          WIND FROM LEFT


 ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD    ( KIP   FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING        2 )
     SUMMATION FORCE-X    =        10.00
     SUMMATION FORCE-Y    =         0.00
     SUMMATION FORCE-Z    =         0.00

    SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
    MX=           0.00 MY=            0.00 MZ=              -150.00


 ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KIP      FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING        2 )
     SUMMATION FORCE-X =          -10.00
     SUMMATION FORCE-Y =            0.00
     SUMMATION FORCE-Z =            0.00

    SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
    MX=           0.00 MY=            0.00 MZ=               150.00


 MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( INCH /RADIANS) (LOADING            2)
           MAXIMUMS    AT NODE
    X = 7.27304E-01        2
    Y = 2.47268E-03        2
    Z = 0.00000E+00        0
    RX= 0.00000E+00        0
    RY= 0.00000E+00        0
    RZ= -5.48842E-03       4



 ************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************


  41. UNIT INCHES KIP
  42. PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION ALL

 MEMBER INFORMATION
 ------------------

 MEMBER     START    END           LENGTH     BETA
            JOINT   JOINT          (INCH)     (DEG)       RELEASES

    1         1       2           180.000     0.00
    2         2       3           228.000     0.00
    3         3       4           180.000     0.00


 ************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************
1-98   Tutorial 1

                      43. UNIT FEET KIP
                      44. PRINT MEMBER FORCES ALL

                     MEMBER END FORCES   STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE
                     -----------------
                     ALL UNITS ARE -- KIP FEET

                    MEMBER   LOAD   JT        AXIAL   SHEAR-Y    SHEAR-Z    TORSION         MOM-Y          MOM-Z

                        1     1      1     23.18         -3.99      0.00          0.00          0.00   -11.48
                                     2    -23.18          3.99      0.00          0.00          0.00   -48.40
                              2      1     -4.10          7.68      0.00          0.00          0.00    67.93
                                     2      4.10         -7.68      0.00          0.00          0.00    47.32
                              3      1     14.30          2.77      0.00          0.00          0.00    42.34
                                     2    -14.30         -2.77      0.00          0.00          0.00    -0.81

                        2     1      2         3.99      23.18      0.00          0.00          0.00    36.81
                                     3        -3.99      24.32      0.00          0.00          0.00   -47.72
                              2      2         2.32      -4.10      0.00          0.00          0.00   -45.27
                                     3        -2.32       4.10      0.00          0.00          0.00   -32.69
                              3      2         4.73      14.30      0.00          0.00          0.00    -6.34
                                     3        -4.73      21.32      0.00          0.00          0.00   -60.31

                        3     1      3     24.32          3.99      0.00          0.00          0.00       59.88
                                     4    -24.32         -3.99      0.00          0.00          0.00        0.00
                              2      3      4.10          2.32      0.00          0.00          0.00       34.74
                                     4     -4.10         -2.32      0.00          0.00          0.00        0.00
                              3      3     21.32          4.73      0.00          0.00          0.00       70.97
                                     4    -21.32         -4.73      0.00          0.00          0.00        0.00


                     ************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT **************


                      45. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION LIST 1 4

                     SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KIP      FEET       STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE
                     -----------------

                    JOINT   LOAD    FORCE-X    FORCE-Y    FORCE-Z      MOM-X         MOM-Y         MOM Z

                        1     1       3.99       23.18       0.00          0.00          0.00     -11.48
                              2      -7.68       -4.10       0.00          0.00          0.00      67.93
                              3      -2.77       14.30       0.00          0.00          0.00      42.34
                        4     1      -3.99       24.32       0.00          0.00          0.00       0.00
                              2      -2.32        4.10       0.00          0.00          0.00       0.00
                              3      -4.73       21.32       0.00          0.00          0.00       0.00


                     ************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT **************


                      46.   LOAD LIST 1 3
                      47.   PARAMETER
                      48.   CODE AISC
                      49.   FYLD 5760 MEMB 1 TO 3
                      50.   UNT 10 MEMB 2 3
                      51.   UNB 10 MEMB 2 3
                      52.   TRACK 2 MEMB 2 3
                      53.   SELECT MEMB 2 3
Tutorial 1   1-99


                  STAAD.PRO MEMBER SELECTION - (AISC 9TH EDITION)
                  ***********************************************

|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|                                                    Y        PROPERTIES   |
|*************                                       |        IN INCH UNIT |
|            * |=============================|    ===|===     ------------ |
|MEMBER   2 * |                               |      |        AX =   8.85 |
|            * | ST W14X30                    |      |   --Z AY =    3.39 |
|DESIGN CODE * |                              |      |        AZ =   3.47 |
| AISC-1989 * ===============================     ===|===     SY =   5.82 |
|            *                                                SZ = 42.05 |
|            * |<---LENGTH (FT)=    19.00 --->|               RY =   1.49 |
|*************                                                RZ =   5.73 |
|                                                                          |
|                 70.5 (KIP-FEET)                                          |
|PARAMETER        |               L1 L1                       STRESSES     |
|IN KIP INCH      |                       L1                  IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- +                                        L3 -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 153.21 |            L3                              FA =    6.36 |
| KL/R-Z= 39.76 +                                             fa =    0.45 |
| UNL   = 120.00 |        L3                  L1              FCZ = 21.68 |
| CB    =   1.00 +L1                                          FTZ = 24.00 |
| CMY   =   0.85 |    L3                              L3      FCY = 30.00 |
| CMZ   =   0.85 +                                            FTY = 30.00 |
| FYLD = 40.00 |                                  L1          fbz = 20.13 |
| NSF   =   1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---|    fby =   0.00 |
| DFF   =   0.00 13.8                                         Fey =   6.36 |
| dff   =   0.00               ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE           Fez = 94.46 |
|                                 (WITH LOAD NO.)             FV = 16.00 |
|                                                             fv =    0.17 |
|                                                                          |
|                      MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)                |
|                      -------------------------                           |
|                                                                          |
|                AXIAL      SHEAR-Y    SHEAR-Z    MOMENT-Y    MOMENT-Z     |
|                                                                          |
|      VALUE       4.7        24.3        0.0         0.0        70.5      |
|   LOCATION       0.0        19.0        0.0         0.0         9.5      |
|    LOADING         3           1          0           0           1      |
|                                                                          |
|**************************************************************************|
|*                                                                        *|
|*                         DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)                      *|
|*                         --------------                                 *|
|*                                                                        *|
|*       RESULT/     CRITICAL COND/     RATIO/         LOADING/           *|
|         FX              MY             MZ           LOCATION             |
|        ======================================================            |
|          PASS        AISC- H1-3       0.999              1               |
|          3.99 C          0.00       -70.55             9.50              |
|*                                                                        *|
|**************************************************************************|
|                                                                          |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
1-100   Tutorial 1

                                       STAAD.PRO MEMBER SELECTION - (AISC 9TH EDITION)
                                       ***********************************************

                     |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
                     |                                                    Y        PROPERTIES   |
                     |*************                                       |        IN INCH UNIT |
                     |            * |=============================|    ===|===     ------------ |
                     |MEMBER   3 * |                               |      |        AX = 10.00 |
                     |            * | ST W14X34                    |      |   --Z AY =    3.61 |
                     |DESIGN CODE * |                              |      |        AZ =   4.10 |
                     | AISC-1989 * ===============================     ===|===     SY =   6.91 |
                     |            *                                                SZ = 48.64 |
                     |            * |<---LENGTH (FT)=    15.00 --->|               RY =   1.53 |
                     |*************                                                RZ =   5.83 |
                     |                                                                          |
                     |                 71.0 (KIP-FEET)                                          |
                     |PARAMETER        |L3                                         STRESSES     |
                     |IN KIP INCH      |   L3                                      IN KIP INCH |
                     |--------------- +        L3 L3                               -------------|
                     | KL/R-Y= 117.92 |                L3                          FA = 10.72 |
                     | KL/R-Z= 30.87 +                                             fa =    2.13 |
                     | UNL   = 120.00 |                    L3 L3                   FCZ = 21.95 |
                     | CB    =   1.00 +                                            FTZ = 24.00 |
                     | CMY   =   0.85 |                            L3              FCY = 30.00 |
                     | CMZ   =   0.85 +                                L3 L3       FTY = 30.00 |
                     | FYLD = 40.00 |                                          L0 fbz = 17.51 |
                     | NSF   =   1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---|    fby =   0.00 |
                     | DFF   =   0.00 -3.9                                         Fey = 10.74 |
                     | dff   =   0.00               ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE           Fez = 156.71 |
                     |                                 (WITH LOAD NO.)             FV = 16.00 |
                     |                                                             fv =    1.31 |
                     |                                                                          |
                     |                      MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)                |
                     |                      -------------------------                           |
                     |                                                                          |
                     |                AXIAL      SHEAR-Y    SHEAR-Z    MOMENT-Y    MOMENT-Z     |
                     |                                                                          |
                     |      VALUE      24.3         4.7        0.0         0.0        71.0      |
                     |   LOCATION       0.0         0.0        0.0         0.0         0.0      |
                     |    LOADING         1           3          0           0           3      |
                     |                                                                          |
                     |**************************************************************************|
                     |*                                                                        *|
                     |*                         DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET)                      *|
                     |*                         --------------                                 *|
                     |*                                                                        *|
                     |*       RESULT/     CRITICAL COND/     RATIO/         LOADING/           *|
                     |         FX              MY             MZ           LOCATION             |
                     |        ======================================================            |
                     |          PASS        AISC- H1-2       0.886              3               |
                     |         21.32 C          0.00        70.97             0.00              |
                     |*                                                                        *|
                     |**************************************************************************|
                     |                                                                          |
                     |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
                       54. PERFORM ANALYSIS
                       55. PARAMETER
                       56. CODE AISC
                       57. TRACK 1 MEMB 1 TO 3
                       58. CHECK CODE MEMB 1 TO 3
Tutorial 1   1-101


                        STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (AISC 9TH EDITION)
                        ********************************************



ALL UNITS ARE - KIP     FEET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)

MEMBER        TABLE    RESULT/   CRITICAL COND/     RATIO/     LOADING/
                         FX            MY             MZ       LOCATION
=======================================================================


    1    ST    W12X35       PASS     AISC- H1-1          0.855       1
                        23.02 C          0.00           52.01     15.00

 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
| MEM=     1, UNIT KIP-INCH, L= 180.0 AX= 10.30 SZ= 45.6 SY=        7.5 |
| KL/R-Y= 116.7 CB= 1.00 YLD= 40.00 ALLOWABLE STRESSES: FCZ= 18.19 |
| FTZ= 24.00 FCY= 30.00 FTY= 30.00 FC= 10.94 FT= 24.00 FV= 16.00        |
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------

    2    ST    W14X30       PASS     AISC- H1-3          0.969       3
                         5.16 C          0.00           66.64     19.00

 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
| MEM=     2, UNIT KIP-INCH, L= 228.0 AX= 8.85 SZ= 42.1 SY=         5.8 |
| KL/R-Y= 153.2 CB= 1.00 YLD= 40.00 ALLOWABLE STRESSES: FCZ= 21.68 |
| FTZ= 24.00 FCY= 30.00 FTY= 30.00 FC= 6.36 FT= 24.00 FV= 16.00         |
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------

    3    ST    W14X34       PASS     AISC- H1-2          0.959       3
                        21.45 C          0.00           77.36      0.00

 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
| MEM=     3, UNIT KIP-INCH, L= 180.0 AX= 10.00 SZ= 48.6 SY=        6.9 |
| KL/R-Y= 117.9 CB= 1.00 YLD= 40.00 ALLOWABLE STRESSES: FCZ= 21.95 |
| FTZ= 24.00 FCY= 30.00 FTY= 30.00 FC= 10.72 FT= 24.00 FV= 16.00        |
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------


  59. FINISH
          *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN ***********
             **** DATE=                TIME=         ***
       ************************************************************
       *         For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact       *
       *   Research Engineers Offices at the following locations *
       *                                                          *
       *               Telephone                Email             *
       * USA:       +1 (714)974-2500       support@reiusa.com     *
       * CANADA     +1 (905)632-4771       detech@odandetech.com *
       * CANADA     +1 (604)629 6087       staad@dowco.com        *
       * UK         +44(1454)207-000       support@reel.co.uk     *
       * FRANCE     +33(0)1 64551084       support@reel.co.uk     *
       * GERMANY    +49/931/40468-71       info@reig.de           *
       * NORWAY     +47 67 57 21 30        staad@edr.no           *
       * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16        support@reiasia.net    *
       * INDIA      +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com *
       * JAPAN      +81(03)5952-6500       eng-eye@crc.co.jp      *
       * CHINA      +86(411)363-1983       support@reiasia.net    *
       *                                                          *
       * North America                    support@reiusa.com      *
       * Europe                           support@reel.co.uk      *
       * Asia                             support@reiasia.net     *
       ************************************************************
1-102   Tutorial 1


        1.10 Post-Processing
                     STAAD.Pro offers extensive result verification and visualization
                     facilities. These facilities are accessed from the Post Processing
                     Mode. The Post Processing mode is used to verify the analysis and
                     design results and generate reports.

                     For this tutorial problem, we shall perform the following tasks:

                           • Display deflection diagrams
                           • Annotate Displacements
                           • Display the force and moment diagrams.
                           • Change the degree of freedom for which the force/moment
                             diagram is plotted
                           • Annotate the force diagram
                           •   Displaying dimensions of members
Tutorial 1   1-103

1.10.1 Going to the post-processing mode
      Steps:

 1.   At the end of section 1.8, we saw how one could go directly from
      the Analysis window to the post-processing screen. However, the
      formal method of accessing the Post Processing mode is either by
      clicking on the Post-Processing icon from the top toolbar or from
      the Mode menu as shown in the figures below.




                                 Figure 1. 91




                                 Figure 1. 92
1-104   Tutorial 1

                     2.   The Results Setup dialog box appears as shown below. Select the
                          load cases for which to display the results. For this tutorial, let us
                          select all the load cases. Then click on the OK button.




                                                       Figure 1. 93
Tutorial 1   1-105
Notice that in the Post-Processing mode, the tabbed Page Control
bar and the menu bar change to offer the post processing functions.


           Page Control in                  Page Control in
           Modeling Mode                    Post-Processing Mode




                             Figure 1. 94

                   Menu Bar in Modeling Mode




                Menu Bar in Post-Processing Mode




                             Figure 1. 95
1-106   Tutorial 1

                     1.10.2 Annotating the displacements
                         Steps:

                         The screen will now look like the figure shown below.




                                                 Figure 1. 96

                         The diagram currently on display is the node deflection diagram
                         for load case 1 (DEAD + LIVE). The title at the bottom of the
                         diagram is indicative of that aspect. If you, say, wandered off into
                         any other result diagram, and wanted to get back to the deflection
                         diagram, just select the Node | Displacement tab along the page
                         control area on the left side.
Tutorial 1   1-107




                           Figure 1. 97

Annotation is the process of displaying the displacement values on
the screen. Select the View Value option from the Results menu.




                           Figure 1. 98
1-108   Tutorial 1

                     The following dialog box comes up. From the Ranges tab, select
                     All nodes. If you wish to annotate deflection for just a few nodes,
                     specify the node numbers in the node list.




                                              Figure 1. 99

                     We will annotate the results for all the nodes. So, keep the button
                     on All.
Tutorial 1   1-109
From the Node tab, check the Resultant option. Resultant stands
for the square root of sum of squares of values of X,Y and Z
displacements. Click the Annotate button and notice that the
values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the
dialog box.




                           Figure 1. 100
1-110   Tutorial 1

                     The following figure shows the annotated deflection diagram for
                     load case 1.




                                               Figure 1. 101
Tutorial 1   1-111

1.10.3 Displaying force/moment diagrams
    Steps:

    The simplest method to access the facilities for displaying
    force/moment diagrams is from the Beam | Forces page along the
    page control area on the left side of the screen. The bending
    moment MZ will be plotted by default, evidence of which can be
    found in the form of the Mz icon show in the diagram below which
    becomes active.




                           Figure 1. 102
1-112   Tutorial 1




                     Figure 1. 103
Tutorial 1   1-113
The option for selecting the forces/moment diagram is available
from another facility also - the Results | Bending Moment menu
option.




                             Figure 1. 104
1-114   Tutorial 1

                     1.10.4 Annotating the force/moment diagram
                         Steps:


                         Annotation is the process of displaying the force/moment values on
                         the screen. Select the View Value option from the Results menu.




                                                   Figure 1. 105


                         In the dialog box that comes up, click on the Ranges tab and select
                         All members. If you wish to annotate the force/moment for just a
                         few members, specify the beam numbers in the beam list.
Tutorial 1   1-115




                        Figure 1. 106
We will annotate the results for all members. So, keep the button
on All.

From the Beam Results tab, check the Ends and Mid Point
options under the Bending section. Click the Annotate button and
notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close
button to close the dialog box.




                          Figure 1. 107
1-116   Tutorial 1

                     The following figure shows the annotated MZ diagram for load
                     case 2.




                                              Figure 1. 108
Tutorial 1   1-117

1.10.5 Changing the degree of freedom for
       which forces diagram is plotted
    Force and moment diagrams can be plotted for 6 degrees of
    freedom – Axial, Shear-Y, Shear-Z, Torsion, Moment-Y, Moment-
    Z. One may select or de-select one of more of these degrees of
    freedom from View | Structure Diagrams | Loads and Results.
    Let us select Shear yy and select load case 3 (75 PERCENT OF
    [DL+LL+WL] as shown below.




                             Figure 1. 109
1-118   Tutorial 1

                     The resulting figure is shown below.




                                                Figure 1. 110

                     All degrees of freedom currently plotted will be indicated with a
                     tick mark in the Diagrams dialog box.

                     The icons of the Results toolbar may also be used to turn on/off
                     specific degrees of freedom.




                                                Figure 1. 111
Tutorial 1   1-119
For the sake of easy identification, each degree of freedom (d.o.f)
has been assigned a different color (see Diagrams dialog box
shown above). One may change the color for that d.o.f. by clicking
on the color button alongside the d.o.f, and make a new choice
from the color palette.




                           Figure 1. 112

The appearance of the diagram may also be set to one of the 3 –
Hatch, Fill or Outline by turning on the relevant option in the
dialog box shown earlier.




                           Figure 1. 113
1-120   Tutorial 1

                     1.10.6 Displaying the dimensions of the
                            members

                         To display the dimension of the members, click on the Dimension
                         icon. Alternatively, one may select the Dimension Beams option
                         from the Tools menu. In the dialog box that opens, the option
                         Dimension to View is active. Click on the Display button followed
                         by the Close button, and the dimensions of the members will
                         appear alongside the members.




                                                   Figure 1. 114




                                                   Figure 1. 115
Tutorial 1   1-121
The diagram will look like the one shown below.




                           Figure 1. 116

We can opt to save the screenshot by clicking on the Take Picture
icon (shown below). This picture may be included in custom
reports. See Chapter 2 for a tutorial on taking pictures as well as
generating custom reports.




                           Figure 1. 117
1-122   Tutorial 1

                     For obtaining a quick print of the plot on the screen, select the
                     Print Current View icon as shown below.




                                                Figure 1. 118
                     For detailed information on the Post Processing features, please
                     refer to the Post Processing section in the STAAD.Pro Graphical
                     Environment manual.
Tutorial 1   1-123
1-124
2-1




Tutorial Problem 2: RC Framed Structure

                                                           Section       2
        This tutorial provides step-by-step instructions for creating the
        model of a reinforced concrete framed structure using STAAD.Pro.
        The following topics are covered :

        •   Starting the Program
        •   Creating Joints and Members
        •   Switching On Node and Beam Labels
        •   Specifying Member Properties and Material Constants
        •   Specifying Member Orientation using Beta Angle
        •   Specifying Supports
        •   Specifying Loads
        •   Specifying the Analysis Type
        •   Specifying the parameters and instructions for Concrete Design
        •   Performing Analysis and Design
        •   Viewing results using the Output File
        •   Viewing results on screen – both graphically and numerically
        •   Producing customized reports
2-2   Tutorial 2



      2.1 Methods of creating the model

                   As explained in Section 1.1 of tutorial problem 1, there are two
                   methods of creating the structure data:

                       a) using the graphical model generation mode, or graphical
                          user interface (GUI) as it is usually referred to.
                       b) using the command file.


                   Both methods are explained in this tutorial also. The graphical
                   method is explained first, from Section 2.2 onwards. Section 2.8
                   describes the process of creating the model using the command file
                   method and the STAAD.Pro text editor.
Tutorial 2   2-3

2.2 Description of the tutorial problem

          The structure for this project is a 2 bay, 2 story reinforced concrete
          frame. The figure below shows the structure. Our goal is to create
          the model, assign all required input, and perform the analysis and
          concrete design.


                                                  3



                                2

                  2                               3
                                                               5

                                                                            6
                                                  4
          3.5m     1

                                                                            4

                  1
                               6.0m
                                                            6.0m            5

                                            Y


                                                 X



                                                     Z


                                       Figure 2. 1
2-4   Tutorial 2

                     BASIC DATA FOR THE STRUCTURE

                   ATTRIBUTE            DATA

                   Member properties    Beams 2 & 5 : Rectangular, 275 mm width X
                                        350 mm depth

                                        Columns 1 & 4 : Rectangular, 275 mm width X
                                        300 mm depth

                                        Column 3 : Circular, 350 mm diameter

                   Member Orientation   All members except column 4 : Default

                                        Column 4 : Rotated by 90 degrees with respect
                                        to default condition

                   Material Constants   Modulus of Elasticity : 22 KN/sq.mm

                                        Density : 25 kn/cu.m

                                        Poisson's Ratio : 0.17

                   Supports             Base of all columns : Fixed

                   Loads                Load case 1 : Dead Load
                                        Selfweight of the structure.
                                        Beams 2 & 5 : 400 kg/m in global Y downward

                                        Load case 2 : Live Load
                                        Beams 2 & 5 : 600 kg/m in global Y downward
                                        Load case 3 : Wind Load
                                        Beam 1 : 300 kg/m along positive global X
                                        Beam 4 : 500 kg/m along positive global X
                                        Load Case 4 : DEAD + LIVE
                                        L1 X 1.2 + L2 X 1.5 (Use REPEAT LOAD, not
                                        Load Combination)

                                        Load Case 5 : DEAD + WIND
                                        L1 X 1.1 + L2 X 1.3 (Use REPEAT LOAD, not
                                        Load Combination)
Tutorial 2   2-5


ATTRIBUTE         DATA

Analysis Type     PDELTA

Concrete Design   Consider load cases 4 and 5 only.
                  Parameters: Ultimate Strength of Steel : 415 N/sq.mm
                  Concrete Strength : 25 N/sq.mm
                  Clear cover for top : 25 mm
                  Clear cover for bottom : 30 mm
                  Clear cover for side : 25 mm
                  Design beams 2 and 5
                  Design columns 1, 3 and 4
2-6   Tutorial 2

      2.3 Starting the program

                   Select the STAAD.Pro icon from the STAAD.Pro 2006 program
                   group.




                                            Figure 2. 2
Tutorial 2   2-7
The STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment will be invoked and the
following screen comes up.




                            Figure 2. 3

This New dialog box will come up every time we start the program.
To turn this feature off, simply uncheck the Display this dialog box
at Startup box at the lower left hand corner. This feature can be
turned on again at a later time when File | New is invoked from the
main menu.
2-8   Tutorial 2

                   Note about the unit system :

                   There are two base unit systems in the program which control the
                   units (length, force, temperature, etc.) in which, values,
                   specifically results and other information presented in the tables
                   and reports, are displayed in. The base unit system also dictates
                   what type of default values the program will use when attributes
                   such as Modulus of Elasticity, Density, etc., are assigned based on
                   material types – Steel, Concrete, Aluminum – selected from the
                   program’s library (Please refer to Section 5 of the STAAD.Pro
                   Technical Reference Manual for details). These two unit systems
                   are English (Foot, Pound, etc.) and Metric (KN, Meter, etc.).

                   If you recall, one of the choices made at the time of installing
                   STAAD.Pro is this base unit system setting. That choice will serve
                   as the default until we specifically change it.

                   The place from where we can change this setting is under the File |
                   Configure menu. To get to that option, first close down the dialog
                   box shown in the earlier figure by clicking on Cancel. Then, click
                   on the File | Configure menu option (see figure below) and choose
                   the appropriate unit system you want. For this tutorial, let us
                   choose the Metric units (KN, Meter, etc.).




                                               Figure 2. 4
Tutorial 2   2-9




                            Figure 2. 5


Click on the Accept button to close the above dialog box.
2-10   Tutorial 2

                    Following this, select File | New once again.




                                                Figure 2. 6

                    The dialog box shown in Figure 2.3 will re-appear.
Tutorial 2   2-11

2.4 Creating a new structure

      1.   In the New dialog box, we provide some crucial initial data
           necessary for building the model.

           The structure type is to be defined by choosing from among Space,
           Plane, Floor and Truss. A Space type is one where the structure,
           the loading or both, cause the structure to deform in all 3 global
           axes (X, Y and Z). In a Plane type, the geometry, loading and
           deformation are restricted to the global X-Y plane only. A Floor
           type is a structure whose geometry is confined to the X-Z plane. A
           Truss type of structure carries loading by pure axial action. Truss
           members are deemed incapable of carrying shear, bending and
           torsion. For our model, let us choose Space.

           We choose Meter as the length unit and Kilo Newton as the force
           unit in which we will start to build the model. The units can be
           changed later if necessary, at any stage of the model creation.

           We also need to provide a name in the File Name edit box. This is
           the name under which the structure data will be saved on the
           computer hard disk. The name “Structure?” (? will be a number) is
           recommended by the program by default, but we can change it to
           any name we want. Let us choose the name rcframe.

           A default path name - the location on the computer drive where the
           file will be saved – is provided by the program under Location. If
           you wish to save the file in a different location, type in the name,
           or click the    button and specify the desired path.

           After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.
2-12   Tutorial 2




                                                      Figure 2. 7

                    2.   In the next dialog box, we choose the tools to be used to initially
                         construct the model. Add Beams, Add Plates or Add Solids are,
                         respectively, the starting points for constructing beams, plates or
                         solids. Open Structure Wizard provides access to a library of
                         structural templates which the program comes equipped with.
                         Those template models can be extracted and modified
                         parametrically to arrive at our model geometry or some of its parts.
                         If the model is to be created initially using the STAAD command
                         language, the Open STAAD Editor box can take us to the STAAD
                         editor. Please remember that all these options are also available
                         from the menus and dialog boxes of the GUI, even after we dismiss
                         this dialog box.

                         Note: If you wish to use the Editor to create the model, choose
                         Open STAAD Editor, click Finish, and proceed to Section 2.8.
Tutorial 2   2-13
For our model, let us check the Add Beam option. Click on the
Finish button. The dialog box will be dismissed and the
STAAD.Pro graphical environment will be displayed.




                           Figure 2. 8
2-14   Tutorial 2

       2.5 Elements of the STAAD.Pro screen

                    The STAAD.Pro main window is the primary screen from where
                    the model generation process takes place. It is important to
                    familiarize ourselves with the components of that window before
                    we embark on creating the RC Frame. Section 1.5 in tutorial
                    problem 1 of this manual explains the components of that window
                    in detail.
Tutorial 2   2-15

2.6 Building the STAAD.Pro model

         We are now ready to start building the model geometry. The steps
         and, wherever possible, the corresponding STAAD.Pro commands
         (the instructions which get written in the STAAD input file) are
         described in the following sections.
2-16   Tutorial 2

                    2.6.1 Generating the model geometry

                          The structure geometry consists of joint numbers, their
                          coordinates, member numbers, the member connectivity
                          information, plate element numbers, etc. From the standpoint of the
                          STAAD command file, the commands to be generated for the
                          structure shown in section 2.2 are :

                                   JOINT COORDINATES
                                   1 0.0 0.0 0.0 ; 2 0.0 3.5 0.0
                                   3 6.0 3.5 0.0 ; 4 6.0 0.0 0.0
                                   5 6.0 0.0 6.0 ; 6 6.0 3.5 6.0
                                   MEMBER INCIDENCE
                                   112;223;334;456;536

                          Steps:

                     1.   We selected the Add Beam option earlier to enable us to add beams
                          and columns to create the structure. This initiates a grid in the main
                          drawing area as shown below. The directions of the global axes (X,
                          Y, Z) are represented in the icon in the lower left hand corner of
                          the drawing area.




                                                   Figure 2. 9
Tutorial 2   2-17
2.   A Snap Node/Beam dialog box also appears in the data area on the
     right side of the screen. In our structure, the segment consisting of
     members 1 to 3, and nodes 1 to 4, happens to lie in the X-Y plane.
     So, in this dialog box, let us keep X-Y as the Plane of the grid. The
     size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the
     number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of
     axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. By
     setting 12 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X,
     7 above the origin along Y, and a spacing of 0.5 meter between
     lines along both X and Y (see figure below) we can draw a frame
     6m X 3.5m, adequate for our segment. Please note that these
     settings are only a starting grid setting, to enable us to start
     drawing the structure, and they do not restrict our overall model to
     those limits.




                                 Figure 2. 10
2-18   Tutorial 2

                    3.   To start creating the nodes, let us first activate the Snap
                         Node/Beam button by clicking on it. Then, with the help of the
                         mouse, click at the origin (0, 0) to create the first node.




                                                       Figure 2. 11

                    4.   In a similar fashion, click on the following points to create nodes
                         and automatically join successive nodes by beam members.

                                 (0, 3.5), (6, 3.5) and (6, 0)

                         The exact location of the mouse arrow can be monitored on the
                         status bar located at the bottom of the window where the X, Y, and
                         Z coordinates of the current cursor position are continuously
                         updated.
Tutorial 2   2-19
When steps 1 to 4 are completed, the frame will be displayed in
the drawing area as shown below.




                           Figure 2. 12
2-20   Tutorial 2

                    5.   At this point, let us remove the grid display from the structure. To
                         do that, click on the Close button in the Snap Node/Beam dialog
                         box.




                                                     Figure 2. 13
Tutorial 2   2-21
     The grid will now be removed and the structure in the main
     window should resemble the figure shown below.




                                Figure 2. 14

6.   It is very important that we save our work often, to avoid loss of
     data and protect our investment of time and effort against power
     interruptions, system problems, or other unforeseen events. To save
     the file, pull down the File menu and select the Save command.
2-22   Tutorial 2


                         Switching on node and beam labels

                    7.   Node and beam labels are a way of identifying the entities we have
                         drawn on the screen. In order to display the node and beam
                         numbers, right click anywhere in the drawing area. In the pop-up
                         menu that appears, choose Labels. Alternatively, one may access
                         this option by selecting the View menu followed by the Structure
                         Diagrams option from the top menu bar, and the Labels tab of the
                         dialog box that comes up.




                                                    Figure 2. 15
Tutorial 2   2-23
8.   In the Diagrams dialog box that appears, turn the Node Numbers
     and Beam Numbers on and then click on OK.




                               Figure 2. 16
2-24   Tutorial 2

                    The following figure illustrates the node and beam numbers
                    displayed on the structure. The structure in the main window
                    should resemble the figure shown below.




                                               Figure 2. 17


                    If you are feeling adventurous, here is a small exercise for you.
                    Change the font of the node/beam labels by going to the View menu
                    and selecting the Options command, and then selecting the
                    appropriate tab (Node Labels / Beam labels) from the Options
                    dialog box.
Tutorial 2   2-25
9.    Examining the structure shown in section 2.2 of this tutorial, it can
      be seen that members 4 and 5 can be easily generated if we could
      first create a copy of members 1 and 2 and then rotate those copied
      units about a vertical line passing through the point (6, 0, 0, that is,
      node 4) by 90 degrees. Fortunately, such a facility does exist which
      can be executed in a single step. It is called Circular Repeat and is
      available under the Geometry menu.

      First, select members 1 and 2 using the Beams Cursor       . (Please
      refer to the ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this
      manual to learn more about selecting members.)

10.   Then, either click on the Circular Repeat icon from the appropriate
      toolbar, or, go to the Geometry | Circular Repeat menu option as
      shown below.




                                    Figure 2. 18
2-26   Tutorial 2

                    11.   In the 3D Circular dialog box that comes up, specify the Axis of
                          Rotation as Y, Total Angle as 90 degrees, No. of Steps as 1 and the
                          vertical line as passing through Node 4. Instead of specifying as
                          passing through Node 4, one may also specify the X and Z co-
                          ordinates as 6 and 0 respectively. Leave the Link Steps box
                          unchecked and click on the OK button.




                                                     Figure 2. 19
Tutorial 2   2-27
After completing the circular repeat procedure, the model will
look as shown below.
                               Before




                           Figure 2. 20


                               After




                            Figure 2. 21

If any of the members are presently selected, let us unselect them
by clicking anywhere else in the drawing area. Then, let us once
again save the work by pulling down the File menu and selecting
the Save command.
2-28   Tutorial 2

                    2.6.2 Changing the input units of length

                          As a matter of convenience, for specifying member properties for
                          our structure, it is simpler if our length units are millimeter instead
                          of meter. This will require changing the current length units of
                          input. The commands to be generated are:

                                   UNIT MMS KN

                          Steps:

                     1.   Click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar.




                                                       Figure 2. 22




                          Alternatively, one may select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit
                          menu option as shown in the next figure.
Tutorial 2   2-29




                                Figure 2. 23

2.   In either case, the following dialog box comes up. Set the Length
     Units to Millimeter and click on the OK button.




                                 Figure 2. 24
2-30   Tutorial 2

                    2.6.3 Specifying member properties

                          Our next task is to assign cross section properties for the beams
                          and columns (see section 2.2). For those of us curious to know the
                          equivalent commands in the STAAD command file, they are :

                                   MEMB PROP
                                   1 4 PRIS YD 300 ZD 275
                                   2 5 PRIS YD 350 ZD 275
                                   3 PRIS YD 350

                          Steps:


                     1.   Click on the Property Page icon located on the Structure Tools
                          toolbar.




                                                     Figure 2. 25
Tutorial 2   2-31
Alternatively, one may go to the General | Property page from the
left side of the screen as shown below.




                       Figure 2. 26
2-32   Tutorial 2

                    2.   In either case, the Properties dialog box comes up. The property
                         type we wish to assign is called PRISMATIC, and is available
                         under the Define button in the Properties dialog box as shown
                         below.




                                                     Figure 2. 27

                    3.   In the dialog box that comes up, select the Rectangle tab. Notice
                         that the field called Material is presently on the checked mode. If
                         we keep it that way, the material properties of concrete (E,
                         Poisson, Density, Alpha, etc.) will be assigned along with the
                         cross-section name. The material property values so assigned will
                         be the program defaults. We do not want default values, instead we
                         will assign our own values later on. Consequently, let us uncheck
                         the Material box. Then, enter the following values:

                                 YD = 300mm      ZD = 275mm
Tutorial 2   2-33
     Finally, click on the Add button as shown below.




                                Figure 2. 28

4.   To create the second member property (PRIS YD 350 ZD 275),
     provide 350 for YD and 275 for ZD (instead of 300 and 275) and
     click on the Add button.

     To create the third member property, in the Property dialog box,
     select the Circle option. Specify the diameter (YD) as 350 mm.
     Once again, uncheck the Material box and click on the Add
     button.




                                Figure 2. 29

     Now that we have finished creating the member properties, let us
     Close this dialog box.
2-34   Tutorial 2

                    The next step is to assign these member properties in the following
                    manner:

                             Rect 0.30x0.28 – members 1 and 4
                             Rect 0.35x0.28 – members 2 and 5
                             Cir 0.35 – member 3

                    To assign the member properties, follow these steps:

                        a. Select the first property reference in the Properties dialog
                           box (Rect 0.30x28).
                        b. Make sure that the “Use Cursor to Assign” button is
                           selected under the Assignment Method box.

                        c. Click on the Assign button. The cursor changes to
                        d. Using the cursor, click on members 1 and 4.
                        e. Finally, click on the Assign button again, or type the ‘Esc’
                           button on your keyboard to stop the assignment process.




                                                Figure 2. 30

                    In a similar fashion, assign the remaining properties.
Tutorial 2   2-35
After all the member properties have been assigned, the model will
look as shown below.




                           Figure 2. 31


We ought to save the model once again by pulling down the File
menu and selecting the Save command.
2-36   Tutorial 2

                    2.6.4 Specifying geometric constants

                          In the absence of any explicit instructions, STAAD will orient the
                          beams and columns of the structure in a pre-defined way.
                          Orientation refers to the directions along which the width and
                          depth of the cross section are aligned with respect to the global
                          axis system. The rules which dictate this default orientation are
                          explained in Section 1 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference
                          Manual.

                          We wish to orient member 4 so that its longer edges (sides parallel
                          to local Y axis) are parallel to the global Z axis. This requires
                          applying a beta angle of 90 degrees. The command which needs to
                          be generated is :

                                   BETA 90 MEMB 4

                          Steps:

                     1.   Select the Beta Angle tab in the Properties dialog box.

                     2.   Click on the Create Beta Angle button. In the ensuing dialog box,
                          specify the angle as 90 degrees. Select member 4 using the Beams
                          Cursor      .

                          Notice that as we select the member, the Assignment Method
                          automatically sets to Assign to Selected Beams. Click on the
                          Assign button.

                          Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the member.
Tutorial 2   2-37




                           Figure 2. 32

(An alternative method to assign beta angles is the following. First
select the member for which you wish to assign the beta angle.
Then, go to the Commands | Geometric Constants | Beta Angle
menu option. Specify the Angle in Degrees to be 90, ensure that the
assignment method is “To Selection” and click on OK. )




                         Figure 2. 33

One may view the orientation of the member local axes by going to
the View | Structure diagrams | Labels menu option and switching
on Beam Orientation.
2-38   Tutorial 2

                    2.6.5 Specifying material constants

                          At the time of assigning member properties, we deliberately chose
                          not to assign the material constants simultaneously, since we
                          wanted to specify values which are different from the built-in
                          defaults. The desired values are listed at the beginning of this
                          tutorial. The corresponding commands we wish to generate in the
                          STAAD input file are:

                                   CONSTANTS
                                   E 22 ALL
                                   UNIT METER
                                   DENSITY 25.0 ALL
                                   POISSON 0.17 ALL

                          Steps:

                     1.   From the Commands menu, select Material Constants. To define
                          the Modulus of Elasticity, select the Elasticity option as shown
                          below.




                                                      Figure 2. 34
Tutorial 2   2-39
2.   In the Material Constant dialog box that appears, enter 22 in the
     Enter Value box. Since the value has to be assigned to all the
     members of the structure, the current setting of the assignment
     method, namely, To View, allows us to achieve this easily. Then,
     click on OK.




                                Figure 2. 35

3.   For specifying the DENSITY constant, it will be convenient if we
     change our length units to meters. To change the length units, as
     before, click on the Input Units icon       from the Structure
     toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option
     from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box
     that comes up, specify the length units as Meter.




                              Figure 2. 36
2-40   Tutorial 2

                    4.   Following the steps 1 and 2 above, we choose Commands |
                         Material Constants | Density, specify the value as 25KN/m 3 , and
                         assign To View.

                    5.   To define the POISSON’S RATIO, using the similar procedure as
                         described above, provide the value 0.17 to all members in the
                         View.
Tutorial 2   2-41

2.6.6 Specifying Supports

      The base nodes of all the columns are restrained against translation
      and rotation about all the 3 global axes (see section 2.2). In other
      words, fixed supports are to be specified at those nodes. The
      commands to be generated are :

               SUPPORTS
               1 4 5 FIXED

      Steps:

 1.   To create supports, click on the Support Page icon located in the
      Structure Tools toolbar as shown below.




                                  Figure 2. 37
2-42   Tutorial 2

                    Alternatively, one may go to the General | Support Page from the
                    left side of the screen.




                                            Figure 2. 38
Tutorial 2   2-43
2.   In either case, the Supports dialog box comes up. Since we already
     know that nodes 1, 4 and 5 are to be associated with the Fixed
     support, using the Nodes Cursor     , select these nodes.

3.   Then, click on the Create button in the Supports dialog box as
     shown below.




                                Figure 2. 39
2-44   Tutorial 2

                    4.   The Create Support dialog box comes up. In the dialog box, the
                         Fixed tab happens to be the default which is convenient for this
                         case. Click on the Assign button as shown below.




                                                    Figure 2. 40
Tutorial 2   2-45
After the supports have been assigned, the structure will look like
the one shown below.




                            Figure 2. 41

Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-select all selected nodes
and prevent accidental assignment of unwanted data to those nodes.

As earlier, save the work completed so far by going to the File
menu and clicking on the Save command.
2-46   Tutorial 2

                    2.6.7 Specifying Loads

                        5 load cases are to be created for this structure. Details of the
                        individual cases are explained at the beginning of this tutorial. The
                        corresponding commands to be generated are listed below. Notice
                        that cases 4 and 5 are to be generated not as the standard
                        combination type, but using a combination load type called
                        REPEAT LOAD. The instructions at the beginning of this tutorial
                        require us to analyze this structure using an analysis type called
                        PDelta. A Pdelta analysis is a non-linear type of analysis. In
                        STAAD, to accurately account for the PDelta effects arising from
                        the simultaneous action of previously defined horizontal and
                        vertical loads, those previous cases must be included as
                        components of the combination case using the REPEAT LOAD
                        type.

                                UNIT METER KG

                                LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD
                                SELFWEIGHT Y -1
                                MEMBER LOAD
                                2 5 UNI GY -400

                                LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD
                                MEMBER LOAD
                                2 5 UNI GY -600

                                LOAD 3 WIND LOAD
                                MEMBER LOAD
                                1 UNI GX 300
                                4 UNI GX 500

                                LOAD 4 DEAD + LIVE
                                REPEAT LOAD
                                1 1.2 2 1.5
Tutorial 2   2-47
              LOAD 5 DEAD + WIND
              REPEAT LOAD
              1 1.1 3 1.3

     Steps:

     LOAD CASE 1

1.   To create loads, click on the Load Page icon located on the
     Structure Tools tool bar.




                                Figure 2. 42

     Alternatively, one may go to the General | Load Page from the left
     side of the screen.




                              Figure 2. 43
2-48   Tutorial 2

                    2.   A window titled “Load” appears on the right-hand side of the
                         screen. To initiate the first load case, highlight the Load Cases
                         Details option and click on the Add button.




                                                     Figure 2. 44

                    3.   The Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up. The drop-down list
                         box against Loading Type is available in case we wish to associate
                         the load case we are creating with any of the ACI, AISC or IBC
                         definitions of Dead, Live, Ice, etc. This type of association needs
                         to be done if we intend to use the program's facility for
                         automatically generating load combinations in accordance with
                         those codes.

                         Notice that there is a check box called Reducible per UBC/IBC.
                         This feature becomes active only when the load case is assigned a
                         Loading Type called Live at the time of creation of that case.
                         Please refer to STAAD.Pro 2004 Release Report for further details.

                         As we do not intend to use the automatic load combination
                         generation option, we will leave the Loading Type as None. Enter
                         DEAD LOAD as the Title for Load Case 1 and click on Add.
Tutorial 2   2-49




                          Figure 2. 45


The newly created load case will now appear under the Load Cases
Details option.




                          Figure 2. 46
2-50   Tutorial 2

                    4.   To generate and assign the selfweight load type, first highlight
                         DEAD LOAD. You will notice that the Add New Load Items dialog
                         box shows more options now.




                                                      Figure 2. 47

                    5.   In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Selfweight Load
                         option under the Selfweight item. Specify the Direction as Y, and
                         the Factor as -1.0. The negative number signifies that the
                         selfweight load acts opposite to the positive direction of the global
                         axis (Y in this case) along which it is applied. Click on the Add
                         button. The selfweight load is applicable to every member of the
                         structure, and cannot be applied on a selected list of members.




                                                     Figure 2. 48
Tutorial 2   2-51
6.   Load 1 contains an additional load component, the member loads
     on members 2 and 5. However, notice that the load values are
     listed in the beginning of this tutorial in kg and meter units. Rather
     than convert those values to the current input units, we will
     conform to those units. The current input units, which we last set
     while specifying Density, are KN and METER. We have to change
     the force unit to Kilogram.

     STAAD has a limitation in that one cannot change the units while
     editing load cases. If we attempt to, the following message will be
     displayed.




                                  Figure 2. 49

     Click on OK. Close the Add New Load Items dialog box. Then, go
     to the Setup Page as shown below (or any other page).




                                  Figure 2. 50
2-52   Tutorial 2

                         As before, click on the Input Units icon      from the top toolbar,
                         or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option from the
                         top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes
                         up, specify the force units as Kilogram. Again, click on General |
                         Load page to resume creating the load cases.

                    7.   To create the member load, first, click on the expression DEAD
                         LOAD followed by the Add button. Then, click on the Member
                         Load item in the Add New Load Items dialog box.




                                                    Figure 2. 51

                    8.   Select the Uniform Force option and specify GY as the Direction
                         and -400 as the Force. For these members, since the local Y axis
                         coincides with the global Y axis, one may choose the direction of
                         the load as either “Y” or “GY”, they will both have the same
                         effect. (One may view the orientation of the member local axes by
                         going to View | Structure Diagrams | Labels | Beam Orientation.)
                         The negative value signifies that the load acts along the negative
                         GY direction. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close
                         button.
Tutorial 2   2-53
9.    The member load we just created has to be assigned to members 2
      and 5. First, make sure that the expression UNI GY -400Kg/m is
      selected in the Load dialog box as shown below.




                                  Figure 2. 52

10.   Next, select members 2 and 5 using the Beams Cursor          .
      (Please refer to the ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the
      end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.)

      Then, click on Assign to Selected Beams followed by the Assign
      button.




                                 Figure 2. 53

      As we click on the Assign button, the following dialog box
      appears. This message box appears just to confirm that we indeed
      wish to associate the loadcase with the selected beams. So, let us
      choose Yes.




                                  Figure 2. 54
2-54   Tutorial 2

                    After the load has been assigned, the structure will look as shown
                    below:




                                               Figure 2. 55
Tutorial 2   2-55
      LOAD CASE 2

11.   The next step is to initiate the second load case which again
      contains MEMBER LOADs. Highlight Load Cases Details and
      click on the Add button. Once again, the Add New Load Cases
      dialog box comes up.




                                  Figure 2. 56

      In this dialog box, once again, we are not associating the load case
      we are about to create with any code based Loading Type and so,
      we will leave that box as None. Specify the Title of the second
      load case as LIVE LOAD and click on the Add button.




                                  Figure 2. 57
2-56   Tutorial 2

                    12.   To create the member load, highlight LIVE LOAD as shown
                          below.




                                                     Figure 2. 58

                    13.   Follow steps 7 to 10 to create and assign a uniformly distributed
                          force of -600Kg/m on members 2 and 5.

                          After the second load case has been assigned, the structure will
                          look as shown below:




                                                      Figure 2. 59

                          Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the members.
Tutorial 2   2-57
      LOAD CASE 3

14.   Creating the third load case, which again has MEMBER LOADs,
      involves the same procedure as that for load case 2. As before, first
      highlight Load Cases Details in the Load dialog box to initiate the
      third load case. Enter WIND LOAD as the Title for Load Case 3.

15.   To apply the load on member 1, follow the procedure similar to
      that in steps 7 to 10. The only differences are, the member which
      receives this load is 1, the Direction is GX and the Force is
      +300Kg/m.

16.   Similarly, for member 4 and the third load case, specify the Force
      as 500Kg/m and the Direction as GX.

      After the third load case has been assigned, the structure will look
      as shown below:




                                  Figure 2. 60
2-58   Tutorial 2

                          LOAD CASE 4

                    17.   We now come to the point where we have to create load case 4 as
                          (1.2 x Load 1) + (1.5 x Load 2). We saw in the beginning of this
                          section that we should be creating a “REPEAT LOAD” type of
                          combination, and not the “LOAD COMBINATION” type. To
                          initiate load case 4, highlight Load Cases Details in the Load
                          dialog box and specify the title as DEAD + LIVE.

                    18.   Then, click on DEAD + LIVE in the Load dialog box as shown
                          below.




                                                      Figure 2. 61

                    19.   In the Add New Load Items dialog box, click on the Repeat Load
                          option. Then, select Load Case 1 (DEAD LOAD), click on the
                          button and enter the Factor as 1.2. (This indicates that the load
                          data values from load case 1 are multiplied by a factor of 1.2, and
                          the resulting values are utilized in load case 4.)

                    20.   Similarly, select Load Case 2 (LIVE LOAD), click on the
                          button and enter the Factor as 1.5.
Tutorial 2   2-59
The Add New Load Items dialog box will now look as shown
below. Click on the Add button.




                           Figure 2. 62

No further operation is required for load case 4. The recipients
(members) of the loads in load case 4 are automatically chosen to
be the very same ones to which the components of the REPEAT
LOAD cases (loads 1 and 2) were assigned.
2-60   Tutorial 2

                    The structure will now look similar to the one shown below.




                                               Figure 2. 63
Tutorial 2   2-61
      LOAD CASE 5

21.   Since load cases 4 and 5 are near identical in nature, the same
      procedure used in creating load case 4 is applicable for case 5 also.
      Let us highlight Load Cases Details in the Load dialog box to
      initiate the fifth load case. Enter DEAD + WIND as the Title for
      Load Case 5.

22.   Follow steps 18 to 20 except for associating a Factor of 1.1 with
      the first load case and a Factor of 1.3 with the third load case.

      The Add New Load Items dialog box will now look as shown
      below. Click on the Add button.




                                  Figure 2. 64

      Since we have completed creating all the load cases, we may now
      click on the Close button to dismiss the Add New Load Items
      dialog box.
2-62   Tutorial 2

                    The structure will now look similar to the one shown below.




                                               Figure 2. 65


                    Let us save the work completed so far by going to the File menu
                    and selecting the Save command or by holding the ‘Ctrl’ key and
                    pressing the ‘S’ key.
Tutorial 2   2-63

2.6.8 Specifying the analysis type

      The analysis type for this structure is called P-Delta. Since this
      problem involves concrete beam and column design per the ACI
      code, second-order analysis is required and has to be done on
      factored loads acting simultaneously. The factored loads have been
      created earlier as cases 4 and 5. Now is the time to specify the
      analysis type.

      The command for a pdelta analysis will appear in the STAAD file
      as:

               PDELTA ANALYSIS

      Steps:

 1.   Go to Analysis/Print Page on the left side of the screen.




                                  Figure 2. 66
2-64   Tutorial 2

                    2.   In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, select the
                         PDelta Analysis tab. Then, click on the Add button followed by
                         the Close button.




                                                    Figure 2. 67

                         Save the work again using the Save option of the File menu.
Tutorial 2   2-65

2.6.9 Short-listing the load cases to be used
      in concrete design

      The concrete design has to be performed for load cases 4 and 5
      only since only those are the factored cases. To instruct the
      program to use just these cases, and ignore the remaining, we have
      to use the LOAD LIST command.

      The command will appear in the STAAD file as :

               LOAD LIST 4 5

      Steps:

 1.   In the menus on the top of the screen, go to Commands | Loading
      | Load List option as shown below.




                                 Figure 2. 68
2-66   Tutorial 2

                    2.   In the Load List dialog box that comes up, select load cases 4
                         (DEAD + LIVE) and 5 (DEAD + WIND) by holding the ‘Ctrl’ key
                         down. Then, click on the      button. Load cases 4 and 5 will be
                         selected and placed in the Load List selection box as shown below.
                         Click on the OK button.




                                                    Figure 2. 69
Tutorial 2   2-67

2.6.10 Specifying concrete design parameters

     Among the various terms which appear in the equations for design
     of concrete beams and columns, some of them can be user
     controlled, such as, the grade of concrete, or the maximum size of
     reinforcing bar one may wish to use. Such terms are called
     concrete design parameters. For the ACI code, a list of these
     parameters is available in Section 3 of the STAAD.Pro Technical
     Reference Manual. The parameters we wish to use, and the
     corresponding command which ought to appear in the STAAD
     input file are :

              UNIT MMS NEWTON
              CODE ACI
              CLT 25 ALL
              CLB 30 ALL
              CLS 25 ALL
              FC 25 ALL
              FYMAIN 415 ALL
              TRACK 1 ALL

     Steps:

1.   Before we can start assigning the parameters, we want our force
     units to be Newton and our length units to be millimeter. We last
     set the units during load specification as Kg and Meter. To change
     the units, as before, click on the Input Units icon      from the
     appropriate toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit
     menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units
     dialog box that comes up, specify the force units as Newton and
     the length units as Millimeter.

2.   Next, go to Design | Concrete Page from the left side of the
     screen. Make sure that under the Current Code selections on the
     top right hand side, ACI is selected. Then, click on the Define
     Parameters button in the Concrete Design dialog box.
2-68   Tutorial 2




                                                    Figure 2. 70

                    3.   In the Design Parameters dialog box that opens, select the Clt
                         (Clear Cover for top) tab. Then, provide the value as 25mm and
                         click on the Add button as shown below.




                                                    Figure 2. 71
Tutorial 2   2-69
4.   To define the remaining parameters, follow the above procedure
     and provide the following values.

                        Parameter              Value

                           Clb                  30
                           Cls                   25
                           Fc                    25
                         Fymain                 415
                          Track                 1.0


     When all the above parameters have been assigned, click on the
     Close button in the Design Parameters dialog box.

     After all the design parameters have been assigned, the Concrete
     Design dialog box will look as shown below.




                                Figure 2. 72
2-70   Tutorial 2

                    The next step is to assign these parameters to all the members in
                    our model. The easiest way to do that is to use the Assign To View
                    method. Follow the steps as shown in the figure below.




                                                Figure 2. 73

                    Let us save our structure once again using the Save option of the
                    File menu.
Tutorial 2   2-71

2.6.11 Specifying design commands

      Design commands are the actual instructions for the design of
      beams and columns. We intend to design beams 2 and 5 and
      columns 1, 3 and 4. The commands to be generated are :

               DESIGN BEAM 2 5
               DESIGN COLUMN 1 3 4

      Steps:


 1.   Design commands are generated through the dialog boxes available
      under the Commands button in the Concrete Design dialog box. So,
      let us click on the Commands button as shown below.




                                 Figure 2. 74
2-72   Tutorial 2

                    2.   In the Design Commands dialog box that comes up, select the
                         DESIGN BEAM option and click on the Add button.




                                                     Figure 2. 75

                    3.   We also need to add a command for designing columns. So, select
                         the DESIGN COLUMN option and click on Add button.

                         After steps 2 and 3 are completed, let us Close this dialog box.

                    4.   The next step is to associate the Design Beam command with
                         members 2 and 5 and the Design Column command with members
                         1, 3 and 4.

                         To do this, as before, first highlight the expression DESIGN
                         BEAM. Then, select members 2 and 5 using the Beams Cursor
                              . Click on Assign to Selected Beams followed by the Assign
                         button.




                                                     Figure 2. 76
Tutorial 2   2-73
As we click on the Assign button, the following dialog box
appears. This message box appears just to confirm that we indeed
wish to associate the design command with the selected beams. So,
let us say Yes.




                            Figure 2. 77

Similarly, assign the Design Column command to members 1, 3
and 4

This concludes the task of assigning all the input for our model.
Let us Save the file one final time.
2-74   Tutorial 2

       2.7 Viewing the input command file

                    Let us now take a look at the data that has been written into the file
                    that we just saved above. The contents of the file can be viewed
                    either by clicking on the STAAD Editor icon or, by going to the
                    Edit menu and choosing Edit Input Command File as shown below.




                                             Figure 2. 78
Tutorial 2   2-75
A new window will open up with the data listed as shown here:




                           Figure 2. 79

This window and the facilities it contains is known as the STAAD
Editor.
2-76   Tutorial 2

                    We could make modifications to the data of our structure in this
                    Editor if we wish to do so. Let us Exit the Editor without doing so
                    by selecting the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not
                    the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor
                    window).

                    As we saw in Section 2.1, we could also have created the same
                    model by typing the relevant STAAD commands into a text file
                    using either the STAAD editor, or by using any external editor of
                    our choice. If you would like to understand that method, proceed
                    to the next section. If you want to skip that part, proceed to section
                    2.9 where we perform the analysis and design on this model.
Tutorial 2   2-77

2.8 Creating the model using the command file

         Let us now use the command file method to create the model for
         the above structure. The commands used in the command file are
         described later in this section.

         The STAAD.Pro command file may be created using the built-in
         editor, the procedure for which is explained further below in this
         section. Any standard text editor such as Notepad or WordPad may
         also be used to create the command file. However, the STAAD.Pro
         command file editor offers the advantage of syntax checking as we
         type the commands. The STAAD.Pro keywords, numeric data,
         comments, etc. are displayed in distinct colors in the STAAD.Pro
         editor. A typical editor screen is shown below to illustrate its general
         appearance.




                                     Figure 2. 80
2-78   Tutorial 2

                    To access the built-in editor, first start the program using the
                    procedure explained in Section 2.2. Next, follow step 1 of Section
                    2.4.




                                                Figure 2. 81

                    You will then encounter the dialog box shown below. In this dialog
                    box, choose Open STAAD Editor.




                                                 Figure 2. 82
Tutorial 2   2-79
At this point, the editor screen will open as shown below.




                             Figure 2. 83

Delete all the command lines displayed in the editor window and
type the lines shown in bold below (You don’t have to delete the
lines if you know which to keep and where to fill in the rest of the
commands). The commands may be typed in upper or lower case
letters. Usually the first three letters of a keyword are all that are
needed -- the rest of the letters of the word are not required. The
required letters are underlined. (“SPACE” = “SPA” = “space” =
“spa”)
2-80   Tutorial 2

                    Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation.

                        STAAD SPACE RC FRAMED STRUCTURE

                    Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE
                    signifies that the structure is a space frame structure (3-D) and the
                    geometry is defined through X, Y and Z coordinates.

                        UNIT METER KN

                    Specifies the unit to be used.

                        JOINT COORDINATES
                        1 0 0 0 ; 2 0 3.5 0 ; 3 6 3.5 0
                        4 6 0 0 ; 5 6 0 6 ; 6 6 3.5 6

                    Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided
                    above. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators. That enables
                    us to provide multiple sets of data on one line.

                        MEMBER INCIDENCES
                        112;223;334
                        456;563

                    Defines the members by the joints they are connected to.

                        UNIT MMS KN
                        MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
                        1 4 PRIS YD 300 ZD 275
                        2 5 PRIS YD 350 ZD 275
                        3 PRIS YD 350

                    Member properties have been defined above using the PRISMATIC
                    attribute for which YD (depth) and ZD (width) values are provided
                    in MM unit. When YD and ZD are provided together, STAAD
                    considers the section to be rectangular. When YD alone is
                    specified, the section is considered to be circular. Details are
                    available in Section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual.
Tutorial 2   2-81
    CONSTANTS
    E 22 MEMB 1 TO 5

Material constant E (modulus of elasticity) is specified as
22KN/sq.mm following the command CONSTANTS.

    UNIT METER KN
    CONSTANTS
    DENSITY 25.0 ALL
    POISSON 0.17 ALL

Length unit is changed from MMS to METER to facilitate the input
of Density. Next, the Poisson’s Ratio is specified.

    BETA 90 MEMB 4

In the absence of any explicit instructions, STAAD will orient the
beams and columns of the structure in a pre-defined way (see
Section 1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details.) In order
to orient member 4 so that its longer edges (sides parallel to local
Y axis) are parallel to the global Z axis, we need to apply a beta
angle of 90 degrees.

    SUPPORT
    1 4 5 FIXED

Joints 1, 4 and 5 are defined as fixed supported.

    UNIT METER KG
    LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD

Force units are changed from KN to KG to facilitate the input of
loads. Load case 1 is initiated along with an accompanying title.
2-82   Tutorial 2
                        SELFWEIGHT Y -1

                    One of the components of load case 1 is the selfweight of the
                    structure acting in the global Y direction with a factor of -1.0.
                    Since global Y is vertically upward, the factor of -1.0 indicates that
                    this load will act downwards.

                        MEMBER LOAD
                        2 5 UNI GY -400

                    Load 1 contains member loads also. GY indicates that the load is in
                    the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly
                    distributed load. Loads are applied on members 2 and 5.

                        LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD

                    Load case 2 is initiated along with an accompanying title.

                        MEMBER LOAD
                        2 5 UNI GY -600

                    Load 2 also contains member loads. GY indicates that the load is in
                    the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly
                    distributed load. Loads are applied on members 2 and 5.

                        LOAD 3 WIND LOAD

                    Load case 3 is initiated along with an accompanying title.

                        MEMBER LOAD
                        1 UNI GX 300
                        4 UNI GX 500

                    Load 3 also contains member loads. GX indicates that the load is in
                    the global X direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly
                    distributed load. Loads are applied on members 1 and 4.

                        LOAD 4 DEAD + LIVE

                    Load case 4 is initiated along with an accompanying title.
Tutorial 2   2-83
    REPEAT LOAD
    1 1.2 2 1.5

Load case 4 illustrates the technique employed to instruct STAAD
to create a load case which consists of data to be assembled from
other load cases specified earlier. We are instructing the program
to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 and 2 acting
simultaneously. The load data values from load case 1 are
multiplied by a factor of 1.2, and the resulting values are utilized
in load case 4. Similarly, the load data values from load case 2 are
multiplied by a factor of 1.5, and the resulting values too are
utilized in load case 4.

    LOAD 5 DEAD + WIND

Load case 5 is initiated along with an accompanying title.

    REPEAT LOAD
    1 1.1 3 1.3

We are instructing the program to analyze the structure for loads
from cases 1 and 3 acting simultaneously.

    PDELTA ANALYSIS

The PDELTA ANALYSIS command is an instruction to the
program to execute a second-order analysis and account for P-delta
effects.

    LOAD LIST 4 5

The above LOAD LIST command is a means of stating that all
further calculations should be based on the results of load cases 4
and 5 only. The intent here is to restrict concrete design
calculations to that for load cases 4 and 5 only.
2-84   Tutorial 2
                        START CONCRETE DESIGN
                        CODE ACI
                        UNIT MMS NEWTON
                        CLT 25 ALL
                        CLB 30 ALL
                        CLS 25 ALL
                        FC 25 ALL
                        FYMAIN 415 ALL
                        TRACK 1 ALL

                    We first line is the command that initiates the concrete design
                    operation. The values for the concrete design parameters are
                    defined in the above commands. Design is performed per the ACI
                    Code. The length units are changed from METER to MMS to
                    facilitate the input of the design parameters. Similarly, force units
                    are changed from KG to NEWTON. The TRACK value dictates the
                    extent of design related information which should be produced by
                    the program in the output. The parameters specified include
                    CLT(Clear cover for top surface), CLB (Clear cover for bottom
                    surface), CLS (Clear cover for sides), FC(Strength of concrete),
                    and FYMAIN(Ultimate strength of steel). These parameters are
                    described in Section 3 of the Technical Reference Manual.

                        DESIGN BEAM 2 5
                        DESIGN COLUMN 1 3 4

                    The above commands instruct the program to design beams 2 and 5
                    for flexure, shear and torsion, and to design columns 1, 3 and 4 for
                    axial load and biaxial bending.

                        END CONCRETE DESIGN

                    This command terminates the concrete design operation.

                        FINISH

                    This command terminates the STAAD run.

                    Let us save the file and exit the editor.
Tutorial 2   2-85

2.9 Performing the analysis and design

         STAAD.Pro performs Analysis and Design simultaneously. In
         order to perform Analysis and Design, select the Run Analysis
         option from the Analyze menu.




                                     Figure 2. 84

         If the structure has not been saved after the last change was made,
         you should save the structure first by using the Save command
         from the File menu.

         When you select the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu,
         the following dialog box appears:




                                     Figure 2. 85

         We are presented with the choice of 2 engines : the STAAD engine
         and the STARDYNE Advanced Analysis engine. The STARDYNE
         Analysis engine is suitable for advanced problems such as
         Buckling Analysis, Modal Extraction using various methods, etc.
         However, if the calculations call for steel or concrete design, UBC
         load generation, etc., we have to select the STAAD engine. So, let
         us ensure that the radio button is on the STAAD engine.
2-86   Tutorial 2

                    Click on the Run Analysis button.

                    As the Analysis progresses, several messages appear on the screen
                    as shown in the next figure.




                                                Figure 2. 86
                    Notice that we can choose from the three options available in the
                    above dialog box :




                                               Figure 2. 87

                    These options are indicative of what will happen after we click on
                    the Done button.
Tutorial 2   2-87
The View Output File option allows us to view the output file
created by STAAD. The output file contains the numerical results
produced in response to the various input commands we specified
during the model generation process. It also tells us whether any
errors were encountered, and if so, whether the analysis and design
was successfully completed or not. Section 2.10 offers additional
details on viewing and understanding the contents of the output
file.

The Go to Post Processing Mode option allows us to go to
graphical part of the program known as the Post-processor. This is
where one can extensively verify the results, view the results
graphically, plot result diagrams, produce reports, etc. Section 2.11
explains the post processing mode in greater detail.

The Stay in Modelling Mode lets us continue to be in the Model
generation mode of the program (the one we current are in) in case
we wish to make further changes to our model.
2-88   Tutorial 2

       2.10 Viewing the output file

                    During the analysis process, STAAD.Pro creates an Output file.
                    This file provides important information on whether the analysis
                    was performed properly. For example, if STAAD.Pro encounters an
                    instability problem during the analysis process, it will be reported
                    in the output file.

                    We can access the output file using the method explained at the
                    end of the previous section. Alternatively, we can select the File |
                    View | Output File | STAAD Output option from the top menu.
                    The STAAD.Pro output file for the problem we just ran is shown in
                    the next few pages.




                                              Figure 2. 88
Tutorial 2   2-89
The STAAD.Pro output file is displayed through a file viewer
called SproView. This viewer allows us to set the text font for the
entire file and print the output file to a printer. Use the appropriate
File menu option from the menu bar.




                              Figure 2. 89


By default, the output file contains a listing of the entire input also.
You may choose not to print the echo of the input commands in the
output file. Please select Commands | Miscellaneous | Set Echo
option from the menu bar and select the Echo Off button.

It is quite important that we browse through the entire output file
and make sure that the results look reasonable, that there are no
error messages or warnings reported, etc. Errors encountered
during the analysis & design can disable access to the post-
processing mode – the graphical screens where results can be
viewed graphically. The information presented in the output file is
a crucial indicator of whether or not the structure satisfies the
engineering requirements of safety and serviceability.
2-90   Tutorial 2


                              ****************************************************
                              *                                                  *
                              *           STAAD.Pro                              *
                              *           Version          Bld                   *
                              *           Proprietary Program of                 *
                              *           Research Engineers, Intl.              *
                              *           Date=                                  *
                              *           Time=                                  *
                              *                                                  *
                              *      USER ID:                                    *
                              ****************************************************

                     1.   STAAD SPACE RC FRAMED STRUCTURE
                     2.   START JOB INFORMATION
                     3.   ENGINEER DATE
                     4.   END JOB INFORMATION
                     5.   INPUT WIDTH 79
                     6.   UNIT METER KN
                     7.   JOINT COORDINATES
                     8.   1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.5 0; 3 6 3.5 0; 4 6 0 0; 5 6 0 6; 6 6 3.5 6
                     9.   MEMBER INCIDENCES
                    10.   1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4; 4 5 6; 5 6 3
                    11.   UNIT MMS KN
                    12.   MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
                    13.   1 4 PRIS YD 300 ZD 275
                    14.   2 5 PRIS YD 350 ZD 275
                    15.   3 PRIS YD 350
                    16.   CONSTANTS
                    17.   E 22 MEMB 1 TO 5
                    18.   UNIT METER KN
                    19.   CONSTANTS
                    20.   DENSITY 25.0 ALL
                    21.   POISSON 0.17 ALL
                    22.   BETA 90 MEMB 4
                    23.   SUPPORTS
                    24.   1 4 5 FIXED
                    25.   UNIT METER KG
                    26.   LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD
                    27.   SELFWEIGHT Y -1
                    28.   MEMBER LOAD
                    29.   2 5 UNI GY -400
                    30.   LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD
                    31.   MEMBER LOAD
                    32.   2 5 UNI GY -600
                    33.   LOAD 3 WIND LOAD
                    34.   MEMBER LOAD
                    35.   1 UNI GX 300
                    36.   4 UNI GX 500
                    37.   LOAD 4 DEAD + LIVE
                    38.   REPEAT LOAD
                    39.   1 1.2 2 1.5
                    40.   LOAD 5 DEAD + WIND
                    41.   REPEAT LOAD
                    42.   1 1.1 3 1.3
                    43.   PDELTA ANALYSIS


                             P R O B L E M   S T A T I S T I C S
                             -----------------------------------

                    NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS =     6/     5/          3
                    ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH=     3/     3/     12 DOF
                    TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES =    5, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM =            18
                    SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX =        1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS
                    REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE =      12.0/ 43064.0 MB
Tutorial 2   2-91

44.   LOAD LIST 4 5
45.   START CONCRETE DESIGN
46.   CODE ACI
47.   UNIT MMS NEWTON
48.   CLT 25 MEMB 1 TO 5
49.   CLB 30 MEMB 1 TO 5
50.   CLS 25 ALL
51.   FC 25 MEMB 1 TO 5
52.   FYMAIN 415 MEMB 1 TO 5
53.   TRACK 1 ALL
54.   DESIGN BEAM 2 5

=====================================================================

        BEAM   NO.        2 DESIGN RESULTS - FLEXURE PER CODE ACI 318-02

LEN -   6000. MM     FY -   415.   FC -   25.   MPA, SIZE -   275. X   350. MMS

LEVEL    HEIGHT     BAR INFO       FROM          TO           ANCHOR
          (MM)                     (MM)         (MM)         STA END
_____________________________________________________________________

  1         51.     2 - 16MM       313.         5437.        NO   NO
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
|   CRITICAL POS MOMENT=     39.16 KN-MET AT 3000.MM, LOAD      4|
|   REQD STEEL=   366.MM2, ROW=0.0044, ROWMX=0.0193 ROWMN=0.0033 |
|   MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING=   273./   41./ 184. MMS          |
|   REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH =   480. MMS                       |
|----------------------------------------------------------------|

 Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location =             20964.0 cm^4

  2        306.     3 - 12MM         0.          860.        YES NO
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
|   CRITICAL NEG MOMENT=     33.29 KN-MET AT      0.MM, LOAD    4|
|   REQD STEEL=   301.MM2, ROW=0.0036, ROWMX=0.0193 ROWMN=0.0033 |
|   MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING=   273./   37./   94. MMS         |
|   REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH =   360. MMS                       |
|----------------------------------------------------------------|

 Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location =             19148.5 cm^4

  3        306.     3 - 12MM      4390.         6000.        NO   YES
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
|   CRITICAL NEG MOMENT=     36.18 KN-MET AT 6000.MM, LOAD      4|
|   REQD STEEL=   329.MM2, ROW=0.0039, ROWMX=0.0193 ROWMN=0.0033 |
|   MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING=   273./   37./   94. MMS         |
|   REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH =   360. MMS                       |
|----------------------------------------------------------------|

 Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location =             19148.5 cm^4


        B E A M    N O.      2 D E S I G N      R E S U L T S - SHEAR

AT START SUPPORT - Vu=   43.94 KNS Vc=    72.44 KNS Vs=     0.00           KNS
Tu=    2.55 KN-MET Tc=     2.4 KN-MET Ts=     3.4 KN-MET LOAD                4
STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION.
REINFORCEMENT FOR SHEAR IS PER CL.11.5.5.1.
PROVIDE 12 MM 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 130. MM C/C FOR 2705. MM
ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL RESISTANCE =             0.75 SQ.CM.
AT END   SUPPORT - Vu=   44.91 KNS Vc=    71.94 KNS Vs=     0.00           KNS
Tu=    2.55 KN-MET Tc=     2.4 KN-MET Ts=     3.4 KN-MET LOAD                4
STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION.
REINFORCEMENT FOR SHEAR IS PER CL.11.5.5.1.
PROVIDE 12 MM 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 130. MM C/C FOR 2705. MM
ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL RESISTANCE =             0.75 SQ.CM.
2-92   Tutorial 2


                    ___   2J____________________ 6000X 275X 350_____________________     3J____
                    |                                                                           |
                    ||=========                                            ====================||
                    | 3No12 H 306.   0.TO 860                          3No12|H|306.4390.TO 6000 |
                    | 22*12c/c130                                           | | |22*12c/c130    |
                    |   2No16 H 51. 313.TO 5437                             | | | | | | |       |
                    | ==================================================================        |
                    |                                                                           |
                    |___________________________________________________________________________|
                     ___________     ___________     ___________     ___________     ___________
                    |           |   |           |   |           |   |           |   |           |
                    |    ooo    |   |           |   |           |   |    ooo    |   |    ooo    |
                    | 3#12      |   |           |   |           |   | 3#12      |   | 3#12      |
                    |           |   |           |   |           |   |           |   |           |
                    |           |   | 2#16      |   | 2#16      |   | 2#16      |   |           |
                    |           |   |    oo     |   |    oo     |   |    oo     |   |           |
                    |           |   |           |   |           |   |           |   |           |
                    |___________|   |___________|   |___________|   |___________|   |___________|


                     =====================================================================

                             BEAM   NO.        5 DESIGN RESULTS - FLEXURE PER CODE ACI 318-02

                     LEN -   6000. MM     FY -   415.   FC -   25.   MPA, SIZE -   275. X   350. MMS

                     LEVEL    HEIGHT     BAR INFO       FROM          TO           ANCHOR
                               (MM)                     (MM)         (MM)         STA END
                     _____________________________________________________________________

                       1         51.     2 - 16MM       313.         5437.        NO   NO
                     |----------------------------------------------------------------|
                     |   CRITICAL POS MOMENT=     39.16 KN-MET AT 3000.MM, LOAD      4|
                     |   REQD STEEL=   366.MM2, ROW=0.0044, ROWMX=0.0193 ROWMN=0.0033 |
                     |   MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING=   273./   41./ 184. MMS          |
                     |   REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH =   480. MMS                       |
                     |----------------------------------------------------------------|

                       Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location =            20964.0 cm^4

                       2        306.     3 - 12MM         0.          860.        YES NO
                     |----------------------------------------------------------------|
                     |   CRITICAL NEG MOMENT=     33.29 KN-MET AT      0.MM, LOAD    4|
                     |   REQD STEEL=   301.MM2, ROW=0.0036, ROWMX=0.0193 ROWMN=0.0033 |
                     |   MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING=   273./   37./   94. MMS         |
                     |   REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH =   360. MMS                       |
                     |----------------------------------------------------------------|

                       Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location =            19148.5 cm^4

                       3        306.     3 - 12MM      4890.         6000.        NO   YES
                     |----------------------------------------------------------------|
                     |   CRITICAL NEG MOMENT=     36.18 KN-MET AT 6000.MM, LOAD      4|
                     |   REQD STEEL=   329.MM2, ROW=0.0039, ROWMX=0.0193 ROWMN=0.0033 |
                     |   MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING=   273./   37./   94. MMS         |
                     |   REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH =   360. MMS                       |
                     |----------------------------------------------------------------|

                       Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location =            19148.5 cm^4


                             B E A M    N O.      5 D E S I G N      R E S U L T S - SHEAR

                      AT START SUPPORT - Vu=   18.56 KNS Vc=    72.56 KNS Vs=     0.00 KNS
                      Tu=    4.73 KN-MET Tc=     2.3 KN-MET Ts=     6.3 KN-MET LOAD      5
                      STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION.
                      REINFORCEMENT FOR SHEAR IS PER CL.11.5.5.1.
                      PROVIDE 12 MM 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 130. MM C/C FOR 2705. MM
                      ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL RESISTANCE =   1.40 SQ.CM.
Tutorial 2   2-93

  AT END   SUPPORT - Vu=   19.11 KNS Vc=    71.87 KNS Vs=     0.00 KNS
  Tu=    4.73 KN-MET Tc=     2.3 KN-MET Ts=     6.3 KN-MET LOAD      5
  STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION.
  REINFORCEMENT FOR SHEAR IS PER CL.11.5.5.1.
  PROVIDE 12 MM 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 130. MM C/C FOR 2705. MM
  ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL RESISTANCE =   1.40 SQ.CM.


 ___   6J____________________ 6000X 275X 350_____________________     3J____
|                                                                           |
||=========                                                  ==============||
| 3No12 H 306.   0.TO 860                          3No12 H 306.4890.TO 6000 |
| 22*12c/c130                                                22*12c/c130    |
|   2No16 H 51. 313.TO 5437                                   | | | |       |
| ==================================================================        |
|                                                                           |
|___________________________________________________________________________|
 ___________     ___________     ___________     ___________     ___________
|           |   |           |   |           |   |           |   |           |
|    ooo    |   |           |   |           |   |           |   |    ooo    |
| 3#12      |   |           |   |           |   |           |   | 3#12      |
|           |   |           |   |           |   |           |   |           |
|           |   | 2#16      |   | 2#16      |   | 2#16      |   |           |
|           |   |    oo     |   |    oo     |   |    oo     |   |           |
|           |   |           |   |           |   |           |   |           |
|___________|   |___________|   |___________|   |___________|   |___________|


 ********************END OF BEAM DESIGN**************************


  55. DESIGN COLUMN 1 3 4

 ====================================================================

      COLUMN   NO.    1   DESIGN PER ACI 318-02 - AXIAL + BENDING

 FY - 415.0 FC - 25.0 MPA, RECT SIZE - 275.0 X 300.0 MMS, TIED
         AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 882.8 SQ. MM

 BAR CONFIGURATION       REINF PCT.   LOAD   LOCATION   PHI
 ----------------------------------------------------------

   8 - 12 MM               1.097        4      END       0.650
 (PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS ON EACH FACE)
 TIE BAR NUMBER    8 SPACING 192.00 MM

     COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z -AXIS (KN-MET)

  --------------------------------------------------------
    P0        Pn max    P-bal.    M-bal.     e-bal. (MM)
  2109.38   1687.50    785.43     97.75     124.5
     M0       P-tens.   Des.Pn    Des.Mn     e/h
    47.51   -375.48     75.04     51.21    0.19497
  --------------------------------------------------------

     COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Y -AXIS (KN-MET)

  --------------------------------------------------------
    P0        Pn max    P-bal.    M-bal.     e-bal. (MM)
  2109.38   1687.50    775.80     88.78     114.4
     M0       P-tens.   Des.Pn    Des.Mn     e/h
    43.01   -375.48     75.04      3.92    0.01492
  --------------------------------------------------------

 ====================================================================
2-94   Tutorial 2

                        COLUMN   NO.     3   DESIGN PER ACI 318-02 - AXIAL + BENDING


                    FY - 415.0 FC - 25.0 MPA, CIRC SIZE 350.0 MMS DIAMETER         TIED
                            AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 1096.8 SQ. MM

                    BAR CONFIGURATION       REINF PCT.   LOAD   LOCATION   PHI
                    ----------------------------------------------------------

                     10 - 12 MM               1.176          4    STA      0.650
                    (EQUALLY SPACED)
                    TIE BAR NUMBER     8 SPACING 192.00 MM

                       COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z/Y -AXIS (KN-MET)
                    --------------------------------------------------------
                      P0        Pn max    P-bal.    M-bal.     e-bal. (MM)
                    2489.81   1991.85    939.46    109.84     116.9
                       M0       P-tens.   Des.Pn    Des.Mn     e/h
                      62.23   -469.35    153.06     73.18    0.09660
                    --------------------------------------------------------

                    ====================================================================

                        COLUMN   NO.     4   DESIGN PER ACI 318-02 - AXIAL + BENDING

                    FY - 415.0 FC - 25.0 MPA, RECT SIZE - 275.0 X 300.0 MMS, TIED
                            AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 1056.0 SQ. MM

                    BAR CONFIGURATION       REINF PCT.   LOAD   LOCATION   PHI
                    ----------------------------------------------------------

                      4 - 20 MM               1.523        5      STA      0.650
                    (PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS ON EACH FACE)
                    TIE BAR NUMBER    8 SPACING 192.00 MM

                       COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z -AXIS (KN-MET)

                    --------------------------------------------------------
                      P0        Pn max    P-bal.    M-bal.     e-bal. (MM)
                    2247.93   1798.34    764.68    123.35     161.3
                       M0       P-tens.   Des.Pn    Des.Mn     e/h
                      63.35   -521.51     43.92     10.50    0.06829
                    --------------------------------------------------------

                       COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Y -AXIS (KN-MET)

                    --------------------------------------------------------
                      P0        Pn max    P-bal.    M-bal.     e-bal. (MM)
                    2247.93   1798.34    755.33    111.44     147.5
                       M0       P-tens.   Des.Pn    Des.Mn     e/h
                      57.35   -521.51     43.92     47.50    0.30898
                    --------------------------------------------------------


                    ********************END OF COLUMN DESIGN RESULTS********************


                    56. END CONCRETE DESIGN
Tutorial 2   2-95

57. FINISH


        *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN ***********

             **** DATE=       TIME=     ****


    ************************************************************
    *         For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact       *
    *   Research Engineers Offices at the following locations *
    *                                                          *
    *               Telephone                Email             *
    * USA:       +1 (714)974-2500       support@reiusa.com     *
    * CANADA     +1 (905)632-4771       detech@odandetech.com *
    * CANADA     +1 (604)629 6087       staad@dowco.com        *
    * UK         +44(1454)207-000       support@reel.co.uk     *
    * FRANCE     +33(0)1 64551084       support@reel.co.uk     *
    * GERMANY    +49/931/40468-71       info@reig.de           *
    * NORWAY     +47 67 57 21 30        staad@edr.no           *
    * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16        support@reiasia.net    *
    * INDIA      +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com *
    * JAPAN      +81(03)5952-6500       eng-eye@crc.co.jp      *
    * CHINA      +86(411)363-1983       support@reiasia.net    *
    *                                                          *
    * North America                    support@reiusa.com      *
    * Europe                           support@reel.co.uk      *
    * Asia                             support@reiasia.net     *
    ************************************************************
2-96   Tutorial 2


       2.11 Post-Processing

                    STAAD.Pro offers extensive result verification and visualization
                    facilities. These facilities are accessed from the Post Processing
                    Mode. The Post Processing mode is used to verify the analysis and
                    design results and generate reports.

                    For this tutorial problem, we shall perform the following tasks:

                    •   Display deflection diagrams
                    •   Annotate Displacements
                    •   Change the Display units for displacement values shown in the
                        tables.
                    •   Switching between load cases for viewing deflection diagrams.
                    •   Display the force and moment diagrams.
                    •   Changing the degree of freedom for which the force/moment
                        diagram is plotted
                    •   Annotating the force diagram
                    •   Changing the Display units for the force and moment values
                        shown in the tables.
                    •   Restricting the load cases for which results are viewed
                    •   Using Member Query
                    •   Viewing Concrete Design results using Query.
                    •   Producing an on-screen report
                    •   Taking pictures
                    •   Creating Customized Reports
Tutorial 2   2-97

2.11.1 Going to the post-processing mode

      Steps:

 1.   At the end of section 2.9, we saw how one could go directly from
      the Analysis window to the post-processing screen. However, the
      formal method of accessing the Post Processing mode is either by
      clicking on the Post-Processing icon from the top toolbar or from
      the Mode menu as shown in the figures below.




                                 Figure 2. 90




                                 Figure 2. 91
2-98   Tutorial 2

                    2.   The Results Setup dialog box appears as shown below. Select the
                         load cases for which to display the results. For our case, let us
                         select all the load cases. Then click on the OK button.




                                                    Figure 2. 92
Tutorial 2   2-99

2.11.2 Viewing the deflection diagram

    The screen will now look like the figure shown below.




                            Figure 2. 93

    The diagram currently on display is the node deflection diagram
    for load case 1 (DEAD LOAD). The title at the bottom of the
    diagram is indicative of that aspect. If you, say, wandered off into
    any other result diagram, and wanted to get back to the deflection
    diagram, just select the Node | Displacement tab along the page
    control area on the left side.
2-100   Tutorial 2




                                                   Figure 2. 94

                     The option for selecting the deflection diagram is available from
                     another facility also - the Results | Deflection menu option - as
                     shown below.




                                                   Figure 2. 95
Tutorial 2   2-101

2.11.3 Switching between load cases for
       viewing the deflection diagram

      Steps:

 1.   To change the load case for which to view the deflection diagram,
      you may click in the list box called Active Load and choose the
      one you want.




                               Figure 2. 96

 2.   Alternatively, either click on the Symbols and Labels icon or, go to
      View | Structure Diagrams menu option as shown below.




                                  Figure 2. 97
2-102   Tutorial 2

                     3.   In either case, the Diagrams dialog box comes up. Select the
                          Loads and Results tab and choose the desired load case from the
                          Load Case list box. Then, click on OK.




                                                     Figure 2. 98
Tutorial 2   2-103
     The diagram below shows the deflected shape of the structure for
     load case 3.




                                Figure 2. 99

4.   To display the deflection for say, load case 5 (DEAD + WIND),
     follow step 1 or 2 and select load case 5.
2-104   Tutorial 2

                     The deflection of Load Case 5 will now displayed on the model as
                     shown below.




                                               Figure 2. 100
Tutorial 2   2-105

2.11.4 Changing the size of the deflection
       diagram

    Steps:

    If the diagram appears too imperceptible, it may be because it may
    be drawn to too small a scale. To change the scale of the deflection
    plot, you may

        a) click on the Scale icon




                               Figure 2. 101

        b) choose Scale from the Results menu




                               Figure 2. 102
        or
2-106   Tutorial 2

                        c) go to View | Structure Diagrams | Scales menu option.

                        All of the above will bring up the following dialog box.




                                                Figure 2. 103

                     In the Displacement field, specify a smaller number than what is
                     currently listed, and click on OK. The deflection diagram should
                     now be larger.
Tutorial 2   2-107
In the above dialog box, if you switch on the check box Apply
Immediately, pressing the up or down arrow keys alongside the
number will produce immediate results in terms of a smaller or a
larger diagram depending on whether you click the up or the down
arrow keys.




                          Figure 2. 104
2-108   Tutorial 2

                     2.11.5 Annotating displacements

                           Annotation is the process of displaying the displacement values on
                           the screen.

                           Steps:


                      1.   Select the View Value option from the Results menu.




                                                      Figure 2. 105


                      2.   The following dialog box comes up. From the Ranges tab, select
                           All nodes. If you wish to annotate deflection for just a few nodes,
                           specify the node numbers in the node list.
Tutorial 2   2-109




                         Figure 2. 106

We will annotate the results for all nodes. So, keep the button on
All.

From the Node tab, check the Resultant option. Resultant stands
for the square root of sum of squares of values of X,Y and Z
displacements. Click the Annotate button and notice that the
values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the
dialog box.




                           Figure 2. 107
2-110   Tutorial 2

                     The following figure shows the annotated deflection diagram for
                     load case 2.




                                               Figure 2. 108
Tutorial 2   2-111

2.11.6 Changing the units in which
       displacement values are annotated

      The units in which displacement values are displayed in the post-
      processing mode are referred to as the display units.

      Steps:

 1.   Display units may be modified by using any one of the following
      methods:

      a. by clicking on the Change Graphical Display Unit icon,




                                 Figure 2. 109

      b. by going to Tools | Set Current Display Unit menu option




                                 Figure 2. 110
      or,
2-112   Tutorial 2

                          c. by selecting the View | Options menu option.




                                                     Figure 2. 111

                     2.   In the Options dialog box that comes up, select the Structure
                          Units tab. Change the Dimensions of Displacement from
                          Millimeter to say, cm or inches or anything else you desire, and
                          click on OK.




                                                     Figure 2. 112
Tutorial 2   2-113
The diagram will be updated to reflect the new units.




                           Figure 2. 113
2-114   Tutorial 2

                     2.11.7 The Node Displacement Table

                         Upon entering the Post-Processing mode, the first screen that we
                         came across is shown below.




                                                Figure 2. 114

                         For the Node | Displacement page on the left side, notice that there
                         are 2 tables displayed along the right side. The upper table, called
                         the Node Displacements table, lists the displacement values for
                         every node for every selected load case. Load cases may be
                         selected or de-selected for the purpose of this table from the
                         Results | Select Load Case menu. (See section 2.11.16 for details)
                         The lower table is called the Beam relative displacement table.
Tutorial 2   2-115
If you happen to close down any of these tables, you can restore
them from the View | Tables menu.




                           Figure 2. 115

The Node Displacement table window has two tabs: All and
Summary (see figure below).




                           Figure 2. 116
2-116   Tutorial 2

                     All - This tab presents all nodal displacements in tabular form for
                     all load cases and all degrees of freedom.




                                                 Figure 2. 117

                     Summary - This tab, shown in the figure below, presents the
                     maximum and minimum nodal displacements (translational and
                     rotational) for each degree of freedom. All nodes and all Load
                     Cases specified during the Results Setup are considered. Maximum
                     values for all degrees of freedom are presented with the
                     corresponding Node of occurrence and Load Case number (L/C).




                                                 Figure 2. 118
Tutorial 2   2-117
For the Beam Relative Displacement table, the details are as
follows :

All
The All tab presents the displacements of members at intermediate
section points. All specified members and all specified load cases
are included. The table shows displacements along the local axes of
the members, as well as their resultants.

Max Displacements
The Max Displacements tab presents the summary of maximum
sectional displacements (see figure below). This table includes the
maximum displacement values and location of its occurrence along
the member, for all specified members and all specified load cases.
The table also provides the ratio of the span length of the member
to the resultant maximum section displacement of the member.




                           Figure 2. 119
2-118   Tutorial 2

                     The sub-pages under the Node page are described below in brief.

                     Page       Sub-Page          Purpose

                     Node       Displacement      Displays nodal displacements along with
                                                  tabular results for Node-Displacements
                                                  and sectional Beam displacements.

                                Reactions         Displays support reactions on the
                                                  drawing as well as in a tabular form.

                                Modes             Displays mode shapes for the selected
                                                  Mode shape number. The eigenvectors
                                                  are simultaneously displayed in tabular
                                                  form. This Page appears only for
                                                  dynamic analyses cases, namely,
                                                  response spectrum, time history, and if
                                                  modal calculations are requested.

                                Time History      Displays Time history plots, for time
                                                  history analysis. This sub-page too will
                                                  appear only if time history analysis is
                                                  performed.
Tutorial 2   2-119

2.11.8 Displaying force/moment diagrams

      Steps:

 1.   The simplest method to access the facilities for displaying
      force/moment diagrams is from the Beam | Forces page along the
      page control area on the left side of the screen. The bending
      moment MZ will be plotted by default, evidence of which can be
      found in the form of the Mz icon show in the diagram below which
      becomes active.




                             Figure 2. 120
2-120   Tutorial 2




                     Figure 2. 121
Tutorial 2   2-121
2.   The option for selecting the force/moment diagram is available
     from another facility also - the Results | Bending Moment menu
     option - as shown below.




                                Figure 2. 122
2-122   Tutorial 2

                     2.11.9 Switching between load cases for
                            viewing the force/moment diagram

                           Steps:

                      1. To change the load case for which to view the force/moment
                         diagram, you may click in the list box called Active Load and
                         choose the one you want.




                                                    Figure 2. 123

                      2. Alternatively, either click on the Symbols and Labels icon or, go to
                         View | Structure Diagrams menu option as shown below.




                                                       Figure 2. 124
Tutorial 2   2-123
3. In either case, the Diagrams dialog box comes up. Select the Loads
   and Results tab and choose the second load case (LIVE LOAD)
   from the Load Case list box. Also, let us check the Shear yy check
   box. Then, click on OK.




                               Figure 2. 125
2-124   Tutorial 2

                     4. The figure below shows the shear force diagram for load case 2.




                                                     Figure 2. 126

                     5. To display the bending moment diagram for say, load case 4 (DEAD
                        + LIVE), follow steps 1 to 3 above and select load case 4.
Tutorial 2   2-125
The following diagram should appear in the drawing area:




                          Figure 2. 127
2-126   Tutorial 2

                     2.11.10 Changing the size of the force/
                             moment diagram

                         Steps:

                         If the diagram appears too imperceptible, it may be because it may
                         be drawn to too small a scale. To change the scale of the moment
                         plot, you may

                            a) click on the Scale icon




                                                    Figure 2. 128

                            b) choose Scale from the Results menu




                                                    Figure 2. 129

                            or
Tutorial 2   2-127
   c) go to View | Structure Diagrams | Scales menu option. All
      of the above will bring up the following dialog box.




                           Figure 2. 130

In the Bending field, specify a smaller number than what is
currently listed, and click on OK. The moment diagram should now
be larger.

In the above dialog box, if you switch on the check box Apply
Immediately, pressing the up or down arrow keys alongside the
number will produce immediate results in terms of a smaller or a
2-128   Tutorial 2

                     larger diagram depending on whether you click the up or the down
                     arrow keys.




                                               Figure 2. 131
Tutorial 2   2-129

2.11.11 Changing the degree of freedom for
        which forces diagram is plotted

    Force and moment diagrams can be plotted for 6 degrees of
    freedom – Axial, Shear-Y, Shear-Z, Torsion, Moment-Y, Moment-
    Z. One may select or de-select one of more of these degrees of
    freedom from View | Structure Diagrams | Loads and Results.




                               Figure 2. 132

    All degrees of freedom currently plotted will be indicated with a
    tick mark.
2-130   Tutorial 2

                     The icons of the Results toolbar may also be used to turn on/off
                     specific degrees of freedom.




                                                 Figure 2. 133

                     For the sake of easy identification, each degree of freedom (d.o.f)
                     has been assigned a different color. One may change the color for
                     that d.o.f. by clicking on the color button alongside the d.o.f, and
                     make a new choice from the color palette.




                                                 Figure 2. 134

                     The appearance of the diagram may also be set to one of the 3 –
                     Hatch, Fill or Outline by turning on the relevant option in the
                     dialog box shown earlier.




                                                 Figure 2. 135
Tutorial 2   2-131

2.11.12 Annotating the force/moment diagram

      Steps :


 1.   Annotation is the process of displaying the force/moment values on
      the screen. Select the View Value option from the Results menu.




                                Figure 2. 136


 2.   The following dialog box comes up. From the Ranges tab, select
      All members. If you wish to annotate the force/moment for just a
      few members, specify the beam numbers in the beam list.




                              Figure 2. 137

      We will annotate the results for all members. So, keep the button
      on All.
2-132   Tutorial 2

                     From the Beam Results tab, check the Bending - Maximum option.
                     Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the
                     structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box.




                                               Figure 2. 138
Tutorial 2   2-133
The following figure shows the annotated MZ diagram for load
case 5.




                          Figure 2. 139
2-134   Tutorial 2

                     2.11.13 Changing the units in which
                             force/moment values are annotated

                           Steps:

                      1.   The units in which force and moment values are displayed in the
                           post-processing mode are referred to as the display units.

                           Display units may be modified by using any one of the following
                           methods:

                           a. by clicking on the Change Graphical Display Unit icon




                                                     Figure 2. 140

                           b. by going to Tools | Set Current Display Unit menu option




                                                     Figure 2. 141
                           or,
Tutorial 2   2-135
     c. by selecting the View | Options menu option.




                                 Figure 2. 142

2.   In the Options dialog box that comes up, select the Force Units
     tab. For bending moments, change the Moment unit from its
     current setting to one of the choices available, say, Mton-m or kip-
     ft or anything else you desire, and select OK.




                                 Figure 2. 143
2-136   Tutorial 2

                     The diagram will be updated to reflect the new units.




                                                Figure 2. 144
Tutorial 2   2-137

2.11.14 Beam Forces Table

    When we select the Beam | Forces page from the page control area
    on the left side, the screen that appears is shown below.




                            Figure 2. 145

    The axial forces and shear forces, bending and torsional moments
    in all selected beams for all selected load cases are displayed in a
    tabular form along the right half of the screen. Load cases may be
    selected or de-selected for the purpose of this table from the
    Results | Select Load Case menu. (See section 2.11.16 for details)
2-138   Tutorial 2

                     If you happen to close down any of these tables, you can restore
                     them from the View | Tables menu.




                                                Figure 2. 146

                     The Beam End Forces table window has three tabs: All, Summary
                     and Envelope.




                                                Figure 2. 147
Tutorial 2   2-139
All - This tab presents all forces and moments corresponding to all
6 degrees of freedom at the start and end of each selected member
for all selected load cases.




                           Figure 2. 148

Summary - This tab, shown in the next figure, presents the
maximum and minimum values (forces and moments) for each
degree of freedom. All beams and all Load Cases specified during
the Results Setup are considered. Maximum values for all degrees
of freedom are presented with the corresponding Node of
occurrence and Load Case number (L/C).
2-140   Tutorial 2




                                               Figure 2. 149

                     Envelope : This tab shows a table consisting of the maximum and
                     minimum for each degree of freedom for each member, and the
                     load case responsible for each of those values.




                                               Figure 2. 150
Tutorial 2   2-141

2.11.15 Viewing the force/moment diagrams
        from the Beam | Graphs page

    The Graphs page in the Post Processing Mode allows us to
    graphically view moments and forces such as Axial, Bending zz,
    Shear yy and Combined Stresses for individual members. Select the
    Graphs sub-page nested under the Beam page from the left side of
    the screen as shown below.




                              Figure 2. 151
2-142   Tutorial 2

                     The Main Window area of the screen shows the loading on the
                     structure. On the right side of the screen, the force/moment
                     diagrams appear (see figure below). When we highlight a member
                     in the main window by clicking on it, the graphs are plotted for
                     that member in the data area.

                     The following figure shows the graphs plotted for member 1 for
                     load case 4.




                                               Figure 2. 152
Tutorial 2   2-143
The following figure shows the graphs plotted for member 2 for
the same load case.




                           Figure 2. 153

We can change the degree of freedom for which results are plotted
by doing the following. Go into one of the 3 drawing windows on
the right side, and click the right mouse button. The following
dialog box will appear.
2-144   Tutorial 2




                                                Figure 2. 154

                     Select Diagrams. In the dialog box which appears, switch
                     on/switch off the degrees of freedom you desire.




                                                Figure 2. 155

                     Click on OK and that degree of freedom will be plotted in that
                     window.
Tutorial 2   2-145

2.11.16 Restricting the load cases for which
        results are viewed

      Steps:

 1.   To restrict the load cases for which results are viewed, either click

      on the Results Setup icon       or, go to Results | Select Load Case
      menu option as shown below.




                                  Figure 2. 156
2-146   Tutorial 2

                     2.   In the Results Setup dialog box that comes up, let us first un-select
                          the already selected load cases by clicking on the      button.




                                                      Figure 2. 157

                     3.   Select load cases 1 (DEAD LOAD) and 3 (WIND LOAD) by
                          holding the ‘Ctrl’ key down. Then, click on the     button. After
                          the load cases have been selected, click on the OK button.




                                                      Figure 2. 158
Tutorial 2   2-147

2.11.17 Using Member Query

    Member query is a facility where several results for specific
    members can be viewed at the same time from a single dialog box.
    It is also a place from where many of the member attributes such as
    the property definition, specifications (releases, truss, cable, etc.)
    and beta angle can be changed for input purposes.

    Steps:

    To access this facility, first select the member. Then, either go to
    Tools | Query | Member menu option or, double-click on the
    member. Let us try double-clicking on member 4.




                                Figure 2. 159
2-148   Tutorial 2

                     As we double-click on member 4, the following dialog box comes
                     up. Let us take a look at the Property tab.




                                                 Figure 2. 160

                     The figure above shows where the buttons are located on the
                     member query box. If the member contains output result tabs
                     (Shear/Bending, Deflection, Steel Design, etc.) in the query box,
                     changing member attributes like releases will cause these result
                     tabs to disappear. This is due to the fact that the current output no
                     longer reflects the new input.

                     NOTE: If you assign or change property by clicking on the
                     Assign/Change Property button in the above dialog box, ensure
                     that you keep the check mark on “Apply to this Member only” in
                     the ensuing dialog box. Else, changing the member attributes for
                     one member will subsequently change the attributes of all other
                     members belonging to the same attribute list. For example, if the
                     current member's property is also assigned to other members,
                     changing the property on the current member will change the
                     property of all the members.
Tutorial 2   2-149
Let us click on the Shear/Bending tab. The following dialog box
appears.




                            Figure 2. 161

The above page contains facilities for viewing values for shears
and moments, selecting the load cases for which those results are
presented, a slider bar (see next figure) for looking at the values at
specific points along the member length, and a Print option for
printing the items on display. Experiment with these options to see
what sort of results you can get. Grab the slider bar using the
mouse and move it to obtain the values at specific locations.
2-150   Tutorial 2




                                               Figure 2. 162

                     Another page (Deflection) of the above dialog box is shown below.




                                               Figure 2. 163
Tutorial 2   2-151
The Concrete Design page of the above dialog box is shown
below.




                            Figure 2. 164

To look at the results of another member using this query facility,
simply close down this query dialog box and repeat the steps
outlined earlier in this section for the desired member.
2-152   Tutorial 2

                     2.11.18 Producing an on-screen report

                           Steps:

                           Occasionally, we will come across a need to obtain results
                           conforming to certain restrictions, such as, say, the resultant node
                           displacements for a few selected nodes, for a few selected load
                           cases, sorted in the order from low to high, with the values
                           reported in a tabular form. The facility which enables us to obtain
                           such customized on-screen results is the Report menu on top of the
                           screen.

                      1.   Let us create one such report. We will create a table that shows the
                           member major axis moment (MZ) values sorted in the order High
                           to Low, for members 1 and 4 for all the load cases. The first step to
                           do this is to select members 1 and 4 from the structure. With the
                           beams cursor active, select members 1 and 4 using the mouse, or
                           use the Select | By List | Beams option of the Select menu and type
                           1 and 4 as the member numbers. Next, go to the Report | Beam
                           End Forces menu option as shown below.




                                                       Figure 2. 165
Tutorial 2   2-153
2.   In the dialog box that appears, select the Sorting tab. Let us select
     Moment-Z as the End Force, set the Sorting Order to List from
     High to Low, and switch on Absolute values under If Sorting
     done. (If we wish to save this report for future use, we may select
     the Report tab, provide a title for the report, and turn on the Save
     ID option.) Under the Loading tab, make sure all the 5 load cases
     have been selected. Then, click on the OK button.




                                 Figure 2. 166

     The next figure shows the member end forces sorted table with the
     MZ values sorted from High to Low based on Absolute numbers.




                                 Figure 2. 167
2-154   Tutorial 2

                     3.   To print this table, click the right mouse button anywhere within
                          the table. A list of options will appear.




                                                      Figure 2. 168

                          Select the print option to get a hardcopy of the report.
Tutorial 2   2-155

2.11.19 Taking Pictures

      There are several options available for taking pictures. The
      simplest of these is in the edit menu and is called Copy Picture. It
      transfers the contents of the active drawing window to the windows
      clipboard. We can then go into any picture processing program like
      Microsoft Paint or Microsoft Word and paste the picture in that
      program for further processing.

      Another more versatile option enables us to include any "snapshot"
      or picture of the drawing window into a report. It is called Take
      Picture and is under the Edit menu. Let us examine this feature.

      Steps:

 1.   To take a picture, either click on the Take Picture icon or, go to
      Tools | Take Picture menu option.




                                  Figure 2. 169
2-156   Tutorial 2

                     2.   The following dialog box comes up. Here, we may provide a
                          caption for the picture so that it may be identified later on.




                                                      Figure 2. 170

                          This picture will be saved till we are ready to produce a customized
                          report of results. Proceed to the next section for details.
Tutorial 2   2-157

2.11.20 Creating Customized Reports

      STAAD.Pro offers extensive report generation facilities. Items
      which can be incorporated into such reports include input
      information, numerical results, steel design results, etc. One can
      choose from among a select set of load cases, mode shapes,
      structural elements, etc.. We may include any "snapshot" or picture
      of the screen taken using the Take Picture toolbar icon. Other
      customizable parameters include the font size, title block, headers,
      footers, etc.


 1.   The Report Setup utility may be accessed either by selecting the

      Reports Page or by clicking on the Report Setup       icon.




                                 Figure 2. 171
2-158   Tutorial 2

                     In either case, the following dialog box appears:




                                                 Figure 2. 172

                     Different tabs of this dialog box offer different options. The Items
                     tab lists all available data which may be included in the report.
                     Note that the items under the Selected list are the ones which have
                     been selected by default.

                     Available items are classified into seven categories: Input, Output,
                     Pictures, Reports, STAAD.etc output, Steel Design Output and
                     Advanced Query Reports.
Tutorial 2   2-159




                                Figure 2. 173

2.   In our report, we want to show Job Information, Node
     Displacement Summary, Beam Max Moments, and Picture 1.

     Job Information is already selected by default.

     From the Available list box, select Output. From the available
     output items, select Node Displacement Summary and Beam Max
     Moments.

     Then select Pictures from the Available list box and select Picture
     1.

     When all the items have been selected, the Report Setup dialog box
     should appear as shown below.
2-160   Tutorial 2




                                                      Figure 2. 174

                          The Report Detail Increments check box at the bottom indicates the
                          number of segments into which a member would be divided for
                          printing sectional displacements, forces, etc.

                     3.   Click on the Load Cases tab to select the Load Cases to be
                          included in the report. The Grouping buttons indicate whether the
                          report data will be grouped by Node/Beam numbers or by Load
                          Case number. In the first case, all Load Case results will appear
                          under a particular Node or Beam. In the second case, results for all
                          Nodes or Beams for a particular Load Case will appear together.
Tutorial 2   2-161




                                 Figure 2. 175


4.   Click on the Picture Album tab to visually identify the pictures
     taken earlier. The following figure displays Picture 1 as stored by
     the program.




                                 Figure 2. 176
2-162   Tutorial 2

                          The Options tab lets you include Header, Footer, Page Numbers,
                          Table Grids, fonts for Column Heading and Table data, etc.

                          The Name and Logo tab allows you to enter the Company Name
                          and Logo. Click on the blank area and type the name and address
                          of the company. Click on the Font button in the Text group and
                          adjust the font to be Arial 16 Pt Bold. Click on the Right radio
                          button in the Alignment group under Text to right-align the
                          company name.




                                                      Figure 2. 177


                     5.   Click OK to finish or click Print to print the report. However, it is
                          always a good idea to first preview the report before printing it.
Tutorial 2   2-163
To preview the report just created, select the Print Preview icon
from the Toolbar.




                           Figure 2. 178

The first and the last pages of the report are shown in the next two
figures.
2-164   Tutorial 2




                     Figure 2. 179
Tutorial 2   2-165




                        Figure 2. 180

This brings us to the end of this tutorial. Though we have covered
a large number of topics, there are several more in various menus
and dialog boxes. Happy exploring !!!!!
2-166   Tutorial 2
3-1




Tutorial Problem 3: Analysis of a slab

                                                            Section          3
        This tutorial provides step-by-step instructions for modelling and
        analysis of a slab supported along two edges. The following topics
        are covered:

        •   Starting the program
        •   Modelling the slab using quadrilateral plate elements
        •   Specifying slab properties and material constants
        •   Specifying supports
        •   Specifying loads
        •   Specifying the analysis type
        •   Viewing results for individual plates
3-2   Tutorial 3



      3.1 Methods of creating the model

                   As explained in Section 1.1 of tutorial problem 1, there are two
                   methods of creating the structure data:

                       a) using the graphical model generation mode, or graphical
                          user interface (GUI) as it is usually referred to.
                       b) using the command file.

                   Both methods of creating the model are explained in this tutorial.
                   The graphical method is explained from Section 3.2 onwards. The
                   command file method is explained in Section 3.8.
Tutorial 3   3-3

3.2 Description of the tutorial problem

          The structure for this project is a slab fixed along two edges. We
          will model it using 6 quadrilateral (4-noded) plate elements. The
          structure and the mathematical model are shown in the figures
          below. It is subjected to selfweight, pressure loads and temperature
          loads. Our goal is to create the model, assign all required input,
          perform the analysis, and go through the results.




                                      Figure 3. 1
3-4   Tutorial 3




                   Figure 3. 2
Tutorial 3   3-5
BASIC DATA FOR THE STRUCTURE

ATTRIBUTE            DATA
Element properties   Slab is 300mm thick

Material Constants   E, Density, Poisson, Alpha – Default values for
                     concrete

Supports             Nodes along 2 edges are fixed as shown in Figure
                     3.2

Primary Loads        Load 1: Selfweight

                     Load 2: Pressure Load of 300Kg/sq.m. acting
                             vertically downwards

                     Load 3: 75 degree F uniform expansion, plus top
                             surface is 60 degrees hotter than the
                             bottom

Combination Loads    Case 101: Case 1 + Case 2

                     Case 102: Case 1 + Case 3

Analysis Type        Linear Elastic
3-6   Tutorial 3

      3.3 Starting the program

                   Select the STAAD.Pro icon from the STAAD.Pro 2006 program
                   group.




                                            Figure 3. 3
Tutorial 3   3-7
The STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment will be invoked and the
following screen comes up.




                             Figure 3. 4

This New dialog box will come up every time we start the program.
If you wish to turn this feature off, simply uncheck the Display this
dialog box at the Startup box at the lower left hand corner. It can
be turned on again at a later time when File | New is invoked from
the main menu.
3-8   Tutorial 3

                   Note about the unit system :

                   There are two base unit systems in the program which control the
                   units (length, force, temperature, etc.) in which, values,
                   specifically results and other information presented in the tables
                   and reports, are displayed in. The base unit system also dictates
                   what type of default values the program will use when attributes
                   such as Modulus of Elasticity, Density, etc., are assigned based on
                   material types – Steel, Concrete, Aluminum – selected from the
                   program’s library (Please refer to Section 5 of the STAAD.Pro
                   Technical Reference Manual for details). These two unit systems
                   are English (Foot, Pound, etc.) and Metric (KN, Meter, etc.)

                   If you recall, one of the choices made at the time of installing
                   STAAD.Pro is this base unit system setting. That choice will serve
                   as the default until we specifically change it.

                   The place from where we can change this setting is under the File |
                   Configure menu. To get to that option, first close down the dialog
                   box shown in the earlier figure by clicking on Cancel. Then, click
                   on the File | Configure menu option and choose the appropriate
                   unit system you want. For this tutorial, let us choose the Metric
                   units (KN, Meter, etc.).




                                               Figure 3. 5
Tutorial 3   3-9




                            Figure 3. 6


Click on the Accept button to close the above dialog box.
3-10   Tutorial 3

                    Following this, select File | New once again.




                                                Figure 3. 7


                    The dialog box shown in Figure 3.4 will re-appear.
Tutorial 3   3-11

3.4 Creating a new structure

      1.   In the New dialog box, we provide some crucial initial data
           necessary for building the model.

           The structure type is to be defined by choosing from among Space,
           Plane, Floor and Truss. A Space type is one where the structure,
           the loading or both, cause the structure to deform in all 3 global
           axes (X, Y and Z). In a Plane type, the geometry, loading and
           deformation are restricted to the global X-Y plane only. A Floor
           type is a structure whose geometry is confined to the X-Z plane. A
           Truss type of structure carries loading by pure axial action. Truss
           members are deemed incapable of carrying shear, bending and
           torsion. For our model, let us choose Space.

           Let us choose Meter as the length unit and Kilo Newton as the
           force unit in which we will start to build the model. The units can
           be changed later if necessary, at any stage of the model creation.

           We also need to provide a name in the File Name edit box. This is
           the name under which the structure data will be saved on the
           computer hard disk. The name “Structure?” (? will be a number) is
           recommended by the program by default, but we can change it to
           any name we want. Let us choose the name Plates Tutorial.

           A default path name - the location on the computer drive where the
           file will be saved - is provided by the program under Location. If
           you wish to save the file in a different location, type in the name,
           or click the    button and specify the desired path.

           After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.
3-12   Tutorial 3




                                                      Figure 3. 8
                    2.   In the next dialog box, we choose the tools to be used to initially
                         construct the model. Add Beams, Add Plates or Add Solids are,
                         respectively, the starting points for constructing beams, plates or
                         solids. Open Structure Wizard provides access to a library of
                         structural templates which the program comes equipped with.
                         Those template models can be extracted and modified
                         parametrically to arrive at our model geometry or some of its parts.
                         If the model is to be created initially using the STAAD command
                         language, the Open Editor box can take us to the STAAD editor.
                         Please remember that all these options are also available from the
                         menus and dialog boxes of the GUI, even after we dismiss this
                         dialog box.

                         Note: If you wish to use the Editor to create the model, choose
                         Open STAAD Editor, click Finish, and proceed to Section 3.8.
Tutorial 3   3-13
For our model, let us check the Add Plate option. Click on the
Finish button. The dialog box will be dismissed and the
STAAD.Pro graphical environment will be displayed.




                            Figure 3. 9
3-14   Tutorial 3

       3.5 Elements of the STAAD.Pro screen

                    The STAAD.Pro main window is the primary screen from where
                    the model generation process takes place. It is important to
                    familiarize ourselves with the components of that window before
                    we embark on creating the RC Frame. Section 1.5 in tutorial
                    problem 1 of this manual explains the components of that window
                    in detail.
Tutorial 3   3-15

3.6 Building the STAAD.Pro model

         We are now ready to start building the model geometry. The steps
         and, wherever possible, the corresponding STAAD.Pro commands
         (the instructions which get written in the STAAD input file) are
         described in the following sections.
3-16   Tutorial 3

                    3.6.1 Generating the model geometry

                        The structure geometry consists of joint numbers, their
                        coordinates, member numbers, the member connectivity
                        information, plate element numbers, etc. From the standpoint of the
                        STAAD command file, the commands to be generated are :

                                JOINT COORDINATES
                                1000;2200;3202;4002
                                5400;6402;7600;8602
                                9 2 0 4 ; 10 0 0 4 ; 11 4 0 4 ; 12 6 0 4
                                ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL
                                11234;22563;35786
                                4 4 3 9 10 ; 5 3 6 11 9 ; 6 6 8 12 11

                        In this tutorial, we will explore 4 different methods to create the
                        model shown in section 3.2:

                            1. Using a mixture of drawing an element and the Copy/Paste
                               facility.
                            2. Using a mixture of drawing an element and the
                               Translational Repeat facility.
                            3. Using the Structure Wizard facility in the Geometry menu.
                            4. Using the Mesh Generation facility of the main graphical
                               screen.
Tutorial 3   3-17



                  Creating the Plates - Method 1

     Steps:

     The Grid Settings

1.   We selected the Add Plate option earlier to enable us to add plates
     to create the structure. This initiates a grid in the main drawing
     area as shown below. The directions of the global axes (X, Y, Z)
     are represented in the icon in the lower left hand corner of the
     drawing area. (Note that we could initiate this grid by selecting the
     Geometry | Snap/Grid Node | Plate menu option also.)




                             Figure 3. 10
3-18   Tutorial 3

                         It is worth paying attention to the fact that when we chose the Add
                         Plate option in section 3.4, the page control area has been
                         automatically set up to have the Geometry – Plate page be in focus.




                                                      Figure 3. 11
                    2.   A Snap Node/Plate dialog box also appears in the data area on the
                         right side of the screen. The Linear tab is meant for placing the
                         construction lines perpendicular to one another along a "left to
                         right - top to bottom" pattern, as in the lines of a chess board. The
                         Radial tab enables construction lines to appear in a spider-web
                         style, which makes it is easy to create circular type models where
                         members are modelled as piece-wise linear straight line segments.
                         The Irregular tab can be used to create gridlines with unequal
                         spacing that lie on the global planes or on an inclined plane. We
                         will use the Linear tab.

                         In our structure, the elements lie in the X-Z plane. So, in this
                         dialog box, let us choose X-Z as the Plane of the grid. The size of
                         the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the
                         number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of
                         axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. By
                         setting 6 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X, 4
                         along Z, and a spacing of 1 meter between lines along both X and
Tutorial 3   3-19
Z (see next figure) we can draw a frame 6m X 4m, adequate for
our model. Please note that these settings are only a starting grid
setting, to enable us to start drawing the structure, and they do not
restrict our overall model to those limits. In fact, we do not even
need this 6m X 4m grid. The method we are using here requires
just a 2m X 2m grid since we are about to draw just a single
element.




                            Figure 3. 12
3-20   Tutorial 3

                         Creating element 1

                    3.   The four corners of the first element are at the coordinates (0, 0,
                         0), (2, 0, 0), (2, 0, 2), and (0, 0, 2) respectively. To start creating
                         the nodes, let us first activate the Snap Node/Plate button by
                         clicking on it. Then, with the help of the mouse, click at the origin
                         (0, 0, 0) to create the first node.




                                                      Figure 3. 13

                    4.   In a similar fashion, click on the remaining three points to create
                         nodes and automatically join successive nodes by a plate.

                                 (2, 0, 0), (2, 0, 2) and (0, 0, 2)

                         The exact location of the mouse arrow can be monitored on the
                         status bar located at the bottom of the window where the X, Y, and
                         Z coordinates of the current cursor position are continuously
                         updated.
Tutorial 3   3-21
When steps 1 to 4 are completed, the element will be displayed in
the drawing area as shown below.




                           Figure 3. 14
3-22   Tutorial 3

                    5.   At this point, let us remove the grid display from the structure. To
                         do that, click on the Close button in the Snap Node/Plate dialog
                         box.




                                                     Figure 3. 15
Tutorial 3   3-23
     The grid will now be removed and the structure in the main
     window should resemble the figure shown below.




                                Figure 3. 16

6.   It is very important that we save our work often, to avoid loss of
     data and protect our investment of time and effort against power
     interruptions, system problems, or other unforeseen events. To save
     the file, pull down the File menu and select the Save command.

7.   For easy identification, the entities drawn on the screen can be
     labeled. Let us display the plate numbers. (Please refer to the
     ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this manual to
     learn more about switching on node/beam/plate labels.)
3-24   Tutorial 3

                    The following figure illustrates the plate number displayed on the
                    structure. The structure in the main window should resemble the
                    figure shown below.




                                               Figure 3. 17


                    If you are feeling adventurous, here is a small exercise for you.
                    Change the font of the plate labels by going to the View menu and
                    selecting the Options command, and then selecting the appropriate
                    tab (Plate labels) from the Options dialog box.
Tutorial 3   3-25
     Creating element 2

8.   Examining the structure shown in section 3.2 of this tutorial, it can
     be seen that the remaining elements can be easily generated if we
     could copy the existing plate and then, paste the copied unit at
     specific distances. The program does indeed have a Copy-Paste
     facility and it is under the Edit menu.


     First, select plate 1 using the Plates Cursor       .

9.   Click the right mouse button and choose Copy from the pop-up
     menu (or click on the Edit menu and choose Copy). Once again,
     click the right mouse button and select Paste Plates (or choose
     Paste Plates from the Edit menu) as shown below.




                Figure 3. 18                         Figure 3. 19
3-26   Tutorial 3

                    10.   Since this facility allows us to create only one copy at a time, all
                          that we can create from element 1 is element 2. The four nodes of
                          element 2 are at distance of X = 2, Y = 0, and Z = 0 away from
                          element 1. So, in the dialog box that comes up, provide 2, 0, and 0
                          for X, Y and Z respectively and click on the OK button.




                                                      Figure 3. 20

                          The model will now look like the one shown below.




                                                      Figure 3. 21
Tutorial 3   3-27
      Creating element 3

11.   The nodes of element 3 are at X = 4m away from those of element
      1. So, let us create the third element by repeating steps 8 to 10
      except for providing 4m for X in the Paste with Move dialog box.

      Alternatively, we could use element 2 as the basis for creating
      element 3, in which case, the X increment will be 2m. If you make
      a mistake and end up pasting the element at a wrong location, you
      can undo the operation by selecting Undo from the Edit menu.

      After creating the third element, the model should look like the one
      shown below.




                                   Figure 3. 22

      Click anywhere in the screen to un-highlight the highlighted plate.

      Creating elements 4, 5 and 6

12.   The elements 4, 5 and 6 are identical to the first three elements
      except that their nodes are at a Z distance of 2m away from the
      corresponding nodes of elements 1 to 3. We can hence use the
      Copy-Paste technique and specify the Z increment as 2m.

      Select all three of the existing plates by rubber-banding around
      them using the mouse.
3-28   Tutorial 3

                    13.   Click the right mouse button and choose Copy from the pop-up
                          menu (or click on the Edit menu and choose Copy). Once again,
                          click the right mouse button and select Paste Plates (or choose
                          Paste Plates from the Edit menu).

                    14.   Provide 0, 0, and 2 for X, Y and Z respectively in the Paste with
                          Move dialog box that comes up. Then, click on the OK button and
                          observe that three new elements are created.

                          Since some elements are still highlighted, click anywhere in the
                          drawing area to un-highlight those elements.

                          The model, with all the six plates generated, will now look as
                          shown below.




                                                      Figure 3. 23
Tutorial 3   3-29
If you want to proceed with assigning the remainder of the data,
go to section 3.6.2.

If instead, you wish to explore the remaining methods of creating
this model, the current structure will have to be entirely deleted.
This can be done using the following procedure.

From the Select menu, choose By All | All Geometry option. The
entire structure will be highlighted. Hit the key on your
keyboard. A message box shown below will appear. Click on the
OK button.




                            Figure 3. 24

As we click on the OK button, the following message box appears.
Let us say Yes. The message box will be dismissed and the entire
structure will be deleted.




                            Figure 3. 25
3-30   Tutorial 3



                                      Creating the Plates - Method 2

                         Steps:

                         Creating element 1

                    1.   In this method, we will be using STAAD’s Translational Repeat
                         facility to create our model. To utilize this facility, we need at least
                         one existing entity to use as the basis for the translational repeat.
                         So, let us follow steps 1 to 7 from ‘Method 1’ to create the first
                         element. Once that is done, our model will look like the one shown
                         below.

                         Note: If you have trouble bringing the grid settings dialog box, go
                         to the Geometry menu and select Snap/Grid Node Plate.




                                                       Figure 3. 26
Tutorial 3   3-31
     Creating elements 2 and 3

2.   In Method 1, it required two separate executions of the Copy/Paste
     function to create elements 2 and 3. That is because, that facility
     does not contain a provision for specifying the number of copies
     one would like to create. Translational Repeat is a facility where
     such a provision is available.


     Select plate 1 using the Plates Cursor    . (Please refer to the
     ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this manual to
     learn more about selecting plates.)

3.   Click on the Translational Repeat icon or select the Geometry |
     Translational Repeat menu option as shown below.




          Figure 3. 27                            Figure 3. 28
3-32   Tutorial 3

                         The 3D Repeat dialog box comes up. By default (when the
                         Geometry Only option is not checked), all loads, properties, design
                         parameters, member releases, etc. on the selected entities will
                         automatically be copied along with the entities. By checking the
                         new option labeled Geometry Only, the translational repeating will
                         be performed using only the Geometry data. In our example, it does
                         not matter because no other attributes have been assigned yet.

                    4.   To create elements 2 and 3 along the X direction, specify the
                         Global Direction as X, No of Steps as 2 and the Default Step
                         Spacing (along X) as 2m. The Link Steps option is applicable when
                         the newly created units are physically removed from the existing
                         units, and when one wishes to connect them using members.
                         Renumber Bay enables us to use our own numbering scheme for
                         entities that will be created, instead of using a sequential
                         numbering that the program does if no instructions are provided.
                         Let us leave these boxes unchecked. Then, click on OK.




                                                     Figure 3. 29

                         Since element 1 is still highlighted, click anywhere in the drawing
                         area to un-highlight it.
Tutorial 3   3-33
     The model will now look as shown below.




                                 Figure 3. 30

     Creating elements 4, 5 and 6

5.   Let us follow the same Translational Repeat method to create these
     elements. Select all the three existing plates by rubber-banding
     around them using the mouse. Make sure that before you do this,
     the cursor type is the Plates Cursor       , else, no plates will be
     selected.

6.   Repeat steps 3 and 4 but this time, specify the Global Direction as
     Z, No of Steps as 1 and the Default Step Spacing as 2m. Leave all
     the other boxes unchecked. Then, click on OK.

     All the 6 elements are now created.

     Since some of the plates are still highlighted, click anywhere in the
     drawing area to un-highlight them.
3-34   Tutorial 3

                    Our model will now look like the one shown below.




                                                Figure 3. 31


                    If you want to proceed with assigning the remainder of the data, go
                    to section 3.6.2.

                    Instead, if you wish to explore the remaining methods of creating
                    this model, the current structure will have to be entirely deleted.
                    This can be done using the following procedure.

                    From the Select menu, choose By All | All Geometry option. The
                    entire structure will be highlighted. Hit the key on your
                    keyboard. A message box shown below will appear. Click on the
                    OK button.




                                                Figure 3. 32
Tutorial 3   3-35
As we click on the OK button, the following message box appears.
Let us say Yes. The message box will be dismissed and the entire
structure will be deleted.




                          Figure 3. 33
3-36   Tutorial 3



                                     Creating the Plates - Method 3

                         Steps:

                         There is a facility in STAAD called Structure Wizard which offers
                         a library of pre-defined structure prototypes, such as Pratt Truss,
                         Northlight Truss, Cylindrical Frame, etc. A surface entity such as
                         a slab or wall, which can be defined using 3-noded or 4-noded
                         plate elements is one such prototype. We can also create our own
                         library of structure prototypes. From this wizard, a structural
                         model may parametrically be generated, and can then be
                         incorporated into our main structure. Structure Wizard can hence
                         be thought of as a store from where one can fetch various
                         components and assemble a complete structure.

                    1.   Select the Geometry | Run Structure Wizard menu option from the
                         top menu bar.




                                                     Figure 3. 34
Tutorial 3   3-37
The Structure Wizard window opens up as shown below.




                       Figure 3. 35

(Note that the Open Structure Wizard option in the Where do you
want to go? dialog box in the beginning stage of creating a new
structure – see Figure 3.9 – also brings up this facility.)
3-38   Tutorial 3

                    2.   The unit of length should be specified prior to the generation of a
                         model. From the File menu of this Structure Wizard window, click
                         Select Units. In the Select Units dialog box that comes up, we can
                         select one of the units of length from Imperial (inch, feet) or
                         SI/Metric (millimeter, centimeter, meter) system of units. Let us
                         choose Meters and click on the OK button.




                         Figure 3. 36                           Figure 3. 37

                    3.   From the Model Type list box, select Surface/Plate Models as
                         shown below.




                                                     Figure 3. 38
Tutorial 3   3-39
4.   To select the Quad Plate option, click on it using the mouse.




                                 Figure 3. 39

5.   Then, using the mouse, either double-click on the Quad Plate
     option or, drag the Quad Plate option to the right side of the
     Structure Wizard window as shown below.




                                 Figure 3. 40
3-40   Tutorial 3

                    6.   A dialog box by the name Select Meshing Parameters comes up. In
                         this box, we specify, among other things, two main pieces of
                         information - a) the dimensions of the boundary (or superelement
                         as it is commonly known) from which the individual elements are
                         generated b) the number of individual elements that must be
                         generated. (a) is defined in terms of the X, Y, Z coordinates of its
                         Corners A, B, C and D. (b) is defined in terms of the number of
                         divisions along sides AB, BC, etc.

                         Let us provide the Corners, the Bias and the Divisions of the
                         model as shown in the figure below. Then, click on the Apply
                         button.




                                                     Figure 3. 41

                         If you made a mistake and wish to bring up the above dialog box
                         again, click the right mouse button in the drawing area and choose
                         Change Property.




                                                     Figure 3. 42
Tutorial 3   3-41
7.   To transfer the model to the main window, select File | Merge
     Model with STAAD.Pro Model as shown below.




                                  Figure 3. 43

8.   When the following message box comes up, let us confirm our
     transfer by clicking on the Yes button.




                                  Figure 3. 44

     The dialog box shown in the next figure comes up. If we had an
     existing structure in the main window, in this dialog box, we will
     be able to provide the co-ordinates of a node of the structure in the
     main window to which we want to connect the piece being brought
     from the wizard.

     If there isn’t any existing structure, this box is a means of
     specifying any distances along X, Y and Z axes by which we want
     the unit (being brought from the Wizard) to be shifted.
3-42   Tutorial 3

                    In our case, since we do not have an existing structure in the main
                    window, nor do we wish to shift the unit by any amount, let us
                    simply click on the OK button.




                                                Figure 3. 45


                    The model will now be transferred to the main window.




                                                Figure 3. 46
Tutorial 3   3-43
If you want to proceed with assigning the remainder of the data,
go to section 3.6.2.

Instead, if you wish to explore the remaining methods of creating
this model, the current structure will have to be entirely deleted.
This can be done using the following procedure.

From the Select menu, choose By All | All Geometry option. The
entire structure will be highlighted. Hit the key on your
keyboard. A message box shown below will appear. Click on the
OK button.




                            Figure 3. 47

As we click on the OK button, the following message box appears.
Let us say Yes. The message box will be dismissed and the entire
structure will be deleted.




                             Figure 3. 48
3-44   Tutorial 3



                                      Creating the Plates - Method 4

                         Steps:

                         The STAAD.Pro GUI contains a facility for generating a mesh of
                         elements from a boundary (or superelement) defined by a set of
                         corner nodes. This facility is in addition to the one we saw in
                         Method 3. The boundary has to form a closed surface and has to be
                         a plane, though that plane can be inclined to any of the global
                         planes.


                    1.   The first step in defining the boundary is selecting the corner
                         nodes. If these nodes do not exist, they must be created before they
                         can be selected. So, either click on the Snap Node/Quad Plates
                         icon or select Geometry | Snap/Grid Node | Plate | Quad menu
                         option as shown in the figures below.




                                                     Figure 3. 49
Tutorial 3   3-45




                                  Figure 3. 50

2.   A Snap Node/Plate dialog box appears in the data area on the right
     side of the screen. (We have already seen this dialog box in
     methods 1 and 2.) As before, let us select the Linear tab. In our
     structure, the elements lie in the X-Z plane. So, in this dialog box,
     let us choose X-Z as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model
     that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of
     Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and
     the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. All that we are
     interested in is the 4 corner nodes of the super-element. So, let us
     set 1 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X and Z,
     and a spacing of 6m between lines along X and 4m along Z.
3-46   Tutorial 3




                    Figure 3. 51
Tutorial 3   3-47
The main drawing area will now look similar to the one shown
below.




                           Figure 3. 52
3-48   Tutorial 3

                    3.   To start creating the nodes, let us first activate the Snap
                         Node/Plate button by clicking on it. Holding the ‘Ctrl’ key down,
                         click at the four corners of the grid as shown below. Those four
                         points represent the four corners of our slab and are (0, 0, 0), (6, 0,
                         0), (6, 0, 4), and (0, 0, 4). In fact, keeping the ‘Ctrl’ key pressed
                         and clicking at points on the grid successively, is a way of creating
                         new nodes without connecting those nodes with beams or plates. If
                         the ‘Ctrl’ key weren’t kept pressed, the nodes would become
                         connected.




                                                      Figure 3. 53

                         It is worth noting that the purpose of the previous four steps was to
                         merely create the four nodes. Consequently, any of the several
                         methods available in the program could have been used to create
                         those nodes. We could have typed the data into the editor, or in the
                         grid tables of the Geometry-Plate page control area, or even used
                         the Snap Grid/Node – Beam option of the Geometry menu from the
                         top of the screen to graphically create the points.
Tutorial 3   3-49
4.   Let us now Close the Snap Node/Plate dialog box as shown below.




                                Figure 3. 54

     We are now ready to utilize the second method available in the
     program for mesh generation.
3-50   Tutorial 3

                    5.   For this, either click on the Generate Surface Meshing icon or go
                         to Geometry | Generate Surface Meshing menu option as shown
                         below.




                                                    Figure 3. 55




                                                    Figure 3. 56
Tutorial 3   3-51
6.   We now have to select the points which form the boundary of the
     superelement from which the individual elements will be created.
     The four points we just created are those four points. So, let us
     click at the four node points in succession as shown below. Lastly,
     close the loop by clicking at the start node (or the first clicked
     point) again.




                                 Figure 3. 57

     As we click at the start node the second time, the following dialog
     box comes up. Let us choose the Quadrilateral Meshing option
     and click on the OK button.




                                 Figure 3. 58
3-52   Tutorial 3

                    7.   The Select Meshing Parameters dialog box (as we saw earlier in
                         Method 3), comes up. Notice that this time however, the data for
                         the four corners is automatically filled in. The program used the
                         coordinates of the four nodes we selected to define A, B, C, and D.
                         Provide the Bias and the Divisions of the model as shown in the
                         figure below. Click on the Apply button.




                                                     Figure 3. 59

                         As we click on the Apply button, our model will appear in the
                         drawing area as the one shown below. Click on the      button to
                         exit the mesh generating mode.




                                                     Figure 3. 60
Tutorial 3   3-53

3.6.2 Changing the input units of length

      As a matter of convenience, for specifying element properties for
      our structure, it is simpler if our length units are centimeter instead
      of meter. This will require changing the current length units of
      input. The command to be generated is:

               UNIT CM KN

      Steps:

 1.   Click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar.




                                   Figure 3. 61

      Alternatively, one may select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit
      menu option as shown below.




                                   Figure 3. 62
3-54   Tutorial 3

                    2.   In either case, the following dialog box comes up. Set the Length
                         Units to Centimeter and click on the OK button.




                                                     Figure 3. 63
Tutorial 3   3-55

3.6.3 Specifying Element Properties

      Just as properties are assigned to members, properties must be
      assigned to plate elements too. The property required for plates is
      the plate thickness (or the thickness at each node of elements if the
      slab has a varying thickness).

      The corresponding command which should be generated in the
      STAAD command file is:

               ELEMENT PROPERTY
               1 TO 6 THICKNESS 30

      Steps:


 1.   Click on the Property Page icon located on the Structure Tools
      toolbar.




                                   Figure 3. 64
3-56   Tutorial 3

                    Alternatively, one may go to the General | Property page from the
                    left side of the screen as shown below.




                                               Figure 3. 65
Tutorial 3   3-57
2.   In either case, the Properties dialog box comes up as shown
     below. Plate thickness is specified through the dialog box available
     under the Thickness button.




                                Figure 3. 66
3-58   Tutorial 3

                    3.   The dialog box shown below comes up. Let us provide the plate
                         thickness as 30cm. Notice that the field called Material is presently
                         on the checked mode. If we keep it that way, the material
                         properties of concrete (E, Poisson, Density, Alpha, etc.) will be
                         assigned along with the plate thickness. The material property
                         values so assigned will be the program defaults. (To see those
                         default values, click on the Materials button in the dialog box
                         shown in the previous figure.) Since we want to assign just the
                         default values, let us keep the Material box in the checked mode
                         itself. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button
                         as shown below.




                                                     Figure 3. 67
Tutorial 3   3-59
     At this point, the Properties dialog box will look as shown below.




                                 Figure 3. 68

4.   Since we want the thickness to be applied to all elements of the
     structure, let us select the Assignment Method called Assign To
     View and then click on the Assign button as shown in the above
     figure.

     As we click on the Assign button, the following message box
     comes up. Let us click on the Yes button to confirm our choice.




                                 Figure 3. 69
3-60   Tutorial 3

                    The structure will now look as shown below.




                                                Figure 3. 70

                    Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the selected
                    entities. We do this only as a safety precaution. When an entity is
                    highlighted, clicking on any Assign option is liable to cause an
                    undesired attribute to be assigned to that entity.
Tutorial 3   3-61

3.6.4 Specifying Material Constants

    In Section 3.6.3, we kept the Material check box “on” while
    assigning the element properties. Consequently, the material
    constants (E, Density, Poisson’s Ratio, etc.) of concrete got
    assigned to the plates along with the properties, and the following
    commands were generated in the command file:

            UNIT METER KN
            CONSTANTS
            E 2.17185e+007 MEMB 1 TO 6
            POISSON 0.17 MEMB 1 TO 6
            DENSITY 23.5616 MEMB 1 TO 6
            ALPHA 1e-005 MEMB 1 TO 6

    Hence, there is no longer a need to assign the constants separately.
    However, if we hadn’t assigned them as before, we could go to the
    menu option Commands | Material Constants and assign them
    explicitly as shown in the figure below.




                                Figure 3. 71
3-62   Tutorial 3

                    3.6.5 Specifying Supports

                          The slab is fixed-supported along the entire length of two of its
                          sides. However, when modelled as plate elements, the supports can
                          be specified only at the nodes along those edges, and not at any
                          point between the nodes. It hence becomes apparent that if one is
                          keen on better modelling the edge conditions, the slab would have
                          to be modelled using a larger number of elements.

                          In our case, the commands we need to generate are:

                                   SUPPORTS
                                   1 2 4 5 7 10 FIXED

                          Steps:

                     1.   To create supports, click on the Support Page icon located in the
                          Structure Tools toolbar as shown below.




                                                        Figure 3. 72
Tutorial 3   3-63
Alternatively, one may go to the General | Support Page from the
left side of the screen.




                           Figure 3. 73
3-64   Tutorial 3

                    2.   In either case, the Supports dialog box comes up as shown in the
                         next figure.

                    3.   For easy identification of the nodes where we wish to place the
                         supports, let us turn the Node Numbers on.

                    4.   Since we already know that nodes 1, 2, 5, 7, 4 and 10 are to be
                         associated with the Fixed support, using the Nodes Cursor         ,
                         select these nodes.

                    5.   Then, click on the Create button in the Supports dialog box as
                         shown below.




                                                     Figure 3. 74
Tutorial 3   3-65
6.   The dialog box shown below comes up. The Fixed tab happens to
     be the default which is convenient for this case. Click on the
     Assign button as shown below.




                                Figure 3. 75

     It is important to understand that the Assign button is active
     because of what we did in step 4 earlier. Had we not selected the
     nodes before reaching this point, this option would not have been
     active.
3-66   Tutorial 3

                    After the supports have been assigned, the structure will look like
                    the one shown below.




                                                Figure 3. 76
Tutorial 3   3-67

3.6.6 Specifying Primary Load Cases

      Three primary load cases have to be created for this structure.
      Details of these load cases are available at the beginning of this
      tutorial. The corresponding commands to be generated are listed
      below.

               UNIT METER KG
               LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD
               SELF Y -1.0

               LOAD 2 EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD
               ELEMENT LOAD
               1 TO 6 PR GY -300

               LOAD 3
               TEMPERATURE LOAD
               1 TO 6 TEMP 40 30

      Steps:

 1.   To create loads, click on the Load Page icon located on the
      Structure Tools tool bar.




                                  Figure 3. 77
3-68   Tutorial 3

                         Alternatively, one may go to the General | Load Page from the left
                         side of the screen.




                                                     Figure 3. 78

                    2.   Notice that the pressure load value listed in the beginning of this
                         tutorial is in KN and meter units. Rather than convert that value to
                         the current input units, we will conform to those units. The current
                         input units, which we last set while specifying THICKNESS was
                         CENTIMETER. We have to change the force unit to Kilogram and
                         the length units to Meter. To change the units, as before, click on
                         the Input Units icon      from the top toolbar, or select the Tools |
                         Set Current Input Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the
                         Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the
                         length units as meter and the force units as Kilogram.
Tutorial 3   3-69
     LOAD CASE 1

3.   A window titled “Load” appears on the right-hand side of the
     screen. To initiate the first load case, highlight Load Cases Details
     and click on the Add button.




                                 Figure 3. 79

4.   The Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up. The drop-down list
     box against Loading Type is available in case we wish to associate
     the load case we are creating with any of the ACI, AISC or IBC
     definitions of Dead, Live, Ice, etc. This type of association needs
     to be done if we intend to use the program's facility for
     automatically generating load combinations in accordance with
     those codes.
     Notice that there is a check box called Reducible per UBC/IBC.
     This feature becomes active only when the load case is assigned a
     Loading Type called Live at the time of creation of that case.
     Please refer to STAAD.Pro 2004 Release Report for further details.

     As we do not intend to use the automatic load combination
     generation option, we will leave the Loading Type as None. Enter
     DEAD LOAD as the Title for Load Case 1 and click on Add.
3-70   Tutorial 3




                                                   Figure 3. 80

                         The newly created load case will now appear under the Load Cases
                         Details in the Load dialog box.




                                                   Figure 3. 81

                    5.   To generate and assign the first load type, highlight DEAD LOAD.
                         You will notice that the Add New Load Items dialog box shows
                         more options now.




                                                   Figure 3. 82
Tutorial 3   3-71
6.   In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Selfweight Load
     option under the Selfweight item. Specify the Direction as Y, and
     the Factor as -1.0. The negative number signifies that the
     selfweight load acts opposite to the positive direction of the global
     axis (Y in this case) along which it is applied. Click on the Add
     button. The selfweight load is applicable to every member of the
     structure, and cannot be applied on a selected list of members.




                                 Figure 3. 83
3-72   Tutorial 3

                         LOAD CASE 2

                    7.   Next, let us initiate the creation of the second load case which is a
                         pressure load on the elements. To do this, highlight Load Cases
                         Details. In the Add New Load Cases dialog box, once again, we are
                         not associating the load case we are about to create with any code
                         based Loading Type and so, leave that box as None. Specify the
                         Title of the second load case as EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD
                         and click on the Add button.




                                                     Figure 3. 84

                         To generate and assign the second load type, highlight
                         EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD.




                                                     Figure 3. 85
Tutorial 3   3-73
8.   In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Pressure on
     Full Plate option under the Plate Loads item enables the load to be
     applied on the full area of the element. (The Concentrated Load is
     for applying a concentrated force on the element. The Trapezoidal
     and Hydrostatic options are for defining pressures with intensities
     varying from one point to another. The Partial Plate Pressure
     Load is useful if the load is to be applied as a “patch” on a small
     localised portion of an element.)

     Let us keep our focus on the Pressure on Full Plate option.
     Provide -300kg/m2 for W1 (Force), GY as the Direction and click
     on the Add button followed by the Close button.




                                 Figure 3. 86
3-74   Tutorial 3

                    9.   Since the pressure load is to be applied on all the elements of the
                         model, the easiest way to do that is to set the Assignment Method to
                         Assign To View. Then, click on the Assign button in the Load
                         dialog box as shown below.




                                                     Figure 3. 87

                         After the load has been assigned, the model will look as shown
                         below.




                                                     Figure 3. 88
Tutorial 3   3-75
      LOAD CASE 3

10.   Next, let us create the third load case which is a temperature load.
      The initiation of a new load case is best done using the procedure
      explained in step 7. In the dialog box that comes up, let us specify
      the Title of the third load case as TEMPERATURE LOAD and
      click on the Add button.




                                   Figure 3. 89

      To generate and assign the third load type, as before, highlight
      TEMPERATURE LOAD.

11.   Temperature Loads are created from the input screens available
      under the Temperature option in the Add New Load Items dialog
      box.
3-76   Tutorial 3

                    12.   In the Add New Load Items dialog box, make sure that the
                          Temperature item is selected under the Temperature Loads
                          option. Then, provide 40 as the Temperature Change for Axial
                          Elongation and 30 as the Temperature Differential from Top to
                          Bottom and click on the Add button followed by the Close button.




                                                      Figure 3. 90

                    13.   Since we intend to apply the temperature load on all the plates, as
                          before, choose Assign To View and click on the Assign button in
                          the Loads dialog box (see step 9 for explanation).
Tutorial 3   3-77

3.6.7 Creating load combinations

      The specifications at the beginning of this tutorial require us to
      create two combination cases. The commands required are:

               LOAD COMBINATION 101 CASE 1 + CASE 2
               1 1.0 2 1.0
               LOAD COMBINATION 102 CASE 1 + CASE 3
               1 1.0 3 1.0

      Steps:

      LOAD COMBINATION 101

 1.   To initiate and define load case 4 as a load combination, once
      again, highlight the Load Cases Details option. In the Add New
      Load Cases dialog box, click on the Define Combinations option
      from the left-hand side. Enter the Load No: as 101 and the Title as
      CASE 1 + CASE 2.




                                   Figure 3. 91
3-78   Tutorial 3

                    2.   Next, in the Define Combinations box, select load case 1 from the
                         left side list box and click on the    button. Repeat this with load
                         case 2 also. Load cases 1 and 2 will appear in the right side list box
                         as shown in the figure below. (These data indicate that we are
                         adding the two load cases with a multiplication factor of 1.0 and
                         that the load combination results would be obtained by algebraic
                         summation of the results for individual load cases.) Finally, click
                         on the Add button.




                                                     Figure 3. 92


                         Case 101 has now been created.
Tutorial 3   3-79
     LOAD COMBINATION 102

3.   To initiate and define load case 5 as a load combination, as before,
     enter the Load No: as 102 and the Title as CASE 1 + CASE 3.

     Next, repeat step 2 except for selecting load cases 1 and 3 instead
     of cases 1 and 2.




                                 Figure 3. 93

     Thus, load 102 is also created.
3-80   Tutorial 3

                    If we change our mind about the composition of any existing
                    combination case, we can select the case we want to alter, and
                    make the necessary changes in terms of the constituent cases or
                    their factors.




                                                 Figure 3. 94

                    Let us exit this dialog box by clicking on the Close button.

                    It is also worth noting that as load cases are created, a facility for
                    quickly switching between the various cases becomes available at
                    the top of the screen in the form of a load case selection box as
                    shown below.




                                                 Figure 3. 95
Tutorial 3   3-81
We have now completed the task of creating all load cases.

Let us once again save our model by pulling down the File menu
and selecting the Save command or by holding the ‘Ctrl’ key and
pressing the ‘S’ key.
3-82   Tutorial 3

                    3.6.8 Specifying the analysis type

                          The analysis type we are required to do is a linear static type. We
                          will also obtain a static equilibrium report. This requires the
                          command:

                                   PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK

                          Steps:

                     1.   To specify the Analysis command, first go to Analysis/Print Page
                          from the left side of the screen.




                                                      Figure 3. 96
Tutorial 3   3-83
2.   In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, the
     instruction for specifying a linear elastic type analysis is provided
     using the Perform Analysis tab. To obtain the static equilibrium
     report, check the Statics Check print option. (In response to this
     option, a report consisting of the summary of applied loading and
     summary of support reactions, for each load case, will be produced
     in the STAAD output file. See section 3.10 for information on
     viewing this report).




                                 Figure 3. 97

     Finally, click on the Add button followed by the Close button.
3-84   Tutorial 3

                    The Analysis dialog box in the data area with the newly added
                    instruction will look as shown below.




                                               Figure 3. 98

                    Let us save the data once again using the File | Save option.
Tutorial 3   3-85

3.6.9 Specifying post-analysis print commands

      Two types of element results can be requested: a) ELEMENT
      STRESSES at the centroid or any point on the element surface b)
      the element forces at the nodes. The former consists of stresses and
      moments per unit width, as explained in sections 1.6.1 and 3.41 of
      the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. The latter consists of the
      3 forces and 3 moments at each node of the elements in the global
      axis system (see section 3.41 for details).

      We would like to obtain both these results. We will also set the
      units in which these results are printed to KN and Meter for
      element stresses and Kg and Meter for element forces. This
      requires the specification of the following commands:

               UNIT METER KN
               PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 3
               UNIT KG METER
               PRINT ELEMENT FORCE LIST 6

      These results will be written in the STAAD output file and can be
      viewed using the procedure explained in section 3.10.

      Steps:

 1.   Go to Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option. Set the length
      and force units to Meter and Kilo Newton respectively.

 2.   The dialog box for requesting element results is available in the
      Post-Print sub-page of the Analysis | Print page.

      Click on the Define Commands button in the data area on the right
      hand side of the screen.
3-86   Tutorial 3




                                                    Figure 3. 99

                    3.   In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, select the
                         Element Forces/Stresses tab. Choose the Print Element Stresses
                         option and click on the Add button followed by the Close button.




                                                   Figure 3. 100
Tutorial 3   3-87
4.   Again, go to Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option. Set the
     length and force units to Meter and Kilogram respectively.

     Then, repeat steps 2 and 3. In step 3, select the Print Element
     Forces option and click on the Add button followed by the Close
     button.

     At this point, the Post Analysis Print dialog box will look as shown
     below.




                                Figure 3. 101
3-88   Tutorial 3

                    5.   To associate the PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES command with
                         element 3, first select the command as shown in the previous

                         figure. Then, using the Plates Cursor      , click on element no.
                         3.

                         As we select the plate, the Assignment Method automatically
                         becomes Assign to Selected Plates. Click on the Assign button as
                         shown below.




                                                   Figure 3. 102


                    6.   To associate the PRINT ELEMENT FORCE command with element
                         6, repeat step 5 except for selecting element no. 6 in the place of
                         element no. 3.

                         We have now completed the tasks of assigning the input for this
                         model. Let us save the file one last time using the File | Save
                         option.
Tutorial 3   3-89

3.7 Viewing the input command file

         Let us now take a look at the data that has been written into the file
         that we just saved earlier. As we have seen in the previous
         tutorials, while the model is being created graphically, a
         corresponding set of commands describing that aspect of the model
         is being simultaneously written into a command file which is a
         simple text file. An abstract of those commands was also
         mentioned under the title “commands to be generated are . .” at the
         beginning of each section of this tutorial.

         The contents of that text file can be viewed in its entirety either by
         clicking on the STAAD Editor icon or, by going to the Edit menu
         and choosing Edit Input Command File as shown below.




                                     Figure 3. 103




                                     Figure 3. 104
3-90   Tutorial 3

                    A new window will open up with the data listed as shown here:




                                               Figure 3. 105

                    This window and the facilities it contains is known as the STAAD
                    Editor.

                    We could make modifications to the data of our structure in this
                    Editor if we wish to do so. Let us Exit the Editor without doing so
                    by selecting the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not
                    the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor
                    window).

                    Instead of using the graphical methods explained in the previous
                    sections, we could have created the entire model by typing these
                    specific commands into the editor. This was one of the methods
                    mentioned in section 3.1 of this tutorial. If you would like to
                    understand that method, proceed to the next section. If you want to
                    skip that part, proceed to section 3.9 where we perform the analysis
                    on this model.
Tutorial 3   3-91

3.8 Creating the model using the command file

          Let us now use the command file method to create the model for
          the above structure. The commands used in the command file are
          described later in this section.

          The STAAD.Pro command file may be created using the built-in
          editor, the procedure for which is explained further below in this
          section. Any standard text editor such as Notepad or WordPad may
          also be used to create the command file. However, the STAAD.Pro
          command file editor offers the advantage of syntax checking as we
          type the commands. The STAAD.Pro keywords, numeric data,
          comments, etc. are displayed in distinct colors in the STAAD.Pro
          editor. A typical editor screen is shown below to illustrate its general
          appearance.




                                      Figure 3. 106
3-92   Tutorial 3

                    To access the built-in editor, first start the program using the
                    procedure explained in Section 3.3. Next, follow step 1 of Section 3.4
                    (also, see Figures below).




                                               Figure 3. 107

                    You will then encounter the dialog box shown below. In that dialog
                    box, choose Open STAAD Editor.




                                               Figure 3. 108
Tutorial 3   3-93
At this point, the editor screen will open as shown below.




                             Figure 3. 109

Delete all the command lines displayed in the editor window and
type the lines shown in bold below (You don’t have to delete the
lines if you know which to keep and where to fill in the rest of the
commands). The commands may be typed in upper or lower case
letters. Usually the first three letters of a keyword are all that are
needed -- the rest of the letters of the word are not required. The
required letters are underlined. (“SPACE” = “SPA” = “space” =
“spa”)
3-94   Tutorial 3

                    Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation.

                        STAAD SPACE SLAB SUPPORTED ALONG 2 EDGES

                    Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE
                    signifies that the structure is a space frame structure (3-D) and the
                    geometry is defined through X, Y and Z coordinates.

                        UNIT METER KN

                    Specifies the unit to be used for data to follow.

                        JOINT COORDINATES
                        1000;2200;3202;4002
                        5400;6402;7600;8602
                        9 2 0 4 ; 10 0 0 4 ; 11 4 0 4 ; 12 6 0 4

                    Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided
                    above. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators. That enables
                    us to provide multiple sets of data on one line. For example, node 6
                    has (X, Y, Z) coordinates of (4, 0, 2).

                        ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL
                        1 1 2 3 4 ; 2 2 5 6 3 ; 3 5 7 8 6 ; 4 4 3 9 10 ;
                        5 3 6 11 9 ; 6 6 8 12 11

                    The incidences of elements are defined above. For example,
                    element 3 is defined as connected between the nodes 5, 7, 8 and 6.

                        UNIT CM KN
                        ELEMENT PROPERTY
                        1 TO 6 THICKNESS 30

                    The length unit is changed from meter to centimeter. Element
                    properties are then provided by specifying that the elements are 30
                    cm thick.
Tutorial 3   3-95
    UNIT METER KN
    CONSTANTS
    E 2.17185e+007 ALL
    POISSON 0.17 ALL
    DENSITY 23.5616 ALL
    ALPHA 1e-005 ALL

Material constants, which are E (modulus of elasticity), Density,
Poisson’s Ratio and Alpha, are specified following the command
CONSTANTS. Prior to this, the input units are changed to Meter
and KN.

    SUPPORTS
    1 2 4 5 7 10 FIXED

Joints 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 and 10 are defined as fixed supported. This will
cause all 6 degrees of freedom at these nodes to be restrained.

    UNIT KG
    LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD

Force units are changed from KN to KG to facilitate the input of
loads. Load case 1 is then initiated along with an accompanying
title.

    SELFWEIGHT Y -1

Load case 1 consists of selfweight of the structure acting in the
global Y direction with a factor of -1.0. Since global Y is vertically
upward, the factor of -1.0 indicates that this load will act
downwards.

    LOAD 2 EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD

Load case 2 is initiated along with an accompanying title.

    ELEMENT LOAD
    1 TO 6 PR GY -300
3-96   Tutorial 3

                    Load 2 is a pressure load on the elements. A uniform pressure of
                    300Kg/m2 is applied on all the elements. GY indicates that the load
                    is in the global Y direction. The negative sign (-300) indicates that
                    the load acts opposite to the positive direction of global Y.

                        LOAD 3 TEMPERATURE LOAD

                    Load case 3 is initiated along with an accompanying title.

                        TEMPERATURE LOAD
                        1 TO 6 TEMP 40 30

                    Load 3 is a temperature load. All the 6 elements are subjected to a
                    in-plane temperature increase of 40 degrees and a temperature
                    variation across the thickness of 30 degrees. This increase is in the
                    same temperature units as the Alpha value specified earlier under
                    CONSTANTS.

                        LOAD COMB 101 CASE 1 + CASE 2
                        1 1.0 2 1.0

                    Load combination 101 is initiated along with an accompanying
                    title. Load cases 1 and 2 are individually factored by a value of
                    1.0, and the factored values are combined algebraically.

                        LOAD COMB 102 CASE 1 + CASE 3
                        1 1.0 3 1.0

                    Load combination 102 is initiated along with an accompanying
                    title. Load cases 1 and 3 are individually factored by a value of
                    1.0, and the factored values are combined algebraically.

                        PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK

                    The above command instructs the program to proceed with the
                    analysis. A static equilibrium report is also requested with the help
                    of the words PRINT STATICS CHECK.

                        UNIT METER KN
                        PRINT ELEMENT STRESS LIST 3
Tutorial 3   3-97
The stresses and unit width moments are requested at the centroid
of element 3 in KN and Meter units.

    UNIT KG METER
    PRINT ELEMENT FORCE LIST 6

The forces and moments for all 6 d.o.f at the corner nodes of
element 6 are requested in KG and Meter units.

    FINISH

This command terminates the STAAD run.

Let us save the file and exit the editor.
3-98   Tutorial 3

   3.9 Performing the analysis and design

                    In order to obtain the displacements, forces, stresses and reactions
                    in the structure due to the applied loads, the model has to be
                    analyzed. If the pass-fail status of the members and elements per
                    the requirements of steel and concrete codes is to be determined,
                    that involves a process called design. Both these processes are
                    launched using the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu.




                                                Figure 3. 110

                    If the structure has not been saved after the last change was made,
                    you should save the structure first by using the Save command
                    from the File menu.

                    When you select the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu,
                    the following dialog box appears:




                                                Figure 3. 111

                    We are presented with the choice of 2 engines : the STAAD engine
                    and the STARDYNE Advanced Analysis engine. The STARDYNE
                    Analysis engine is suitable for advanced problems such as
                    Buckling Analysis, Modal Extraction using various methods, etc.
                    However, if the calculations call for steel or concrete design, UBC
Tutorial 3   3-99
load generation, etc., we have to select the STAAD engine. For
this problem, let us use the STAAD engine.

Then, click on the Run Analysis button.

As the analysis progresses, several messages appear on the screen
as shown in the next figure.




                           Figure 3. 112
At the end of these calculations, two activities take place. a) A
Done button becomes active b) three options become available at
the bottom left corner of this information window.




                          Figure 3. 113
3-100   Tutorial 3

                     These options are indicative of what will happen after we click on
                     the Done button.

                     The View Output File option allows us to view the output file
                     created by STAAD. The output file contains the numerical results
                     produced in response to the various input commands we specified
                     during the model generation process. It also tells us whether any
                     errors were encountered, and if so, whether the analysis and design
                     was successfully completed or not. Section 3.10 (also, see section
                     1.9) offers additional details on viewing and understanding the
                     contents of the output file.

                     The Go To Post Processing Mode option allows us to go to
                     graphical part of the program known as the Post-processor. This is
                     where one can extensively verify the results, view the results
                     graphically, plot result diagrams, produce reports, etc. Section 3.11
                     explains the Post processing mode in greater detail.

                     The Stay in Modelling Mode lets us continue to be in the Model
                     generation mode of the program (the one we currently are in) in
                     case we wish to make further changes to our model.
Tutorial 3   3-101

3.10 Viewing the output file

          During the analysis stage, an output file containing results,
          warnings and messages associated with errors if any in the output,
          is produced. This file has the extension .anl and may be viewed
          using the output viewer. Section 1.9 of this manual contains
          information on viewing this file.

          In Sections 3.6.8 and 3.6.9, we had provided instructions to the
          program to write some very specific results in the output file. Let
          us examine those results.

          PRINT STATICS CHECK

          This instruction was provided so that we could view a report
          indicating if the structure is in equilibrium for the various load
          cases. If we scroll down the output file, we will see information
          which looks like the following:

            ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING       1)
             SUMMATION FORCE-X =       0.00
             SUMMATION FORCE-Y = -17298.83
             SUMMATION FORCE-Z =       0.00


             SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
             MX=    34597.65 MY=      0.00 MZ=    -51896.48


           ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING         1)
             SUMMATION FORCE-X =      0.00
             SUMMATION FORCE-Y =    17298.83
             SUMMATION FORCE-Z =      0.00
             SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
             MX=   -34597.65 MY=      0.00 MZ=    51896.48
           MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING        1)
           MAXIMUMS    AT NODE
3-102   Tutorial 3


                        X = 0.00000E+00      0
                        Y = -3.20681E-01    12
                        Z = 0.00000E+00     0
                        RX = 9.80406E-04     12
                        RY = 0.00000E+00         0
                        RZ = -6.49355E-04    9


                     For each primary load case, the report consists of:

                         a.   Summary of total applied loads for all 6 degrees of
                              freedom, with moments calculated about the origin of the
                              coordinate system (0, 0, 0)

                         b. Summary of total reactions from the supports of the
                            structure, with moments calculated about the origin of the
                            coordinate system (0, 0, 0)

                         c.   Maximum displacements (3 translations and 3 rotations) in
                              the structure induced by this load case

                     Each of the 6 terms of item (a) must be equal and opposite to the
                     corresponding term of item (b). A failure to meet this criteria
                     would mean the analysis results (for a linear elastic analysis) may
                     be erroneous. Factors such as instability conditions or improperly
                     applied loads can cause the equilibrium check to fail.

                     It is quite important to examine the maximum displacements since
                     they tell us whether the deformations are within tolerable limits.

                     Since the information presented above is for load case 1, and since
                     load case 1 is the selfweight of the structure, we can conclude that
                     the structure weighs 17298.83 Kgs.
Tutorial 3   3-103
STRESSES FOR ELEMENT 3

This information consists of the stress and “moment over unit
width” values at the centroid of element 3. A typical sample is
presented below.



ELEMENT STRESSES             FORCE, LENGTH UNITS = KN METE
 ----------------
FORCE OR STRESS = FORCE/UNIT WIDTH/THICK,
MOMENT = FORCE-LENGTH/UNIT WIDTH


 ELEMENT LOAD SQX                 SQY       MX       MY          MXY
                         VONT     VONB      SX       SY          SXY


  3                 1   -18.13      72.86    -3.96   -20.42        -3.35
                        1308.63   1308.63    0.00         0.00         0.00
      TOP : SMAX= -220.33 SMIN= -1404.81 TMAX= 592.24 ANGLE= -11.1
      BOTT: SMAX= 1404.81 SMIN= 220.33 TMAX= 592.24 ANGLE= -11.1




These terms are explained in Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD
Technical Reference Manual in elaborate detail. Example problem
18 of the Examples Manual explains the method involved in
calculating the principal stresses SMAX, SMIN and TMAX.
3-104   Tutorial 3

                     FORCES FOR ELEMENT 6

                     This information consists of the force and moment values at each
                     of the 4 corner nodes of element 6. A typical sample is presented
                     below.



                     ELEMENT FORCES            FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KG METE
                      --------------
                     JOINT      FX        FY       FZ    MX      MY   MZ


                                ELE.NO.        6 FOR LOAD CASE   1
                      6 0.0000E+00 4.5323E+02 0.0000E+00 -1.1313E+03 0.0000E+00 7.9082E+02
                      8 0.0000E+00 5.0615E+02 0.0000E+00 -3.2047E+02 0.0000E+00 2.3981E+02
                     12 0.0000E+00 -7.2078E+02 0.0000E+00 1.0346E-03 0.0000E+00 -1.3733E-03
                     11 0.0000E+00 -2.3860E+02 0.0000E+00 -4.6697E+02 0.0000E+00 -6.0136E+02




                     The corner forces are in the global coordinate system. These values
                     may be used to create a free body diagram of the element and
                     verify that the element is in equilibrium. In this case for example,
                     the FX and FZ forces are zero, and sum of the FY forces is also
                     zero.

                     The complete text of the output file is shown in the next few pages.
Tutorial 3   3-105

          ****************************************************
          *                                                  *
          *           STAAD.Pro                              *
          *           Version          Bld                   *
          *           Proprietary Program of                 *
          *           Research Engineers, Intl.              *
          *           Date=                                  *
          *           Time=                                  *
          *                                                  *
          *      USER ID:                                    *
          ****************************************************

 1.   STAAD SPACE SLAB SUPPORTED ALONG 2 EDGES
 2.   START JOB INFORMATION
 3.   ENGINEER DATE
 4.   END JOB INFORMATION
 5.   INPUT WIDTH 79
 6.   UNIT METER KN
 7.   JOINT COORDINATES
 8.   1 0 0 0; 2 2 0 0; 3 2 0 2; 4 0 0 2; 5 4 0 0; 6 4 0 2; 7 6 0 0; 8 6 0 2
 9.   9 2 0 4; 10 0 0 4; 11 4 0 4; 12 6 0 4
10.   ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL
11.   1 1 2 3 4; 2 2 5 6 3; 3 5 7 8 6; 4 4 3 9 10; 5 3 6 11 9; 6 6 8 12 11
12.   UNIT CM KN
13.   ELEMENT PROPERTY
14.   1 TO 6 THICKNESS 30
15.   DEFINE MATERIAL START
16.   ISOTROPIC CONCRETE
17.   E 2171.85
18.   POISSON 0.17
19.   DENSITY 2.35616E-005
20.   ALPHA 1E-005
21.   DAMP 0.05
22.   END DEFINE MATERIAL
23.   CONSTANTS
24.   MATERIAL CONCRETE MEMB 1 TO 6
25.   SUPPORTS
26.   1 2 4 5 7 10 FIXED
27.   LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD
28.   SELFWEIGHT Y -1
29.   LOAD 2 EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD
30.   UNIT METER KG
31.   ELEMENT LOAD
32.   1 TO 6 PR GY -300
33.   LOAD 3 TEMPERATURE LOAD
34.   TEMPERATURE LOAD
35.   1 TO 6 TEMP 40 30
36.   LOAD COMB 101 CASE 1 + CASE 2
37.   1 1.0 2 1.0
38.   LOAD COMB 102 CASE 1 + CASE 3
39.   1 1.0 3 1.0
40.   PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK

         P R O B L E M   S T A T I S T I C S
         -----------------------------------

 NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS =    12/     6/   6
 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH=     8/     5/     36 DOF
 TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES =    3, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM =   72
 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX =       3 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS
 REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE =     12.1/ 3521.0 MB, EXMEM = 461.2 MB

       STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO.     1
       DEAD LOAD


***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD   ( KG   METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING   1 )
    SUMMATION FORCE-X   =        0.00
    SUMMATION FORCE-Y   =   -17298.83
    SUMMATION FORCE-Z   =        0.00

  SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
  MX=       34597.66 MY=            0.00 MZ=         -51896.48
3-106   Tutorial 3


                     ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KG   METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING           1 )
                         SUMMATION FORCE-X =        0.00
                         SUMMATION FORCE-Y =    17298.83
                         SUMMATION FORCE-Z =        0.00

                       SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
                       MX=      -34597.66 MY=            0.00 MZ=              51896.48


                     MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS (    CM /RADIANS) (LOADING          1)
                               MAXIMUMS    AT   NODE
                        X = 0.00000E+00          0
                        Y = -3.20681E-01        12
                        Z = 0.00000E+00          0
                        RX= 9.80406E-04         12
                        RY= 0.00000E+00          0
                        RZ= -6.49355E-04         9


                           STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO.           2
                           EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD


                     ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD   ( KG   METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING         2 )
                         SUMMATION FORCE-X   =        0.00
                         SUMMATION FORCE-Y   =    -7200.00
                         SUMMATION FORCE-Z   =        0.00

                       SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
                       MX=       14400.00 MY=            0.00 MZ=          -21600.00


                     ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KG      METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING        2 )
                         SUMMATION FORCE-X =           0.00
                         SUMMATION FORCE-Y =        7200.00
                         SUMMATION FORCE-Z =           0.00

                       SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
                       MX=      -14400.00 MY=            0.00 MZ=              21600.00


                     MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS (    CM /RADIANS) (LOADING          2)
                               MAXIMUMS    AT   NODE
                        X = 0.00000E+00          0
                        Y = -1.33471E-01        12
                        Z = 0.00000E+00          0
                        RX= 4.08058E-04         12
                        RY= 0.00000E+00          0
                        RZ= -2.70270E-04         9


                           STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO.           3
                           TEMPERATURE LOAD


                     ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD   ( KG   METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING         3 )
                         SUMMATION FORCE-X   =        0.00
                         SUMMATION FORCE-Y   =        0.00
                         SUMMATION FORCE-Z   =        0.00

                       SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
                       MX=           0.00 MY=            0.00 MZ=                   0.00


                     ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KG     METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING         3 )
                         SUMMATION FORCE-X =         -0.01
                         SUMMATION FORCE-Y =          0.00
                         SUMMATION FORCE-Z =          0.02

                       SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
                       MX=           0.00 MY=           -0.10 MZ=                   0.00
Tutorial 3   3-107

MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING            3)
           MAXIMUMS    AT NODE
    X = 2.01178E-01       12
    Y = 8.97365E-01       12
    Z = 1.66240E-01       11
    RX= -3.51264E-03      12
    RY= -2.41785E-04      11
    RZ= 2.62398E-03       12



 ************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************


  41. UNIT METER KN
  42. PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 3

 ELEMENT STRESSES     FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KN     METE
 ----------------

    STRESS = FORCE/UNIT WIDTH/THICK, MOMENT = FORCE-LENGTH/UNIT WIDTH

ELEMENT   LOAD        SQX         SQY          MX             MY          MXY
                      VONT        VONB         SX             SY          SXY
                      TRESCAT     TRESCAB


    3       1    -18.13           72.86       -3.96      -20.42          -3.35
                1308.63         1308.63        0.00        0.00           0.00
                1404.81         1404.81
     TOP : SMAX= -220.33        SMIN= -1404.81 TMAX=    592.24 ANGLE= -11.1
     BOTT: SMAX= 1404.81        SMIN=   220.33 TMAX=    592.24 ANGLE= -11.1
           2      -7.54           30.33       -1.65       -8.50       -1.39
                 544.67          544.67        0.00        0.00        0.00
                 584.70          584.70
     TOP : SMAX=   -91.70       SMIN= -584.70 TMAX=      246.50 ANGLE= -11.1
     BOTT: SMAX=   584.70       SMIN=    91.70 TMAX=     246.50 ANGLE= -11.1
           3      96.73          -59.42      -30.45       -14.83       18.43
               10779.68         5300.82    -5044.81     -2309.43     3890.01
               10912.04         5585.51
     TOP : SMAX=   269.79       SMIN=-10642.25 TMAX=    5456.02 ANGLE= -34.9
     BOTT: SMAX=   624.74       SMIN= -4960.77 TMAX=    2792.75 ANGLE= -36.2
         101     -25.67          103.18       -5.61       -28.92       -4.74
                1853.30         1853.30        0.00         0.00        0.00
                1989.51         1989.51
     TOP : SMAX= -312.03        SMIN= -1989.51 TMAX=     838.74 ANGLE= -11.1
     BOTT: SMAX= 1989.51        SMIN=   312.03 TMAX=     838.74 ANGLE= -11.1
         102      78.60           13.44      -34.41       -35.24       15.08
               10642.95         5713.09    -5044.81     -2309.43     3890.01
               11074.45         6408.55
     TOP : SMAX= -923.15        SMIN=-11074.45 TMAX=    5075.65    ANGLE= -37.3
     BOTT: SMAX= 1848.83        SMIN= -4559.72 TMAX=    3204.28    ANGLE= -32.1


          **** MAXIMUM STRESSES AMONG SELECTED PLATES AND CASES ****
             MAXIMUM       MINIMUM       MAXIMUM       MAXIMUM       MAXIMUM
            PRINCIPAL     PRINCIPAL       SHEAR       VONMISES       TRESCA
             STRESS        STRESS        STRESS        STRESS        STRESS

         1.989513E+03 -1.107445E+04    5.456020E+03    1.077968E+04   1.107445E+04
PLATE NO.       3             3               3               3              3
CASE NO.      101           102               3               3            102


 ********************END OF ELEMENT FORCES********************


  43. UNIT METER KG
3-108   Tutorial 3

                       44. PRINT ELEMENT FORCE LIST 6

                      ELEMENT FORCES    FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KG   METE
                      --------------

                       **NOTE- IF A COMBINATION INCLUDES A DYNAMIC CASE OR IS AN SRSS OR ABS COMBINATION
                               THEN RESULTS CANNOT BE COMPUTED PROPERLY.
                         GLOBAL CORNER FORCES
                     JOINT     FX          FY          FZ          MX          MY          MZ

                                  ELE.NO.      6 FOR LOAD CASE    1
                        6  0.0000E+00 4.5323E+02 0.0000E+00 -1.1313E+03 0.0000E+00 7.9082E+02
                        8  0.0000E+00 5.0615E+02 0.0000E+00 -3.2047E+02 0.0000E+00 2.3981E+02
                       12  0.0000E+00 -7.2078E+02 0.0000E+00 1.0346E-03 0.0000E+00 -1.3733E-03
                       11  0.0000E+00 -2.3860E+02 0.0000E+00 -4.6697E+02 0.0000E+00 -6.0136E+02
                                  ELE.NO.      6 FOR LOAD CASE    2
                        6 0.0000E+00 1.8864E+02 0.0000E+00 -4.7087E+02 0.0000E+00 3.2915E+02
                        8 0.0000E+00 2.1067E+02 0.0000E+00 -1.3338E+02 0.0000E+00 9.9813E+01
                       12 0.0000E+00 -3.0000E+02 0.0000E+00 8.9143E-05 0.0000E+00 1.6633E-05
                       11 0.0000E+00 -9.9306E+01 0.0000E+00 -1.9436E+02 0.0000E+00 -2.5029E+02
                                  ELE.NO.      6 FOR LOAD CASE    3
                        6 -2.9880E+05 6.6190E+02 -3.0717E+05 6.3684E+03 2.7912E+03 -5.5444E+03
                        8 3.0633E+05 -9.9013E+02 -3.2773E+05 4.3052E+03 -3.7431E+03 4.3521E+03
                       12 3.2019E+05 4.6301E-03 3.2019E+05 -6.0036E+03 4.0162E-03 6.0036E+03
                       11 -3.2773E+05 3.2822E+02 3.1471E+05 -4.0135E+03 9.5183E+02 -2.8311E+03
                                  ELE.NO.      6 FOR LOAD CASE  101
                        6 0.0000E+00 6.4187E+02 0.0000E+00 -1.6022E+03 0.0000E+00 1.1200E+03
                        8 0.0000E+00 7.1681E+02 0.0000E+00 -4.5385E+02 0.0000E+00 3.3963E+02
                       12 0.0000E+00 -1.0208E+03 0.0000E+00 3.8188E-04 0.0000E+00 -9.6018E-05
                       11 0.0000E+00 -3.3790E+02 0.0000E+00 -6.6133E+02 0.0000E+00 -8.5165E+02
                                  ELE.NO.      6 FOR LOAD CASE  102
                        6 -2.9880E+05 1.1151E+03 -3.0717E+05 5.2371E+03 2.7912E+03 -4.7536E+03
                        8 3.0633E+05 -4.8398E+02 -3.2773E+05 3.9847E+03 -3.7431E+03 4.5919E+03
                       12 3.2019E+05 -7.2078E+02 3.2019E+05 -6.0036E+03 4.0162E-03 6.0036E+03
                       11 -3.2773E+05 8.9625E+01 3.1471E+05 -4.4804E+03 9.5183E+02 -3.4325E+03
                       45. FINISH


                                *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN ***********

                                  **** DATE=            TIME=             ****

                            ************************************************************
                            *         For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact       *
                            *   Research Engineers Offices at the following locations *
                            *                                                          *
                            *               Telephone                Email             *
                            * USA:       +1 (714)974-2500       support@reiusa.com     *
                            * CANADA     +1 (905)632-4771       detech@odandetech.com *
                            * CANADA     +1 (604)629 6087       staad@dowco.com        *
                            * UK         +44(1454)207-000       support@reel.co.uk     *
                            * FRANCE     +33(0)1 64551084       support@reel.co.uk     *
                            * GERMANY    +49/931/40468-71       info@reig.de           *
                            * NORWAY     +47 67 57 21 30        staad@edr.no           *
                            * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16        support@reiasia.net    *
                            * INDIA      +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com *
                            * JAPAN      +81(03)5952-6500       eng-eye@crc.co.jp      *
                            * CHINA      +86(411)363-1983       support@reiasia.net    *
                            *                                                          *
                            * North America                    support@reiusa.com      *
                            * Europe                           support@reel.co.uk      *
                            * Asia                             support@reiasia.net     *
                            ************************************************************
Tutorial 3   3-109

3.11 Post-Processing

         If there are no errors in the input, the analysis is successfully
         completed. The extensive facilities of the Post-processing mode
         can then be used to

             a) view the results graphically and numerically
             b) assess the suitability of the structure from the standpoint of
                safety, serviceability and efficiency
             c) create customized reports and plots

         The procedure for entering the post processing mode is explained
         in section 2.11.1 of this manual.

         Node results such as displacements and support reactions are
         available for all models. The methods explained in the first two
         tutorials – see sections 2.11.2 to 2.11.7 – may be used to explore
         these. If beams are present in the model, beam results will be
         available too (see sections 2.11.8 to 2.11.18 for information on
         these). For this example, we will look at the support reactions. We
         do not have any beams in our model, so no results will be available
         for this type of entity.

         For plates, the results available are stresses, and “unit width”
         moments. There are several different methods for viewing these
         results, as explained in the next few sections.
3-110   Tutorial 3

                     3.11.1 Viewing stress values in a tabular form

                         From the View menu, select Tables (or click the right mouse
                         button in the drawing area and select Tables). Choose Plate Centre
                         Stress.




                           Figure 3. 114                               Figure 3. 115
Tutorial 3   3-111
The following table will be displayed.




                            Figure 3. 116

The table has the following tabs:

Shear, Membrane and Bending: These terms are explained in
Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. The
individual values for each plate for each selected load case are
displayed.

Summary: This tab contains the maximum for each of the 8 values
listed in the Shear, Membrane and Bending tab.

Principal and Von Mises: These terms too are explained in
Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. The
individual values for each plate for each selected load case are
displayed, for the top and bottom surfaces of the elements.

Summary: This tab contains the maximum for each of the 8 values
listed in the Principal and Von Mises tab.

Global Moments: This tab provides the moments about the global
X, Y and Z axes at the center of each element.
3-112   Tutorial 3

                     3.11.2 Printing the tables

                          All of these tables may be printed by clicking the right mouse
                          button in the table area and selecting the Print option.




                                                     Figure 3. 117
Tutorial 3   3-113

3.11.3 Changing the units of values which
       appear in the above tables

    The length and force units of the stresses and moments are
    displayed alongside the individual column headings for the terms.
    To view the values in a different set of units, go to the Tools menu
    and select Set Current Display Unit.




                               Figure 3. 118
3-114   Tutorial 3

                     In the dialog box that comes up, click on the Force Units tab and
                     specify the required unit from the Stress and Moment fields. Click
                     on the Apply button for the changes to take effect immediately.
                     Once you are sure that you have chosen the proper unit
                     combination, click on the OK button.




                                                Figure 3. 119
Tutorial 3   3-115

3.11.4 Limiting the load cases for which the
       results are displayed

    When we entered the post-processing mode, we chose all load
    cases in the Results Setup dialog box. The tables hence contain
    results for all the load cases. To change that load list, choose
    Select Load Case from the Results menu.




                               Figure 3. 120
3-116   Tutorial 3

                     In the dialog box that comes up, select the load cases you want,

                     and click on the single arrow      , so they are transferred from the
                     Available category to the Selected category. Then, click on the OK
                     button.




                                                Figure 3. 121
Tutorial 3   3-117

3.11.5 Stress Contours

    Stress contours are a color-based plot of the variation of stress or
    moment across the surface of the slab or a selected portion of it.
    There are 2 ways to switch on stress contour plots:

    a)   From the left side, select the Contour sub-page under the
         Plate page.




                             Figure 3. 122

    or
3-118   Tutorial 3

                     b) From the top of the screen, click on the Results menu and
                        select the Plate Stress Contour option.




                                               Figure 3. 123
Tutorial 3   3-119
In each of the above cases, the following dialog box appears.




                           Figure 3. 124

    •   From the Stress type field, select the specific type of stress
        for which you want the contour drawn.
    •   From the Load Case selection box, select the load case
        number.
    •   Stress values are known exactly only at the plate centroid
        locations. Everywhere else, they are calculated by linear
        interpolation between the center point stress values of
        adjacent plates. The Enhanced type contour chooses a
        larger number of points compared to the Normal type
        contour in determining the stress variation.
    •   View Stress Index will display a small table consisting of
        the numerical range of values from smallest to largest
        which are represented in the plot.
3-120   Tutorial 3

                     Let us set the following:

                         •   Load case – 102
                         •   Stress Type – Von Mis Top
                         •   Contour Type – Normal Fill
                         •   Index based on Center Stress
                         •   View Stress Index
                         •   Re-Index for new view




                                                  Figure 3. 125


                     Click on the Apply button.
Tutorial 3   3-121
The following diagram will be displayed. We can keep changing
the settings and click on Apply to see all the various possible
results in the above facility.




                          Figure 3. 126

Let us keep the dialog box open to examine the feature (Animation)
explained in the next section.
3-122   Tutorial 3

                              If some portion of the structure appears truncated, we can bring
                              that portion into view by choosing one of the following methods:


                                  a.   Click on the Zoom Out button      to shrink the size of the
                                       region drawn.
                     Before                                                After




                                Figure 3. 127                         Figure 3. 128




                                  b. Use the Pan button      to physically shift the position of
                                     the structure away from the index.

                     Before                                   After




                              Figure 3. 129                            Figure 3. 130
Tutorial 3   3-123

3.11.6 Animating stress contours

    The same dialog box shown in the previous section may be used to
    obtain the stress contours in an animated view. This is a method of
    getting a “dynamic” instead of static representation of the plot.
    After making the choices as explained in that section, click on the
    Animation tab of that dialog box. Switch on Stress followed by
    Apply.




                               Figure 3. 131

    To stop the animation, click on No Animation and click Apply
    again.
3-124   Tutorial 3

                     3.11.7 Creating AVI Files

                          AVI files are a mechanism by which a dynamic result, such as, a
                          deflection diagram in animation, may be captured and recorded.
                          Presently, this facility is available in STAAD for node deflection,
                          beam section displacement, mode shape and plate stress contour
                          diagrams.

                          The facility in STAAD for creating AVI files is under the Tools
                          menu and is called Create AVI File. These files can then be
                          viewed using tools such as the Windows Media Explorer.




                                                     Figure 3. 132
Tutorial 3   3-125
The following dialog box will appear.




                           Figure 3. 133

In an animated view, the movement from one extremity to the other
is captured as several frames. The number of frames that comprise
such a movement is controlled by specifying a value for Total No.
of Frames. The speed of motion is controlled by the Frame Rate
/sec. The rest of the options in the above dialog box are for the
type of diagram from which the AVI file is to be created. Certain
items such as Mode Shape and Plate Stress contour do not become
active (remain grayed out) if the required data of that type are not
present in the STAAD file, such as a modal extraction, or finite
elements.
3-126   Tutorial 3

                     After making the appropriate selections, click OK. Following this,
                     another dialog box appears, where we are instructed to specify a
                     file name for the .AVI file. Subsequently, we are prompted for the
                     type of video compression. AVI files can be quite large, and
                     compression is a technique by which one may reduce the size of
                     these files.




                                                Figure 3. 134


                     Finally, a message indicating that the operation was successful will
                     appear at the end of the file creation process as shown below.




                                                Figure 3. 135


                     As mentioned earlier, other tools like Windows Media Explorer
                     may be used to view the AVI file. The file with the extension .AVI
                     should be located in the same folder where the STAAD input file is
                     present.
Tutorial 3   3-127

3.11.8 Viewing plate results using element
       query

    Element Query is a facility where several results for a specific
    element can be viewed at the same time from a single dialog box.
    Let us explore this facility for element 4. Select element 4 and
    double click on it. Alternatively, select element 4, and from the
    Tools menu, choose Query – Plate.




                                Figure 3. 136

    The various tabs of the query box enable one to view various types
    of information such as the plate geometry, property constants,
    stresses, etc., for various load cases, as well as print those values.
3-128   Tutorial 3

                     Some typical screens are shown.




                                               Figure 3. 137




                                               Figure 3. 138
Tutorial 3   3-129




Figure 3. 139




Figure 3. 140
3-130   Tutorial 3




                                                Figure 3. 141

                     The length and force units in which the values appear in the above
                     tables can also be modified using the method explained in section
                     3.11.3.
Tutorial 3   3-131

3.11.9 Producing an onscreen report

    Occasionally, we will come across a need to obtain results
    conforming to certain restrictions, such as, say, the resultant node
    displacements for a few selected nodes, for a few selected load
    cases, sorted in the order from low to high, with the values
    reported in a tabular form. The facility which enables us to obtain
    such customized on-screen results is the Report menu on top of the
    screen.

    Let us produce a report consisting of the plate principal stresses,
    for all plates, sorted in the order from Low to High of the Principal
    Maximum Stress (SMAX) for load cases 101 and 102.

    The first step to do this is to select all the plates using the Plates
    Cursor     . Then, go to the Report | Plate Results | Principal
    Stresses menu option as shown below.




                                 Figure 3. 142
3-132   Tutorial 3

                     In the dialog box that appears, select the Loading tab. Make sure
                     that load cases 101 and 102 are selected as shown below.




                                                Figure 3. 143
Tutorial 3   3-133
Next, select the Sorting tab. Choose SMAX under the Sort by
Plate Stress category and set the Sorting Order List from Low to
High. (If we wish to save this report for future use, we may select
the Report tab, provide a title for the report, and turn on the Save
ID option.) Then, click on the OK button.




                            Figure 3. 144
3-134   Tutorial 3

                     The following figure shows the table of maximum principal stress
                     with SMAX values sorted from Low to High.




                                               Figure 3. 145
Tutorial 3   3-135
To print this table, click the right mouse button anywhere within
the table. A list of options will appear.




                             Figure 3. 146

Select the print option to get a hardcopy of the report.

To transfer the contents of this table to a Microsoft Excel file,
click at the top left corner of the table with the left mouse button.
The entire table will become highlighted. Click the right mouse
button and select Copy. Then, open an Excel worksheet, click at
the desired cell and click Paste.
3-136   Tutorial 3

                     3.11.10 Viewing Support Reactions

                         Since supports are located at nodes of the structure, results of this
                         type are available along with other node results like displacements.
                         To view the reactions graphically, click on the Node page on the
                         left side of the screen, and select the Reactions sub-page.




                                                     Figure 3. 147
Tutorial 3   3-137
The reactions at the supports will be displayed on the drawing as
shown below.




                           Figure 3. 148


The six values – namely, the 3 forces along global X, Y and Z, and
the 3 moments Mx, My and Mz, in the global axis system are
displayed in a box for each support node. The words N1, N2, etc.
stand for the node numbers of the supports.
3-138   Tutorial 3

                     We may choose to “un-display” one or more of the 6 terms of each
                     support node in the following manner.

                     From the Results menu, choose View Value.




                                               Figure 3. 149
Tutorial 3   3-139
In the dialog box that comes up, click on the Reactions tab. Let us
switch off Global X and Global Z under the Direct category.
Then, click on the Annotate button followed by the Close button.




                           Figure 3. 150
3-140   Tutorial 3

                     The drawing will now contain only the remaining 4 terms (see
                     figure below).




                                                Figure 3. 151

                     To change the load case for which the reactions are displayed,
                     select the desired case from the load selection box.




                                                Figure 3. 152
Tutorial 3   3-141
For better clarity in viewing the results in the drawing area (and
for reducing the clutter on the screen), a variety of methods are
available. For example, keep the mouse pressed on top of Zoom In
button, and watch the drawing get progressively bigger. Use the
Pan button to physically shift the drawing around. Other options
like Dynamic Zoom and Zoom Window buttons may also be used.
To restore the original view, click on the Display Whole Structure
button. (Some of these options are explained in greater detail in the
‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this manual.)

                Icon          Name


                              Zoom In


                              Pan



                              Dynamic Zoom


                              Zoom Window



                              Display Whole
                              Structure
3-142   Tutorial 3

                     The table on the right side of the screen contains the reaction
                     values for all supports for all selected load cases.




                                             Figure 3. 153

                     This table can also be displayed from any mode by clicking on the
                     View menu, choosing Tables, and switching on Support Reactions.
Tutorial 3   3-143
The method explained in section 3.11.3 may be used to change the
units in which these values are displayed. The summary tab
contains the maximum value for each of the 6 degrees of freedom
along with the load case number responsible for it.




                        Figure 3. 154

This brings us to the conclusion of this tutorial. Additional help on
using plates is available in Examples 9, 10 and 18 in the Examples
Manual.
3-144   Tutorial 3
4-1




Tutorial Problem 4: Interoperability
(using STAAD.Pro and STAAD.etc)

                                                            Section       4
         This tutorial is relevant only for users who have
         purchased the program called STAAD.etc. Since this
         tutorial is created using the Demo CD, the user will
         not have the ability to alter certain input items.

         This chapter provides a step-by-step tutorial on using the
         interoperability features between STAAD.Pro and the program
         called STAAD.etc. The structure created in Tutorial Problem 1 will
         be used as the basis for this tutorial. This tutorial covers the
         following topics:

         •   Understanding STAAD.etc
         •   Description of the tutorial problem
         •   Using the Interactive Mode in STAAD.Pro
         •   Designing a footing based on results from STAAD.Pro
         •   Designing a base plate based on results from STAAD.Pro
         •   Saving the Interactive Design information as a STAAD.etc file
4-2   Tutorial 4

      4.1 Understanding STAAD.etc
                   STAAD.etc is the “engineer’s structural toolkit” containing various
                   component analysis and design module groups including
                   foundations, masonry, timber, steel, concrete and general analysis.
                   As a standalone product, STAAD.etc can be used to design small
                   portal frames, continuous beams, footings, retaining walls one-way
                   slabs, connections, shear walls and much more. STAAD.etc allows
                   the engineer to complete the design cycle on the primary structure
                   by analyzing and designing several structural components or
                   accessories within the STAAD.Pro environment using
                   STAAD.Pro’s results database.
Tutorial 4   4-3

4.2 Description of the tutorial problem
          Using the structure created in Tutorial Problem 1 as the primary
          model, STAAD.etc will be utilized to analyze and design a footing
          and a base plate inside the STAAD.Pro environment for the model.
4-4   Tutorial 4

      4.3 Using the Interactive Mode in STAAD.Pro
                   Start the STAAD.Pro 2006 Program from your STAAD.Pro
                   program folder, as explained in Section 1.2. From File | Open,
                   open the file “Tut_01_portal.std” from the
                   ../SPRO2006/STAAD/Examp/US directory as shown below (please
                   note that the .. represents the drive or root directory the program
                   was installed in) or from wherever the file was saved:




                                               Figure 4. 1

                   The picture in the preview pane is made possible by a file with the
                   extension .emf. When a model is created using the graphical
                   method, or when a model is saved from the graphical mode, the
                   .emf file is created alongside the .std file. If you follow the
                   procedure explained in Section 1.5 of this manual for creating
                   tutorial 1, the Tut-01-portal.emf file will be produced, and if you
                   re-open the Tut-01-portal.std subsequently, you will see the picture
                   in the preview pane.
Tutorial 4   4-5
     If you have not performed the analysis and design for
     “Tut_01_portal.std”, please execute the following steps:

1.   After opening the file in STAAD.Pro, go to Analyze | Run
     Analysis from the top menu bar as shown below.




                                  Figure 4. 2


2.   A dialog box providing a choice of engines to run the file with will
     then popup. Select the STAAD Analysis engine as the default
     engine and click on the Run Analysis button.




                                  Figure 4. 3

3.   If the analysis is successfully completed, a dialog box showing the
     different steps STAAD took to analyze the structure will come up.
     Click Done to proceed to the next step. If a message reporting
     errors in the input file were found, please refer to Tutorial 1 to
     rectify those problems.
4-6   Tutorial 4




                                               Figure 4. 4

                   Starting the Interactive Mode in STAAD.Pro

                   After “tut_01_portal.std” has been successfully analyzed and
                   designed, click on Mode | Interactive Designs | Component
                   Design from the top menu bar as shown in the next figure. If this
                   menu item is “grayed-out”, the STAAD.etc program has not been
                   installed properly or is missing. Please install or reinstall the
                   STAAD.etc program from the STAAD.suite CD.
Tutorial 4   4-7




                          Figure 4. 5

The STAAD.etc interface to STAAD.Pro is shown in the bottom
right-hand corner of the screen. At the time of release of
STAAD.Pro 2003 Build 1001, there are only three STAAD.etc
modules interfaced with STAAD.Pro 2003. These modules are the
footing, slab and base plate analysis/design as shown below.




                          Figure 4. 6
4-8   Tutorial 4

                   Using the Drag and Drop Facilities

                   To run any of the STAAD.etc modules, hold the left-mouse button
                   down over a particular module and drag it to a specific joint or
                   node in the main structure window.




                                              Figure 4. 7
Tutorial 4   4-9

4.4 Designing a Footing based on results from
    STAAD.Pro
         In this section of the tutorial, a footing will be designed for node
         #1. The details of the input of the footing will not be discussed
         here. For further information about the input for the STAAD.etc
         footing module, please refer to the STAAD.etc HTML Help
         accompanied with the STAAD.etc program.

         To identify Node #1, click on Select | By List | Nodes… from the
         main menu bar. Select number 1 in the list box.




             Figure 4. 8                                Figure 4. 9
4-10   Tutorial 4
                    Node #1 is now marked by a red dot in the main structure window
                    as shown below.




                                               Figure 4. 10


                    Once Node #1 is identified, drag the footing icon from the
                    Interactive Design dialog box and drop it over #1. The input for
                    the footing pops up. Provide the name of the footing in the Job
                    Name edit box.
Tutorial 4   4-11




                           Figure 4. 11

If the Column Depth and Width are not provided under the Column
Data box, obtain those data (either from the member query or from
the property table) and provide them. STAAD.etc defines the
Column Depth as the dimension of the supported column along the
local Y axis of the column. The Column Width is defined as the
dimension of the supported column along the local Z axis of the
column.
4-12   Tutorial 4

                    Leave the Concrete Pedestal option unchecked. Switch to the
                    Loading tab and select the Dead Load as Load Case 1 (the
                    Selfweight load case) and the Live Load and Wind Load as None.
                    Check the Reversal of Wind option off as shown below.




                                               Figure 4. 12

                    Keep all the other data as the defaults. Click on OK to begin
                    designing the footing for Node #1. If the design completes
                    successfully, the results for the footing will be displayed in a
                    separate window. Each interactive design module produces a
                    separate results window containing three tabs at the bottom. These
                    tabs are Results, Calculations and Output Drawing.
Tutorial 4   4-13
                The different facets of the results output are as follows:

   Tab              Description                                Sample




               Displays all results (analysis
  Results
                 and design) in tabulated
                           form




                Displays the step-by-step
                intermediate calculations
Calculations
               explaining the derivation of
                        all results.




  Output         Detailed output drawing
 Drawing                schematic




                                       Figure 4. 13
4-14   Tutorial 4
                    Editing and Viewing Interactive Designs

                    All interactive design results for a particular STAAD file are listed
                    in the Interactive Design dialog box which can be brought up by
                    clicking on Mode | Interactive Design from the top menu bar. To
                    view any interactive design result, select the design job and click
                    on View Results. To edit any job, select the job and click on Edit
                    Job to bring up the input dialog box with the existing data.




                                                 Figure 4. 14

                    STAAD.Pro also has the ability to design group footings. This
                    tutorial does not cover the basics of running a group footing inside
                    of STAAD.Pro.
Tutorial 4   4-15

4.5 Designing a base plate based on results from
    STAAD.Pro
         The base plate and other modules in the Interactive Design mode of
         STAAD.Pro are similar to the footing module explained
         previously. A brief description of the base plate input will be
         explained here. For a detailed description of the base plate
         module, please refer to the STAAD.etc HTML Help.

         Following the steps in the footing module tutorial in Section 4.4,
         the input for a base plate can be supplied after the base plate icon
         is dragged and dropped over a particular support joint. A base plate
         can be designed only for a member with a support.




                                     Figure 4. 15

         To check the adequacy of an existing base plate for a specfic load
         case, provide the Plate Length, Plate Width and Thickness of that
         plate. However, to have the program design a base plate, set the
         Plate Length, Plate Width and Thickness to zero (0).
4-16   Tutorial 4

       4.6 Saving the interactive design as a STAAD.etc
           file
                    All interactive design jobs are saved with the STAAD.Pro “.std”
                    input file as a separate file with the extension “.etc”. For example,
                    in this tutorial, the STAAD file is named tut_01_portal.std .
                    Thus, the name of the interactive design file will be
                    tut_01_portal.etc and will be saved in the same directory as the
                    “tut_01_portal.std” file.

                    STAAD.Pro is capable of inherently reading STAAD.etc files
                    without the need for importing or exporting the file. Similarly, any
                    “.etc” file generated by STAAD.Pro can be read in STAAD.etc.
                    This is particularly useful when the engineer wants to design other
                    structural components on top of the ones already produced in
                    STAAD.Pro.
4-17
4-18
Frequently Performed Tasks
Tutorial Staad-Pro
FPT-1


1. Selecting nodes, beams, plates, etc.


                       The Selection Toolbar
FPT-2    Frequently Performed Tasks




        Icon             Corresponding Menu/Sub-menu   Purpose          Description
                         options

                         Select | Nodes Cursor
                                                       Used to select   First, select the Nodes
                                                       nodes            Cursor. Then, click on
                                                       graphically      the nodes you wish to
                                                                        select. To select
                                                                        multiple nodes, hold
        Nodes                                                           down the Control key
        Cursor                                                          while selecting, or
                                                                        create a rubber-band
                                                                        style window around
                                                                        the desired nodes.




                         Select | Beams Cursor         Used to select   First, select the Beams
                                                       beams            Cursor. Then, click on
                                                       graphically      the members you wish
                                                                        to select. To select
                                                                        multiple members, hold
        Beams                                                           down the Control key
        Cursor                                                          while selecting, or
                                                                        create a rubber-band
                                                                        style window around
                                                                        the desired beams.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-3


Icon      Corresponding Menu/Sub-menu   Purpose          Description
          options


          Select | Plates Cursor        Used to select   First, select the Plates
                                        plates           Cursor. Then, click on
                                        graphically      the plates you wish to
                                                         select. To select
                                                         multiple plates, hold
Plates                                                   down the Control key
Cursor                                                   while selecting, or
                                                         create a rubber-band
                                                         style window around
                                                         the desired plates.




          Select | Surface Cursor       Used to select   First, select the
                                        surface          Surface Cursor. Then,
                                        graphically      click on the surface
                                                         you wish to select. To
                                                         select multiple
Surface                                                  surfaces, hold down
Cursor                                                   the Control key while
                                                         selecting, or create a
                                                         rubber-band style
                                                         window around the
                                                         desired surfaces.
FPT-4    Frequently Performed Tasks


        Icon             Corresponding Menu/Sub-menu   Purpose              Description
                         options


                         Select | Solids Cursor        Used to select       First, select the Solids
                                                       solids               Cursor. Then, click on
                                                       graphically          the solids you wish to
                                                                            select. To select
                                                                            multiple solids, hold
        Solids                                                              down the Control key
        Cursor                                                              while selecting, or
                                                                            create a rubber-band
                                                                            style window around
                                                                            the desired solids.




                         Select | Geometry Cursor      Used to select       First, select the
                                                       any geometry         Geometry Cursor.
                                                       graphically. It is   Then, click on the
                                                       a mechanism for      entity you wish to
                                                       selecting nodes,     select. To select
        Geometry                                       beams, plates        multiple entities, hold
        Cursor                                         and solids, or,      down the Control key
                                                       any combination      while selecting, or
                                                       of these,            create a rubber-band
                                                       simultaneously.      style window around
                                                                            the desired entities.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-5


Icon           Corresponding Menu/Sub-menu    Purpose            Description
               options

               Select | Load Edit Cursor
                                              Used to            First, select the Load
                                              graphically        Edit Cursor. Then,
                                              select a           double-click on the
                                              component of an    diagram of the load
                                              existing load      component you wish to
Load Edit                                     case for           edit.
Cursor                                        modification.




               Select | Support Edit Cursor
                                              Used to            First select the Support
                                              graphically        Edit Cursor. Then,
                                              select a support   double-click on the
                                              whose              support icon at the
                                              parameters one     node where you wish
Support Edit                                  may wish to        to modify the details of
Cursor                                        modify.            the existing support.
FPT-6    Frequently Performed Tasks


        Icon             Corresponding Menu/Sub-menu    Purpose           Description
                         options

                         Select | Release Edit Cursor
                                                        Used to           First, select the
                                                        graphically       Release Edit Cursor.
                                                        select and        Then, double-click on
                                                        modify an         the member on which a
                                                        existing member   currently defined
                                                        release           START or END release
        Release Edit                                    specification     condition has to be
        Cursor                                                            modified.




                         Select | Text Cursor
                                                        Used to enter     To edit any pre-created
                                                        the mode for      text, first, select the
                                                        editing pre-      Text Label Cursor.
                                                        created text      Then, double-click on
                                                        labels            the text that you wish
                                                                          to modify.
        Select Text
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-7


Icon        Corresponding Menu/Sub-menu   Purpose             Description
            options


                                          Enables the user    Please refer to
                                                                               nd
                                          to select           STAAD.Pro 2004 2
                                          multiple types of   Edition Release
                                          geometric           Report.
Filtered                                  entities (nodes,
Selection                                 beams,
                                          surfaces, etc.)
                                          with specific
                                          attributes in one
                                          pass.
FPT-8   Frequently Performed Tasks



                 2. Viewing the structure from different angles


                                        The Rotation Toolbar
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-9




Icon          Description                          Example


              Displays the structure as seen
              from the front. When the
              global Y axis is vertical, this is
              the elevation view, as looking
              towards the negative direction
View From     of the Z-axis.
+Z




              Displays the structure as seen
              from the back. When the
              global Y axis is vertical, this is
              the elevation view, as seen
              looking towards the positive
              direction of the Z-axis.
View From -
Z




              Displays the structure as seen
              from the right side. When the
              global Y axis is vertical, this is
              the side elevation, as seen
              looking towards the negative
View From     direction of the X-axis.
+X
FPT-10   Frequently Performed Tasks


                 Icon            Description                          Example


                                 Displays the structure as seen
                                 from the left side. When the
                                 global Y axis is vertical, this is
                                 the side elevation, as seen
                                 looking towards the positive
                                 direction of the X-axis.
                 View From -
                 X




                                 Displays the structure as seen
                                 from the top looking down.
                                 When the global Y axis is
                                 vertical, this is the plan view,
                                 as seen from the sky looking
                 View From       down.
                 +Y




                                 Displays the structure as if one
                                 is looking up skywards.




                 View From -
                 Y
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-11


Icon        Description                       Example


            Displays the structure in the
            isometric view. The angle
            which defines isometric view is
            generally X = 30, Y = 30, Z = 0

Isometric
View
FPT-12   Frequently Performed Tasks



                  3. Switching on labels for nodes, beams, plates, etc.


                             Labels are a way of identifying the entities we have drawn on the
                             screen. To demonstrate this facility, let us open EXAMP01.std.
                             The structure will look as shown below.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-13

1.   To switch the node and beam labels on, we may utilize any one of
     the following methods:

     a. Click on the Symbols and Labels icon as shown below.




     b. Click the right mouse button anywhere in the drawing area. In
        the dialog box that appears, choose Labels (as shown in the
        figure below).
FPT-14   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             c. Select the View menu followed by the Structure Diagrams
                                option from the top menu bar, and the Labels tab of the dialog
                                box that comes up.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-15

2.   In all of the above three cases, the following Diagrams dialog box
     will appear. Make sure that the Labels tab is selected. Then,
     switch the appropriate labels on and click on OK.
FPT-16   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             The following figure shows the structure with the node and beam
                             labels displayed on it.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-17

3.   To change the font of the node/beam labels, go to the View menu
     and select the Options command. Then, select the appropriate tab
     (Node Labels / Beam labels) from the Options dialog box. Choose
     the Font option and make the necessary changes.
FPT-18   Frequently Performed Tasks



                  4.        Displaying a portion of the model by isolating it from
                            the rest of the structure

                              Sometimes, the large number of entities that are drawn on the
                              screen may make it difficult to clearly see the details at any
                              particular region of the structure. In such cases, one is confronted
                              with the task of de-cluttering the screen or looking at specific
                              regions or entities while removing the rest of the structure from
                              the view.

                              There are different methods in STAAD.Pro by which the user can
                              view a portion of the structure. The following pages demonstrate
                              three different methods.

                              Method 1 – View | New View

                              Steps:

                       1.     To demonstrate this method, let us open EXAMP08.STD file. The
                              structure will look as shown below.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-19

2.   Let us say that we wish to view only the members which are at the
     midheight level. The first step to doing this is to select those
     members. The quickest way to select them is to bring up the View

     From + Z        and creating a rubber-band around them, after
     making sure that the Beams Cursor        is the active cursor.




3.   To visually verify that the correct members have been selected,

     click on the Isometric View icon        . The selected members will
     appear in one color and the rest of the structure in another.
FPT-20   Frequently Performed Tasks

                     4.      Next, either click the right mouse button and select the New View
                             option or, pull down the View menu and select the New View
                             option.




                     5.      In either case, the following dialog box comes up. These radio
                             buttons determine whether the selected view would be opened in a
                             new (‘child’) window or whether it would replace the current
                             (‘parent’) view window. Let us select the Create a new window
                             for the view option and click on the OK button.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-21

     The portion of the structure that we selected will now be displayed
     in a new window as shown below. We can create more than one
     ‘child’ view window this way.




     All sorts of operations can be performed inside the ‘New View’
     such as adding and deleting members, assigning properties, loads,
     supports, etc. A new view of a selected portion offers the
     advantage of de-cluttering the screen and limiting the displayed
     objects to just a few chosen entities.

6.   To return to the ‘parent’ view window, simply close the new view
     (‘child’) window.
FPT-22   Frequently Performed Tasks

                     7.      Next, let us try the Display the view in the active window option.
                             Follow steps 2 to 4. Then, select the Display the view in the
                             active window option and click on the OK button.




                             The original structure will be hidden and, the portion of the
                             structure that we selected will instead be displayed in the current
                             (‘parent’) window as shown below.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-23

     We may restore the original view of the structure by simply
     clicking on the Display Whole Structure icon.




     These new views may be saved by going to the View | View
     Management | Save View menu option. Provide a title for the new
     view. These saved views may later be opened by going to the View
     | Open View menu option.


     Method 2 – Tools | Cut Section

     Steps:

1.   To demonstrate this method, let us once again open
     EXAMP08.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
FPT-24   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             We will once again try to view just the members at the mid-height
                             level.

                     2.      Click on the Symbols and Labels icon and in the Diagrams dialog
                             box that comes up, switch the Node Numbers on. The reason for
                             doing this will become evident in the next step.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-25

3.   From the Tools menu, select Cut Section.
FPT-26   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             The following dialog box comes up.




                             The Range By Joint method

                             Since the beams of the mid-height level happen to contain joint #
                             10 (or any of the joint numbers from 7 to 12), it would be
                             convenient if we could instruct the program to display the entities
                             lying in the X-Z plane, and passing through any one of those joints
                             7 to 12. The facilities of the Range By Joint tab enable us to do
                             that.

                     4.      Let us select that tab (it happens to be the default). Here, we can
                             select the plane of the section by clicking on one of the options –
                             X-Y, Y-Z, or X-Z. We have to choose the X-Z plane for our
                             example. Then, in the Node # drop down list, provide a joint that
                             lies on the sectional plane. In our example, we may choose any one
                             of the nodes between 7 and 12. Let us choose node # 10. Click on
                             the OK button.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-27

     The following figure shows the cut portion of the original structure
     displayed in the drawing area.




5.   To restore the original view, simply click on the Display Whole
     Structure icon.




     Alternatively, go to the dialog box shown in step 4 and click on
     the Show All button.
FPT-28   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             The Range By Min/Max method

                             Steps:

                             Another convenient way of choosing the beams at the mid-height
                             level is to specify that those beams lie in the X-Z plane between
                             the Y range values of 12ft - a and 12ft + a, where, “a” is an
                             arbitrary value such as say, 2ft.

                     6.      To do this, let us select the Range By Min/Max tab. Here, we can
                             again select the plane of the section by clicking on one of the
                             options – X-Y, Y-Z, or X-Z. We have to choose the X-Z plane for
                             our example. The Minimum and Maximum edit boxes represent the
                             boundary distances along the axis perpendicular to the sectional
                             plane. Every object lying between these two distances will be
                             displayed. In our example, let us provide 10 as the Minimum and
                             14 as the Maximum distance. (Before doing so, make sure that the
                             current input units of length, displayed at the bottom right corner
                             of the STAAD program window, are feet.) Then, click on the OK
                             button.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-29

     The following figure shows the cut portion of the original structure
     displayed in the drawing area.




7.   To restore the original view, again, click on the Display Whole
     Structure icon or click on the Show All button in the dialog box
     shown in step 6.
FPT-30   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             The Select to View method

                             For demonstrating this method, instead of viewing specific beams,
                             let us look at the nodes instead.

                             Steps:

                             Using this option, the portion of the structure we wish to view can
                             be selected by specifying the objects which lie in that portion. The
                             Window/Rubber Band option allows us to select the portion of the
                             structure to view by specifying a rubber-band window around it.
                             The View Highlighted Only option displays only the selected
                             (highlighted) objects on screen and, the members and elements we
                             wish to view must be selected before choosing this option. The
                             Select To View option allows us to view only Beams, Plates, and/or
                             Solids, depending on the corresponding check boxes that are
                             activated.

                     8.      For our example, let us choose the Select To View option and
                             check the Nodes check box. Then, click on the OK button as
                             shown below.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-31

     The following figure shows the view of the structure with only the
     nodes displayed.




9.   To restore the original view, click on the Display Whole
     Structure icon or click on the Show All button in the dialog box
     shown in step 8.




     These new views may be saved by going to the View | View
     Management | Save View menu option. Provide a title for the new
     view. These saved views may later be opened by going to the View
     | Open View menu option.
FPT-32   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             Method 3 – View | Zoom

                             The Zoom menu option allows us to zoom in (magnify) or out
                             (reduce) on a portion of the structure, as one would, using a
                             telescope.

                             Steps:

                     1.      To demonstrate this method, let us open EXAMP09.STD file. The
                             structure will look as shown below.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-33

2.   Say, we want to magnify the portion of the structure shown in the
     figure below.




3.   To select the plates as shown in the above figure, click on the
     View From + Z icon. Then, using the Plates Cursor     , select
     the plates by rubber-banding around them as shown below.




     By the way, looking at the model from View From + Y, or, View
     From - X, and using the rubber-band window methods can be just
     as effective in selecting these elements.
FPT-34   Frequently Performed Tasks

                     4.      To restore the original isometric view, click on the Isometric
                             View icon. We do this only to make sure that we have selected the
                             correct entities.




                     5.      To magnify the selected portion of the structure, either click on the
                             Zoom Window icon or, pull down the View menu and select the
                             Zoom | Zoom Window menu option as shown below.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-35

     The cursor changes as shown below.




6.   Using the cursor, drag a window around the selected portion of the
     structure.

     The magnified view of the selected portion of the structure will
     now be displayed in the drawing area as shown below.
FPT-36   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             If we click on the Zoom In icon, it magnifies or enlarges the view
                             of the structure even further by a pre-defined factor. You can keep
                             the mouse cursor pressed over the Zoom In or Zoom Out icons,
                             and the screen will continuously refresh to draw the structure
                             larger or smaller.




                             To display the enlarged view in a new window, use the Dynamic
                             Zoom icon instead of the Zoom Window option.




                             The region you wish to see will have to be selected by creating a
                             rubber-band window around it. That region will now be displayed
                             in a new window in the drawing area as shown in the next figure.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-37




7.   To restore the view of the full structure, click on the Display
     Whole Structure icon.




     These new views may be saved by going to the View | View
     Management | Save View menu option. Provide a title for the new
     view. These saved views may later be opened by going to the View
     | Open View menu option.
FPT-38   Frequently Performed Tasks



                  5. Creating Groups

                             Group names are a means for easily identifying a collection of
                             entities like Beams, Plates or Solids using a single moniker. By
                             grouping these entities, we need to assign attributes such as
                             member properties and material constants just to the group, a
                             simple process, compared to the task of assigning them to the
                             individual members.

                             Steps:

                     1.      To demonstrate this, let us open EXAMP01.STD file. The structure
                             will look as shown below.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-39

     Let us classify the members of the topmost level of this structure
     into three groups – Top Chords, Bottom Chords and Transverse
     Truss.

     Top Chords:

2.   Make sure that the Beams Cursor        has been selected. Then,
     using the mouse, select the inclined members as shown in the
     figure below.
FPT-40   Frequently Performed Tasks

                     3.      From the Tools menu, choose Create New Group.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-41

4.   In the Give Group Name dialog box, type _TOPCOR for Group
     name (Group Names must begin with the underscore ‘_’ character).
     Since group names can be assigned to Nodes, Beams, Plates,
     Solids as well as a general category called Geometry, it is very
     important that we choose the proper entity type. Hence, specify the
     Select Type as Beam.




5.   Click on the OK button. Notice that the Assign Methods in the
     Create Group dialog box is presently set to Associate to Selected
     Geometry. Click on the Associate button.




     Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the highlighted
     members. This is necessary before we start selecting the members
     for the next group name.
FPT-42   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             Bottom Chords:

                     6.      Using the mouse, select the bottom chords as shown in the figure
                             below.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-43

7.   Next, to bring up the Give Group Name dialog box, click on the
     Create button. Then, follow steps 4 and 5 and assign the Group
     Name _BOTCOR to these members.




     Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the highlighted
     members.
FPT-44   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             Transverse Truss:

                     8.      Using the mouse, select the Transverse Truss members as shown in
                             the figure below.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-45

9.   Next, follow step 7 except for specifying the Group Name as
     _TRNTRUS.




     Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the highlighted
     members. Also, Close the Create Group dialog box.

     Three groups have now been created. If we now go to the Select
     menu, an option called By Group Name should be available. Let us
     click on that option, and the following dialog box comes up.
FPT-46   Frequently Performed Tasks




                             It is apparent that we can now select the members using the group
                             name method. If the check boxes for Show Label are switched off,
                             labels such as beam numbers will not be displayed for these
                             specific members, even if the beam numbering icon is switched on
                             for the entire structure.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-47


6. Displaying Loads on the screen


      Steps:

 1.   To demonstrate this feature, let us open EXAMP08.STD file. The
      structure will look as shown below.
FPT-48   Frequently Performed Tasks

                     2.      The easiest way to display a load is to click on the Loads icon as
                             shown below. To choose a specific load, we can click in the list
                             box called Active Load and choose the one we want.




                             Alternatively, we may pull the View menu down and select the
                             Structure Diagrams menu option. In the Diagrams dialog box that
                             opens, select the Loads and Results tab. Check the Loads check
                             box and select the load case we want from the Load Case list box.
                             Then, click on the Apply button.




                             Drag the dialog box out of the way if it obstructs the view of the
                             structure.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-49

The following figure shows load case 1 displayed on our structure.
FPT-50   Frequently Performed Tasks

                     3.      We can change the color in which load icons are drawn. Click on
                             the color button alongside the Loads checkbox, and make a new
                             choice from the color palette (see figure below).




                             Let us assign say, blue color, as shown in the above figure. Select
                             load case 2 from the Load Case list box.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-51

The following figure shows load case 2 displayed (in blue) on our
structure.
FPT-52   Frequently Performed Tasks



                  7. Displaying Load Values on the screen


                             Steps:

                     1.      In the previous exercise, we saw the method for turning on load
                             icons, but not the numeric value of those loads. To view load
                             values, let us open EXAMP01.STD file. The structure will look as
                             shown below.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-53

2.   Let us first display the load by clicking on the Loads icon    .
     After this, click the right mouse button and choose the Labels
     option. Alternatively, we may click on the Symbols and Labels
     icon      or go to View | Structure Diagrams and select the Labels
     tab in the Diagrams dialog box.
FPT-54   Frequently Performed Tasks

                     3.      The dialog box shown below appears. Switch on the Load Values
                             option under the Loading Display Options category as shown
                             below.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-55

The following figure shows our structure with the load values
displayed on it.
FPT-56   Frequently Performed Tasks

                     4.      To change the unit in which load values are displayed, go to Tools
                             | Set Current Display Unit menu command.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-57

In the Options dialog box that comes up, select the Force Units
tab. Then, change the selection under the Force, Distributed
Force, etc. options as shown below.




The following figure shows our structure with the load values
displayed in KN/m.
FPT-58   Frequently Performed Tasks

                  8. Structural Tool Tip Options


                             Structural tool tips offer a facility for displaying any customized
                             input or output information about a node, beam, plate or solid
                             element when the mouse cursor is placed over the structural entity.
                             The tool tips are similar to the ones displayed when the mouse
                             cursor hovers over a toolbar icon. When the mouse cursor is
                             moved away from that spot, the information displayed is switched
                             off too.

                             To activate the structural tool tips, go to View | Structural Tool
                             Tip Options from the top menu.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-59

The dialog box shown in the figure below will prompt for the data
to be displayed when the mouse hovers a particular structural
entity.




To turn the structural tool tips on or off, check the Show Tool Tip
box in the upper left hand corner. The Tip Delay box signifies the
amount of time it takes from when the mouse cursor first appears
over an entity to when the tool tip actually pops up. This number is
expressed in milliseconds (i.e. 1000 = 1 second). The options
(items that can be displayed) for each entity are shown under the
Options box. A check mark signifies that the particular data item
will be displayed in the tool tip. An option with a “+” next to it
signifies that further options can be enabled or disabled.
FPT-60   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             The figure below shows the options that can be turned on or off for
                             Node Displacements.




                             A red “X” indicates the data will not be shown in the tool tip.
                             Simply click on the check box to turn an option on or off.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-61

The resulting tool tip that is displayed from the options chosen in
the previous figure is shown in the figure below.




The tool tips automatically display the results for the active load
case. All values are reported in the current display units.
FPT-62   Frequently Performed Tasks



                  9.        Identifying Beam Start and End

                              When assigning attributes like member releases or member offsets,
                              one additional item of information which accompanies this
                              information is whether that attribute is applied at the “START”
                              node of a member or the “END” node. Hence, there has to be a
                              way to quickly identify these two points without mistaking one for
                              the other.

                              Steps:

                       1.     To demonstrate this, let us open EXAMP01.STD file. The structure
                              will look as shown below.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-63

2.   There are two different ways to identify the start and/or end of a
     beam:

         a)   simply place the mouse over a specific beam. The
              resulting tool tip will display the start node and end node
              of that beam in two distinct colors along with their
              corresponding coordinates. Of course, it is necessary to
              have the tool tips display turned on for this method to
              work.
FPT-64   Frequently Performed Tasks

                                  b)   Click the right mouse button anywhere in the drawing
                                       area and choose Labels.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-65

The following Diagrams dialog box will appear. Make sure
that the Labels tab is selected. Then, switch the Beam Ends
option on. To alter the color in which the start and/or end is
displayed, simply click on the color palette next to the Start
Color and/or End Color options and choose the color you
want. Then, click on Apply for the changes to take effect
immediately. Click on OK to close the dialog box.
FPT-66   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             The following figure shows the structure with the start and end of
                             all beams displayed in two separate colors.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-67


10.   Plotting from STAAD.Pro


      Explained below are 5 methods for plotting the drawing of the
      STAAD model and STAAD result diagrams.

      Method 1 : Using the Print Current View option

 1.   We shall use example problem 14 to illustrate this feature. Open
      the example. The model should appear as shown below.
FPT-68   Frequently Performed Tasks

                     2.      To plot this picture, click on the Print Current View icon as
                             shown in the following figure.




                     3.      The standard Windows Print dialog box will appear asking you to
                             choose the printer to which you wish to plot the drawing.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-69

4.   If you wish to catch a glimpse of the plot, as it would appear on
     paper, select the Print Preview Current View option.




     A preview screen similar to the one shown below will be
     displayed.
FPT-70   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             Method 2 : Using the Take Picture option

                     1.      Bring up the diagram of the STAAD model you wish to print. On
                             the Print toolbar of the STAAD screen, you will find an icon of a
                             camera called Take Picture.




                             Alternatively, this option can be accessed from Edit | Take Picture.




                     2.      A dialog box will appear prompting you to provide a Picture ID
                             and caption.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-71

3.   Next, select Report Setup from the File menu, or click on the
     Report Setup icon as shown below.




4.   A Report Setup dialog box will appear. In the Items tab, select
     Pictures from the available list of items.
FPT-72   Frequently Performed Tasks

                     5.      If more than one picture is available, select the one you wish to
                             plot by pressing the    button. Next, go to the Picture Album
                             tab and switch on Full Page. Click OK.




                     6.      From the File menu, select Print – Report. The diagram will be
                             plotted.

                             Alternatively, from the File menu, select Export Report | MS
                             Word File.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-73




7.   In the Save As dialog box, type in the name of the “.doc” file you
     want and click on the Save button. In the template dialog box,
     select the Normal template.




     Microsoft Word will now start building the file with the picture in
     it. Once this task is completed, Word will open this file, and
     program can be accessed from the Windows Taskbar. Browse the
     file, and if you are sure the image meets your needs, select Print
     from the File menu and follow the instructions.
FPT-74   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             Method 3 : Using the Export View option

                     1.      STAAD.Pro has a facility to export the drawing to a graphic image
                             file. The icon for this facility is called Export View and is
                             available in the Print toolbar.




                     2.      When the diagram that you wish to plot is displayed on the screen,
                             click on the Export View icon. Select the graphic format in which
                             you wish to save the file (i.e., .bmp, .jpg, .tif, .gif, etc.)




                             Provide a file name and save the file.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-75

3.   Then go to a document publishing or graphic editing program such
     as Microsoft Word or Adobe Photoshop. Import the drawing from
     the file saved above. In Word, this can be done using Insert |
     Picture | From File. Once you are sure the image meets your
     needs, select Print from the File menu and follow the instructions.

     Method 4 : Using the Copy Picture option

1.   Highlight the window containing the diagram that you wish to plot.
     This can be done by making sure the title bar of that window has
     the color which indicates that it is in focus. From the Edit menu,
     choose Copy Picture.




2.   Next, run a graphics program which offers facilities for handling
     graphic images such as Microsoft Paint, Adobe Photoshop, etc. In
     the Edit menu of that program, select Paste. You will notice that
     the drawing from the STAAD window is now pasted in that
     program. Using the tools provided by the graphics program, you
     can modify the drawing if you wish. Once you are sure the image
     meets your needs, select Print from the File menu and follow the
     instructions.
FPT-76   Frequently Performed Tasks

                             Method 5 : Using the Windows Clipboard

                     1.      When the diagram that you wish to plot is displayed on the screen,
                             press the "Print Screen" key on your keyboard or “Shift-Print
                             Screen", depending on how your keyboard is set up. The entire
                             image currently in view will be copied to the Windows clipboard.
                             Next, run a graphics program which offers facilities for cropping
                             portions of a graphic image (such as Microsoft Paint, Hijaak, Full
                             Shot, etc.). In the Edit menu of those programs, select Paste. You
                             will notice that the entire STAAD screen including the diagram,
                             menus, toolbar icons, tables, etc., which were in view, are part of
                             the pasted image. Using the tools provided by the graphics
                             program, crop the image so as to preserve just the drawing and
                             eliminate unwanted portions. Using the File | Print option, print
                             the drawing.
Frequently Performed Tasks   FPT-77
FPT-78   Frequently Performed Tasks

More Related Content

PPTX
Staad Pro Intro
PDF
Steel Structures Design Manual to AS 4100.pdf
PPTX
DESIGN AND ANALAYSIS OF MULTI STOREY BUILDING USING STAAD PRO
PDF
MBA HR PROJECT.pdf
PPTX
staad pro
PPTX
Ectopic Pregnancy
PDF
Steel warehouse design report
PPT
WATERSHED MANAGEMENT - INTRODUCTION
Staad Pro Intro
Steel Structures Design Manual to AS 4100.pdf
DESIGN AND ANALAYSIS OF MULTI STOREY BUILDING USING STAAD PRO
MBA HR PROJECT.pdf
staad pro
Ectopic Pregnancy
Steel warehouse design report
WATERSHED MANAGEMENT - INTRODUCTION

What's hot (20)

PPSX
PDF
Etabs presentation
PDF
Tutorial for design of foundations using safe
PDF
How to model and analyse structures using etabs
PPTX
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF G+3 STOREY BUILDING USING STAAD PRO vi8 Software
PPSX
Design of steel structures Introduction
PDF
Calulation of deflection and crack width according to is 456 2000
PPTX
Design of R.C.C Beam
PDF
Etabs notes-pdf
PPTX
Seismic Analysis
PPTX
post tensioning slabs
PPT
SINGLY REINFORCED BEAM
PDF
Etabs example-rc building seismic load response-
PDF
Sp 34-1987 handbook on reinforcement and detailing
PDF
Analysis and design of multi-storey building using staad.Pro
PPT
footing
PPTX
DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS IN STEEL STRUCTURE
PPTX
Structural analysis and design of multi storey ppt
DOCX
Design & Analysis of G+2 Residential Building Using STAAD Pro
PPT
Analysis and design of building
Etabs presentation
Tutorial for design of foundations using safe
How to model and analyse structures using etabs
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF G+3 STOREY BUILDING USING STAAD PRO vi8 Software
Design of steel structures Introduction
Calulation of deflection and crack width according to is 456 2000
Design of R.C.C Beam
Etabs notes-pdf
Seismic Analysis
post tensioning slabs
SINGLY REINFORCED BEAM
Etabs example-rc building seismic load response-
Sp 34-1987 handbook on reinforcement and detailing
Analysis and design of multi-storey building using staad.Pro
footing
DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS IN STEEL STRUCTURE
Structural analysis and design of multi storey ppt
Design & Analysis of G+2 Residential Building Using STAAD Pro
Analysis and design of building
Ad

Similar to Tutorial Staad-Pro (20)

PDF
Staad pro-getting started &tutorial
PDF
American app examples_2007_complete
PDF
Accelerate Your Apache Spark with Intel Optane DC Persistent Memory
PDF
Sys cat i181e-en-07+sysmac studio
PPTX
Learn Staad. Pro Online
PDF
SE.pdf
PDF
New_Microsoft_PowerPoint_Presentation-1[1].pdf
DOC
John f kiser
PDF
One integrated platform for all activities,from engineering to production
PDF
Comp tia a_220-802_objectives
PDF
dassault-systemes-catia-application-scalability-guide
PDF
CAD/CAM system in terms of hardware classification
PDF
DAOS - Scale-Out Software-Defined Storage for HPC/Big Data/AI Convergence
PPT
chapter-8 standard for CAD/CAM System.ppt
PPTX
Adopting and Managing Teamcenter 8 at Wagstaff
PDF
Comp tia A+(220 802)objectives
PDF
Rashmi_Resume
DOC
Lee+Shanley's+Resume 2016-2
PDF
Quick start manual geode
Staad pro-getting started &tutorial
American app examples_2007_complete
Accelerate Your Apache Spark with Intel Optane DC Persistent Memory
Sys cat i181e-en-07+sysmac studio
Learn Staad. Pro Online
SE.pdf
New_Microsoft_PowerPoint_Presentation-1[1].pdf
John f kiser
One integrated platform for all activities,from engineering to production
Comp tia a_220-802_objectives
dassault-systemes-catia-application-scalability-guide
CAD/CAM system in terms of hardware classification
DAOS - Scale-Out Software-Defined Storage for HPC/Big Data/AI Convergence
chapter-8 standard for CAD/CAM System.ppt
Adopting and Managing Teamcenter 8 at Wagstaff
Comp tia A+(220 802)objectives
Rashmi_Resume
Lee+Shanley's+Resume 2016-2
Quick start manual geode
Ad

More from Nabeh Wildan (6)

PDF
Tether chain, wire, and synthethic for offshore
PDF
Launch analysis
PDF
Rigid body dynamic
PDF
Rigid Body Dynamic
PDF
cross sectional properties of structural members
PDF
Wave force
Tether chain, wire, and synthethic for offshore
Launch analysis
Rigid body dynamic
Rigid Body Dynamic
cross sectional properties of structural members
Wave force

Tutorial Staad-Pro

  • 1. STAAD.Pro 2006 GETTING STARTED AND TUTORIALS A Bentley Solutions Center www.reiworld.com www.bentley.com/staad
  • 2. STAAD.Pro 2006 is a suite of proprietary computer programs of Research Engineers, a Bentley Solutions Center. Although every effort has been made to ensure the correctness of these programs, REI will not accept responsibility for any mistake, error or misrepresentation in or as a result of the usage of these programs. RELEASE 2006, Build 1005 © 2006 Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved. Published July, 2007
  • 3. About STAAD.Pro STAAD.Pro is a general purpose structural analysis and design program with applications primarily in the building industry - commercial buildings, bridges and highway structures, industrial structures, chemical plant structures, dams, retaining walls, turbine foundations, culverts and other embedded structures, etc. The program hence consists of the following facilities to enable this task. 1. Graphical model generation utilities as well as text editor based commands for creating the mathematical model. Beam and column members are represented using lines. Walls, slabs and panel type entities are represented using triangular and quadrilateral finite elements. Solid blocks are represented using brick elements. These utilities allow the user to create the geometry, assign properties, orient cross sections as desired, assign materials like steel, concrete, timber, aluminum, specify supports, apply loads explicitly as well as have the program generate loads, design parameters etc. 2. Analysis engines for performing linear elastic and pdelta analysis, finite element analysis, frequency extraction, and dynamic response (spectrum, time history, steady state, etc.). 3. Design engines for code checking and optimization of steel, aluminum and timber members. Reinforcement calculations for concrete beams, columns, slabs and shear walls. Design of shear and moment connections for steel members. 4. Result viewing, result verification and report generation tools for examining displacement diagrams, bending moment and shear force diagrams, beam, plate and solid stress contours, etc. 5. Peripheral tools for activities like import and export of data from and to other widely accepted formats, links with other popular softwares for niche areas like reinforced and prestressed concrete slab design, footing design, steel connection design, etc. 6. A library of exposed functions called OpenSTAAD which allows users to access STAAD.Pro’s internal functions and routines as well as its graphical commands to tap into STAAD’s database and link input and output data to third-party software written using languages like C, C++, VB, VBA, FORTRAN, Java, Delphi, etc. Thus, OpenSTAAD allows users to link in-house or third-party applications with STAAD.Pro.
  • 4. About the STAAD.Pro Documentation The documentation for STAAD.Pro consists of a set of manuals as described below. These manuals are normally provided only in the electronic format, with perhaps some exceptions such as the Getting Started Manual which may be supplied as a printed book to first time and new-version buyers. All the manuals can be accessed from the Help facilities of STAAD.Pro. Users who wish to obtain a printed copy of the books may contact Research Engineers. REI also supplies the manuals in the PDF format at no cost for those who wish to print them on their own. See the back cover of this book for addresses and phone numbers. Getting Started and Tutorials : This manual contains information on the contents of the STAAD.Pro package, computer system requirements, installation process, copy protection issues and a description on how to run the programs in the package. Tutorials that provide detailed and step-by-step explanation on using the programs are also provided. Examples Manual This book offers examples of various problems that can be solved using the STAAD engine. The examples represent various structural analyses and design problems commonly encountered by structural engineers. Graphical Environment This document contains a detailed description of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of STAAD.Pro. The topics covered include model generation, structural analysis and design, result verification, and report generation. Technical Reference Manual This manual deals with the theory behind the engineering calculations made by the STAAD engine. It also includes an explanation of the commands available in the STAAD command file. International Design Codes This document contains information on the various Concrete, Steel, and Aluminum design codes, of several countries, that are implemented in STAAD. The documentation for the STAAD.Pro Extension component(s) is available separately.
  • 5. Part - I Getting Started System Requirements Installation Start-up
  • 7. Table of Contents 1. Introduction 1 2. Hardware Requirements 2 3. Contents of the STAAD.Pro CD 4 4. Installation 6 5. Copy Protection Device 15 6. Running STAAD.Pro 17 7. Running STAAD.etc 19 8. Running Sectionwizard 20 9. Running STAAD.foundation 21 10. Running Mesher 22
  • 9. 1 1. Introduction STAAD.Pro is an analysis and design software package for structural engineering. This manual is intended to guide users who are new to this software as well as experienced users who want specific information on the basics of using the program. Part-I of this manual describes the following: • Hardware Requirements • Contents of the STAAD.Pro CD • Installation • Copy Protection Device • Running STAAD.Pro Part II of this manual contains tutorials on using STAAD.Pro. The tutorials guide a user through the processes of: • Creating a structural model. This consists of generating the structural geometry, specifying member properties, material constants, loads, analysis and design specifications, etc. • Visualization and verification of the model geometry • Running the STAAD analysis engine to perform analysis and design • Verification of results - graphically and numerically • Report generation and printing • Inter-operability. In other words, using STAAD.Pro in conjunction with other programs created by REI, such as STAAD.etc.
  • 10. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 2 2. Hardware Requirements The following requirements are suggested minimums. Systems with increased capacity provide enhanced performance. • PC with Intel-Pentium or equivalent. • Graphics card and monitor with 1024x768 resolution, 256 color display (16 bit high color recommended). • 128 MB RAM or higher. • Windows NT 4.0 or higher operating system. Windows 95, Windows 98 & Windows Me are no longer supported. The program works best on Windows 2000 and XP operating systems. • Sufficient free space on the hard disk to hold the program and data files. The disk space requirement will vary depending on the modules you are installing. A typical minimum is 500MB free space. • A multi-media ready system with sound card and speakers is needed to run the tutorial movies and slide shows. Note: Additional RAM, disk space, and video memory will enhance the performance of STAAD.Pro. Starting with STAAD.Pro Version 2001, the size of structures that the program can handle has been increased significantly. As a result of this, the minimum amount of physical + virtual memory required by the program also has increased to over 600MB. Users may need to ensure that adequate amounts of virtual memory are available, and in Windows NT and 2000 systems, parameters such as paging file sizes should be large enough or span over multiple drives if the free space on any one drive runs low. Another issue to keep in mind is the location of the “TEMP” parameter as in the “SET TEMP” environment variable in Windows NT and 2000 systems. While performing calculations, depending on the structure size, the program may create gigantic scratch files which are placed in the folder location associated with
  • 11. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 3 the “TEMP” parameter. Users may wish to point the “SET TEMP” variable to a folder on a drive that has disk space sufficiently large to accommodate the requirements for large size structures. Note: The user must have a basic familiarity with Microsoft Windows systems in order to use the software.
  • 12. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 4 3. Contents of the STAAD.Pro CD Typically, a startup screen appears when the CD is placed in the drive. If it does not, you may initiate it by running SPROCD.EXE located at the root folder of the CD (This can be done by clicking on the file named SPROCD.EXE from Windows Explorer). The SPROCD Title screen appears as shown in Figure 1. Figure 1: The SPROCD Title Screen The choices offered by the Title screen are described below: Install STAAD Structural Suite This is the installation module containing the programs STAAD.Pro Version 2006, STAAD.etc, Sectionwizard and STAAD.foundation. STAAD.etc is a program that enables design of structural components such as base plates, bolt groups, cantilever retaining walls, rectangular footings, etc. Sectionwizard is a
  • 13. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 5 program for calculating properties such as area, moments of inertia, section modulii, torsional constants, etc., of various cross sections. STAAD.foundation is a program for designing reinforced concrete pile caps and pile groups, mat foundations, individual footings, etc. In order to use STAAD.etc, Sectionwizard and STAAD.foundation to their full capability, users must have purchased them as additional items of software. In the absence of a valid license to use them, those modules will work only in a demonstration mode. The installation procedure is explained in detail in the next section. View STAAD.Pro Manuals This takes the user to another screen which displays links to various STAAD.Pro manuals. Note: STAAD.beam is not a part of the STAAD.Pro family of products. You need to purchase it separately. Install STAAD.beam STAAD.beam is a utility type of program for designing simple steel beams. Its usefulness lies in its ease of use, and its ability to create reports of the detailed calculations that goes into the design of members per standard codes like AISC ASD and AISC LRFD. Exit Exits the SPROCD program. All online documentation that comes with the program is created in HTML format. These may be accessed using any Internet browser such as Microsoft’s Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. A set of multi-media movies which demonstrate the procedure for using STAAD.Pro are accessible after installing the program. They can be accessed from the Help menu of the main screen of the program. These too can be viewed using a web browser.
  • 14. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 6 4. Installation If you receive a document titled Installation Notes, it will supercede all other related instructions. Close all applications before installing STAAD.Pro. Typically, a startup screen appears when the CD is placed in the drive. If it does not, you may initiate it by running SPROCD.EXE located at the root folder of the CD (This can be done by clicking on the file named SPROCD.EXE from Windows Explorer). For an explanation of the different facilities offered by the SPROCD program, please refer to the previous section. Note: In Windows NT, Windows 2000, and Windows XP systems, you have to log in with administrative rights before commencing installation. To commence installation, select the option named Install STAAD Structural Suite. Standard installation procedure available with any software running on Microsoft Windows is followed and hence is self-explanatory.
  • 15. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 7 Users installing the commercial version of the program will encounter the following screen. Figure 2: Customer Information & Serial Number If an older version of STAAD.Pro has already been installed in the machine, the serial number information will show up automatically in this dialog box. If STAAD.Pro is being installed for the first time in the machine, the Serial number box will be blank. In that case, enter the serial number provided in the CD case. If you are under Bentley Select Contract, you will be asked to confirm that you will be using a Bentley SELECT License by checking the box titled ‘I am under Bentley Select Contract’. This will provide the serial number that is required for this method of security only.
  • 16. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 8 When this box is checked, the following confirmation message box will be displayed. Figure 2a: Customer Information One of the initial screens you will encounter is the one shown in Figure 3. It pertains to the type of software security system that you purchased with STAAD.Pro. SELECT XM system refers to Bentley’s SELECT Server based licensing system .A Local Security generally refers to a hardware lock, which is an adapter- like device that is placed on the parallel or USB port of your computer. It could also be a software based system (instead of a hardlock), in which case, it will be a software license which binds STAAD.Pro to the specific computer you are installing it on. Network Security refers to a system that supports simultaneous multiple-user access. A separate instruction document containing the steps for network installations is provided to users who have opted for this latter type. Please refer to the file "Quickstart.pdf" located in the CD for further description of these systems.
  • 17. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 9 Figure 3: Selection of security system type If you have purchased SELECT XM license for the products, please refer to Quick Start & Troubleshooting Guide to understand how to install and configure SELECT XM licenses. If you do not have SELECT XM license information, you can still choose the “SELECT XM License” option during installation. The program will run in Trial Mode for 15 days. You should complete the SELECT XM License configuration within that period.
  • 18. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 10 If you choose Local Security, you are asked to select the type of hardware lock supplied to you, or the software license if that is applicable. The name of the lock is engraved on the cover of the lock. Make sure the type of lock you choose from Figure 4 matches that name. This is absolutely necessary to ensure that the program functions to its full capacity. Please note that if you do not have a license for STAAD.etc, Sectionwizard and/or STAAD.foundation, they will work only in the Demonstration mode. Figure 4: Selection of Local Security type
  • 19. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 11 You may install the program in any folder of your choice. A default folder name is supplied to you. Figure 5: Selection of the Installation Folder
  • 20. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 12 The next dialog box seeks confirmation from you as to whether you wish to install all the programs shown in the list. Advanced Mesher is a standalone program for generating finite element meshes for panel type entities like walls and slabs and is available for those who want advanced meshing facilities besides those which are built into the STAAD.Pro software. OpenSTAAD is a library of functions which enables users to access input and output data from their STAAD.Pro projects for extraction into their own applications. While Advanced Mesher and OpenSTAAD are free utilities supplied along with STAAD.Pro, the remainder of the programs in the list require your copy-protection device/system to support those. If you do not wish to have any specific item(s) installed, uncheck the associated box. Figure 6: Selection of programs to install
  • 21. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 13 You also have to choose a default unit system. This is to ensure that the length and force units frequently used by you will be available upon entry into the program each time. This is known as the base unit system, and mainly affects the units in which results are displayed, as well as default values for certain quantities. Please refer to one of the tutorials for additional information on these. Of course, it is always possible for you to change the base unit system within the program, at run-time, as frequently as you please. Figure 7: Selection of Default Unit System for STAAD.Pro
  • 22. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 14 Towards the end of the installation process, a message resembling the one shown in Figure 8 will appear. It is pertinent only to users who have received this program as an upgrade from earlier versions of STAAD.Pro, and are already using a security device with those versions. For those users, their hardware lock also needs to be upgraded to enable it to work with STAAD.Pro 2006. That process is done electronically - called re-programming the lock - and there is no need to physically replace the lock (in most of the cases). Figure 8: Information regarding upgrade of lock After the installation is complete, please restart your machine for the changes to take effect.
  • 23. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 15 5. Copy Protection Device As explained in the previous section, a copy protection device in the form of a Select XM License, a hardware lock, or a software license, is required to run STAAD.Pro, STAAD.etc, STAAD.foundation and Sectionwizard. If you are using a hardware lock, it must be inserted in the parallel port of your computer and must remain there during the entire duration that you are in one of the programs. If any other device, such as printer cable, hardware lock for other software, etc., is attached to the parallel port, we recommend that you attach the STAAD.Pro / STAAD.etc hardware lock in front of such devices. In case you have multiple locks, and cannot stack them for any reason, REI can replace your parallel port type with a USB type of lock. The hardware lock is configured for the programs and modules that you have purchased. If you install one of the programs or modules that is not supported by the hardware lock, that component may not be accessible, or will be operable only as a Demonstration version. The hardware lock driver(s) are automatically installed during the installation process. For computers running on Windows NT, Windows 2000, or Windows XP, you must have administrative rights before installing the program to enable proper installation of the hardware lock driver files. As can be seen from the tutorials in the later sections of this book, STAAD.Pro consists of various modules, each designed to perform a certain type of task in the model generation, analysis and result verification process. Version 2006 requires the hardlock to be in place during the entire time that any and all of these tasks are being performed.
  • 24. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 16 In other words, from the moment you start the program till the moment you exit it, the lock has to be in place. If the lock is detached at any time in between, the program will stop running, and request that you re-attach the lock. In the event that you are unable to, it will provide the opportunity to save the work and exit the program. To resume your work, you will have to put the lock back in the port and re-start the program. Another important aspect to note is that if you are upgrading from an earlier version of STAAD.Pro such as 2000, 2001 or 2002, one of the following is applicable with regards to the lock: a. The upgrade package should contain a new lock which replaces your old lock. b. The upgrade package should contain information outlining how you can re-program your earlier lock so that it becomes compatible with STAAD.Pro 2006.
  • 25. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 17 6. Running STAAD.Pro Click on the STAAD.Pro icon from the STAAD.Pro 2006 program group. Figure 9: Starting STAAD.Pro
  • 26. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 18 The STAAD.Pro main screen appears as shown in below. Figure 10: The STAAD.Pro screen If you are a first time user who is unfamiliar with STAAD.Pro, we suggest that you go through the tutorials shown in Section II of this manual.
  • 27. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 19 7. Running STAAD.etc To launch the STAAD.etc program, click on the STAAD.etc icon. Figure 11: Starting STAAD.etc For help on using this program, we suggest that you go through the STAAD.etc Documentation accessible by clicking on its icon shown in the above figure.
  • 28. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 20 8. Running Sectionwizard To launch Sectionwizard, choose one of the programs from the Sectionwizard menu. Figure 12: Starting Sectionwizard For help on using this program, please go through Sectionwizard Help shown in the above figure.
  • 29. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 21 9. Running STAAD.foundation To launch STAAD.foundation, click on the STAAD.foundation icon. Figure 13: Starting STAAD.foundation For help on using this program, please go through the STAAD.foundation Documentation shown in the above figure.
  • 30. System Requirements, Installation and Start-up 22 10. Running Mesher To launch Mesher, click on the Mesher icon. Figure 14: Starting Mesher Information on using this program is available from the Help menus of the program.
  • 34. s
  • 35. Table of Contents Introduction 1 1. Tutorial Problem 1: 2D Portal Frame 1-1 1.1 Methods of creating the model 1-2 1.2 Description of the Tutorial Problem 1-3 1.3 Starting the Program 1-5 1.4 Creating a New Structure 1-10 1.5 Creating the Model using the Graphical Interface 1-13 1.5.1 Generating the Model Geometry 1-16 1.5.2 Switching On Node And Beam Labels 1-23 1.5.3 Specifying Member Properties 1-26 1.5.4 Specifying Material Constants 1-32 1.5.5 Changing the Input Units of Length 1-33 1.5.6 Specifying Member Offsets 1-35 1.5.7 Printing Member Information in the Output File 1-40 1.5.8 Specifying Supports 1-43 1.5.9 Viewing the model in 3D 1-48 1.5.10 Specifying Loads 1-50 1.5.11 Specifying the Analysis Type 1-60 1.5.12 Specifying Post-Analysis Print Commands 1-62 1.5.13 Short-listing the Load Cases to be used in Steel Design 1-66 1.5.14 Specifying Steel Design Parameters 1-68 1.5.15 Re-specifying the Analysis Command 1-74 1.5.16 Re-specifying the Track Parameter 1-75 1.5.17 Specifying the Check Code Command 1-76 1.6 Viewing the Input Command File 1-79 1.7 Creating the Model using the Command File 1-82 1.8 Performing Analysis/Design 1-91 1.9 Viewing the Output File 1-94 1.10 Post-Processing 1-102 1.10.1 Going to the Post-Processing Mode 1-103 1.10.2 Annotating the Displacements 1-106 1.10.3 Displaying Force/Moment Diagrams 1-111 1.10.4 Annotating the Force/Moment Diagram 1-114 1.10.5 Changing the Degree of Freedom for which Forces Diagram is Plotted 1-117 1.10.6 Displaying the Dimensions of The Members 1-120
  • 36. 2. Tutorial Problem 2: RC Framed Structure 2-1 2.1 Methods of creating the model 2-2 2.2 Description of the Tutorial Problem 2-3 2.3 Starting the Program 2-6 2.4 Creating a New Structure 2-11 2.5 Elements of the STAAD.Pro Screen 2-14 2.6 Building the STAAD.Pro Model 2-15 2.6.1 Generating the Model Geometry 2-16 2.6.2 Changing the Input Units of Length 2-28 2.6.3 Specifying Member Properties 2-30 2.6.4 Specifying Geometric Constants 2-36 2.6.5 Specifying Material Constants 2-38 2.6.6 Specifying Supports 2-41 2.6.7 Specifying Loads 2-46 2.6.8 Specifying the Analysis Type 2-63 2.6.9 Short-listing the load cases to be used in Concrete Design 2-65 2.6.10 Specifying Concrete Design Parameters 2-67 2.6.11 Specifying Design Commands 2-71 2.7 Viewing the Input Command File 2-74 2.8 Creating the Model using the Command File 2-77 2.9 Performing the Analysis and Design 2-85 2.10 Viewing the Output File 2-88 2.11 Post-Processing 2-96 2.11.1 Going to the Post-Processing Mode 2-97 2.11.2 Viewing the Deflection Diagram 2-99 2.11.3 Switching between load cases for viewing the deflection diagram 2-101 2.11.4 Changing the size of the deflection diagram 2-105 2.11.5 Annotating Displacements 2-108 2.11.6 Changing the units in which displacement values are annotated 2-111 2.11.7 The Node Displacement Table 2-114 2.11.8 Displaying Force/Moment Diagrams 2-119 2.11.9 Switching between load cases for viewing the Force/Moment diagram 2-122 2.11.10 Changing the size of the Force/Moment diagram 2-126 2.11.11 Changing the degree of freedom for which forces diagram is plotted 2-129 2.11.12 Annotating the Force/Moment diagram 2-131
  • 37. 2.11.13 Changing the units in which Force/Moment values are annotated 2-134 2.11.14 Beam Forces Table 2-137 2.11.15 Viewing the Force/Moment diagrams from the Beam | Graphs Page 2-141 2.11.16 Restricting the load cases for which results are viewed 2-145 2.11.17 Using Member Query 2-147 2.11.18 Producing an on-screen Report 2-152 2.11.19 Taking Pictures 2-155 2.11.20 Creating Customized Reports 2-157 3. Tutorial Problem 3: Analysis of a slab 3-1 3.1 Methods of creating the model 3-2 3.2 Description of the tutorial problem 3-3 3.3 Starting the program 3-6 3.4 Creating a new structure 3-11 3.5 Elements of the STAAD.Pro screen 3-14 3.6 Building the STAAD.Pro model 3-15 3.6.1 Generating the model geometry 3-16 3.6.2 Changing the input units of length 3-53 3.6.3 Specifying Element Properties 3-55 3.6.4 Specifying Material Constants 3-61 3.6.5 Specifying Supports 3-62 3.6.6 Specifying Primary Load Cases 3-67 3.6.7 Creating Load Combinations 3-77 3.6.8 Specifying the analysis type 3-82 3.6.9 Specifying post-analysis print commands 3-85 3.7 Viewing the input command file 3-89 3.8 Creating the model using the command file 3-91 3.9 Performing the analysis and design 3-98 3.10 Viewing the output file 3-101 3.11 Post-Processing 3-109 3.11.1 Viewing stress values in a tabular form 3-110 3.11.2 Printing the tables 3-112 3.11.3 Changing the units of values which appear in the above tables 3-113 3.11.4 Limiting the load cases for which the results are displayed 3-115 3.11.5 Stress Contours 3-117 3.11.6 Animating stress contours 3-123 3.11.7 Creating AVI Files 3-124
  • 38. 3.11.8 Viewing plate results using element query 3-127 3.11.9 Producing an onscreen report 3-131 3.11.10 Viewing Support Reactions 3-136 4. Tutorial Problem 4: Interoperability (using STAAD.Pro and STAAD.etc) 4-1 4.1 Understanding STAAD.etc 4-2 4.2 Description of the Tutorial Problem 4-3 4.3 Using the Interactive Mode in STAAD.Pro 4-4 4.4 Designing a Footing based on results from STAAD.Pro 4-9 4.5 Designing a Base Plate based on results from STAAD.Pro 4-15 4.7 Saving the Interactive Design as a STAAD.etc File 4-16 5. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-1 1 Selecting nodes, beams, plates, etc. FPT-1 2 Viewing the structure from different angles FPT-8 3 Switching on labels for nodes, beams, plates, etc. FPT-12 4 Displaying a portion of the model by isolating it from the rest of the structure FPT-18 5 Creating Groups FPT-38 6 Displaying Loads on the screen FPT-47 7 Displaying Load Values on the screen FPT-52 8 Structural Tool Tip Options FPT-58 9 Identifying Beam Start and End FPT-62 10 Plotting from STAAD.Pro FPT-67
  • 39. Introduction STAAD.Pro is a general purpose program for performing the analysis and design of a wide variety of types of structures. The basic three activities which are to be carried out to achieve that goal - a) model generation b) the calculations to obtain the analytical results c) result verification - are all facilitated by tools contained in the program's graphical environment. This manual contains four sample tutorials which guide the user through those 3 activities. The first of those tutorials demonstrates these processes using a simple two-dimensional steel portal frame. It is a good starting point for learning the program. If you are unfamiliar with STAAD.Pro, you will greatly benefit by going through this tutorial first. For the second tutorial, we have chosen a reinforced concrete frame. We generate the model, perform the analysis, and design the concrete beams and columns. It contains extensive details on the various facilities available for visualization and verification of results. The modelling and analysis of a slab is demonstrated in the third tutorial. Slabs, and other surface entities like walls are modelled using plate elements. Large surface entities may have to be defined using several elements and this sometimes requires a tool called a mesh generator. This tutorial shows the simple techniques as well as the mesh generation method for generating the finite element model of the slab. It also explains the methods by which one can check the results for plate elements. A tutorial which demonstrates the inter-operability features between STAAD.Pro and STAAD.etc. is presented in the fourth tutorial. STAAD.etc is a set of modules which can be used to perform component designs such as for a rectangular footing, base plate, cantilever retaining wall, moment connection, bolt group,
  • 40. etc. Users who have purchased STAAD.etc in addition to STAAD.Pro may go through this tutorial to familiarize themselves with the process of utilizing STAAD.etc to perform secondary analysis and design tasks on a structure for which the primary analysis and design is done using STAAD.Pro.
  • 41. 1-1 Tutorial Problem 1: 2D Portal Frame Section 1 This chapter provides a step-by-step tutorial for creating a 2D portal frame using STAAD.Pro. This tutorial covers the following topics. • Starting the Program • Creating a New Structure • Creating Joints and Members • Switching On Node and Beam Labels • Specifying Member Properties • Specifying Material Constants • Specifying Member Offsets • Printing Member Information • Specifying Supports • Specifying Loads • Specifying the Analysis Type • Specifying Post-Analysis Print Commands • Specifying Steel Design Parameters • Performing Analysis and Design • Viewing the Output File • Verifying results on screen – both graphically and numerically
  • 42. 1-2 Tutorial 1 1.1 Methods of creating the model There are two methods of creating the structure data: a. using the command file b. using the graphical model generation mode, or graphical user interface (GUI) as it is usually referred to. The Command File is a text file which contains the data for the structure being modeled. This file consists of simple English- language like commands. This command file may be created directly using the editor built into the program, or for that matter, any editor which saves data in text form, such as Notepad or WordPad available in Microsoft Windows. This command file is also automatically created behind the scenes when the structure is generated using the Graphical User Interface. The graphical model generation mode and the command file are seamlessly integrated. So, at any time, you may temporarily exit the graphical model generation mode and access the command file. You will find that it reflects all data entered through the graphical model generation mode. Further, when you make changes to the command file and save it, the GUI immediately reflects the changes made to the structure through the command file. Both methods of creating our model are explained in this tutorial. Section 1.3 through 1.6 explain the procedure for creating the file using the GUI. Section 1.7 describes creation of the command file using the STAAD.Pro text editor.
  • 43. Tutorial 1 1-3 1.2 Description of the tutorial problem The structure for this project is a single bay, single story steel portal frame that will be analyzed and designed. The figure below shows the structure. 2.5 KIP/FT 10 KIP 2 3 W14 x 34 2 W12 x 35 W12 x 35 15' - 0" 3 1 4 1 20' - 0" Figure 1. 1 An input file called "Tut-01-portal.std" containing the input data for the above structure has been provided with the program. This file contains what would otherwise have resulted had we followed the procedure explained in Section 1.7.
  • 44. 1-4 Tutorial 1 BASIC DATA FOR THE STRUCTURE ATTRIBUTE DATA Member properties Members 1 & 3 : W12X35 Member 2 : W14X34 Material Constants Modulus of Elasticity : 29000 ksi Poisson's Ratio : 0.30 Member Offsets 6.0 inches along global X for member 2 at both ends Supports Node 1 : Fixed Node 4 : Pinned Loads Load case 1 : Dead + Live Beam 2 : 2.5 kips/ft downward along global Y Load case 2 : Wind From Left 10 kips point force at Node 2 Load case 3 : 75 Percent of (DL+LL+WL) Load Combination - L1 X 0.75 + L2 X 0.75 Analysis Type Linear Elastic (PERFORM) Steel Design Consider load cases 1 and 3 only. Parameters: Unsupported length of compression flange for bending : 10 ft for members 2 and 3, 15 ft for member 1. Steel Yield Stress : 40 ksi Perform member selection for members 2 and 3
  • 45. Tutorial 1 1-5 1.3 Starting the program Select the STAAD.Pro icon from the STAAD.Pro 2006 program group. Figure 1. 2
  • 46. 1-6 Tutorial 1 The STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment will be invoked and the following screen comes up. Figure 1. 3 This New dialog box will come up every time we start the program. To turn this feature off, simply uncheck the Display this dialog box at the Startup box at the lower left hand corner. This feature can be turned on again at a later time when File | New is invoked from the main menu.
  • 47. Tutorial 1 1-7 Note about the unit system : There are two base unit systems in the program which control the units (length, force, temperature, etc.) in which, values, specifically results and other information presented in the tables and reports, are displayed in. The base unit system also dictates what type of default values the program will use when attributes such as Modulus of Elasticity, Density, etc., are assigned based on material types – Steel, Concrete, Aluminum – selected from the program’s library (Please refer to Section 5 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual for details). These two unit systems are English (Foot, Pound, etc.) and Metric (KN, Meter, etc.). If you recall, one of the choices made at the time of installing STAAD.Pro is this base unit system setting. That choice will serve as the default until we specifically change it. The place from where we can change this setting is under the File | Configure menu. To get to that option, first close down the dialog box shown in the earlier figure by clicking on Cancel. Then, click on the File | Configure menu option (see figure below) and choose the appropriate unit system you want. For this tutorial, let us choose the English units (Kip, Feet, etc.). Figure 1. 4
  • 48. 1-8 Tutorial 1 Figure 1. 5 Click on the Accept button to close the above dialog box.
  • 49. Tutorial 1 1-9 Following this, select File | New once again. Figure 1. 6 The dialog box shown in Figure 1.3 will re-appear.
  • 50. 1-10 Tutorial 1 1.4 Creating a new structure 1. In the New dialog box, we provide some crucial initial data necessary for building the model. The structure type is to be defined by choosing from among Space, Plane, Floor and Truss. A Space type is one where the structure, the loading or both, cause the structure to deform in all 3 global axes (X, Y and Z). In a Plane type, the geometry, loading and deformation are restricted to the global X-Y plane only. A Floor type is a structure whose geometry is confined to the X-Z plane. A Truss type of structure carries loading by pure axial action. Truss members are deemed incapable of carrying shear, bending and torsion. For our model, let us choose Plane. We choose Foot as the length unit and Kilo Pound as the force unit in which we will start to build the model. The units can be changed later if necessary, at any stage of the model creation. We also need to provide a name in the File Name edit box. This is the name under which the structure data will be saved on the computer hard disk. The name “Structure?” (? will be a number) is recommended by the program by default, but we can change it to any name we want. Let us choose the name PORTAL. A default path name - the location on the computer drive where the file will be saved – is provided by the program under Location. If you wish to save the file in a different location, type in the name, or click the button and specify the desired path. After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.
  • 51. Tutorial 1 1-11 Figure 1. 7 2. In the next dialog box, we choose the tools to be used to initially construct the model. Add Beam, Add Plate or Add Solid are, respectively, the starting points for constructing beams, plates or solids. Open Structure Wizard provides access to a library of structural templates which the program comes equipped with. Those template models can be extracted and modified parametrically to arrive at our model geometry or some of its parts. If the model is to be created initially using the STAAD command language, the Open STAAD Editor box can take us to the STAAD editor. Please remember that all these options are also available from the menus and dialog boxes of the GUI, even after we dismiss this dialog box. Note: If you wish to use the Editor to create the model, choose Open STAAD Editor, click Finish, and proceed to Section 1.7.
  • 52. 1-12 Tutorial 1 For our model, let us check the Add Beam option. Click on the Finish button. The dialog box will be dismissed and the STAAD.Pro graphical environment will be displayed. Figure 1. 8
  • 53. Tutorial 1 1-13 1.5 Creating the model using the graphical user interface In order to generate the model graphically, we have to familiarize ourselves with the components of the STAAD.Pro screen. A sample of the STAAD.Pro screen is shown in Figure 1.9. The screen has five major elements as described below: Menu bar Located at the top of the screen, the Menu bar gives access to all the facilities of STAAD.Pro. Toolbar The dockable Toolbar gives access to the most frequently used commands. You may also create your own customized toolbar. Main Window This is the largest area at the center of the screen, where the model drawings and results are displayed in pictorial form. Page Control The Page Control is a set of tabs that appear on the left-most part of the screen. Each tab on the Page Control allows you to perform specific tasks. The organization of the Pages, from top to bottom, represents the logical sequence of operations, such as, definition of beams, specification of member properties, loading, and so on. Each tab has a name and an icon for easy identification. The name on the tabs may or may not appear depending on your screen resolution and the size of the STAAD.Pro window. However, the icons on the Page Control tabs always appear. The Pages in the Page Control area depend on the Mode of operation. The Mode of operation may be set from the Mode menu from the Menu bar.
  • 54. 1-14 Tutorial 1 Elements of the STAAD.Pro Screen Figure 1. 9
  • 55. Tutorial 1 1-15 Data Area The right side of the screen is called the Data Area, where different dialog boxes, tables, list boxes, etc. appear depending on the type of operation you are performing. For example, when you select the Geometry | Beam Page, the Data Area contains the Node- Coordinate table and the Member-incidence table. When you are in the Load Page, the contents of the Data Area changes to display the currently assigned Load cases and the icons for different types of loads. The icons in the toolbar as well as in the Page Control area offer ToolTip help. As we move the mouse pointer over a button, the name of the button – called a ToolTip – appears above or below the button. This floating Tool tip help will identify the icon. A brief description of the icon also appears in the status bar. We are now ready to start building the model geometry. The steps and, wherever possible, the corresponding STAAD.Pro commands (the instructions which get written in the STAAD input file) are described in the following sections.
  • 56. 1-16 Tutorial 1 1.5.1 Generating the model geometry The structure geometry consists of joint numbers, their coordinates, member numbers, the member connectivity information, plate element numbers, etc. From the standpoint of the STAAD command file, the commands to be generated for the structure shown in section 1.2 are : JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. ; 2 0. 15. ; 3 20. 15. ; 4 20. 0. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 2;2 2 3;3 3 4 Steps: 1. We selected the Add Beam option earlier to facilitate adding beams to create the structure. This initiates a grid in the main drawing area as shown below. The directions of the global axes (X,Y,Z) are represented in the icon in the lower left hand corner of the drawing area. Figure 1. 10
  • 57. Tutorial 1 1-17 2. A Snap Node/Beam dialog box also appears in the data area on the right side of the screen. The Linear tab is meant for placing the construction lines perpendicular to one another along a "left to right - top to bottom" pattern, as in the lines of a chess board. The Radial tab enables construction lines to appear in a spider-web style, which makes it is easy to create circular type models where members are modelled as piece-wise linear straight line segments. The Irregular tab can be used to create gridlines with unequal spacing that lie on the global planes or on an inclined plane. We will use the Linear tab. In our structure, the segment consisting of members 1 to 3, and nodes 1 to 4, happens to lie in the X-Y plane. So, in this dialog box, let us keep X-Y as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. By setting 20 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X, 15 above the origin along Y, and a spacing of 1 feet between lines along both X and Y (see next figure) we can draw a frame 20ft X 15ft, adequate for our structure. Please note that these settings are only a starting grid setting, to enable us to start drawing the structure, and they do not restrict our overall model to those limits.
  • 58. 1-18 Tutorial 1 Figure 1. 11
  • 59. Tutorial 1 1-19 3. To start creating the nodes, let us first activate the Snap Node/Beam button by clicking on it. Then, with the help of the mouse, click at the origin (0, 0) to create the first node. Figure 1. 12 4. In a similar fashion, click on the following points to create nodes and automatically join successive nodes by beam members. (0, 15), (20, 15), and (20, 0) The exact location of the mouse arrow can be monitored on the status bar located at the bottom of the window where the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the current cursor position are continuously updated.
  • 60. 1-20 Tutorial 1 When steps 1 to 4 are completed, the structure will be displayed in the drawing area as shown below. Figure 1. 13
  • 61. Tutorial 1 1-21 5. At this point, let us remove the grid from the structure. To do that, click on the Close button in the Snap Node/Beam dialog box. Figure 1. 14
  • 62. 1-22 Tutorial 1 The grid will now be removed and the structure in the main window should resemble the figure shown below. Figure 1. 15 It is very important that we save our work often, to avoid loss of data and protect our investment of time and effort against power interruptions, system problems, or other unforeseen events. To save the file, pull down the File menu and select the Save command.
  • 63. Tutorial 1 1-23 1.5.2 Switching on node and beam labels 1. Node and beam labels are a way of identifying the entities we have drawn on the screen. In order to display the node and beam numbers, right click anywhere in the drawing area. In the pop-up menu that comes up, choose Labels. Alternatively, one may access this option by selecting the View menu followed by the Structure Diagrams option from the top menu bar, and the Labels tab of the dialog box that comes up. Figure 1. 16
  • 64. 1-24 Tutorial 1 2. In the Diagrams dialog box that appears, turn the Node Numbers and Beam Numbers on and then click on OK. Figure 1. 17
  • 65. Tutorial 1 1-25 The following figure illustrates the node and beam numbers displayed on the structure. The structure in the main window should resemble the figure shown below. Figure 1. 18 If you are feeling adventurous, here is a small exercise for you. Change the font of the node/beam labels by going to the View menu and selecting the Options command, and then selecting the appropriate tab (Node Labels / Beam labels) from the Options dialog box.
  • 66. 1-26 Tutorial 1 1.5.3 Specifying member properties Our next task is to assign cross section properties for the beams and columns (see figure in section 1.2). For those of us curious to know the equivalent commands in the STAAD command file, they are : MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 3 TABLE ST W12X35 2 TABLE ST W14X34 Steps: 1. To define member properties, click on the Property Page icon located on the top toolbar. Figure 1. 19
  • 67. Tutorial 1 1-27 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Property page from the left side of the screen as shown below. Figure 1. 20
  • 68. 1-28 Tutorial 1 2. In either case, the Properties dialog box comes up (see figure below). The property type we wish to create is the W shape from the AISC table. This is available under the Section Database button in the Properties dialog box as shown below. So, let us click on the Section Database button. Figure 1. 21
  • 69. Tutorial 1 1-29 3. In the Section Profile Tables dialog box that comes up, select W Shape under the American option. Notice that the Material box is checked. Let us keep it that way because it will enable us to subsequently assign the material constants E, Density, Poisson, etc. along with the cross-section since we want to assign the default values. Choose W12X35 as the beam size, and ST as the section type. Then, click on the Add button as shown in the figure below. Detailed explanation of the terms such as ST, T, CM, TC, BC, etc. is available in Section 5 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. Figure 1. 22 4. To create the second member property (ST W14X34), select the W14X34 shape and click on the Add button. After the member properties have been created, let us Close the Section Profile Tables dialog box.
  • 70. 1-30 Tutorial 1 5. The next step is to associate the properties we just created with selected members in our model. Follow these steps. a. Select the first property reference in the Properties dialog box (W12X35). b. Make sure that the “Use Cursor to Assign” button is selected under the Assignment Method box. c. Click on the Assign button. The cursor changes to d. Using the cursor, click on members 1 and 3. e. Finally, click on the Assign button again, or click on the ‘Esc’ button on your keyboard to stop the assignment process. Figure 1. 23 6. In a similar fashion, assign the second property reference (W14X34) to member 2.
  • 71. Tutorial 1 1-31 After both the properties have been assigned to the respective members, our model should resemble the following figure. Figure 1. 24 Let us once again save our structure by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
  • 72. 1-32 Tutorial 1 1.5.4 Specifying material constants In Section 1.5.3, we kept the Material check box “on” while assigning the member properties. Consequently, the material constants got assigned to the members along with the properties, and the following commands were generated in the command file: CONSTANTS E 29000 MEMB 1 TO 3 POISSON 0.3 MEMB 1 TO 3 DENSITY 0.000283 MEMB 1 TO 3 ALPHA 6.5e-006 MEMB 1 TO 3 Hence, there is no more a need to assign the constants separately. However, if we hadn’t assign them as before, we could go to the menu option Commands | Material Constants and assign them explicitly as shown in the figure below. Figure 1. 25
  • 73. Tutorial 1 1-33 1.5.5 Changing the input units of length For specifying member offset values, as a matter of convenience, it is simpler if our length units are inches instead of feet. The commands to be generated are: UNIT INCHES KIP Steps: 1. To change the length units from feet to inch, click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar. Figure 1. 26 Alternatively, one may select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option as shown in the next figure.
  • 74. 1-34 Tutorial 1 Figure 1. 27 2. In either case, the following dialog box comes up. Set the Length Units to Inch and click on the OK button. Figure 1. 28
  • 75. Tutorial 1 1-35 1.5.6 Specifying member offsets Since beam 2 actually spans only the clear distance between the column faces, and not the center to center distance, we can take advantage of this aspect by specifying offsets. Member 2 is OFFSET at its START joint by 6 inches in the global X direction, 0.0 and 0.0 in Y and Z directions. The same member is offset by negative 6.0 inches at its END joint. The corresponding STAAD commands are: MEMBER OFFSET 2 START 6.0 0.0 0.0 2 END -6.0 0.0 0.0 Steps: 1. Since we know that member 2 is the one to be assigned with the offset, let us first select this member prior to defining the offset itself. Select member 2 by clicking on it using the Beams Cursor . The selected member will be highlighted. (Please refer to the ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.) 2. To define member offsets, click on the Specification Page icon located in the top toolbar. Figure 1. 29
  • 76. 1-36 Tutorial 1 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Spec Page from the left side of the screen. Figure 1. 30
  • 77. Tutorial 1 1-37 3. In either case, the Specifications dialog box shown below comes up. Member Releases and Offsets are defined through the Beam button in this dialog box as shown below. Figure 1. 31
  • 78. 1-38 Tutorial 1 4. In the Beam Specs dialog box that opens, select the Offset tab. We want to define the offset at the start node in the X direction. Hence, make sure that the Start option is selected under Location . Then, enter 6.0 in the X edit box. Since we have already selected the member, let us click on the Assign button. Figure 1. 32 5. To apply the offset at the end node, repeat steps 3 and 4, except for selecting the End option and providing -6.0 in the X edit box.
  • 79. Tutorial 1 1-39 After both the Start and End offsets have been assigned, the model will look as shown below. Figure 1. 33 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the member. Let us save the work again by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
  • 80. 1-40 Tutorial 1 1.5.7 Printing member information in the output file We would like to get a report consisting of information about all the members including start and end joint numbers (incidence), member length, beta angle and member end releases in the STAAD output file. The corresponding STAAD command is: PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION ALL Steps: 1. Since the information is required for all the members, select all the members by going to Select | By All | All Beams menu option. Figure 1. 34
  • 81. Tutorial 1 1-41 2. Then, go to Commands | Pre Analysis Print | Member Information from the top menu bar as shown in the figure below. Figure 1. 35
  • 82. 1-42 Tutorial 1 3. Notice that the assignment method is set To Selection. Press the OK button in this dialog box. Figure 1. 36 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the members. Let us also save our structure again by using the Save option of the File menu.
  • 83. Tutorial 1 1-43 1.5.8 Specifying Supports The specifications of this problem (see section 1.2) call for restraining all degrees of freedom at node 1 (FIXED support) and a pinned type of restraint at node 4 (restrained against all translations, free for all rotations) The commands to be generated are : SUPPORTS 1 FIXED ; 4 PINNED Steps: 1. To create a support, click on the Support Page icon located in the top toolbar as shown below. Figure 1. 37
  • 84. 1-44 Tutorial 1 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Support Page from the left side of the screen. Figure 1. 38
  • 85. Tutorial 1 1-45 2. In either case, the Supports dialog box comes up as shown in the next figure. Since we already know that node 1 is to be associated with a Fixed support, using the Nodes Cursor , select node 1. It becomes highlighted. (Please refer to the ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting nodes.) 3. Then, click on the Create button in the Supports dialog box as shown below. Figure 1. 39
  • 86. 1-46 Tutorial 1 4. In the Create Support dialog box that opens, select the Fixed tab (which also happens to be the default) and click on the Assign button as shown below. This creates a FIXED type of support at node 1 where all 6 degrees of freedom are restrained. Figure 1. 40 5. To create a PINNED support at node 4, repeat steps 2 to 4, except for selecting node 4 and selecting the Pinned tab in the Create Support dialog box.
  • 87. Tutorial 1 1-47 After the supports have been assigned, the structure will look like the one shown below. Figure 1. 41 After assigning both the supports, let us save our structure using the File | Save option.
  • 88. 1-48 Tutorial 1 1.5.9 Viewing the model in 3D Let us see how we can display our model in 3D. To do this, either right-click and select Structure Diagrams or go to View | Structure Diagrams menu. Figure 1. 42 In the ensuing dialog box, the Structure tab page allows you to set up structural view parameters as explained below. The options under 3D Sections control how the members are displayed. Selecting None displays the structure without displaying the cross-sectional properties of the members and elements. Selecting Full Sections displays the 3D cross-sections of members, depending on the member properties. Sections Outline displays only the outline of the cross-sections of members. Let us select Full Sections to draw the 3D sections. You can also change the color of the sections by clicking on the Section Outline color button under the Colors section. Then, click on OK.
  • 89. Tutorial 1 1-49 Figure 1. 43 The resulting diagram is shown below. Figure 1. 44
  • 90. 1-50 Tutorial 1 1.5.10 Specifying Loads Three load cases are to be created for this structure. Details of the individual cases are explained at the beginning of this tutorial. The corresponding commands to be generated are listed below. UNIT FEET KIP LOADING 1 DEAD + LIVE MEMBER LOAD 2 UNI GY -2.5 LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT JOINT LOAD 2 FX 10. LOAD COMBINATION 3 75 PERCENT OF (DL+LL+WL) 1 0.75 2 0.75 Steps: The creation and assignment of load cases involves the following two steps: a. First, we will be creating all 3 load cases. b. Then, we will be assigning them to the respective members/nodes. Creating load cases 1 and 2 1. To create loads, first click on the Load Page icon located on the top tool bar. Figure 1. 45
  • 91. Tutorial 1 1-51 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Load Page from the left side of the screen. Figure 1. 46 2. Before we create the first load case, we need to change our length units to feet. To do that, as before, utilize the Input Units icon (see section 1.5.5). Notice that a window titled “Load” appears on the right-hand side of the screen. To create the first load case, highlight Load Cases Details and then click on the Add button in the Load dialog box. Figure 1. 47
  • 92. 1-52 Tutorial 1 3. The Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up. The drop-down list box against Loading Type is available in case we wish to associate the load case we are creating with any of the ACI, AISC or IBC definitions of Dead, Live, Ice, etc. This type of association needs to be done if we intend to use the program's facility for automatically generating load combinations in accordance with those codes. Notice that there is a check box called Reducible per UBC/IBC. This feature becomes active only when the load case is assigned a Loading Type called Live at the time of creation of that case. Please refer to STAAD.Pro 2004 Release Report for further details. As we do not intend to use the automatic load combination generation option, we will leave the Loading Type as None. Enter DEAD + LIVE as the Title for Load Case 1 and click on the Add button. Figure 1. 48 The newly created load case will now appear under the Load Cases Details option. Figure 1. 49
  • 93. Tutorial 1 1-53 To create the Member load, first highlight DEAD + LIVE. You will notice that the Add New Load Items dialog box shows more options now. Figure 1. 50 4. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Uniform Force option under the Member Load item. Specify GY as the Direction, enter -2.5 as the Force and click on the Add button. Figure 1. 51
  • 94. 1-54 Tutorial 1 The next step is to create the second load case which contains a joint load. 5. Highlight Load Cases Details in the Load dialog box. In the Add New Load Cases dialog box, once again, we are not associating the load case we are about to create with any code based Loading Type and so, leave that box as None. Specify the Title of the second load case as WIND FROM LEFT and click on the Add button. Figure 1. 52 6. Next, to create the Joint load, highlight WIND FROM LEFT. Figure 1. 53
  • 95. Tutorial 1 1-55 7. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Node option under the Nodal Load item. Specify 10 for Fx, and click on the Add button. Figure 1. 54
  • 96. 1-56 Tutorial 1 Creating load case 3 Load cases 1 and 2 were primary load cases. Load case 3 will be defined as a load combination. So, the next step is to define load case 3 as 0.75 x (Load 1 + Load 2), which is a load combination. 8. To do this, once again, highlight the Load Cases Details option. In the Add New Load Cases dialog box, click on the Define Combinations option from the left-hand side. Specify the Title as 75 Percent of [DL+LL+WL]. Figure 1. 55 In the Define Combinations box, the default load combination type is set to be Normal, which means an algebraic combination. The other combination types available are called SRSS (square root of sum of squares) and ABS (Absolute). The SRSS type offers the flexibility of part SRSS and part Algebraic. That is, some load cases are combined using the square root of sum of squares approach, and the result is combined with other cases algebraically, as in A + SQRT(B*B + C*C) where A, B and C are the individual primary cases. We intend to use the default algebraic combination type (Normal).
  • 97. Tutorial 1 1-57 9. In the Define Combinations box, select both load cases from the left side list box (by holding down the ‘Ctrl’ key) and click on the button. The load cases appear in the right side list box. Then, enter 0.75 in the Factor edit box. (These data indicate that we are adding the two load cases with a multiplication factor of 0.75 and that the load combination results would be obtained by algebraic summation of the results for individual load cases.) Press the Add button. Figure 1. 56 Now that we have completed the task of creating all 3 load cases, let us Close the Add New Load Cases dialog box.
  • 98. 1-58 Tutorial 1 Our next step is to associate load case 1 with member 2. Follow these steps. a. Select the first load reference in the Load dialog box (UNI GY -2.5 kip/ft). b. Make sure that the “Use Cursor to Assign” button is selected under the Assignment Method box. c. Click on the Assign button. The cursor changes to d. Using the cursor, click on member 2. e. Finally, click on the Assign button again, or type the ‘Esc’ button on your keyboard to stop the assignment process. Figure 1. 57
  • 99. Tutorial 1 1-59 After the member load has been assigned, the model will look as shown below. Figure 1. 58 In a similar fashion, assign the second load case (FX 10 kip, ft) to Node 2. After assigning the joint load, the model will look as shown below. Figure 1. 59 Let us once again save our model by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command or by holding the ‘Ctrl’ key and pressing the ‘S’ key.
  • 100. 1-60 Tutorial 1 1.5.11 Specifying the analysis type The analysis type we are required to do is a linear static type. We also need to obtain a static equilibrium report. This requires the command: PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK Steps: 1. To specify the Analysis command, go to Analysis/Print Page from the left side of the screen. By default, the Analysis sub-page from the second row is in focus as shown below. Figure 1. 60
  • 101. Tutorial 1 1-61 2. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, make sure that the Perform Analysis tab is selected. Then, check the Statics Check print option. Finally, click on the Add button followed by the Close button. Figure 1. 61 Let us save the data once again using the File | Save option.
  • 102. 1-62 Tutorial 1 1.5.12 Specifying post-analysis print commands We would like to obtain the member end forces and support reactions written into the output file. This requires the specification of the following commands: PRINT MEMBER FORCES ALL PRINT SUPPORT REACTION LIST 1 4 Steps: 1. The dialog box for specifying the above commands is nested in the Post-Print sub-page of the Analysis/Print page. Figure 1. 62
  • 103. Tutorial 1 1-63 2. Next, select all the members by rubber-banding around them using the mouse. 3. Click on the Define Commands button in the data area on the right hand side of the screen. Figure 1. 63
  • 104. 1-64 Tutorial 1 4. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, select the Member Forces tab and click on the Assign button followed by the Close button. Figure 1. 64 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 except for selecting both the supports and selecting the Support Reactions tab in the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box. (Recall that the supports can be selected by turning the Nodes Cursor on, holding the ‘Ctrl’ key down, and clicking on the supports.) After clicking on the Assign button, Close the dialog box.
  • 105. Tutorial 1 1-65 At this point, the Post Analysis Print dialog box should resemble the figure shown below. Figure 1. 65 Save the work using the File | Save menu option.
  • 106. 1-66 Tutorial 1 1.5.13 Short-listing the load cases to be used in steel design The steel design has to be performed for load cases 1 and 3 only per the specification at the beginning of this tutorial. To instruct the program to use just these cases, and ignore the remaining, we have to use the LOAD LIST command. The command will appear in the STAAD file as : LOAD LIST 1 3 Steps: 1. In the menus on the top of the screen, go to Commands | Loading | Load List option as shown below. Figure 1. 66
  • 107. Tutorial 1 1-67 2. A Load List dialog box comes up. From the Load Cases list box on the left, double click on 1: DEAD + LIVE and 3: 75 Percent of [DL+LL+WL] to send them to the Load List box on the right, as shown below. Then click on the OK button to dismiss the dialog box. Figure 1. 67
  • 108. 1-68 Tutorial 1 1.5.14 Specifying steel design parameters The specifications listed in section 1.2 of this tutorial require us to provide values for some of the terms used in steel design because the default values of those terms are not suitable. The corresponding commands to be generated are: PARAMETER CODE AISC FYLD 5760 ALL UNT 10.0 MEMB 2 3 UNB 10.0 MEMB 23 TRACK 2 MEMB 2 3 SELECT MEMB 2 3 Steps: 1. To specify steel design parameters, go to Design | Steel Page from the left side of the screen. Make sure that under the Current Code selections on the top right hand side, AISC ASD is selected. Figure 1. 68
  • 109. Tutorial 1 1-69 2. Click on the Define Parameters button in the Steel Design dialog box. Figure 1. 69 3. In the Design Parameters dialog box that comes up, select the FYLD option. Then, provide the Yield Strength as 5760 Kip/ft 2 and click on the Add button. Figure 1. 70
  • 110. 1-70 Tutorial 1 4. To define the remaining parameters, repeat step 3 except for selecting the parameters and providing the values listed below. Parameter Value UNT 10 UNB 10 TRACK 2 5. When all the parameters have been added, click on the Close button in the Design Parameters dialog box. 6. The next step is to assign these parameters to specific members of the model. From looking at the requirements listed in the beginning of this tutorial, we know that the FYLD parameter is to be assigned to all the members, while the remaining parameters are to assigned to members 2 and 3. As before, use the Use Cursor to Assign method to assign these parameters. Figure 1. 71
  • 111. Tutorial 1 1-71 After all the design parameters have been assigned, the Steel Design dialog box will look as shown below. Figure 1. 72
  • 112. 1-72 Tutorial 1 7. To specify the SELECT command, click on the Commands button in the Steel Design dialog box as shown below. The SELECT command is an instruction to the program to fetch and assign the least-weight cross-section which satisfies all the code requirements (PASSes) for the member. Figure 1. 73
  • 113. Tutorial 1 1-73 8. In the Design Commands dialog box that appears, click on the SELECT option. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button. Figure 1. 74 9. Once again, we need to associate this command with members 2 and 3. You may either use the Use Cursor to Assign method or first select members 2 and 3 and then use the Assign to Selected Beams option. After the parameters are assigned, click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the members. Let us save our structure by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
  • 114. 1-74 Tutorial 1 1.5.15 Re-specifying the analysis command When the analysis & design engine executes the member selection operation we specified in the previous step, a new set of properties will end up being assigned to those members. This has the effect of changing the stiffness distribution for the entire structure. Since the structure is statically indeterminate, we ought to re-analyze it if we want the nodal displacements, member forces, etc. to reflect this new stiffness distribution. The command to be generated is hence: PERFORM ANALYSIS Steps: 1. To specify the Analysis command, repeat step 1 of Section 1.5.11 of this tutorial. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that comes up, select the Perform Analysis tab. Since we are not interested in a statics check report once again, let us check the No Print option. Finally, click on the Add button followed by the Close button. We should again save the work using File | Save.
  • 115. Tutorial 1 1-75 1.5.16 Re-specifying the TRACK parameter The final calculation we need to do is make sure the current set of member properties pass the code requirements based on the up-to- date member forces. This will require that we do a code checking operation again. To restrict the output produced to a reasonable level, we specify the TRACK parameter again as: TRACK 1 ALL Steps: 1. To define and assign 1.0 for the TRACK parameter, repeat steps 1 to 4 of Section 1.5.14 of this tutorial. 2. Next, select all the members by rubber-banding around them using the mouse. (Please refer to the ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.) Then, assign this parameter to all the members.
  • 116. 1-76 Tutorial 1 1.5.17 Re-specifying the CHECK CODE command The analysis operation carried out in response to the command in Section 1.5.15 will create a new set of member forces. These forces will very likely be quite different from those which were used in the member selection operation (see the commands of section 1.5.14). Consequently, we have to verify that the structure is safely able – from the standpoint of the design code requirements – to carry these new forces. A code checking operation, which uses the up-to-date cross sections of the members, and the latest member forces, will provide us with a status report on this issue. The command to be generated is hence: CHECK CODE ALL Steps: 1. If you have wandered away from the Steel Design page, from the Commands menu on top of the screen, select Design | Steel Design.
  • 117. Tutorial 1 1-77 2. Click on the Commands button in the Steel Design dialog box as shown below. Figure 1. 75
  • 118. 1-78 Tutorial 1 3. In the Design Commands dialog box that appears, click on the Check Code tab. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button. Figure 1. 76 4. Since the CHECK CODE command has to be assigned to all the members, the easiest way to do that is to click on the Assign to View button. Figure 1. 77 We have now completed the tasks for assigning the input for this model. Let us save the file one last time using the File | Save option.
  • 119. Tutorial 1 1-79 1.6 Viewing the input command file Steps: Let us now take a look at the data that has been written into the file that we just saved earlier. The contents of the file can be viewed either by clicking on the STAAD Editor icon or, by going to the Edit menu and choosing Edit Input Command File as shown below. Figure 1. 78 Figure 1. 79
  • 120. 1-80 Tutorial 1 A new window will open up with the data listed as shown here: Figure 1. 80 This window and the facilities it contains is known as the STAAD Editor.
  • 121. Tutorial 1 1-81 We could make modifications to the data of our structure in this Editor if we wish to do so. Let us Exit the Editor without doing so by selecting the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor window). As we saw in Section 1.1, we could also have created the same model by typing the relevant STAAD commands into a text file using either the STAAD editor, or by using any external editor of our choice. If you would like to understand that method, proceed to the next section. If you want to skip that part, proceed to section 1.8 where we perform the analysis and design on this model.
  • 122. 1-82 Tutorial 1 1.7 Creating the model using the command file Let us now use the command file method to create the model for the above structure. The commands used in the command file are described later in this section. The STAAD.Pro command file may be created using the built-in editor, the procedure for which is explained further below in this section. Any standard text editor such as Notepad or WordPad may also be used to create the command file. However, the STAAD.Pro command file editor offers the advantage of syntax checking as we type the commands. The STAAD.Pro keywords, numeric data, comments, etc. are displayed in distinct colors in the STAAD.Pro editor. A typical editor screen is shown below to illustrate its general appearance. Figure 1. 81
  • 123. Tutorial 1 1-83 To access the built-in editor, first start the program using the procedure explained in Section 1.3. Next, follow step 1 of Section 1.4. Figure 1. 82 You will then encounter the dialog box shown in the figure shown below. In that dialog box, choose Open STAAD Editor. Figure 1. 83
  • 124. 1-84 Tutorial 1 At this point, the editor screen similar to the one shown below will open. Figure 1. 84 Delete all the command lines displayed in the editor window and type the lines shown in bold below (You don’t have to delete the lines if you know which to keep and where to fill in the rest of the commands). The commands may be typed in upper or lower case letters. Usually the first three letters of a keyword are all that are needed -- the rest of the letters of the word are not required. The required letters are underlined. (“PLANE” = “PLA” = “plane” = “pla”)
  • 125. Tutorial 1 1-85 STAAD PLANE PORTAL FRAME Every STAAD.Pro input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame (in the XY plane). The remainder of the words are the title of the problem, which is optional. If a line is typed with an asterisk in the first column, it signifies that the line is a comment line and should not be executed. For example, one could have put the optional title above on a separate line as follows. * PORTAL FRAME UNIT FEET KIP Specify the force and length units for the commands to follow. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. ; 2 0. 15. ; 3 20. 15. ; 4 20. 0. Joint numbers and their corresponding global X and Y coordinates are provided above. For example, 3 20 15. indicates that node 3 has an X coordinate of 20 ft and a Y coordinate of 15 ft. Note that the reason for not providing the Z coordinate is because the structure is a plane frame. If this were a space frame, the Z coordinate would also be required. Semicolons (;) are used as line separators. In other words, data which is normally put on multiple lines can be put on one line by separating them with a semicolon. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 2;2 2 3;3 3 4 The members are defined by the joints to which they are connected.
  • 126. 1-86 Tutorial 1 MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 3 TABLE ST W12X35 2 TABLE ST W14X34 Members 1 and 3 are assigned a W12X35 section from the built-in AMERICAN steel table. Member 2 has been assigned a W14X34. The word ST stands for standard single section. Sections 5.20.1 through 5.20.5 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual explain the convention for assigning member property names. UNIT INCHES CONSTANTS E 29000.0 ALL POISSON 0.3 ALL The length unit is changed from FEET to INCHES to facilitate input of the modulus of elasticity (E). The keyword CONSTANT is required before material properties such as E, density, Poisson’s ratio, coefficient of thermal expansion (ALPHA) etc. can be provided. See Section 5.26 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for more information. MEMBER OFFSET 2 START 6.0 0. 0. 2 END -6.0 0. 0. The beam member is physically connected to the 2 columns at the face of the column, and not at the column centerline. This creates a rigid zone, about half the depth of the columns, at the 2 ends of the beam 2. This rigid zone is taken advantage of using member offsets (It is the user’s choice whether or not he/she wishes to use these). So, the above commands define that member 2 is eccentrically connected or OFFSET at its START joint by 6 inches in the global X direction, 0.0 and 0.0 in Y and Z directions. The same member is offset by negative 6.0 inches at its END joint. See Section 5.25 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for more information.
  • 127. Tutorial 1 1-87 PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION ALL The above command is self-explanatory. The information that is printed includes start and end joint numbers (incidence), member length, beta angle and member end releases. SUPPORTS 1 FIXED ; 4 PINNED A fixed support is located at joint 1 and a pinned support (fixed for translations, released for rotations) at joint 4. More information on the support specification is available in Section 5.27 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. UNIT FT The length unit is changed to FEET to facilitate input of loads. LOADING 1 DEAD + LIVE MEMBER LOAD 2 UNI GY -2.5 The above commands identify a loading condition. DEAD + LIVE is an optional title to identify this load case. A UNIformly distributed MEMBER LOAD of 2.5 kips/ft is acting on member 2 in the negative global Y direction. Member Load specification is explained in Section 5.32 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT JOINT LOAD 2 FX 10. The above commands identify a second load case. This load is a JOINT LOAD. A 10 kip force is acting at joint 2 in the global X direction.
  • 128. 1-88 Tutorial 1 LOAD COMBINATION 3 75 PERCENT OF (DL+LL+WL) 1 0.75 2 0.75 This command identifies a combination load with an optional title. The second line provides the components of the load combination case - primary load cases and the factors by which they should be individually multiplied. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis and produce a report of static equilibrium checks. Section 5.37 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual offers information on the various analysis options available. PRINT MEMBER FORCES ALL PRINT SUPPORT REACTION LIST 1 4 The above print commands are self-explanatory. The member forces are in the member local axes while support reactions are in the global axes. LOAD LIST 1 3 PARAMETERS CODE AISC UNT 10.0 MEMB 2 3 UNB 10.0 MEMB 2 3 FYLD 5760 ALL TRACK 2.0 MEMB 2 3 SELECT MEMBER 2 3 The above sequence of commands is used to initiate the steel design process. The command PARAMETERS is followed by the various steel design parameters. Parameters are specified typically when their values differ from the built-in program defaults. Specifications of the AISC ASD code are to be followed. A parameter list for the AISC code is available in Table 3.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. ALL members have 10 ft unsupported length for the top and bottom flange (UNT and UNB). UNT and UNB are used to compute the allowable compressive stress in bending. The yield strength of steel is specified as 5760
  • 129. Tutorial 1 1-89 ksf (40 ksi) since it is different from the default value of 36 ksi. The TRACK parameter controls the level of description of the output, 2.0 being the most detailed. The LOAD LIST command lists the load cases (1 and 3) to be used in the design. The SELECT MEMBER command asks the program to come up with the most economical section for members 2 and 3 in the context of the above analysis. PERFORM ANALYSIS When the analysis & design engine executes the member selection operation we specified in the previous step, a new set of properties will end up being assigned to those members. This has the effect of changing the stiffness distribution for the entire structure. Since the structure is statically indeterminate, we ought to re-analyze it if we want the nodal displacements, member forces, etc. to reflect this new stiffness distribution. The above command instructs the program to do another cycle of analysis. PARAMETER TRACK 1 ALL The TRACK parameter is re-specified. It controls the level of information produced in the steel design output. We have lowered it from 2.0 we specified earlier to 1.0 since we aren’t interested in the highest level of detail at this time. CHECK CODE ALL The analysis operation carried out earlier will create a new set of member forces. These forces will very likely be quite different from those which were used in the member selection operation. Consequently, we have to verify that the structure is safely able – from the standpoint of the design code requirements – to carry these new forces. A code checking operation, which uses the up-to- date cross sections of the members, and the latest member forces, will provide us with a status report on this issue. FINISH
  • 130. 1-90 Tutorial 1 A STAAD run is terminated using the FINISH command. Save the file and return to the main screen. This concludes the session on generating our model as a command file using the built-in editor. If you wish to perform the analysis and design, you may proceed to the next section of this manual. The on-screen post-processing facilities are explained in Section 1.10. (Remember that without successfully completing the analysis and design, the post-processing facilities will not be accessible.)
  • 131. Tutorial 1 1-91 1.8 Performing Analysis/Design STAAD.Pro performs Analysis and Design simultaneously. In order to perform Analysis and Design, select the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu. Figure 1. 85 If the structure has not been saved after the last change was made, you should save the structure first by using the Save command from the File menu. When you select the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu, the following dialog box appears: Figure 1. 86 We are presented with the choice of 2 engines : the STAAD engine and the STARDYNE Advanced Analysis engine. The STARDYNE Analysis engine is suitable for advanced problems such as Buckling Analysis, Modal Extraction using various methods, etc. However, if the calculations call for steel or concrete design, UBC load generation, etc., we have to select the STAAD engine. So, let us ensure that the radio button is on the STAAD engine.
  • 132. 1-92 Tutorial 1 Click on the Run Analysis button. As the analysis progresses, several messages appear on the screen as shown in the figure below. Figure 1. 87 Notice that we can choose from the three options available in the above dialog box: Figure 1. 88
  • 133. Tutorial 1 1-93 These options are indicative of what will happen after we click on the Done button. The View Output File option allows us to view the output file created by STAAD. The output file contains the numerical results produced in response to the various input commands we specified during the model generation process. It also tells us whether any errors were encountered, and if so, whether the analysis and design was successfully completed or not. Section 1.9 offers additional details on viewing and understanding the contents of the output file. The Go to Post Processing Mode option allows us to go to graphical part of the program known as the Post-processor. This is where one can extensively verify the results, view the results graphically, plot result diagrams, produce reports, etc. Section 1.10 explains the Post processing mode in greater detail. The Stay in Modelling Mode lets us continue to be in the Model generation mode of the program (the one we currently are in) in case we wish to make further changes to our model.
  • 134. 1-94 Tutorial 1 1.9 Viewing the output file During the analysis process, STAAD.Pro creates an Output file. This file provides important information on whether the analysis were performed properly. For example, if STAAD.Pro encounters an instability problem during the analysis process, it will be reported in the output file. We can access the output file using the method explained at the end of the previous section. Alternatively, we can select the File | View | Output File | STAAD Output option from the top menu. The STAAD.Pro output file for the problem we just ran is shown in the next few pages. Figure 1. 89
  • 135. Tutorial 1 1-95 The STAAD.Pro output file is displayed through a file viewer called SproView. This viewer allows us to set the text font for the entire file and print the output file to a printer. Use the appropriate File menu option from the menu bar. Figure 1. 90 By default, the output file contains a listing of the entire Input also. You may choose not to print the echo of the Input commands in the Output file. Please select Commands | Miscellaneous | Set Echo option from the menu bar and select the Echo Off button. It is quite important that we browse through the entire output file and make sure that the results look reasonable, that there are no error messages or warnings reported, etc. Errors encountered during the analysis & design can disable access to the post- processing mode – the graphical screens where results can be viewed graphically. The information presented in the output file is a crucial indicator of whether or not the structure satisfies the engineering requirements of safety and serviceability.
  • 136. 1-96 Tutorial 1 **************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE PORTAL FRAME 2. START JOB INFORMATION 3. ENGINEER DATE 4. END JOB INFORMATION 5. INPUT WIDTH 79 6. UNIT FEET KIP 7. JOINT COORDINATES 8. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 15 0; 3 20 15 0; 4 20 0 0 9. MEMBER INCIDENCES 10. 1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4 11. DEFINE MATERIAL START 12. ISOTROPIC STEEL 13. E 4.176E+006 14. POISSON 0.3 15. DENSITY 0.489024 16. ALPHA 6.5E-006 17. DAMP 0.03 18. END DEFINE MATERIAL 19. MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 20. 1 3 TABLE ST W12X35 21. 2 TABLE ST W14X34 22. CONSTANTS 23. MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 TO 3 24. UNIT INCHES KIP 25. MEMBER OFFSET 26. 2 START 6 0 0 27. 2 END -6 0 0 28. SUPPORTS 29. 1 FIXED 30. 4 PINNED 31. UNIT FEET KIP 32. LOAD 1 DEAD + LIVE 33. MEMBER LOAD 34. 2 UNI GY -2.5 35. LOAD 2 WIND FROM LEFT 36. JOINT LOAD 37. 2 FX 10 38. LOAD COMB 3 75 PERCENT OF {DL+LL+WL] 39. 1 0.75 2 0.75 40. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S ----------------------------------- NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 4/ 3/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 6 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 7 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 3884.9 MB, EXMEM = 488.4 MB STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO. 1 DEAD + LIVE ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING 1 ) SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = -47.50 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN- MX= 0.00 MY= 0.00 MZ= -475.00
  • 137. Tutorial 1 1-97 ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING 1 ) SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 47.50 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN- MX= 0.00 MY= 0.00 MZ= 475.00 MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( INCH /RADIANS) (LOADING 1) MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = 1.82363E-01 2 Y = -1.46578E-02 3 Z = 0.00000E+00 0 RX= 0.00000E+00 0 RY= 0.00000E+00 0 RZ= -4.82525E-03 2 STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO. 2 WIND FROM LEFT ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING 2 ) SUMMATION FORCE-X = 10.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN- MX= 0.00 MY= 0.00 MZ= -150.00 ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING 2 ) SUMMATION FORCE-X = -10.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN- MX= 0.00 MY= 0.00 MZ= 150.00 MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( INCH /RADIANS) (LOADING 2) MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = 7.27304E-01 2 Y = 2.47268E-03 2 Z = 0.00000E+00 0 RX= 0.00000E+00 0 RY= 0.00000E+00 0 RZ= -5.48842E-03 4 ************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 41. UNIT INCHES KIP 42. PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION ALL MEMBER INFORMATION ------------------ MEMBER START END LENGTH BETA JOINT JOINT (INCH) (DEG) RELEASES 1 1 2 180.000 0.00 2 2 3 228.000 0.00 3 3 4 180.000 0.00 ************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************
  • 138. 1-98 Tutorial 1 43. UNIT FEET KIP 44. PRINT MEMBER FORCES ALL MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------- ALL UNITS ARE -- KIP FEET MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z 1 1 1 23.18 -3.99 0.00 0.00 0.00 -11.48 2 -23.18 3.99 0.00 0.00 0.00 -48.40 2 1 -4.10 7.68 0.00 0.00 0.00 67.93 2 4.10 -7.68 0.00 0.00 0.00 47.32 3 1 14.30 2.77 0.00 0.00 0.00 42.34 2 -14.30 -2.77 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.81 2 1 2 3.99 23.18 0.00 0.00 0.00 36.81 3 -3.99 24.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 -47.72 2 2 2.32 -4.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 -45.27 3 -2.32 4.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 -32.69 3 2 4.73 14.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 -6.34 3 -4.73 21.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 -60.31 3 1 3 24.32 3.99 0.00 0.00 0.00 59.88 4 -24.32 -3.99 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2 3 4.10 2.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 34.74 4 -4.10 -2.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 3 21.32 4.73 0.00 0.00 0.00 70.97 4 -21.32 -4.73 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 ************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 45. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION LIST 1 4 SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KIP FEET STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------- JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z MOM-X MOM-Y MOM Z 1 1 3.99 23.18 0.00 0.00 0.00 -11.48 2 -7.68 -4.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 67.93 3 -2.77 14.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 42.34 4 1 -3.99 24.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2 -2.32 4.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 -4.73 21.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 ************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 46. LOAD LIST 1 3 47. PARAMETER 48. CODE AISC 49. FYLD 5760 MEMB 1 TO 3 50. UNT 10 MEMB 2 3 51. UNB 10 MEMB 2 3 52. TRACK 2 MEMB 2 3 53. SELECT MEMB 2 3
  • 139. Tutorial 1 1-99 STAAD.PRO MEMBER SELECTION - (AISC 9TH EDITION) *********************************************** |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Y PROPERTIES | |************* | IN INCH UNIT | | * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ | |MEMBER 2 * | | | AX = 8.85 | | * | ST W14X30 | | --Z AY = 3.39 | |DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 3.47 | | AISC-1989 * =============================== ===|=== SY = 5.82 | | * SZ = 42.05 | | * |<---LENGTH (FT)= 19.00 --->| RY = 1.49 | |************* RZ = 5.73 | | | | 70.5 (KIP-FEET) | |PARAMETER | L1 L1 STRESSES | |IN KIP INCH | L1 IN KIP INCH | |--------------- + L3 -------------| | KL/R-Y= 153.21 | L3 FA = 6.36 | | KL/R-Z= 39.76 + fa = 0.45 | | UNL = 120.00 | L3 L1 FCZ = 21.68 | | CB = 1.00 +L1 FTZ = 24.00 | | CMY = 0.85 | L3 L3 FCY = 30.00 | | CMZ = 0.85 + FTY = 30.00 | | FYLD = 40.00 | L1 fbz = 20.13 | | NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.00 | | DFF = 0.00 13.8 Fey = 6.36 | | dff = 0.00 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE Fez = 94.46 | | (WITH LOAD NO.) FV = 16.00 | | fv = 0.17 | | | | MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) | | ------------------------- | | | | AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z | | | | VALUE 4.7 24.3 0.0 0.0 70.5 | | LOCATION 0.0 19.0 0.0 0.0 9.5 | | LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 | | | |**************************************************************************| |* *| |* DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) *| |* -------------- *| |* *| |* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *| | FX MY MZ LOCATION | | ====================================================== | | PASS AISC- H1-3 0.999 1 | | 3.99 C 0.00 -70.55 9.50 | |* *| |**************************************************************************| | | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
  • 140. 1-100 Tutorial 1 STAAD.PRO MEMBER SELECTION - (AISC 9TH EDITION) *********************************************** |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Y PROPERTIES | |************* | IN INCH UNIT | | * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ | |MEMBER 3 * | | | AX = 10.00 | | * | ST W14X34 | | --Z AY = 3.61 | |DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 4.10 | | AISC-1989 * =============================== ===|=== SY = 6.91 | | * SZ = 48.64 | | * |<---LENGTH (FT)= 15.00 --->| RY = 1.53 | |************* RZ = 5.83 | | | | 71.0 (KIP-FEET) | |PARAMETER |L3 STRESSES | |IN KIP INCH | L3 IN KIP INCH | |--------------- + L3 L3 -------------| | KL/R-Y= 117.92 | L3 FA = 10.72 | | KL/R-Z= 30.87 + fa = 2.13 | | UNL = 120.00 | L3 L3 FCZ = 21.95 | | CB = 1.00 + FTZ = 24.00 | | CMY = 0.85 | L3 FCY = 30.00 | | CMZ = 0.85 + L3 L3 FTY = 30.00 | | FYLD = 40.00 | L0 fbz = 17.51 | | NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.00 | | DFF = 0.00 -3.9 Fey = 10.74 | | dff = 0.00 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE Fez = 156.71 | | (WITH LOAD NO.) FV = 16.00 | | fv = 1.31 | | | | MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) | | ------------------------- | | | | AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z | | | | VALUE 24.3 4.7 0.0 0.0 71.0 | | LOCATION 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 | | LOADING 1 3 0 0 3 | | | |**************************************************************************| |* *| |* DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) *| |* -------------- *| |* *| |* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *| | FX MY MZ LOCATION | | ====================================================== | | PASS AISC- H1-2 0.886 3 | | 21.32 C 0.00 70.97 0.00 | |* *| |**************************************************************************| | | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| 54. PERFORM ANALYSIS 55. PARAMETER 56. CODE AISC 57. TRACK 1 MEMB 1 TO 3 58. CHECK CODE MEMB 1 TO 3
  • 141. Tutorial 1 1-101 STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (AISC 9TH EDITION) ******************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KIP FEET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST W12X35 PASS AISC- H1-1 0.855 1 23.02 C 0.00 52.01 15.00 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | MEM= 1, UNIT KIP-INCH, L= 180.0 AX= 10.30 SZ= 45.6 SY= 7.5 | | KL/R-Y= 116.7 CB= 1.00 YLD= 40.00 ALLOWABLE STRESSES: FCZ= 18.19 | | FTZ= 24.00 FCY= 30.00 FTY= 30.00 FC= 10.94 FT= 24.00 FV= 16.00 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 ST W14X30 PASS AISC- H1-3 0.969 3 5.16 C 0.00 66.64 19.00 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | MEM= 2, UNIT KIP-INCH, L= 228.0 AX= 8.85 SZ= 42.1 SY= 5.8 | | KL/R-Y= 153.2 CB= 1.00 YLD= 40.00 ALLOWABLE STRESSES: FCZ= 21.68 | | FTZ= 24.00 FCY= 30.00 FTY= 30.00 FC= 6.36 FT= 24.00 FV= 16.00 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 ST W14X34 PASS AISC- H1-2 0.959 3 21.45 C 0.00 77.36 0.00 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | MEM= 3, UNIT KIP-INCH, L= 180.0 AX= 10.00 SZ= 48.6 SY= 6.9 | | KL/R-Y= 117.9 CB= 1.00 YLD= 40.00 ALLOWABLE STRESSES: FCZ= 21.95 | | FTZ= 24.00 FCY= 30.00 FTY= 30.00 FC= 10.72 FT= 24.00 FV= 16.00 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 59. FINISH *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= *** ************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com * * CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@odandetech.com * * CANADA +1 (604)629 6087 staad@dowco.com * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk * * GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 staad@edr.no * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com * * JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net * * * * North America support@reiusa.com * * Europe support@reel.co.uk * * Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************
  • 142. 1-102 Tutorial 1 1.10 Post-Processing STAAD.Pro offers extensive result verification and visualization facilities. These facilities are accessed from the Post Processing Mode. The Post Processing mode is used to verify the analysis and design results and generate reports. For this tutorial problem, we shall perform the following tasks: • Display deflection diagrams • Annotate Displacements • Display the force and moment diagrams. • Change the degree of freedom for which the force/moment diagram is plotted • Annotate the force diagram • Displaying dimensions of members
  • 143. Tutorial 1 1-103 1.10.1 Going to the post-processing mode Steps: 1. At the end of section 1.8, we saw how one could go directly from the Analysis window to the post-processing screen. However, the formal method of accessing the Post Processing mode is either by clicking on the Post-Processing icon from the top toolbar or from the Mode menu as shown in the figures below. Figure 1. 91 Figure 1. 92
  • 144. 1-104 Tutorial 1 2. The Results Setup dialog box appears as shown below. Select the load cases for which to display the results. For this tutorial, let us select all the load cases. Then click on the OK button. Figure 1. 93
  • 145. Tutorial 1 1-105 Notice that in the Post-Processing mode, the tabbed Page Control bar and the menu bar change to offer the post processing functions. Page Control in Page Control in Modeling Mode Post-Processing Mode Figure 1. 94 Menu Bar in Modeling Mode Menu Bar in Post-Processing Mode Figure 1. 95
  • 146. 1-106 Tutorial 1 1.10.2 Annotating the displacements Steps: The screen will now look like the figure shown below. Figure 1. 96 The diagram currently on display is the node deflection diagram for load case 1 (DEAD + LIVE). The title at the bottom of the diagram is indicative of that aspect. If you, say, wandered off into any other result diagram, and wanted to get back to the deflection diagram, just select the Node | Displacement tab along the page control area on the left side.
  • 147. Tutorial 1 1-107 Figure 1. 97 Annotation is the process of displaying the displacement values on the screen. Select the View Value option from the Results menu. Figure 1. 98
  • 148. 1-108 Tutorial 1 The following dialog box comes up. From the Ranges tab, select All nodes. If you wish to annotate deflection for just a few nodes, specify the node numbers in the node list. Figure 1. 99 We will annotate the results for all the nodes. So, keep the button on All.
  • 149. Tutorial 1 1-109 From the Node tab, check the Resultant option. Resultant stands for the square root of sum of squares of values of X,Y and Z displacements. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box. Figure 1. 100
  • 150. 1-110 Tutorial 1 The following figure shows the annotated deflection diagram for load case 1. Figure 1. 101
  • 151. Tutorial 1 1-111 1.10.3 Displaying force/moment diagrams Steps: The simplest method to access the facilities for displaying force/moment diagrams is from the Beam | Forces page along the page control area on the left side of the screen. The bending moment MZ will be plotted by default, evidence of which can be found in the form of the Mz icon show in the diagram below which becomes active. Figure 1. 102
  • 152. 1-112 Tutorial 1 Figure 1. 103
  • 153. Tutorial 1 1-113 The option for selecting the forces/moment diagram is available from another facility also - the Results | Bending Moment menu option. Figure 1. 104
  • 154. 1-114 Tutorial 1 1.10.4 Annotating the force/moment diagram Steps: Annotation is the process of displaying the force/moment values on the screen. Select the View Value option from the Results menu. Figure 1. 105 In the dialog box that comes up, click on the Ranges tab and select All members. If you wish to annotate the force/moment for just a few members, specify the beam numbers in the beam list.
  • 155. Tutorial 1 1-115 Figure 1. 106 We will annotate the results for all members. So, keep the button on All. From the Beam Results tab, check the Ends and Mid Point options under the Bending section. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box. Figure 1. 107
  • 156. 1-116 Tutorial 1 The following figure shows the annotated MZ diagram for load case 2. Figure 1. 108
  • 157. Tutorial 1 1-117 1.10.5 Changing the degree of freedom for which forces diagram is plotted Force and moment diagrams can be plotted for 6 degrees of freedom – Axial, Shear-Y, Shear-Z, Torsion, Moment-Y, Moment- Z. One may select or de-select one of more of these degrees of freedom from View | Structure Diagrams | Loads and Results. Let us select Shear yy and select load case 3 (75 PERCENT OF [DL+LL+WL] as shown below. Figure 1. 109
  • 158. 1-118 Tutorial 1 The resulting figure is shown below. Figure 1. 110 All degrees of freedom currently plotted will be indicated with a tick mark in the Diagrams dialog box. The icons of the Results toolbar may also be used to turn on/off specific degrees of freedom. Figure 1. 111
  • 159. Tutorial 1 1-119 For the sake of easy identification, each degree of freedom (d.o.f) has been assigned a different color (see Diagrams dialog box shown above). One may change the color for that d.o.f. by clicking on the color button alongside the d.o.f, and make a new choice from the color palette. Figure 1. 112 The appearance of the diagram may also be set to one of the 3 – Hatch, Fill or Outline by turning on the relevant option in the dialog box shown earlier. Figure 1. 113
  • 160. 1-120 Tutorial 1 1.10.6 Displaying the dimensions of the members To display the dimension of the members, click on the Dimension icon. Alternatively, one may select the Dimension Beams option from the Tools menu. In the dialog box that opens, the option Dimension to View is active. Click on the Display button followed by the Close button, and the dimensions of the members will appear alongside the members. Figure 1. 114 Figure 1. 115
  • 161. Tutorial 1 1-121 The diagram will look like the one shown below. Figure 1. 116 We can opt to save the screenshot by clicking on the Take Picture icon (shown below). This picture may be included in custom reports. See Chapter 2 for a tutorial on taking pictures as well as generating custom reports. Figure 1. 117
  • 162. 1-122 Tutorial 1 For obtaining a quick print of the plot on the screen, select the Print Current View icon as shown below. Figure 1. 118 For detailed information on the Post Processing features, please refer to the Post Processing section in the STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment manual.
  • 163. Tutorial 1 1-123
  • 164. 1-124
  • 165. 2-1 Tutorial Problem 2: RC Framed Structure Section 2 This tutorial provides step-by-step instructions for creating the model of a reinforced concrete framed structure using STAAD.Pro. The following topics are covered : • Starting the Program • Creating Joints and Members • Switching On Node and Beam Labels • Specifying Member Properties and Material Constants • Specifying Member Orientation using Beta Angle • Specifying Supports • Specifying Loads • Specifying the Analysis Type • Specifying the parameters and instructions for Concrete Design • Performing Analysis and Design • Viewing results using the Output File • Viewing results on screen – both graphically and numerically • Producing customized reports
  • 166. 2-2 Tutorial 2 2.1 Methods of creating the model As explained in Section 1.1 of tutorial problem 1, there are two methods of creating the structure data: a) using the graphical model generation mode, or graphical user interface (GUI) as it is usually referred to. b) using the command file. Both methods are explained in this tutorial also. The graphical method is explained first, from Section 2.2 onwards. Section 2.8 describes the process of creating the model using the command file method and the STAAD.Pro text editor.
  • 167. Tutorial 2 2-3 2.2 Description of the tutorial problem The structure for this project is a 2 bay, 2 story reinforced concrete frame. The figure below shows the structure. Our goal is to create the model, assign all required input, and perform the analysis and concrete design. 3 2 2 3 5 6 4 3.5m 1 4 1 6.0m 6.0m 5 Y X Z Figure 2. 1
  • 168. 2-4 Tutorial 2 BASIC DATA FOR THE STRUCTURE ATTRIBUTE DATA Member properties Beams 2 & 5 : Rectangular, 275 mm width X 350 mm depth Columns 1 & 4 : Rectangular, 275 mm width X 300 mm depth Column 3 : Circular, 350 mm diameter Member Orientation All members except column 4 : Default Column 4 : Rotated by 90 degrees with respect to default condition Material Constants Modulus of Elasticity : 22 KN/sq.mm Density : 25 kn/cu.m Poisson's Ratio : 0.17 Supports Base of all columns : Fixed Loads Load case 1 : Dead Load Selfweight of the structure. Beams 2 & 5 : 400 kg/m in global Y downward Load case 2 : Live Load Beams 2 & 5 : 600 kg/m in global Y downward Load case 3 : Wind Load Beam 1 : 300 kg/m along positive global X Beam 4 : 500 kg/m along positive global X Load Case 4 : DEAD + LIVE L1 X 1.2 + L2 X 1.5 (Use REPEAT LOAD, not Load Combination) Load Case 5 : DEAD + WIND L1 X 1.1 + L2 X 1.3 (Use REPEAT LOAD, not Load Combination)
  • 169. Tutorial 2 2-5 ATTRIBUTE DATA Analysis Type PDELTA Concrete Design Consider load cases 4 and 5 only. Parameters: Ultimate Strength of Steel : 415 N/sq.mm Concrete Strength : 25 N/sq.mm Clear cover for top : 25 mm Clear cover for bottom : 30 mm Clear cover for side : 25 mm Design beams 2 and 5 Design columns 1, 3 and 4
  • 170. 2-6 Tutorial 2 2.3 Starting the program Select the STAAD.Pro icon from the STAAD.Pro 2006 program group. Figure 2. 2
  • 171. Tutorial 2 2-7 The STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment will be invoked and the following screen comes up. Figure 2. 3 This New dialog box will come up every time we start the program. To turn this feature off, simply uncheck the Display this dialog box at Startup box at the lower left hand corner. This feature can be turned on again at a later time when File | New is invoked from the main menu.
  • 172. 2-8 Tutorial 2 Note about the unit system : There are two base unit systems in the program which control the units (length, force, temperature, etc.) in which, values, specifically results and other information presented in the tables and reports, are displayed in. The base unit system also dictates what type of default values the program will use when attributes such as Modulus of Elasticity, Density, etc., are assigned based on material types – Steel, Concrete, Aluminum – selected from the program’s library (Please refer to Section 5 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual for details). These two unit systems are English (Foot, Pound, etc.) and Metric (KN, Meter, etc.). If you recall, one of the choices made at the time of installing STAAD.Pro is this base unit system setting. That choice will serve as the default until we specifically change it. The place from where we can change this setting is under the File | Configure menu. To get to that option, first close down the dialog box shown in the earlier figure by clicking on Cancel. Then, click on the File | Configure menu option (see figure below) and choose the appropriate unit system you want. For this tutorial, let us choose the Metric units (KN, Meter, etc.). Figure 2. 4
  • 173. Tutorial 2 2-9 Figure 2. 5 Click on the Accept button to close the above dialog box.
  • 174. 2-10 Tutorial 2 Following this, select File | New once again. Figure 2. 6 The dialog box shown in Figure 2.3 will re-appear.
  • 175. Tutorial 2 2-11 2.4 Creating a new structure 1. In the New dialog box, we provide some crucial initial data necessary for building the model. The structure type is to be defined by choosing from among Space, Plane, Floor and Truss. A Space type is one where the structure, the loading or both, cause the structure to deform in all 3 global axes (X, Y and Z). In a Plane type, the geometry, loading and deformation are restricted to the global X-Y plane only. A Floor type is a structure whose geometry is confined to the X-Z plane. A Truss type of structure carries loading by pure axial action. Truss members are deemed incapable of carrying shear, bending and torsion. For our model, let us choose Space. We choose Meter as the length unit and Kilo Newton as the force unit in which we will start to build the model. The units can be changed later if necessary, at any stage of the model creation. We also need to provide a name in the File Name edit box. This is the name under which the structure data will be saved on the computer hard disk. The name “Structure?” (? will be a number) is recommended by the program by default, but we can change it to any name we want. Let us choose the name rcframe. A default path name - the location on the computer drive where the file will be saved – is provided by the program under Location. If you wish to save the file in a different location, type in the name, or click the button and specify the desired path. After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.
  • 176. 2-12 Tutorial 2 Figure 2. 7 2. In the next dialog box, we choose the tools to be used to initially construct the model. Add Beams, Add Plates or Add Solids are, respectively, the starting points for constructing beams, plates or solids. Open Structure Wizard provides access to a library of structural templates which the program comes equipped with. Those template models can be extracted and modified parametrically to arrive at our model geometry or some of its parts. If the model is to be created initially using the STAAD command language, the Open STAAD Editor box can take us to the STAAD editor. Please remember that all these options are also available from the menus and dialog boxes of the GUI, even after we dismiss this dialog box. Note: If you wish to use the Editor to create the model, choose Open STAAD Editor, click Finish, and proceed to Section 2.8.
  • 177. Tutorial 2 2-13 For our model, let us check the Add Beam option. Click on the Finish button. The dialog box will be dismissed and the STAAD.Pro graphical environment will be displayed. Figure 2. 8
  • 178. 2-14 Tutorial 2 2.5 Elements of the STAAD.Pro screen The STAAD.Pro main window is the primary screen from where the model generation process takes place. It is important to familiarize ourselves with the components of that window before we embark on creating the RC Frame. Section 1.5 in tutorial problem 1 of this manual explains the components of that window in detail.
  • 179. Tutorial 2 2-15 2.6 Building the STAAD.Pro model We are now ready to start building the model geometry. The steps and, wherever possible, the corresponding STAAD.Pro commands (the instructions which get written in the STAAD input file) are described in the following sections.
  • 180. 2-16 Tutorial 2 2.6.1 Generating the model geometry The structure geometry consists of joint numbers, their coordinates, member numbers, the member connectivity information, plate element numbers, etc. From the standpoint of the STAAD command file, the commands to be generated for the structure shown in section 2.2 are : JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 ; 2 0.0 3.5 0.0 3 6.0 3.5 0.0 ; 4 6.0 0.0 0.0 5 6.0 0.0 6.0 ; 6 6.0 3.5 6.0 MEMBER INCIDENCE 112;223;334;456;536 Steps: 1. We selected the Add Beam option earlier to enable us to add beams and columns to create the structure. This initiates a grid in the main drawing area as shown below. The directions of the global axes (X, Y, Z) are represented in the icon in the lower left hand corner of the drawing area. Figure 2. 9
  • 181. Tutorial 2 2-17 2. A Snap Node/Beam dialog box also appears in the data area on the right side of the screen. In our structure, the segment consisting of members 1 to 3, and nodes 1 to 4, happens to lie in the X-Y plane. So, in this dialog box, let us keep X-Y as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. By setting 12 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X, 7 above the origin along Y, and a spacing of 0.5 meter between lines along both X and Y (see figure below) we can draw a frame 6m X 3.5m, adequate for our segment. Please note that these settings are only a starting grid setting, to enable us to start drawing the structure, and they do not restrict our overall model to those limits. Figure 2. 10
  • 182. 2-18 Tutorial 2 3. To start creating the nodes, let us first activate the Snap Node/Beam button by clicking on it. Then, with the help of the mouse, click at the origin (0, 0) to create the first node. Figure 2. 11 4. In a similar fashion, click on the following points to create nodes and automatically join successive nodes by beam members. (0, 3.5), (6, 3.5) and (6, 0) The exact location of the mouse arrow can be monitored on the status bar located at the bottom of the window where the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the current cursor position are continuously updated.
  • 183. Tutorial 2 2-19 When steps 1 to 4 are completed, the frame will be displayed in the drawing area as shown below. Figure 2. 12
  • 184. 2-20 Tutorial 2 5. At this point, let us remove the grid display from the structure. To do that, click on the Close button in the Snap Node/Beam dialog box. Figure 2. 13
  • 185. Tutorial 2 2-21 The grid will now be removed and the structure in the main window should resemble the figure shown below. Figure 2. 14 6. It is very important that we save our work often, to avoid loss of data and protect our investment of time and effort against power interruptions, system problems, or other unforeseen events. To save the file, pull down the File menu and select the Save command.
  • 186. 2-22 Tutorial 2 Switching on node and beam labels 7. Node and beam labels are a way of identifying the entities we have drawn on the screen. In order to display the node and beam numbers, right click anywhere in the drawing area. In the pop-up menu that appears, choose Labels. Alternatively, one may access this option by selecting the View menu followed by the Structure Diagrams option from the top menu bar, and the Labels tab of the dialog box that comes up. Figure 2. 15
  • 187. Tutorial 2 2-23 8. In the Diagrams dialog box that appears, turn the Node Numbers and Beam Numbers on and then click on OK. Figure 2. 16
  • 188. 2-24 Tutorial 2 The following figure illustrates the node and beam numbers displayed on the structure. The structure in the main window should resemble the figure shown below. Figure 2. 17 If you are feeling adventurous, here is a small exercise for you. Change the font of the node/beam labels by going to the View menu and selecting the Options command, and then selecting the appropriate tab (Node Labels / Beam labels) from the Options dialog box.
  • 189. Tutorial 2 2-25 9. Examining the structure shown in section 2.2 of this tutorial, it can be seen that members 4 and 5 can be easily generated if we could first create a copy of members 1 and 2 and then rotate those copied units about a vertical line passing through the point (6, 0, 0, that is, node 4) by 90 degrees. Fortunately, such a facility does exist which can be executed in a single step. It is called Circular Repeat and is available under the Geometry menu. First, select members 1 and 2 using the Beams Cursor . (Please refer to the ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.) 10. Then, either click on the Circular Repeat icon from the appropriate toolbar, or, go to the Geometry | Circular Repeat menu option as shown below. Figure 2. 18
  • 190. 2-26 Tutorial 2 11. In the 3D Circular dialog box that comes up, specify the Axis of Rotation as Y, Total Angle as 90 degrees, No. of Steps as 1 and the vertical line as passing through Node 4. Instead of specifying as passing through Node 4, one may also specify the X and Z co- ordinates as 6 and 0 respectively. Leave the Link Steps box unchecked and click on the OK button. Figure 2. 19
  • 191. Tutorial 2 2-27 After completing the circular repeat procedure, the model will look as shown below. Before Figure 2. 20 After Figure 2. 21 If any of the members are presently selected, let us unselect them by clicking anywhere else in the drawing area. Then, let us once again save the work by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
  • 192. 2-28 Tutorial 2 2.6.2 Changing the input units of length As a matter of convenience, for specifying member properties for our structure, it is simpler if our length units are millimeter instead of meter. This will require changing the current length units of input. The commands to be generated are: UNIT MMS KN Steps: 1. Click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar. Figure 2. 22 Alternatively, one may select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option as shown in the next figure.
  • 193. Tutorial 2 2-29 Figure 2. 23 2. In either case, the following dialog box comes up. Set the Length Units to Millimeter and click on the OK button. Figure 2. 24
  • 194. 2-30 Tutorial 2 2.6.3 Specifying member properties Our next task is to assign cross section properties for the beams and columns (see section 2.2). For those of us curious to know the equivalent commands in the STAAD command file, they are : MEMB PROP 1 4 PRIS YD 300 ZD 275 2 5 PRIS YD 350 ZD 275 3 PRIS YD 350 Steps: 1. Click on the Property Page icon located on the Structure Tools toolbar. Figure 2. 25
  • 195. Tutorial 2 2-31 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Property page from the left side of the screen as shown below. Figure 2. 26
  • 196. 2-32 Tutorial 2 2. In either case, the Properties dialog box comes up. The property type we wish to assign is called PRISMATIC, and is available under the Define button in the Properties dialog box as shown below. Figure 2. 27 3. In the dialog box that comes up, select the Rectangle tab. Notice that the field called Material is presently on the checked mode. If we keep it that way, the material properties of concrete (E, Poisson, Density, Alpha, etc.) will be assigned along with the cross-section name. The material property values so assigned will be the program defaults. We do not want default values, instead we will assign our own values later on. Consequently, let us uncheck the Material box. Then, enter the following values: YD = 300mm ZD = 275mm
  • 197. Tutorial 2 2-33 Finally, click on the Add button as shown below. Figure 2. 28 4. To create the second member property (PRIS YD 350 ZD 275), provide 350 for YD and 275 for ZD (instead of 300 and 275) and click on the Add button. To create the third member property, in the Property dialog box, select the Circle option. Specify the diameter (YD) as 350 mm. Once again, uncheck the Material box and click on the Add button. Figure 2. 29 Now that we have finished creating the member properties, let us Close this dialog box.
  • 198. 2-34 Tutorial 2 The next step is to assign these member properties in the following manner: Rect 0.30x0.28 – members 1 and 4 Rect 0.35x0.28 – members 2 and 5 Cir 0.35 – member 3 To assign the member properties, follow these steps: a. Select the first property reference in the Properties dialog box (Rect 0.30x28). b. Make sure that the “Use Cursor to Assign” button is selected under the Assignment Method box. c. Click on the Assign button. The cursor changes to d. Using the cursor, click on members 1 and 4. e. Finally, click on the Assign button again, or type the ‘Esc’ button on your keyboard to stop the assignment process. Figure 2. 30 In a similar fashion, assign the remaining properties.
  • 199. Tutorial 2 2-35 After all the member properties have been assigned, the model will look as shown below. Figure 2. 31 We ought to save the model once again by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
  • 200. 2-36 Tutorial 2 2.6.4 Specifying geometric constants In the absence of any explicit instructions, STAAD will orient the beams and columns of the structure in a pre-defined way. Orientation refers to the directions along which the width and depth of the cross section are aligned with respect to the global axis system. The rules which dictate this default orientation are explained in Section 1 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual. We wish to orient member 4 so that its longer edges (sides parallel to local Y axis) are parallel to the global Z axis. This requires applying a beta angle of 90 degrees. The command which needs to be generated is : BETA 90 MEMB 4 Steps: 1. Select the Beta Angle tab in the Properties dialog box. 2. Click on the Create Beta Angle button. In the ensuing dialog box, specify the angle as 90 degrees. Select member 4 using the Beams Cursor . Notice that as we select the member, the Assignment Method automatically sets to Assign to Selected Beams. Click on the Assign button. Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the member.
  • 201. Tutorial 2 2-37 Figure 2. 32 (An alternative method to assign beta angles is the following. First select the member for which you wish to assign the beta angle. Then, go to the Commands | Geometric Constants | Beta Angle menu option. Specify the Angle in Degrees to be 90, ensure that the assignment method is “To Selection” and click on OK. ) Figure 2. 33 One may view the orientation of the member local axes by going to the View | Structure diagrams | Labels menu option and switching on Beam Orientation.
  • 202. 2-38 Tutorial 2 2.6.5 Specifying material constants At the time of assigning member properties, we deliberately chose not to assign the material constants simultaneously, since we wanted to specify values which are different from the built-in defaults. The desired values are listed at the beginning of this tutorial. The corresponding commands we wish to generate in the STAAD input file are: CONSTANTS E 22 ALL UNIT METER DENSITY 25.0 ALL POISSON 0.17 ALL Steps: 1. From the Commands menu, select Material Constants. To define the Modulus of Elasticity, select the Elasticity option as shown below. Figure 2. 34
  • 203. Tutorial 2 2-39 2. In the Material Constant dialog box that appears, enter 22 in the Enter Value box. Since the value has to be assigned to all the members of the structure, the current setting of the assignment method, namely, To View, allows us to achieve this easily. Then, click on OK. Figure 2. 35 3. For specifying the DENSITY constant, it will be convenient if we change our length units to meters. To change the length units, as before, click on the Input Units icon from the Structure toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the length units as Meter. Figure 2. 36
  • 204. 2-40 Tutorial 2 4. Following the steps 1 and 2 above, we choose Commands | Material Constants | Density, specify the value as 25KN/m 3 , and assign To View. 5. To define the POISSON’S RATIO, using the similar procedure as described above, provide the value 0.17 to all members in the View.
  • 205. Tutorial 2 2-41 2.6.6 Specifying Supports The base nodes of all the columns are restrained against translation and rotation about all the 3 global axes (see section 2.2). In other words, fixed supports are to be specified at those nodes. The commands to be generated are : SUPPORTS 1 4 5 FIXED Steps: 1. To create supports, click on the Support Page icon located in the Structure Tools toolbar as shown below. Figure 2. 37
  • 206. 2-42 Tutorial 2 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Support Page from the left side of the screen. Figure 2. 38
  • 207. Tutorial 2 2-43 2. In either case, the Supports dialog box comes up. Since we already know that nodes 1, 4 and 5 are to be associated with the Fixed support, using the Nodes Cursor , select these nodes. 3. Then, click on the Create button in the Supports dialog box as shown below. Figure 2. 39
  • 208. 2-44 Tutorial 2 4. The Create Support dialog box comes up. In the dialog box, the Fixed tab happens to be the default which is convenient for this case. Click on the Assign button as shown below. Figure 2. 40
  • 209. Tutorial 2 2-45 After the supports have been assigned, the structure will look like the one shown below. Figure 2. 41 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-select all selected nodes and prevent accidental assignment of unwanted data to those nodes. As earlier, save the work completed so far by going to the File menu and clicking on the Save command.
  • 210. 2-46 Tutorial 2 2.6.7 Specifying Loads 5 load cases are to be created for this structure. Details of the individual cases are explained at the beginning of this tutorial. The corresponding commands to be generated are listed below. Notice that cases 4 and 5 are to be generated not as the standard combination type, but using a combination load type called REPEAT LOAD. The instructions at the beginning of this tutorial require us to analyze this structure using an analysis type called PDelta. A Pdelta analysis is a non-linear type of analysis. In STAAD, to accurately account for the PDelta effects arising from the simultaneous action of previously defined horizontal and vertical loads, those previous cases must be included as components of the combination case using the REPEAT LOAD type. UNIT METER KG LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD SELFWEIGHT Y -1 MEMBER LOAD 2 5 UNI GY -400 LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD MEMBER LOAD 2 5 UNI GY -600 LOAD 3 WIND LOAD MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GX 300 4 UNI GX 500 LOAD 4 DEAD + LIVE REPEAT LOAD 1 1.2 2 1.5
  • 211. Tutorial 2 2-47 LOAD 5 DEAD + WIND REPEAT LOAD 1 1.1 3 1.3 Steps: LOAD CASE 1 1. To create loads, click on the Load Page icon located on the Structure Tools tool bar. Figure 2. 42 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Load Page from the left side of the screen. Figure 2. 43
  • 212. 2-48 Tutorial 2 2. A window titled “Load” appears on the right-hand side of the screen. To initiate the first load case, highlight the Load Cases Details option and click on the Add button. Figure 2. 44 3. The Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up. The drop-down list box against Loading Type is available in case we wish to associate the load case we are creating with any of the ACI, AISC or IBC definitions of Dead, Live, Ice, etc. This type of association needs to be done if we intend to use the program's facility for automatically generating load combinations in accordance with those codes. Notice that there is a check box called Reducible per UBC/IBC. This feature becomes active only when the load case is assigned a Loading Type called Live at the time of creation of that case. Please refer to STAAD.Pro 2004 Release Report for further details. As we do not intend to use the automatic load combination generation option, we will leave the Loading Type as None. Enter DEAD LOAD as the Title for Load Case 1 and click on Add.
  • 213. Tutorial 2 2-49 Figure 2. 45 The newly created load case will now appear under the Load Cases Details option. Figure 2. 46
  • 214. 2-50 Tutorial 2 4. To generate and assign the selfweight load type, first highlight DEAD LOAD. You will notice that the Add New Load Items dialog box shows more options now. Figure 2. 47 5. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Selfweight Load option under the Selfweight item. Specify the Direction as Y, and the Factor as -1.0. The negative number signifies that the selfweight load acts opposite to the positive direction of the global axis (Y in this case) along which it is applied. Click on the Add button. The selfweight load is applicable to every member of the structure, and cannot be applied on a selected list of members. Figure 2. 48
  • 215. Tutorial 2 2-51 6. Load 1 contains an additional load component, the member loads on members 2 and 5. However, notice that the load values are listed in the beginning of this tutorial in kg and meter units. Rather than convert those values to the current input units, we will conform to those units. The current input units, which we last set while specifying Density, are KN and METER. We have to change the force unit to Kilogram. STAAD has a limitation in that one cannot change the units while editing load cases. If we attempt to, the following message will be displayed. Figure 2. 49 Click on OK. Close the Add New Load Items dialog box. Then, go to the Setup Page as shown below (or any other page). Figure 2. 50
  • 216. 2-52 Tutorial 2 As before, click on the Input Units icon from the top toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the force units as Kilogram. Again, click on General | Load page to resume creating the load cases. 7. To create the member load, first, click on the expression DEAD LOAD followed by the Add button. Then, click on the Member Load item in the Add New Load Items dialog box. Figure 2. 51 8. Select the Uniform Force option and specify GY as the Direction and -400 as the Force. For these members, since the local Y axis coincides with the global Y axis, one may choose the direction of the load as either “Y” or “GY”, they will both have the same effect. (One may view the orientation of the member local axes by going to View | Structure Diagrams | Labels | Beam Orientation.) The negative value signifies that the load acts along the negative GY direction. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button.
  • 217. Tutorial 2 2-53 9. The member load we just created has to be assigned to members 2 and 5. First, make sure that the expression UNI GY -400Kg/m is selected in the Load dialog box as shown below. Figure 2. 52 10. Next, select members 2 and 5 using the Beams Cursor . (Please refer to the ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.) Then, click on Assign to Selected Beams followed by the Assign button. Figure 2. 53 As we click on the Assign button, the following dialog box appears. This message box appears just to confirm that we indeed wish to associate the loadcase with the selected beams. So, let us choose Yes. Figure 2. 54
  • 218. 2-54 Tutorial 2 After the load has been assigned, the structure will look as shown below: Figure 2. 55
  • 219. Tutorial 2 2-55 LOAD CASE 2 11. The next step is to initiate the second load case which again contains MEMBER LOADs. Highlight Load Cases Details and click on the Add button. Once again, the Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up. Figure 2. 56 In this dialog box, once again, we are not associating the load case we are about to create with any code based Loading Type and so, we will leave that box as None. Specify the Title of the second load case as LIVE LOAD and click on the Add button. Figure 2. 57
  • 220. 2-56 Tutorial 2 12. To create the member load, highlight LIVE LOAD as shown below. Figure 2. 58 13. Follow steps 7 to 10 to create and assign a uniformly distributed force of -600Kg/m on members 2 and 5. After the second load case has been assigned, the structure will look as shown below: Figure 2. 59 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the members.
  • 221. Tutorial 2 2-57 LOAD CASE 3 14. Creating the third load case, which again has MEMBER LOADs, involves the same procedure as that for load case 2. As before, first highlight Load Cases Details in the Load dialog box to initiate the third load case. Enter WIND LOAD as the Title for Load Case 3. 15. To apply the load on member 1, follow the procedure similar to that in steps 7 to 10. The only differences are, the member which receives this load is 1, the Direction is GX and the Force is +300Kg/m. 16. Similarly, for member 4 and the third load case, specify the Force as 500Kg/m and the Direction as GX. After the third load case has been assigned, the structure will look as shown below: Figure 2. 60
  • 222. 2-58 Tutorial 2 LOAD CASE 4 17. We now come to the point where we have to create load case 4 as (1.2 x Load 1) + (1.5 x Load 2). We saw in the beginning of this section that we should be creating a “REPEAT LOAD” type of combination, and not the “LOAD COMBINATION” type. To initiate load case 4, highlight Load Cases Details in the Load dialog box and specify the title as DEAD + LIVE. 18. Then, click on DEAD + LIVE in the Load dialog box as shown below. Figure 2. 61 19. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, click on the Repeat Load option. Then, select Load Case 1 (DEAD LOAD), click on the button and enter the Factor as 1.2. (This indicates that the load data values from load case 1 are multiplied by a factor of 1.2, and the resulting values are utilized in load case 4.) 20. Similarly, select Load Case 2 (LIVE LOAD), click on the button and enter the Factor as 1.5.
  • 223. Tutorial 2 2-59 The Add New Load Items dialog box will now look as shown below. Click on the Add button. Figure 2. 62 No further operation is required for load case 4. The recipients (members) of the loads in load case 4 are automatically chosen to be the very same ones to which the components of the REPEAT LOAD cases (loads 1 and 2) were assigned.
  • 224. 2-60 Tutorial 2 The structure will now look similar to the one shown below. Figure 2. 63
  • 225. Tutorial 2 2-61 LOAD CASE 5 21. Since load cases 4 and 5 are near identical in nature, the same procedure used in creating load case 4 is applicable for case 5 also. Let us highlight Load Cases Details in the Load dialog box to initiate the fifth load case. Enter DEAD + WIND as the Title for Load Case 5. 22. Follow steps 18 to 20 except for associating a Factor of 1.1 with the first load case and a Factor of 1.3 with the third load case. The Add New Load Items dialog box will now look as shown below. Click on the Add button. Figure 2. 64 Since we have completed creating all the load cases, we may now click on the Close button to dismiss the Add New Load Items dialog box.
  • 226. 2-62 Tutorial 2 The structure will now look similar to the one shown below. Figure 2. 65 Let us save the work completed so far by going to the File menu and selecting the Save command or by holding the ‘Ctrl’ key and pressing the ‘S’ key.
  • 227. Tutorial 2 2-63 2.6.8 Specifying the analysis type The analysis type for this structure is called P-Delta. Since this problem involves concrete beam and column design per the ACI code, second-order analysis is required and has to be done on factored loads acting simultaneously. The factored loads have been created earlier as cases 4 and 5. Now is the time to specify the analysis type. The command for a pdelta analysis will appear in the STAAD file as: PDELTA ANALYSIS Steps: 1. Go to Analysis/Print Page on the left side of the screen. Figure 2. 66
  • 228. 2-64 Tutorial 2 2. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, select the PDelta Analysis tab. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button. Figure 2. 67 Save the work again using the Save option of the File menu.
  • 229. Tutorial 2 2-65 2.6.9 Short-listing the load cases to be used in concrete design The concrete design has to be performed for load cases 4 and 5 only since only those are the factored cases. To instruct the program to use just these cases, and ignore the remaining, we have to use the LOAD LIST command. The command will appear in the STAAD file as : LOAD LIST 4 5 Steps: 1. In the menus on the top of the screen, go to Commands | Loading | Load List option as shown below. Figure 2. 68
  • 230. 2-66 Tutorial 2 2. In the Load List dialog box that comes up, select load cases 4 (DEAD + LIVE) and 5 (DEAD + WIND) by holding the ‘Ctrl’ key down. Then, click on the button. Load cases 4 and 5 will be selected and placed in the Load List selection box as shown below. Click on the OK button. Figure 2. 69
  • 231. Tutorial 2 2-67 2.6.10 Specifying concrete design parameters Among the various terms which appear in the equations for design of concrete beams and columns, some of them can be user controlled, such as, the grade of concrete, or the maximum size of reinforcing bar one may wish to use. Such terms are called concrete design parameters. For the ACI code, a list of these parameters is available in Section 3 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual. The parameters we wish to use, and the corresponding command which ought to appear in the STAAD input file are : UNIT MMS NEWTON CODE ACI CLT 25 ALL CLB 30 ALL CLS 25 ALL FC 25 ALL FYMAIN 415 ALL TRACK 1 ALL Steps: 1. Before we can start assigning the parameters, we want our force units to be Newton and our length units to be millimeter. We last set the units during load specification as Kg and Meter. To change the units, as before, click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the force units as Newton and the length units as Millimeter. 2. Next, go to Design | Concrete Page from the left side of the screen. Make sure that under the Current Code selections on the top right hand side, ACI is selected. Then, click on the Define Parameters button in the Concrete Design dialog box.
  • 232. 2-68 Tutorial 2 Figure 2. 70 3. In the Design Parameters dialog box that opens, select the Clt (Clear Cover for top) tab. Then, provide the value as 25mm and click on the Add button as shown below. Figure 2. 71
  • 233. Tutorial 2 2-69 4. To define the remaining parameters, follow the above procedure and provide the following values. Parameter Value Clb 30 Cls 25 Fc 25 Fymain 415 Track 1.0 When all the above parameters have been assigned, click on the Close button in the Design Parameters dialog box. After all the design parameters have been assigned, the Concrete Design dialog box will look as shown below. Figure 2. 72
  • 234. 2-70 Tutorial 2 The next step is to assign these parameters to all the members in our model. The easiest way to do that is to use the Assign To View method. Follow the steps as shown in the figure below. Figure 2. 73 Let us save our structure once again using the Save option of the File menu.
  • 235. Tutorial 2 2-71 2.6.11 Specifying design commands Design commands are the actual instructions for the design of beams and columns. We intend to design beams 2 and 5 and columns 1, 3 and 4. The commands to be generated are : DESIGN BEAM 2 5 DESIGN COLUMN 1 3 4 Steps: 1. Design commands are generated through the dialog boxes available under the Commands button in the Concrete Design dialog box. So, let us click on the Commands button as shown below. Figure 2. 74
  • 236. 2-72 Tutorial 2 2. In the Design Commands dialog box that comes up, select the DESIGN BEAM option and click on the Add button. Figure 2. 75 3. We also need to add a command for designing columns. So, select the DESIGN COLUMN option and click on Add button. After steps 2 and 3 are completed, let us Close this dialog box. 4. The next step is to associate the Design Beam command with members 2 and 5 and the Design Column command with members 1, 3 and 4. To do this, as before, first highlight the expression DESIGN BEAM. Then, select members 2 and 5 using the Beams Cursor . Click on Assign to Selected Beams followed by the Assign button. Figure 2. 76
  • 237. Tutorial 2 2-73 As we click on the Assign button, the following dialog box appears. This message box appears just to confirm that we indeed wish to associate the design command with the selected beams. So, let us say Yes. Figure 2. 77 Similarly, assign the Design Column command to members 1, 3 and 4 This concludes the task of assigning all the input for our model. Let us Save the file one final time.
  • 238. 2-74 Tutorial 2 2.7 Viewing the input command file Let us now take a look at the data that has been written into the file that we just saved above. The contents of the file can be viewed either by clicking on the STAAD Editor icon or, by going to the Edit menu and choosing Edit Input Command File as shown below. Figure 2. 78
  • 239. Tutorial 2 2-75 A new window will open up with the data listed as shown here: Figure 2. 79 This window and the facilities it contains is known as the STAAD Editor.
  • 240. 2-76 Tutorial 2 We could make modifications to the data of our structure in this Editor if we wish to do so. Let us Exit the Editor without doing so by selecting the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor window). As we saw in Section 2.1, we could also have created the same model by typing the relevant STAAD commands into a text file using either the STAAD editor, or by using any external editor of our choice. If you would like to understand that method, proceed to the next section. If you want to skip that part, proceed to section 2.9 where we perform the analysis and design on this model.
  • 241. Tutorial 2 2-77 2.8 Creating the model using the command file Let us now use the command file method to create the model for the above structure. The commands used in the command file are described later in this section. The STAAD.Pro command file may be created using the built-in editor, the procedure for which is explained further below in this section. Any standard text editor such as Notepad or WordPad may also be used to create the command file. However, the STAAD.Pro command file editor offers the advantage of syntax checking as we type the commands. The STAAD.Pro keywords, numeric data, comments, etc. are displayed in distinct colors in the STAAD.Pro editor. A typical editor screen is shown below to illustrate its general appearance. Figure 2. 80
  • 242. 2-78 Tutorial 2 To access the built-in editor, first start the program using the procedure explained in Section 2.2. Next, follow step 1 of Section 2.4. Figure 2. 81 You will then encounter the dialog box shown below. In this dialog box, choose Open STAAD Editor. Figure 2. 82
  • 243. Tutorial 2 2-79 At this point, the editor screen will open as shown below. Figure 2. 83 Delete all the command lines displayed in the editor window and type the lines shown in bold below (You don’t have to delete the lines if you know which to keep and where to fill in the rest of the commands). The commands may be typed in upper or lower case letters. Usually the first three letters of a keyword are all that are needed -- the rest of the letters of the word are not required. The required letters are underlined. (“SPACE” = “SPA” = “space” = “spa”)
  • 244. 2-80 Tutorial 2 Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE RC FRAMED STRUCTURE Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame structure (3-D) and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z coordinates. UNIT METER KN Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 ; 2 0 3.5 0 ; 3 6 3.5 0 4 6 0 0 ; 5 6 0 6 ; 6 6 3.5 6 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators. That enables us to provide multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCES 112;223;334 456;563 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. UNIT MMS KN MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 4 PRIS YD 300 ZD 275 2 5 PRIS YD 350 ZD 275 3 PRIS YD 350 Member properties have been defined above using the PRISMATIC attribute for which YD (depth) and ZD (width) values are provided in MM unit. When YD and ZD are provided together, STAAD considers the section to be rectangular. When YD alone is specified, the section is considered to be circular. Details are available in Section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual.
  • 245. Tutorial 2 2-81 CONSTANTS E 22 MEMB 1 TO 5 Material constant E (modulus of elasticity) is specified as 22KN/sq.mm following the command CONSTANTS. UNIT METER KN CONSTANTS DENSITY 25.0 ALL POISSON 0.17 ALL Length unit is changed from MMS to METER to facilitate the input of Density. Next, the Poisson’s Ratio is specified. BETA 90 MEMB 4 In the absence of any explicit instructions, STAAD will orient the beams and columns of the structure in a pre-defined way (see Section 1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details.) In order to orient member 4 so that its longer edges (sides parallel to local Y axis) are parallel to the global Z axis, we need to apply a beta angle of 90 degrees. SUPPORT 1 4 5 FIXED Joints 1, 4 and 5 are defined as fixed supported. UNIT METER KG LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD Force units are changed from KN to KG to facilitate the input of loads. Load case 1 is initiated along with an accompanying title.
  • 246. 2-82 Tutorial 2 SELFWEIGHT Y -1 One of the components of load case 1 is the selfweight of the structure acting in the global Y direction with a factor of -1.0. Since global Y is vertically upward, the factor of -1.0 indicates that this load will act downwards. MEMBER LOAD 2 5 UNI GY -400 Load 1 contains member loads also. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. Loads are applied on members 2 and 5. LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD Load case 2 is initiated along with an accompanying title. MEMBER LOAD 2 5 UNI GY -600 Load 2 also contains member loads. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. Loads are applied on members 2 and 5. LOAD 3 WIND LOAD Load case 3 is initiated along with an accompanying title. MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GX 300 4 UNI GX 500 Load 3 also contains member loads. GX indicates that the load is in the global X direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. Loads are applied on members 1 and 4. LOAD 4 DEAD + LIVE Load case 4 is initiated along with an accompanying title.
  • 247. Tutorial 2 2-83 REPEAT LOAD 1 1.2 2 1.5 Load case 4 illustrates the technique employed to instruct STAAD to create a load case which consists of data to be assembled from other load cases specified earlier. We are instructing the program to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 and 2 acting simultaneously. The load data values from load case 1 are multiplied by a factor of 1.2, and the resulting values are utilized in load case 4. Similarly, the load data values from load case 2 are multiplied by a factor of 1.5, and the resulting values too are utilized in load case 4. LOAD 5 DEAD + WIND Load case 5 is initiated along with an accompanying title. REPEAT LOAD 1 1.1 3 1.3 We are instructing the program to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 and 3 acting simultaneously. PDELTA ANALYSIS The PDELTA ANALYSIS command is an instruction to the program to execute a second-order analysis and account for P-delta effects. LOAD LIST 4 5 The above LOAD LIST command is a means of stating that all further calculations should be based on the results of load cases 4 and 5 only. The intent here is to restrict concrete design calculations to that for load cases 4 and 5 only.
  • 248. 2-84 Tutorial 2 START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE ACI UNIT MMS NEWTON CLT 25 ALL CLB 30 ALL CLS 25 ALL FC 25 ALL FYMAIN 415 ALL TRACK 1 ALL We first line is the command that initiates the concrete design operation. The values for the concrete design parameters are defined in the above commands. Design is performed per the ACI Code. The length units are changed from METER to MMS to facilitate the input of the design parameters. Similarly, force units are changed from KG to NEWTON. The TRACK value dictates the extent of design related information which should be produced by the program in the output. The parameters specified include CLT(Clear cover for top surface), CLB (Clear cover for bottom surface), CLS (Clear cover for sides), FC(Strength of concrete), and FYMAIN(Ultimate strength of steel). These parameters are described in Section 3 of the Technical Reference Manual. DESIGN BEAM 2 5 DESIGN COLUMN 1 3 4 The above commands instruct the program to design beams 2 and 5 for flexure, shear and torsion, and to design columns 1, 3 and 4 for axial load and biaxial bending. END CONCRETE DESIGN This command terminates the concrete design operation. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run. Let us save the file and exit the editor.
  • 249. Tutorial 2 2-85 2.9 Performing the analysis and design STAAD.Pro performs Analysis and Design simultaneously. In order to perform Analysis and Design, select the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu. Figure 2. 84 If the structure has not been saved after the last change was made, you should save the structure first by using the Save command from the File menu. When you select the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu, the following dialog box appears: Figure 2. 85 We are presented with the choice of 2 engines : the STAAD engine and the STARDYNE Advanced Analysis engine. The STARDYNE Analysis engine is suitable for advanced problems such as Buckling Analysis, Modal Extraction using various methods, etc. However, if the calculations call for steel or concrete design, UBC load generation, etc., we have to select the STAAD engine. So, let us ensure that the radio button is on the STAAD engine.
  • 250. 2-86 Tutorial 2 Click on the Run Analysis button. As the Analysis progresses, several messages appear on the screen as shown in the next figure. Figure 2. 86 Notice that we can choose from the three options available in the above dialog box : Figure 2. 87 These options are indicative of what will happen after we click on the Done button.
  • 251. Tutorial 2 2-87 The View Output File option allows us to view the output file created by STAAD. The output file contains the numerical results produced in response to the various input commands we specified during the model generation process. It also tells us whether any errors were encountered, and if so, whether the analysis and design was successfully completed or not. Section 2.10 offers additional details on viewing and understanding the contents of the output file. The Go to Post Processing Mode option allows us to go to graphical part of the program known as the Post-processor. This is where one can extensively verify the results, view the results graphically, plot result diagrams, produce reports, etc. Section 2.11 explains the post processing mode in greater detail. The Stay in Modelling Mode lets us continue to be in the Model generation mode of the program (the one we current are in) in case we wish to make further changes to our model.
  • 252. 2-88 Tutorial 2 2.10 Viewing the output file During the analysis process, STAAD.Pro creates an Output file. This file provides important information on whether the analysis was performed properly. For example, if STAAD.Pro encounters an instability problem during the analysis process, it will be reported in the output file. We can access the output file using the method explained at the end of the previous section. Alternatively, we can select the File | View | Output File | STAAD Output option from the top menu. The STAAD.Pro output file for the problem we just ran is shown in the next few pages. Figure 2. 88
  • 253. Tutorial 2 2-89 The STAAD.Pro output file is displayed through a file viewer called SproView. This viewer allows us to set the text font for the entire file and print the output file to a printer. Use the appropriate File menu option from the menu bar. Figure 2. 89 By default, the output file contains a listing of the entire input also. You may choose not to print the echo of the input commands in the output file. Please select Commands | Miscellaneous | Set Echo option from the menu bar and select the Echo Off button. It is quite important that we browse through the entire output file and make sure that the results look reasonable, that there are no error messages or warnings reported, etc. Errors encountered during the analysis & design can disable access to the post- processing mode – the graphical screens where results can be viewed graphically. The information presented in the output file is a crucial indicator of whether or not the structure satisfies the engineering requirements of safety and serviceability.
  • 254. 2-90 Tutorial 2 **************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE RC FRAMED STRUCTURE 2. START JOB INFORMATION 3. ENGINEER DATE 4. END JOB INFORMATION 5. INPUT WIDTH 79 6. UNIT METER KN 7. JOINT COORDINATES 8. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.5 0; 3 6 3.5 0; 4 6 0 0; 5 6 0 6; 6 6 3.5 6 9. MEMBER INCIDENCES 10. 1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4; 4 5 6; 5 6 3 11. UNIT MMS KN 12. MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 13. 1 4 PRIS YD 300 ZD 275 14. 2 5 PRIS YD 350 ZD 275 15. 3 PRIS YD 350 16. CONSTANTS 17. E 22 MEMB 1 TO 5 18. UNIT METER KN 19. CONSTANTS 20. DENSITY 25.0 ALL 21. POISSON 0.17 ALL 22. BETA 90 MEMB 4 23. SUPPORTS 24. 1 4 5 FIXED 25. UNIT METER KG 26. LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD 27. SELFWEIGHT Y -1 28. MEMBER LOAD 29. 2 5 UNI GY -400 30. LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD 31. MEMBER LOAD 32. 2 5 UNI GY -600 33. LOAD 3 WIND LOAD 34. MEMBER LOAD 35. 1 UNI GX 300 36. 4 UNI GX 500 37. LOAD 4 DEAD + LIVE 38. REPEAT LOAD 39. 1 1.2 2 1.5 40. LOAD 5 DEAD + WIND 41. REPEAT LOAD 42. 1 1.1 3 1.3 43. PDELTA ANALYSIS P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S ----------------------------------- NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 6/ 5/ 3 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 3/ 3/ 12 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 5, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 18 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 43064.0 MB
  • 255. Tutorial 2 2-91 44. LOAD LIST 4 5 45. START CONCRETE DESIGN 46. CODE ACI 47. UNIT MMS NEWTON 48. CLT 25 MEMB 1 TO 5 49. CLB 30 MEMB 1 TO 5 50. CLS 25 ALL 51. FC 25 MEMB 1 TO 5 52. FYMAIN 415 MEMB 1 TO 5 53. TRACK 1 ALL 54. DESIGN BEAM 2 5 ===================================================================== BEAM NO. 2 DESIGN RESULTS - FLEXURE PER CODE ACI 318-02 LEN - 6000. MM FY - 415. FC - 25. MPA, SIZE - 275. X 350. MMS LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR (MM) (MM) (MM) STA END _____________________________________________________________________ 1 51. 2 - 16MM 313. 5437. NO NO |----------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL POS MOMENT= 39.16 KN-MET AT 3000.MM, LOAD 4| | REQD STEEL= 366.MM2, ROW=0.0044, ROWMX=0.0193 ROWMN=0.0033 | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 273./ 41./ 184. MMS | | REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 480. MMS | |----------------------------------------------------------------| Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 20964.0 cm^4 2 306. 3 - 12MM 0. 860. YES NO |----------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL NEG MOMENT= 33.29 KN-MET AT 0.MM, LOAD 4| | REQD STEEL= 301.MM2, ROW=0.0036, ROWMX=0.0193 ROWMN=0.0033 | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 273./ 37./ 94. MMS | | REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 360. MMS | |----------------------------------------------------------------| Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 19148.5 cm^4 3 306. 3 - 12MM 4390. 6000. NO YES |----------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL NEG MOMENT= 36.18 KN-MET AT 6000.MM, LOAD 4| | REQD STEEL= 329.MM2, ROW=0.0039, ROWMX=0.0193 ROWMN=0.0033 | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 273./ 37./ 94. MMS | | REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 360. MMS | |----------------------------------------------------------------| Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 19148.5 cm^4 B E A M N O. 2 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR AT START SUPPORT - Vu= 43.94 KNS Vc= 72.44 KNS Vs= 0.00 KNS Tu= 2.55 KN-MET Tc= 2.4 KN-MET Ts= 3.4 KN-MET LOAD 4 STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION. REINFORCEMENT FOR SHEAR IS PER CL.11.5.5.1. PROVIDE 12 MM 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 130. MM C/C FOR 2705. MM ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL RESISTANCE = 0.75 SQ.CM. AT END SUPPORT - Vu= 44.91 KNS Vc= 71.94 KNS Vs= 0.00 KNS Tu= 2.55 KN-MET Tc= 2.4 KN-MET Ts= 3.4 KN-MET LOAD 4 STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION. REINFORCEMENT FOR SHEAR IS PER CL.11.5.5.1. PROVIDE 12 MM 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 130. MM C/C FOR 2705. MM ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL RESISTANCE = 0.75 SQ.CM.
  • 256. 2-92 Tutorial 2 ___ 2J____________________ 6000X 275X 350_____________________ 3J____ | | ||========= ====================|| | 3No12 H 306. 0.TO 860 3No12|H|306.4390.TO 6000 | | 22*12c/c130 | | |22*12c/c130 | | 2No16 H 51. 313.TO 5437 | | | | | | | | | ================================================================== | | | |___________________________________________________________________________| ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ | | | | | | | | | | | ooo | | | | | | ooo | | ooo | | 3#12 | | | | | | 3#12 | | 3#12 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2#16 | | 2#16 | | 2#16 | | | | | | oo | | oo | | oo | | | | | | | | | | | | | |___________| |___________| |___________| |___________| |___________| ===================================================================== BEAM NO. 5 DESIGN RESULTS - FLEXURE PER CODE ACI 318-02 LEN - 6000. MM FY - 415. FC - 25. MPA, SIZE - 275. X 350. MMS LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR (MM) (MM) (MM) STA END _____________________________________________________________________ 1 51. 2 - 16MM 313. 5437. NO NO |----------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL POS MOMENT= 39.16 KN-MET AT 3000.MM, LOAD 4| | REQD STEEL= 366.MM2, ROW=0.0044, ROWMX=0.0193 ROWMN=0.0033 | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 273./ 41./ 184. MMS | | REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 480. MMS | |----------------------------------------------------------------| Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 20964.0 cm^4 2 306. 3 - 12MM 0. 860. YES NO |----------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL NEG MOMENT= 33.29 KN-MET AT 0.MM, LOAD 4| | REQD STEEL= 301.MM2, ROW=0.0036, ROWMX=0.0193 ROWMN=0.0033 | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 273./ 37./ 94. MMS | | REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 360. MMS | |----------------------------------------------------------------| Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 19148.5 cm^4 3 306. 3 - 12MM 4890. 6000. NO YES |----------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL NEG MOMENT= 36.18 KN-MET AT 6000.MM, LOAD 4| | REQD STEEL= 329.MM2, ROW=0.0039, ROWMX=0.0193 ROWMN=0.0033 | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 273./ 37./ 94. MMS | | REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 360. MMS | |----------------------------------------------------------------| Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 19148.5 cm^4 B E A M N O. 5 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR AT START SUPPORT - Vu= 18.56 KNS Vc= 72.56 KNS Vs= 0.00 KNS Tu= 4.73 KN-MET Tc= 2.3 KN-MET Ts= 6.3 KN-MET LOAD 5 STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION. REINFORCEMENT FOR SHEAR IS PER CL.11.5.5.1. PROVIDE 12 MM 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 130. MM C/C FOR 2705. MM ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL RESISTANCE = 1.40 SQ.CM.
  • 257. Tutorial 2 2-93 AT END SUPPORT - Vu= 19.11 KNS Vc= 71.87 KNS Vs= 0.00 KNS Tu= 4.73 KN-MET Tc= 2.3 KN-MET Ts= 6.3 KN-MET LOAD 5 STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION. REINFORCEMENT FOR SHEAR IS PER CL.11.5.5.1. PROVIDE 12 MM 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 130. MM C/C FOR 2705. MM ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL RESISTANCE = 1.40 SQ.CM. ___ 6J____________________ 6000X 275X 350_____________________ 3J____ | | ||========= ==============|| | 3No12 H 306. 0.TO 860 3No12 H 306.4890.TO 6000 | | 22*12c/c130 22*12c/c130 | | 2No16 H 51. 313.TO 5437 | | | | | | ================================================================== | | | |___________________________________________________________________________| ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ | | | | | | | | | | | ooo | | | | | | | | ooo | | 3#12 | | | | | | | | 3#12 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2#16 | | 2#16 | | 2#16 | | | | | | oo | | oo | | oo | | | | | | | | | | | | | |___________| |___________| |___________| |___________| |___________| ********************END OF BEAM DESIGN************************** 55. DESIGN COLUMN 1 3 4 ==================================================================== COLUMN NO. 1 DESIGN PER ACI 318-02 - AXIAL + BENDING FY - 415.0 FC - 25.0 MPA, RECT SIZE - 275.0 X 300.0 MMS, TIED AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 882.8 SQ. MM BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION PHI ---------------------------------------------------------- 8 - 12 MM 1.097 4 END 0.650 (PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS ON EACH FACE) TIE BAR NUMBER 8 SPACING 192.00 MM COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z -AXIS (KN-MET) -------------------------------------------------------- P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal. (MM) 2109.38 1687.50 785.43 97.75 124.5 M0 P-tens. Des.Pn Des.Mn e/h 47.51 -375.48 75.04 51.21 0.19497 -------------------------------------------------------- COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Y -AXIS (KN-MET) -------------------------------------------------------- P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal. (MM) 2109.38 1687.50 775.80 88.78 114.4 M0 P-tens. Des.Pn Des.Mn e/h 43.01 -375.48 75.04 3.92 0.01492 -------------------------------------------------------- ====================================================================
  • 258. 2-94 Tutorial 2 COLUMN NO. 3 DESIGN PER ACI 318-02 - AXIAL + BENDING FY - 415.0 FC - 25.0 MPA, CIRC SIZE 350.0 MMS DIAMETER TIED AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 1096.8 SQ. MM BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION PHI ---------------------------------------------------------- 10 - 12 MM 1.176 4 STA 0.650 (EQUALLY SPACED) TIE BAR NUMBER 8 SPACING 192.00 MM COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z/Y -AXIS (KN-MET) -------------------------------------------------------- P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal. (MM) 2489.81 1991.85 939.46 109.84 116.9 M0 P-tens. Des.Pn Des.Mn e/h 62.23 -469.35 153.06 73.18 0.09660 -------------------------------------------------------- ==================================================================== COLUMN NO. 4 DESIGN PER ACI 318-02 - AXIAL + BENDING FY - 415.0 FC - 25.0 MPA, RECT SIZE - 275.0 X 300.0 MMS, TIED AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 1056.0 SQ. MM BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION PHI ---------------------------------------------------------- 4 - 20 MM 1.523 5 STA 0.650 (PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS ON EACH FACE) TIE BAR NUMBER 8 SPACING 192.00 MM COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z -AXIS (KN-MET) -------------------------------------------------------- P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal. (MM) 2247.93 1798.34 764.68 123.35 161.3 M0 P-tens. Des.Pn Des.Mn e/h 63.35 -521.51 43.92 10.50 0.06829 -------------------------------------------------------- COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Y -AXIS (KN-MET) -------------------------------------------------------- P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal. (MM) 2247.93 1798.34 755.33 111.44 147.5 M0 P-tens. Des.Pn Des.Mn e/h 57.35 -521.51 43.92 47.50 0.30898 -------------------------------------------------------- ********************END OF COLUMN DESIGN RESULTS******************** 56. END CONCRETE DESIGN
  • 259. Tutorial 2 2-95 57. FINISH *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= **** ************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com * * CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@odandetech.com * * CANADA +1 (604)629 6087 staad@dowco.com * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk * * GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 staad@edr.no * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com * * JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net * * * * North America support@reiusa.com * * Europe support@reel.co.uk * * Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************
  • 260. 2-96 Tutorial 2 2.11 Post-Processing STAAD.Pro offers extensive result verification and visualization facilities. These facilities are accessed from the Post Processing Mode. The Post Processing mode is used to verify the analysis and design results and generate reports. For this tutorial problem, we shall perform the following tasks: • Display deflection diagrams • Annotate Displacements • Change the Display units for displacement values shown in the tables. • Switching between load cases for viewing deflection diagrams. • Display the force and moment diagrams. • Changing the degree of freedom for which the force/moment diagram is plotted • Annotating the force diagram • Changing the Display units for the force and moment values shown in the tables. • Restricting the load cases for which results are viewed • Using Member Query • Viewing Concrete Design results using Query. • Producing an on-screen report • Taking pictures • Creating Customized Reports
  • 261. Tutorial 2 2-97 2.11.1 Going to the post-processing mode Steps: 1. At the end of section 2.9, we saw how one could go directly from the Analysis window to the post-processing screen. However, the formal method of accessing the Post Processing mode is either by clicking on the Post-Processing icon from the top toolbar or from the Mode menu as shown in the figures below. Figure 2. 90 Figure 2. 91
  • 262. 2-98 Tutorial 2 2. The Results Setup dialog box appears as shown below. Select the load cases for which to display the results. For our case, let us select all the load cases. Then click on the OK button. Figure 2. 92
  • 263. Tutorial 2 2-99 2.11.2 Viewing the deflection diagram The screen will now look like the figure shown below. Figure 2. 93 The diagram currently on display is the node deflection diagram for load case 1 (DEAD LOAD). The title at the bottom of the diagram is indicative of that aspect. If you, say, wandered off into any other result diagram, and wanted to get back to the deflection diagram, just select the Node | Displacement tab along the page control area on the left side.
  • 264. 2-100 Tutorial 2 Figure 2. 94 The option for selecting the deflection diagram is available from another facility also - the Results | Deflection menu option - as shown below. Figure 2. 95
  • 265. Tutorial 2 2-101 2.11.3 Switching between load cases for viewing the deflection diagram Steps: 1. To change the load case for which to view the deflection diagram, you may click in the list box called Active Load and choose the one you want. Figure 2. 96 2. Alternatively, either click on the Symbols and Labels icon or, go to View | Structure Diagrams menu option as shown below. Figure 2. 97
  • 266. 2-102 Tutorial 2 3. In either case, the Diagrams dialog box comes up. Select the Loads and Results tab and choose the desired load case from the Load Case list box. Then, click on OK. Figure 2. 98
  • 267. Tutorial 2 2-103 The diagram below shows the deflected shape of the structure for load case 3. Figure 2. 99 4. To display the deflection for say, load case 5 (DEAD + WIND), follow step 1 or 2 and select load case 5.
  • 268. 2-104 Tutorial 2 The deflection of Load Case 5 will now displayed on the model as shown below. Figure 2. 100
  • 269. Tutorial 2 2-105 2.11.4 Changing the size of the deflection diagram Steps: If the diagram appears too imperceptible, it may be because it may be drawn to too small a scale. To change the scale of the deflection plot, you may a) click on the Scale icon Figure 2. 101 b) choose Scale from the Results menu Figure 2. 102 or
  • 270. 2-106 Tutorial 2 c) go to View | Structure Diagrams | Scales menu option. All of the above will bring up the following dialog box. Figure 2. 103 In the Displacement field, specify a smaller number than what is currently listed, and click on OK. The deflection diagram should now be larger.
  • 271. Tutorial 2 2-107 In the above dialog box, if you switch on the check box Apply Immediately, pressing the up or down arrow keys alongside the number will produce immediate results in terms of a smaller or a larger diagram depending on whether you click the up or the down arrow keys. Figure 2. 104
  • 272. 2-108 Tutorial 2 2.11.5 Annotating displacements Annotation is the process of displaying the displacement values on the screen. Steps: 1. Select the View Value option from the Results menu. Figure 2. 105 2. The following dialog box comes up. From the Ranges tab, select All nodes. If you wish to annotate deflection for just a few nodes, specify the node numbers in the node list.
  • 273. Tutorial 2 2-109 Figure 2. 106 We will annotate the results for all nodes. So, keep the button on All. From the Node tab, check the Resultant option. Resultant stands for the square root of sum of squares of values of X,Y and Z displacements. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box. Figure 2. 107
  • 274. 2-110 Tutorial 2 The following figure shows the annotated deflection diagram for load case 2. Figure 2. 108
  • 275. Tutorial 2 2-111 2.11.6 Changing the units in which displacement values are annotated The units in which displacement values are displayed in the post- processing mode are referred to as the display units. Steps: 1. Display units may be modified by using any one of the following methods: a. by clicking on the Change Graphical Display Unit icon, Figure 2. 109 b. by going to Tools | Set Current Display Unit menu option Figure 2. 110 or,
  • 276. 2-112 Tutorial 2 c. by selecting the View | Options menu option. Figure 2. 111 2. In the Options dialog box that comes up, select the Structure Units tab. Change the Dimensions of Displacement from Millimeter to say, cm or inches or anything else you desire, and click on OK. Figure 2. 112
  • 277. Tutorial 2 2-113 The diagram will be updated to reflect the new units. Figure 2. 113
  • 278. 2-114 Tutorial 2 2.11.7 The Node Displacement Table Upon entering the Post-Processing mode, the first screen that we came across is shown below. Figure 2. 114 For the Node | Displacement page on the left side, notice that there are 2 tables displayed along the right side. The upper table, called the Node Displacements table, lists the displacement values for every node for every selected load case. Load cases may be selected or de-selected for the purpose of this table from the Results | Select Load Case menu. (See section 2.11.16 for details) The lower table is called the Beam relative displacement table.
  • 279. Tutorial 2 2-115 If you happen to close down any of these tables, you can restore them from the View | Tables menu. Figure 2. 115 The Node Displacement table window has two tabs: All and Summary (see figure below). Figure 2. 116
  • 280. 2-116 Tutorial 2 All - This tab presents all nodal displacements in tabular form for all load cases and all degrees of freedom. Figure 2. 117 Summary - This tab, shown in the figure below, presents the maximum and minimum nodal displacements (translational and rotational) for each degree of freedom. All nodes and all Load Cases specified during the Results Setup are considered. Maximum values for all degrees of freedom are presented with the corresponding Node of occurrence and Load Case number (L/C). Figure 2. 118
  • 281. Tutorial 2 2-117 For the Beam Relative Displacement table, the details are as follows : All The All tab presents the displacements of members at intermediate section points. All specified members and all specified load cases are included. The table shows displacements along the local axes of the members, as well as their resultants. Max Displacements The Max Displacements tab presents the summary of maximum sectional displacements (see figure below). This table includes the maximum displacement values and location of its occurrence along the member, for all specified members and all specified load cases. The table also provides the ratio of the span length of the member to the resultant maximum section displacement of the member. Figure 2. 119
  • 282. 2-118 Tutorial 2 The sub-pages under the Node page are described below in brief. Page Sub-Page Purpose Node Displacement Displays nodal displacements along with tabular results for Node-Displacements and sectional Beam displacements. Reactions Displays support reactions on the drawing as well as in a tabular form. Modes Displays mode shapes for the selected Mode shape number. The eigenvectors are simultaneously displayed in tabular form. This Page appears only for dynamic analyses cases, namely, response spectrum, time history, and if modal calculations are requested. Time History Displays Time history plots, for time history analysis. This sub-page too will appear only if time history analysis is performed.
  • 283. Tutorial 2 2-119 2.11.8 Displaying force/moment diagrams Steps: 1. The simplest method to access the facilities for displaying force/moment diagrams is from the Beam | Forces page along the page control area on the left side of the screen. The bending moment MZ will be plotted by default, evidence of which can be found in the form of the Mz icon show in the diagram below which becomes active. Figure 2. 120
  • 284. 2-120 Tutorial 2 Figure 2. 121
  • 285. Tutorial 2 2-121 2. The option for selecting the force/moment diagram is available from another facility also - the Results | Bending Moment menu option - as shown below. Figure 2. 122
  • 286. 2-122 Tutorial 2 2.11.9 Switching between load cases for viewing the force/moment diagram Steps: 1. To change the load case for which to view the force/moment diagram, you may click in the list box called Active Load and choose the one you want. Figure 2. 123 2. Alternatively, either click on the Symbols and Labels icon or, go to View | Structure Diagrams menu option as shown below. Figure 2. 124
  • 287. Tutorial 2 2-123 3. In either case, the Diagrams dialog box comes up. Select the Loads and Results tab and choose the second load case (LIVE LOAD) from the Load Case list box. Also, let us check the Shear yy check box. Then, click on OK. Figure 2. 125
  • 288. 2-124 Tutorial 2 4. The figure below shows the shear force diagram for load case 2. Figure 2. 126 5. To display the bending moment diagram for say, load case 4 (DEAD + LIVE), follow steps 1 to 3 above and select load case 4.
  • 289. Tutorial 2 2-125 The following diagram should appear in the drawing area: Figure 2. 127
  • 290. 2-126 Tutorial 2 2.11.10 Changing the size of the force/ moment diagram Steps: If the diagram appears too imperceptible, it may be because it may be drawn to too small a scale. To change the scale of the moment plot, you may a) click on the Scale icon Figure 2. 128 b) choose Scale from the Results menu Figure 2. 129 or
  • 291. Tutorial 2 2-127 c) go to View | Structure Diagrams | Scales menu option. All of the above will bring up the following dialog box. Figure 2. 130 In the Bending field, specify a smaller number than what is currently listed, and click on OK. The moment diagram should now be larger. In the above dialog box, if you switch on the check box Apply Immediately, pressing the up or down arrow keys alongside the number will produce immediate results in terms of a smaller or a
  • 292. 2-128 Tutorial 2 larger diagram depending on whether you click the up or the down arrow keys. Figure 2. 131
  • 293. Tutorial 2 2-129 2.11.11 Changing the degree of freedom for which forces diagram is plotted Force and moment diagrams can be plotted for 6 degrees of freedom – Axial, Shear-Y, Shear-Z, Torsion, Moment-Y, Moment- Z. One may select or de-select one of more of these degrees of freedom from View | Structure Diagrams | Loads and Results. Figure 2. 132 All degrees of freedom currently plotted will be indicated with a tick mark.
  • 294. 2-130 Tutorial 2 The icons of the Results toolbar may also be used to turn on/off specific degrees of freedom. Figure 2. 133 For the sake of easy identification, each degree of freedom (d.o.f) has been assigned a different color. One may change the color for that d.o.f. by clicking on the color button alongside the d.o.f, and make a new choice from the color palette. Figure 2. 134 The appearance of the diagram may also be set to one of the 3 – Hatch, Fill or Outline by turning on the relevant option in the dialog box shown earlier. Figure 2. 135
  • 295. Tutorial 2 2-131 2.11.12 Annotating the force/moment diagram Steps : 1. Annotation is the process of displaying the force/moment values on the screen. Select the View Value option from the Results menu. Figure 2. 136 2. The following dialog box comes up. From the Ranges tab, select All members. If you wish to annotate the force/moment for just a few members, specify the beam numbers in the beam list. Figure 2. 137 We will annotate the results for all members. So, keep the button on All.
  • 296. 2-132 Tutorial 2 From the Beam Results tab, check the Bending - Maximum option. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box. Figure 2. 138
  • 297. Tutorial 2 2-133 The following figure shows the annotated MZ diagram for load case 5. Figure 2. 139
  • 298. 2-134 Tutorial 2 2.11.13 Changing the units in which force/moment values are annotated Steps: 1. The units in which force and moment values are displayed in the post-processing mode are referred to as the display units. Display units may be modified by using any one of the following methods: a. by clicking on the Change Graphical Display Unit icon Figure 2. 140 b. by going to Tools | Set Current Display Unit menu option Figure 2. 141 or,
  • 299. Tutorial 2 2-135 c. by selecting the View | Options menu option. Figure 2. 142 2. In the Options dialog box that comes up, select the Force Units tab. For bending moments, change the Moment unit from its current setting to one of the choices available, say, Mton-m or kip- ft or anything else you desire, and select OK. Figure 2. 143
  • 300. 2-136 Tutorial 2 The diagram will be updated to reflect the new units. Figure 2. 144
  • 301. Tutorial 2 2-137 2.11.14 Beam Forces Table When we select the Beam | Forces page from the page control area on the left side, the screen that appears is shown below. Figure 2. 145 The axial forces and shear forces, bending and torsional moments in all selected beams for all selected load cases are displayed in a tabular form along the right half of the screen. Load cases may be selected or de-selected for the purpose of this table from the Results | Select Load Case menu. (See section 2.11.16 for details)
  • 302. 2-138 Tutorial 2 If you happen to close down any of these tables, you can restore them from the View | Tables menu. Figure 2. 146 The Beam End Forces table window has three tabs: All, Summary and Envelope. Figure 2. 147
  • 303. Tutorial 2 2-139 All - This tab presents all forces and moments corresponding to all 6 degrees of freedom at the start and end of each selected member for all selected load cases. Figure 2. 148 Summary - This tab, shown in the next figure, presents the maximum and minimum values (forces and moments) for each degree of freedom. All beams and all Load Cases specified during the Results Setup are considered. Maximum values for all degrees of freedom are presented with the corresponding Node of occurrence and Load Case number (L/C).
  • 304. 2-140 Tutorial 2 Figure 2. 149 Envelope : This tab shows a table consisting of the maximum and minimum for each degree of freedom for each member, and the load case responsible for each of those values. Figure 2. 150
  • 305. Tutorial 2 2-141 2.11.15 Viewing the force/moment diagrams from the Beam | Graphs page The Graphs page in the Post Processing Mode allows us to graphically view moments and forces such as Axial, Bending zz, Shear yy and Combined Stresses for individual members. Select the Graphs sub-page nested under the Beam page from the left side of the screen as shown below. Figure 2. 151
  • 306. 2-142 Tutorial 2 The Main Window area of the screen shows the loading on the structure. On the right side of the screen, the force/moment diagrams appear (see figure below). When we highlight a member in the main window by clicking on it, the graphs are plotted for that member in the data area. The following figure shows the graphs plotted for member 1 for load case 4. Figure 2. 152
  • 307. Tutorial 2 2-143 The following figure shows the graphs plotted for member 2 for the same load case. Figure 2. 153 We can change the degree of freedom for which results are plotted by doing the following. Go into one of the 3 drawing windows on the right side, and click the right mouse button. The following dialog box will appear.
  • 308. 2-144 Tutorial 2 Figure 2. 154 Select Diagrams. In the dialog box which appears, switch on/switch off the degrees of freedom you desire. Figure 2. 155 Click on OK and that degree of freedom will be plotted in that window.
  • 309. Tutorial 2 2-145 2.11.16 Restricting the load cases for which results are viewed Steps: 1. To restrict the load cases for which results are viewed, either click on the Results Setup icon or, go to Results | Select Load Case menu option as shown below. Figure 2. 156
  • 310. 2-146 Tutorial 2 2. In the Results Setup dialog box that comes up, let us first un-select the already selected load cases by clicking on the button. Figure 2. 157 3. Select load cases 1 (DEAD LOAD) and 3 (WIND LOAD) by holding the ‘Ctrl’ key down. Then, click on the button. After the load cases have been selected, click on the OK button. Figure 2. 158
  • 311. Tutorial 2 2-147 2.11.17 Using Member Query Member query is a facility where several results for specific members can be viewed at the same time from a single dialog box. It is also a place from where many of the member attributes such as the property definition, specifications (releases, truss, cable, etc.) and beta angle can be changed for input purposes. Steps: To access this facility, first select the member. Then, either go to Tools | Query | Member menu option or, double-click on the member. Let us try double-clicking on member 4. Figure 2. 159
  • 312. 2-148 Tutorial 2 As we double-click on member 4, the following dialog box comes up. Let us take a look at the Property tab. Figure 2. 160 The figure above shows where the buttons are located on the member query box. If the member contains output result tabs (Shear/Bending, Deflection, Steel Design, etc.) in the query box, changing member attributes like releases will cause these result tabs to disappear. This is due to the fact that the current output no longer reflects the new input. NOTE: If you assign or change property by clicking on the Assign/Change Property button in the above dialog box, ensure that you keep the check mark on “Apply to this Member only” in the ensuing dialog box. Else, changing the member attributes for one member will subsequently change the attributes of all other members belonging to the same attribute list. For example, if the current member's property is also assigned to other members, changing the property on the current member will change the property of all the members.
  • 313. Tutorial 2 2-149 Let us click on the Shear/Bending tab. The following dialog box appears. Figure 2. 161 The above page contains facilities for viewing values for shears and moments, selecting the load cases for which those results are presented, a slider bar (see next figure) for looking at the values at specific points along the member length, and a Print option for printing the items on display. Experiment with these options to see what sort of results you can get. Grab the slider bar using the mouse and move it to obtain the values at specific locations.
  • 314. 2-150 Tutorial 2 Figure 2. 162 Another page (Deflection) of the above dialog box is shown below. Figure 2. 163
  • 315. Tutorial 2 2-151 The Concrete Design page of the above dialog box is shown below. Figure 2. 164 To look at the results of another member using this query facility, simply close down this query dialog box and repeat the steps outlined earlier in this section for the desired member.
  • 316. 2-152 Tutorial 2 2.11.18 Producing an on-screen report Steps: Occasionally, we will come across a need to obtain results conforming to certain restrictions, such as, say, the resultant node displacements for a few selected nodes, for a few selected load cases, sorted in the order from low to high, with the values reported in a tabular form. The facility which enables us to obtain such customized on-screen results is the Report menu on top of the screen. 1. Let us create one such report. We will create a table that shows the member major axis moment (MZ) values sorted in the order High to Low, for members 1 and 4 for all the load cases. The first step to do this is to select members 1 and 4 from the structure. With the beams cursor active, select members 1 and 4 using the mouse, or use the Select | By List | Beams option of the Select menu and type 1 and 4 as the member numbers. Next, go to the Report | Beam End Forces menu option as shown below. Figure 2. 165
  • 317. Tutorial 2 2-153 2. In the dialog box that appears, select the Sorting tab. Let us select Moment-Z as the End Force, set the Sorting Order to List from High to Low, and switch on Absolute values under If Sorting done. (If we wish to save this report for future use, we may select the Report tab, provide a title for the report, and turn on the Save ID option.) Under the Loading tab, make sure all the 5 load cases have been selected. Then, click on the OK button. Figure 2. 166 The next figure shows the member end forces sorted table with the MZ values sorted from High to Low based on Absolute numbers. Figure 2. 167
  • 318. 2-154 Tutorial 2 3. To print this table, click the right mouse button anywhere within the table. A list of options will appear. Figure 2. 168 Select the print option to get a hardcopy of the report.
  • 319. Tutorial 2 2-155 2.11.19 Taking Pictures There are several options available for taking pictures. The simplest of these is in the edit menu and is called Copy Picture. It transfers the contents of the active drawing window to the windows clipboard. We can then go into any picture processing program like Microsoft Paint or Microsoft Word and paste the picture in that program for further processing. Another more versatile option enables us to include any "snapshot" or picture of the drawing window into a report. It is called Take Picture and is under the Edit menu. Let us examine this feature. Steps: 1. To take a picture, either click on the Take Picture icon or, go to Tools | Take Picture menu option. Figure 2. 169
  • 320. 2-156 Tutorial 2 2. The following dialog box comes up. Here, we may provide a caption for the picture so that it may be identified later on. Figure 2. 170 This picture will be saved till we are ready to produce a customized report of results. Proceed to the next section for details.
  • 321. Tutorial 2 2-157 2.11.20 Creating Customized Reports STAAD.Pro offers extensive report generation facilities. Items which can be incorporated into such reports include input information, numerical results, steel design results, etc. One can choose from among a select set of load cases, mode shapes, structural elements, etc.. We may include any "snapshot" or picture of the screen taken using the Take Picture toolbar icon. Other customizable parameters include the font size, title block, headers, footers, etc. 1. The Report Setup utility may be accessed either by selecting the Reports Page or by clicking on the Report Setup icon. Figure 2. 171
  • 322. 2-158 Tutorial 2 In either case, the following dialog box appears: Figure 2. 172 Different tabs of this dialog box offer different options. The Items tab lists all available data which may be included in the report. Note that the items under the Selected list are the ones which have been selected by default. Available items are classified into seven categories: Input, Output, Pictures, Reports, STAAD.etc output, Steel Design Output and Advanced Query Reports.
  • 323. Tutorial 2 2-159 Figure 2. 173 2. In our report, we want to show Job Information, Node Displacement Summary, Beam Max Moments, and Picture 1. Job Information is already selected by default. From the Available list box, select Output. From the available output items, select Node Displacement Summary and Beam Max Moments. Then select Pictures from the Available list box and select Picture 1. When all the items have been selected, the Report Setup dialog box should appear as shown below.
  • 324. 2-160 Tutorial 2 Figure 2. 174 The Report Detail Increments check box at the bottom indicates the number of segments into which a member would be divided for printing sectional displacements, forces, etc. 3. Click on the Load Cases tab to select the Load Cases to be included in the report. The Grouping buttons indicate whether the report data will be grouped by Node/Beam numbers or by Load Case number. In the first case, all Load Case results will appear under a particular Node or Beam. In the second case, results for all Nodes or Beams for a particular Load Case will appear together.
  • 325. Tutorial 2 2-161 Figure 2. 175 4. Click on the Picture Album tab to visually identify the pictures taken earlier. The following figure displays Picture 1 as stored by the program. Figure 2. 176
  • 326. 2-162 Tutorial 2 The Options tab lets you include Header, Footer, Page Numbers, Table Grids, fonts for Column Heading and Table data, etc. The Name and Logo tab allows you to enter the Company Name and Logo. Click on the blank area and type the name and address of the company. Click on the Font button in the Text group and adjust the font to be Arial 16 Pt Bold. Click on the Right radio button in the Alignment group under Text to right-align the company name. Figure 2. 177 5. Click OK to finish or click Print to print the report. However, it is always a good idea to first preview the report before printing it.
  • 327. Tutorial 2 2-163 To preview the report just created, select the Print Preview icon from the Toolbar. Figure 2. 178 The first and the last pages of the report are shown in the next two figures.
  • 328. 2-164 Tutorial 2 Figure 2. 179
  • 329. Tutorial 2 2-165 Figure 2. 180 This brings us to the end of this tutorial. Though we have covered a large number of topics, there are several more in various menus and dialog boxes. Happy exploring !!!!!
  • 330. 2-166 Tutorial 2
  • 331. 3-1 Tutorial Problem 3: Analysis of a slab Section 3 This tutorial provides step-by-step instructions for modelling and analysis of a slab supported along two edges. The following topics are covered: • Starting the program • Modelling the slab using quadrilateral plate elements • Specifying slab properties and material constants • Specifying supports • Specifying loads • Specifying the analysis type • Viewing results for individual plates
  • 332. 3-2 Tutorial 3 3.1 Methods of creating the model As explained in Section 1.1 of tutorial problem 1, there are two methods of creating the structure data: a) using the graphical model generation mode, or graphical user interface (GUI) as it is usually referred to. b) using the command file. Both methods of creating the model are explained in this tutorial. The graphical method is explained from Section 3.2 onwards. The command file method is explained in Section 3.8.
  • 333. Tutorial 3 3-3 3.2 Description of the tutorial problem The structure for this project is a slab fixed along two edges. We will model it using 6 quadrilateral (4-noded) plate elements. The structure and the mathematical model are shown in the figures below. It is subjected to selfweight, pressure loads and temperature loads. Our goal is to create the model, assign all required input, perform the analysis, and go through the results. Figure 3. 1
  • 334. 3-4 Tutorial 3 Figure 3. 2
  • 335. Tutorial 3 3-5 BASIC DATA FOR THE STRUCTURE ATTRIBUTE DATA Element properties Slab is 300mm thick Material Constants E, Density, Poisson, Alpha – Default values for concrete Supports Nodes along 2 edges are fixed as shown in Figure 3.2 Primary Loads Load 1: Selfweight Load 2: Pressure Load of 300Kg/sq.m. acting vertically downwards Load 3: 75 degree F uniform expansion, plus top surface is 60 degrees hotter than the bottom Combination Loads Case 101: Case 1 + Case 2 Case 102: Case 1 + Case 3 Analysis Type Linear Elastic
  • 336. 3-6 Tutorial 3 3.3 Starting the program Select the STAAD.Pro icon from the STAAD.Pro 2006 program group. Figure 3. 3
  • 337. Tutorial 3 3-7 The STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment will be invoked and the following screen comes up. Figure 3. 4 This New dialog box will come up every time we start the program. If you wish to turn this feature off, simply uncheck the Display this dialog box at the Startup box at the lower left hand corner. It can be turned on again at a later time when File | New is invoked from the main menu.
  • 338. 3-8 Tutorial 3 Note about the unit system : There are two base unit systems in the program which control the units (length, force, temperature, etc.) in which, values, specifically results and other information presented in the tables and reports, are displayed in. The base unit system also dictates what type of default values the program will use when attributes such as Modulus of Elasticity, Density, etc., are assigned based on material types – Steel, Concrete, Aluminum – selected from the program’s library (Please refer to Section 5 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual for details). These two unit systems are English (Foot, Pound, etc.) and Metric (KN, Meter, etc.) If you recall, one of the choices made at the time of installing STAAD.Pro is this base unit system setting. That choice will serve as the default until we specifically change it. The place from where we can change this setting is under the File | Configure menu. To get to that option, first close down the dialog box shown in the earlier figure by clicking on Cancel. Then, click on the File | Configure menu option and choose the appropriate unit system you want. For this tutorial, let us choose the Metric units (KN, Meter, etc.). Figure 3. 5
  • 339. Tutorial 3 3-9 Figure 3. 6 Click on the Accept button to close the above dialog box.
  • 340. 3-10 Tutorial 3 Following this, select File | New once again. Figure 3. 7 The dialog box shown in Figure 3.4 will re-appear.
  • 341. Tutorial 3 3-11 3.4 Creating a new structure 1. In the New dialog box, we provide some crucial initial data necessary for building the model. The structure type is to be defined by choosing from among Space, Plane, Floor and Truss. A Space type is one where the structure, the loading or both, cause the structure to deform in all 3 global axes (X, Y and Z). In a Plane type, the geometry, loading and deformation are restricted to the global X-Y plane only. A Floor type is a structure whose geometry is confined to the X-Z plane. A Truss type of structure carries loading by pure axial action. Truss members are deemed incapable of carrying shear, bending and torsion. For our model, let us choose Space. Let us choose Meter as the length unit and Kilo Newton as the force unit in which we will start to build the model. The units can be changed later if necessary, at any stage of the model creation. We also need to provide a name in the File Name edit box. This is the name under which the structure data will be saved on the computer hard disk. The name “Structure?” (? will be a number) is recommended by the program by default, but we can change it to any name we want. Let us choose the name Plates Tutorial. A default path name - the location on the computer drive where the file will be saved - is provided by the program under Location. If you wish to save the file in a different location, type in the name, or click the button and specify the desired path. After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.
  • 342. 3-12 Tutorial 3 Figure 3. 8 2. In the next dialog box, we choose the tools to be used to initially construct the model. Add Beams, Add Plates or Add Solids are, respectively, the starting points for constructing beams, plates or solids. Open Structure Wizard provides access to a library of structural templates which the program comes equipped with. Those template models can be extracted and modified parametrically to arrive at our model geometry or some of its parts. If the model is to be created initially using the STAAD command language, the Open Editor box can take us to the STAAD editor. Please remember that all these options are also available from the menus and dialog boxes of the GUI, even after we dismiss this dialog box. Note: If you wish to use the Editor to create the model, choose Open STAAD Editor, click Finish, and proceed to Section 3.8.
  • 343. Tutorial 3 3-13 For our model, let us check the Add Plate option. Click on the Finish button. The dialog box will be dismissed and the STAAD.Pro graphical environment will be displayed. Figure 3. 9
  • 344. 3-14 Tutorial 3 3.5 Elements of the STAAD.Pro screen The STAAD.Pro main window is the primary screen from where the model generation process takes place. It is important to familiarize ourselves with the components of that window before we embark on creating the RC Frame. Section 1.5 in tutorial problem 1 of this manual explains the components of that window in detail.
  • 345. Tutorial 3 3-15 3.6 Building the STAAD.Pro model We are now ready to start building the model geometry. The steps and, wherever possible, the corresponding STAAD.Pro commands (the instructions which get written in the STAAD input file) are described in the following sections.
  • 346. 3-16 Tutorial 3 3.6.1 Generating the model geometry The structure geometry consists of joint numbers, their coordinates, member numbers, the member connectivity information, plate element numbers, etc. From the standpoint of the STAAD command file, the commands to be generated are : JOINT COORDINATES 1000;2200;3202;4002 5400;6402;7600;8602 9 2 0 4 ; 10 0 0 4 ; 11 4 0 4 ; 12 6 0 4 ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL 11234;22563;35786 4 4 3 9 10 ; 5 3 6 11 9 ; 6 6 8 12 11 In this tutorial, we will explore 4 different methods to create the model shown in section 3.2: 1. Using a mixture of drawing an element and the Copy/Paste facility. 2. Using a mixture of drawing an element and the Translational Repeat facility. 3. Using the Structure Wizard facility in the Geometry menu. 4. Using the Mesh Generation facility of the main graphical screen.
  • 347. Tutorial 3 3-17 Creating the Plates - Method 1 Steps: The Grid Settings 1. We selected the Add Plate option earlier to enable us to add plates to create the structure. This initiates a grid in the main drawing area as shown below. The directions of the global axes (X, Y, Z) are represented in the icon in the lower left hand corner of the drawing area. (Note that we could initiate this grid by selecting the Geometry | Snap/Grid Node | Plate menu option also.) Figure 3. 10
  • 348. 3-18 Tutorial 3 It is worth paying attention to the fact that when we chose the Add Plate option in section 3.4, the page control area has been automatically set up to have the Geometry – Plate page be in focus. Figure 3. 11 2. A Snap Node/Plate dialog box also appears in the data area on the right side of the screen. The Linear tab is meant for placing the construction lines perpendicular to one another along a "left to right - top to bottom" pattern, as in the lines of a chess board. The Radial tab enables construction lines to appear in a spider-web style, which makes it is easy to create circular type models where members are modelled as piece-wise linear straight line segments. The Irregular tab can be used to create gridlines with unequal spacing that lie on the global planes or on an inclined plane. We will use the Linear tab. In our structure, the elements lie in the X-Z plane. So, in this dialog box, let us choose X-Z as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. By setting 6 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X, 4 along Z, and a spacing of 1 meter between lines along both X and
  • 349. Tutorial 3 3-19 Z (see next figure) we can draw a frame 6m X 4m, adequate for our model. Please note that these settings are only a starting grid setting, to enable us to start drawing the structure, and they do not restrict our overall model to those limits. In fact, we do not even need this 6m X 4m grid. The method we are using here requires just a 2m X 2m grid since we are about to draw just a single element. Figure 3. 12
  • 350. 3-20 Tutorial 3 Creating element 1 3. The four corners of the first element are at the coordinates (0, 0, 0), (2, 0, 0), (2, 0, 2), and (0, 0, 2) respectively. To start creating the nodes, let us first activate the Snap Node/Plate button by clicking on it. Then, with the help of the mouse, click at the origin (0, 0, 0) to create the first node. Figure 3. 13 4. In a similar fashion, click on the remaining three points to create nodes and automatically join successive nodes by a plate. (2, 0, 0), (2, 0, 2) and (0, 0, 2) The exact location of the mouse arrow can be monitored on the status bar located at the bottom of the window where the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the current cursor position are continuously updated.
  • 351. Tutorial 3 3-21 When steps 1 to 4 are completed, the element will be displayed in the drawing area as shown below. Figure 3. 14
  • 352. 3-22 Tutorial 3 5. At this point, let us remove the grid display from the structure. To do that, click on the Close button in the Snap Node/Plate dialog box. Figure 3. 15
  • 353. Tutorial 3 3-23 The grid will now be removed and the structure in the main window should resemble the figure shown below. Figure 3. 16 6. It is very important that we save our work often, to avoid loss of data and protect our investment of time and effort against power interruptions, system problems, or other unforeseen events. To save the file, pull down the File menu and select the Save command. 7. For easy identification, the entities drawn on the screen can be labeled. Let us display the plate numbers. (Please refer to the ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this manual to learn more about switching on node/beam/plate labels.)
  • 354. 3-24 Tutorial 3 The following figure illustrates the plate number displayed on the structure. The structure in the main window should resemble the figure shown below. Figure 3. 17 If you are feeling adventurous, here is a small exercise for you. Change the font of the plate labels by going to the View menu and selecting the Options command, and then selecting the appropriate tab (Plate labels) from the Options dialog box.
  • 355. Tutorial 3 3-25 Creating element 2 8. Examining the structure shown in section 3.2 of this tutorial, it can be seen that the remaining elements can be easily generated if we could copy the existing plate and then, paste the copied unit at specific distances. The program does indeed have a Copy-Paste facility and it is under the Edit menu. First, select plate 1 using the Plates Cursor . 9. Click the right mouse button and choose Copy from the pop-up menu (or click on the Edit menu and choose Copy). Once again, click the right mouse button and select Paste Plates (or choose Paste Plates from the Edit menu) as shown below. Figure 3. 18 Figure 3. 19
  • 356. 3-26 Tutorial 3 10. Since this facility allows us to create only one copy at a time, all that we can create from element 1 is element 2. The four nodes of element 2 are at distance of X = 2, Y = 0, and Z = 0 away from element 1. So, in the dialog box that comes up, provide 2, 0, and 0 for X, Y and Z respectively and click on the OK button. Figure 3. 20 The model will now look like the one shown below. Figure 3. 21
  • 357. Tutorial 3 3-27 Creating element 3 11. The nodes of element 3 are at X = 4m away from those of element 1. So, let us create the third element by repeating steps 8 to 10 except for providing 4m for X in the Paste with Move dialog box. Alternatively, we could use element 2 as the basis for creating element 3, in which case, the X increment will be 2m. If you make a mistake and end up pasting the element at a wrong location, you can undo the operation by selecting Undo from the Edit menu. After creating the third element, the model should look like the one shown below. Figure 3. 22 Click anywhere in the screen to un-highlight the highlighted plate. Creating elements 4, 5 and 6 12. The elements 4, 5 and 6 are identical to the first three elements except that their nodes are at a Z distance of 2m away from the corresponding nodes of elements 1 to 3. We can hence use the Copy-Paste technique and specify the Z increment as 2m. Select all three of the existing plates by rubber-banding around them using the mouse.
  • 358. 3-28 Tutorial 3 13. Click the right mouse button and choose Copy from the pop-up menu (or click on the Edit menu and choose Copy). Once again, click the right mouse button and select Paste Plates (or choose Paste Plates from the Edit menu). 14. Provide 0, 0, and 2 for X, Y and Z respectively in the Paste with Move dialog box that comes up. Then, click on the OK button and observe that three new elements are created. Since some elements are still highlighted, click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight those elements. The model, with all the six plates generated, will now look as shown below. Figure 3. 23
  • 359. Tutorial 3 3-29 If you want to proceed with assigning the remainder of the data, go to section 3.6.2. If instead, you wish to explore the remaining methods of creating this model, the current structure will have to be entirely deleted. This can be done using the following procedure. From the Select menu, choose By All | All Geometry option. The entire structure will be highlighted. Hit the key on your keyboard. A message box shown below will appear. Click on the OK button. Figure 3. 24 As we click on the OK button, the following message box appears. Let us say Yes. The message box will be dismissed and the entire structure will be deleted. Figure 3. 25
  • 360. 3-30 Tutorial 3 Creating the Plates - Method 2 Steps: Creating element 1 1. In this method, we will be using STAAD’s Translational Repeat facility to create our model. To utilize this facility, we need at least one existing entity to use as the basis for the translational repeat. So, let us follow steps 1 to 7 from ‘Method 1’ to create the first element. Once that is done, our model will look like the one shown below. Note: If you have trouble bringing the grid settings dialog box, go to the Geometry menu and select Snap/Grid Node Plate. Figure 3. 26
  • 361. Tutorial 3 3-31 Creating elements 2 and 3 2. In Method 1, it required two separate executions of the Copy/Paste function to create elements 2 and 3. That is because, that facility does not contain a provision for specifying the number of copies one would like to create. Translational Repeat is a facility where such a provision is available. Select plate 1 using the Plates Cursor . (Please refer to the ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting plates.) 3. Click on the Translational Repeat icon or select the Geometry | Translational Repeat menu option as shown below. Figure 3. 27 Figure 3. 28
  • 362. 3-32 Tutorial 3 The 3D Repeat dialog box comes up. By default (when the Geometry Only option is not checked), all loads, properties, design parameters, member releases, etc. on the selected entities will automatically be copied along with the entities. By checking the new option labeled Geometry Only, the translational repeating will be performed using only the Geometry data. In our example, it does not matter because no other attributes have been assigned yet. 4. To create elements 2 and 3 along the X direction, specify the Global Direction as X, No of Steps as 2 and the Default Step Spacing (along X) as 2m. The Link Steps option is applicable when the newly created units are physically removed from the existing units, and when one wishes to connect them using members. Renumber Bay enables us to use our own numbering scheme for entities that will be created, instead of using a sequential numbering that the program does if no instructions are provided. Let us leave these boxes unchecked. Then, click on OK. Figure 3. 29 Since element 1 is still highlighted, click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight it.
  • 363. Tutorial 3 3-33 The model will now look as shown below. Figure 3. 30 Creating elements 4, 5 and 6 5. Let us follow the same Translational Repeat method to create these elements. Select all the three existing plates by rubber-banding around them using the mouse. Make sure that before you do this, the cursor type is the Plates Cursor , else, no plates will be selected. 6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 but this time, specify the Global Direction as Z, No of Steps as 1 and the Default Step Spacing as 2m. Leave all the other boxes unchecked. Then, click on OK. All the 6 elements are now created. Since some of the plates are still highlighted, click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight them.
  • 364. 3-34 Tutorial 3 Our model will now look like the one shown below. Figure 3. 31 If you want to proceed with assigning the remainder of the data, go to section 3.6.2. Instead, if you wish to explore the remaining methods of creating this model, the current structure will have to be entirely deleted. This can be done using the following procedure. From the Select menu, choose By All | All Geometry option. The entire structure will be highlighted. Hit the key on your keyboard. A message box shown below will appear. Click on the OK button. Figure 3. 32
  • 365. Tutorial 3 3-35 As we click on the OK button, the following message box appears. Let us say Yes. The message box will be dismissed and the entire structure will be deleted. Figure 3. 33
  • 366. 3-36 Tutorial 3 Creating the Plates - Method 3 Steps: There is a facility in STAAD called Structure Wizard which offers a library of pre-defined structure prototypes, such as Pratt Truss, Northlight Truss, Cylindrical Frame, etc. A surface entity such as a slab or wall, which can be defined using 3-noded or 4-noded plate elements is one such prototype. We can also create our own library of structure prototypes. From this wizard, a structural model may parametrically be generated, and can then be incorporated into our main structure. Structure Wizard can hence be thought of as a store from where one can fetch various components and assemble a complete structure. 1. Select the Geometry | Run Structure Wizard menu option from the top menu bar. Figure 3. 34
  • 367. Tutorial 3 3-37 The Structure Wizard window opens up as shown below. Figure 3. 35 (Note that the Open Structure Wizard option in the Where do you want to go? dialog box in the beginning stage of creating a new structure – see Figure 3.9 – also brings up this facility.)
  • 368. 3-38 Tutorial 3 2. The unit of length should be specified prior to the generation of a model. From the File menu of this Structure Wizard window, click Select Units. In the Select Units dialog box that comes up, we can select one of the units of length from Imperial (inch, feet) or SI/Metric (millimeter, centimeter, meter) system of units. Let us choose Meters and click on the OK button. Figure 3. 36 Figure 3. 37 3. From the Model Type list box, select Surface/Plate Models as shown below. Figure 3. 38
  • 369. Tutorial 3 3-39 4. To select the Quad Plate option, click on it using the mouse. Figure 3. 39 5. Then, using the mouse, either double-click on the Quad Plate option or, drag the Quad Plate option to the right side of the Structure Wizard window as shown below. Figure 3. 40
  • 370. 3-40 Tutorial 3 6. A dialog box by the name Select Meshing Parameters comes up. In this box, we specify, among other things, two main pieces of information - a) the dimensions of the boundary (or superelement as it is commonly known) from which the individual elements are generated b) the number of individual elements that must be generated. (a) is defined in terms of the X, Y, Z coordinates of its Corners A, B, C and D. (b) is defined in terms of the number of divisions along sides AB, BC, etc. Let us provide the Corners, the Bias and the Divisions of the model as shown in the figure below. Then, click on the Apply button. Figure 3. 41 If you made a mistake and wish to bring up the above dialog box again, click the right mouse button in the drawing area and choose Change Property. Figure 3. 42
  • 371. Tutorial 3 3-41 7. To transfer the model to the main window, select File | Merge Model with STAAD.Pro Model as shown below. Figure 3. 43 8. When the following message box comes up, let us confirm our transfer by clicking on the Yes button. Figure 3. 44 The dialog box shown in the next figure comes up. If we had an existing structure in the main window, in this dialog box, we will be able to provide the co-ordinates of a node of the structure in the main window to which we want to connect the piece being brought from the wizard. If there isn’t any existing structure, this box is a means of specifying any distances along X, Y and Z axes by which we want the unit (being brought from the Wizard) to be shifted.
  • 372. 3-42 Tutorial 3 In our case, since we do not have an existing structure in the main window, nor do we wish to shift the unit by any amount, let us simply click on the OK button. Figure 3. 45 The model will now be transferred to the main window. Figure 3. 46
  • 373. Tutorial 3 3-43 If you want to proceed with assigning the remainder of the data, go to section 3.6.2. Instead, if you wish to explore the remaining methods of creating this model, the current structure will have to be entirely deleted. This can be done using the following procedure. From the Select menu, choose By All | All Geometry option. The entire structure will be highlighted. Hit the key on your keyboard. A message box shown below will appear. Click on the OK button. Figure 3. 47 As we click on the OK button, the following message box appears. Let us say Yes. The message box will be dismissed and the entire structure will be deleted. Figure 3. 48
  • 374. 3-44 Tutorial 3 Creating the Plates - Method 4 Steps: The STAAD.Pro GUI contains a facility for generating a mesh of elements from a boundary (or superelement) defined by a set of corner nodes. This facility is in addition to the one we saw in Method 3. The boundary has to form a closed surface and has to be a plane, though that plane can be inclined to any of the global planes. 1. The first step in defining the boundary is selecting the corner nodes. If these nodes do not exist, they must be created before they can be selected. So, either click on the Snap Node/Quad Plates icon or select Geometry | Snap/Grid Node | Plate | Quad menu option as shown in the figures below. Figure 3. 49
  • 375. Tutorial 3 3-45 Figure 3. 50 2. A Snap Node/Plate dialog box appears in the data area on the right side of the screen. (We have already seen this dialog box in methods 1 and 2.) As before, let us select the Linear tab. In our structure, the elements lie in the X-Z plane. So, in this dialog box, let us choose X-Z as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. All that we are interested in is the 4 corner nodes of the super-element. So, let us set 1 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X and Z, and a spacing of 6m between lines along X and 4m along Z.
  • 376. 3-46 Tutorial 3 Figure 3. 51
  • 377. Tutorial 3 3-47 The main drawing area will now look similar to the one shown below. Figure 3. 52
  • 378. 3-48 Tutorial 3 3. To start creating the nodes, let us first activate the Snap Node/Plate button by clicking on it. Holding the ‘Ctrl’ key down, click at the four corners of the grid as shown below. Those four points represent the four corners of our slab and are (0, 0, 0), (6, 0, 0), (6, 0, 4), and (0, 0, 4). In fact, keeping the ‘Ctrl’ key pressed and clicking at points on the grid successively, is a way of creating new nodes without connecting those nodes with beams or plates. If the ‘Ctrl’ key weren’t kept pressed, the nodes would become connected. Figure 3. 53 It is worth noting that the purpose of the previous four steps was to merely create the four nodes. Consequently, any of the several methods available in the program could have been used to create those nodes. We could have typed the data into the editor, or in the grid tables of the Geometry-Plate page control area, or even used the Snap Grid/Node – Beam option of the Geometry menu from the top of the screen to graphically create the points.
  • 379. Tutorial 3 3-49 4. Let us now Close the Snap Node/Plate dialog box as shown below. Figure 3. 54 We are now ready to utilize the second method available in the program for mesh generation.
  • 380. 3-50 Tutorial 3 5. For this, either click on the Generate Surface Meshing icon or go to Geometry | Generate Surface Meshing menu option as shown below. Figure 3. 55 Figure 3. 56
  • 381. Tutorial 3 3-51 6. We now have to select the points which form the boundary of the superelement from which the individual elements will be created. The four points we just created are those four points. So, let us click at the four node points in succession as shown below. Lastly, close the loop by clicking at the start node (or the first clicked point) again. Figure 3. 57 As we click at the start node the second time, the following dialog box comes up. Let us choose the Quadrilateral Meshing option and click on the OK button. Figure 3. 58
  • 382. 3-52 Tutorial 3 7. The Select Meshing Parameters dialog box (as we saw earlier in Method 3), comes up. Notice that this time however, the data for the four corners is automatically filled in. The program used the coordinates of the four nodes we selected to define A, B, C, and D. Provide the Bias and the Divisions of the model as shown in the figure below. Click on the Apply button. Figure 3. 59 As we click on the Apply button, our model will appear in the drawing area as the one shown below. Click on the button to exit the mesh generating mode. Figure 3. 60
  • 383. Tutorial 3 3-53 3.6.2 Changing the input units of length As a matter of convenience, for specifying element properties for our structure, it is simpler if our length units are centimeter instead of meter. This will require changing the current length units of input. The command to be generated is: UNIT CM KN Steps: 1. Click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar. Figure 3. 61 Alternatively, one may select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option as shown below. Figure 3. 62
  • 384. 3-54 Tutorial 3 2. In either case, the following dialog box comes up. Set the Length Units to Centimeter and click on the OK button. Figure 3. 63
  • 385. Tutorial 3 3-55 3.6.3 Specifying Element Properties Just as properties are assigned to members, properties must be assigned to plate elements too. The property required for plates is the plate thickness (or the thickness at each node of elements if the slab has a varying thickness). The corresponding command which should be generated in the STAAD command file is: ELEMENT PROPERTY 1 TO 6 THICKNESS 30 Steps: 1. Click on the Property Page icon located on the Structure Tools toolbar. Figure 3. 64
  • 386. 3-56 Tutorial 3 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Property page from the left side of the screen as shown below. Figure 3. 65
  • 387. Tutorial 3 3-57 2. In either case, the Properties dialog box comes up as shown below. Plate thickness is specified through the dialog box available under the Thickness button. Figure 3. 66
  • 388. 3-58 Tutorial 3 3. The dialog box shown below comes up. Let us provide the plate thickness as 30cm. Notice that the field called Material is presently on the checked mode. If we keep it that way, the material properties of concrete (E, Poisson, Density, Alpha, etc.) will be assigned along with the plate thickness. The material property values so assigned will be the program defaults. (To see those default values, click on the Materials button in the dialog box shown in the previous figure.) Since we want to assign just the default values, let us keep the Material box in the checked mode itself. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button as shown below. Figure 3. 67
  • 389. Tutorial 3 3-59 At this point, the Properties dialog box will look as shown below. Figure 3. 68 4. Since we want the thickness to be applied to all elements of the structure, let us select the Assignment Method called Assign To View and then click on the Assign button as shown in the above figure. As we click on the Assign button, the following message box comes up. Let us click on the Yes button to confirm our choice. Figure 3. 69
  • 390. 3-60 Tutorial 3 The structure will now look as shown below. Figure 3. 70 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the selected entities. We do this only as a safety precaution. When an entity is highlighted, clicking on any Assign option is liable to cause an undesired attribute to be assigned to that entity.
  • 391. Tutorial 3 3-61 3.6.4 Specifying Material Constants In Section 3.6.3, we kept the Material check box “on” while assigning the element properties. Consequently, the material constants (E, Density, Poisson’s Ratio, etc.) of concrete got assigned to the plates along with the properties, and the following commands were generated in the command file: UNIT METER KN CONSTANTS E 2.17185e+007 MEMB 1 TO 6 POISSON 0.17 MEMB 1 TO 6 DENSITY 23.5616 MEMB 1 TO 6 ALPHA 1e-005 MEMB 1 TO 6 Hence, there is no longer a need to assign the constants separately. However, if we hadn’t assigned them as before, we could go to the menu option Commands | Material Constants and assign them explicitly as shown in the figure below. Figure 3. 71
  • 392. 3-62 Tutorial 3 3.6.5 Specifying Supports The slab is fixed-supported along the entire length of two of its sides. However, when modelled as plate elements, the supports can be specified only at the nodes along those edges, and not at any point between the nodes. It hence becomes apparent that if one is keen on better modelling the edge conditions, the slab would have to be modelled using a larger number of elements. In our case, the commands we need to generate are: SUPPORTS 1 2 4 5 7 10 FIXED Steps: 1. To create supports, click on the Support Page icon located in the Structure Tools toolbar as shown below. Figure 3. 72
  • 393. Tutorial 3 3-63 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Support Page from the left side of the screen. Figure 3. 73
  • 394. 3-64 Tutorial 3 2. In either case, the Supports dialog box comes up as shown in the next figure. 3. For easy identification of the nodes where we wish to place the supports, let us turn the Node Numbers on. 4. Since we already know that nodes 1, 2, 5, 7, 4 and 10 are to be associated with the Fixed support, using the Nodes Cursor , select these nodes. 5. Then, click on the Create button in the Supports dialog box as shown below. Figure 3. 74
  • 395. Tutorial 3 3-65 6. The dialog box shown below comes up. The Fixed tab happens to be the default which is convenient for this case. Click on the Assign button as shown below. Figure 3. 75 It is important to understand that the Assign button is active because of what we did in step 4 earlier. Had we not selected the nodes before reaching this point, this option would not have been active.
  • 396. 3-66 Tutorial 3 After the supports have been assigned, the structure will look like the one shown below. Figure 3. 76
  • 397. Tutorial 3 3-67 3.6.6 Specifying Primary Load Cases Three primary load cases have to be created for this structure. Details of these load cases are available at the beginning of this tutorial. The corresponding commands to be generated are listed below. UNIT METER KG LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD SELF Y -1.0 LOAD 2 EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 6 PR GY -300 LOAD 3 TEMPERATURE LOAD 1 TO 6 TEMP 40 30 Steps: 1. To create loads, click on the Load Page icon located on the Structure Tools tool bar. Figure 3. 77
  • 398. 3-68 Tutorial 3 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Load Page from the left side of the screen. Figure 3. 78 2. Notice that the pressure load value listed in the beginning of this tutorial is in KN and meter units. Rather than convert that value to the current input units, we will conform to those units. The current input units, which we last set while specifying THICKNESS was CENTIMETER. We have to change the force unit to Kilogram and the length units to Meter. To change the units, as before, click on the Input Units icon from the top toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the length units as meter and the force units as Kilogram.
  • 399. Tutorial 3 3-69 LOAD CASE 1 3. A window titled “Load” appears on the right-hand side of the screen. To initiate the first load case, highlight Load Cases Details and click on the Add button. Figure 3. 79 4. The Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up. The drop-down list box against Loading Type is available in case we wish to associate the load case we are creating with any of the ACI, AISC or IBC definitions of Dead, Live, Ice, etc. This type of association needs to be done if we intend to use the program's facility for automatically generating load combinations in accordance with those codes. Notice that there is a check box called Reducible per UBC/IBC. This feature becomes active only when the load case is assigned a Loading Type called Live at the time of creation of that case. Please refer to STAAD.Pro 2004 Release Report for further details. As we do not intend to use the automatic load combination generation option, we will leave the Loading Type as None. Enter DEAD LOAD as the Title for Load Case 1 and click on Add.
  • 400. 3-70 Tutorial 3 Figure 3. 80 The newly created load case will now appear under the Load Cases Details in the Load dialog box. Figure 3. 81 5. To generate and assign the first load type, highlight DEAD LOAD. You will notice that the Add New Load Items dialog box shows more options now. Figure 3. 82
  • 401. Tutorial 3 3-71 6. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Selfweight Load option under the Selfweight item. Specify the Direction as Y, and the Factor as -1.0. The negative number signifies that the selfweight load acts opposite to the positive direction of the global axis (Y in this case) along which it is applied. Click on the Add button. The selfweight load is applicable to every member of the structure, and cannot be applied on a selected list of members. Figure 3. 83
  • 402. 3-72 Tutorial 3 LOAD CASE 2 7. Next, let us initiate the creation of the second load case which is a pressure load on the elements. To do this, highlight Load Cases Details. In the Add New Load Cases dialog box, once again, we are not associating the load case we are about to create with any code based Loading Type and so, leave that box as None. Specify the Title of the second load case as EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD and click on the Add button. Figure 3. 84 To generate and assign the second load type, highlight EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD. Figure 3. 85
  • 403. Tutorial 3 3-73 8. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Pressure on Full Plate option under the Plate Loads item enables the load to be applied on the full area of the element. (The Concentrated Load is for applying a concentrated force on the element. The Trapezoidal and Hydrostatic options are for defining pressures with intensities varying from one point to another. The Partial Plate Pressure Load is useful if the load is to be applied as a “patch” on a small localised portion of an element.) Let us keep our focus on the Pressure on Full Plate option. Provide -300kg/m2 for W1 (Force), GY as the Direction and click on the Add button followed by the Close button. Figure 3. 86
  • 404. 3-74 Tutorial 3 9. Since the pressure load is to be applied on all the elements of the model, the easiest way to do that is to set the Assignment Method to Assign To View. Then, click on the Assign button in the Load dialog box as shown below. Figure 3. 87 After the load has been assigned, the model will look as shown below. Figure 3. 88
  • 405. Tutorial 3 3-75 LOAD CASE 3 10. Next, let us create the third load case which is a temperature load. The initiation of a new load case is best done using the procedure explained in step 7. In the dialog box that comes up, let us specify the Title of the third load case as TEMPERATURE LOAD and click on the Add button. Figure 3. 89 To generate and assign the third load type, as before, highlight TEMPERATURE LOAD. 11. Temperature Loads are created from the input screens available under the Temperature option in the Add New Load Items dialog box.
  • 406. 3-76 Tutorial 3 12. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, make sure that the Temperature item is selected under the Temperature Loads option. Then, provide 40 as the Temperature Change for Axial Elongation and 30 as the Temperature Differential from Top to Bottom and click on the Add button followed by the Close button. Figure 3. 90 13. Since we intend to apply the temperature load on all the plates, as before, choose Assign To View and click on the Assign button in the Loads dialog box (see step 9 for explanation).
  • 407. Tutorial 3 3-77 3.6.7 Creating load combinations The specifications at the beginning of this tutorial require us to create two combination cases. The commands required are: LOAD COMBINATION 101 CASE 1 + CASE 2 1 1.0 2 1.0 LOAD COMBINATION 102 CASE 1 + CASE 3 1 1.0 3 1.0 Steps: LOAD COMBINATION 101 1. To initiate and define load case 4 as a load combination, once again, highlight the Load Cases Details option. In the Add New Load Cases dialog box, click on the Define Combinations option from the left-hand side. Enter the Load No: as 101 and the Title as CASE 1 + CASE 2. Figure 3. 91
  • 408. 3-78 Tutorial 3 2. Next, in the Define Combinations box, select load case 1 from the left side list box and click on the button. Repeat this with load case 2 also. Load cases 1 and 2 will appear in the right side list box as shown in the figure below. (These data indicate that we are adding the two load cases with a multiplication factor of 1.0 and that the load combination results would be obtained by algebraic summation of the results for individual load cases.) Finally, click on the Add button. Figure 3. 92 Case 101 has now been created.
  • 409. Tutorial 3 3-79 LOAD COMBINATION 102 3. To initiate and define load case 5 as a load combination, as before, enter the Load No: as 102 and the Title as CASE 1 + CASE 3. Next, repeat step 2 except for selecting load cases 1 and 3 instead of cases 1 and 2. Figure 3. 93 Thus, load 102 is also created.
  • 410. 3-80 Tutorial 3 If we change our mind about the composition of any existing combination case, we can select the case we want to alter, and make the necessary changes in terms of the constituent cases or their factors. Figure 3. 94 Let us exit this dialog box by clicking on the Close button. It is also worth noting that as load cases are created, a facility for quickly switching between the various cases becomes available at the top of the screen in the form of a load case selection box as shown below. Figure 3. 95
  • 411. Tutorial 3 3-81 We have now completed the task of creating all load cases. Let us once again save our model by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command or by holding the ‘Ctrl’ key and pressing the ‘S’ key.
  • 412. 3-82 Tutorial 3 3.6.8 Specifying the analysis type The analysis type we are required to do is a linear static type. We will also obtain a static equilibrium report. This requires the command: PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK Steps: 1. To specify the Analysis command, first go to Analysis/Print Page from the left side of the screen. Figure 3. 96
  • 413. Tutorial 3 3-83 2. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, the instruction for specifying a linear elastic type analysis is provided using the Perform Analysis tab. To obtain the static equilibrium report, check the Statics Check print option. (In response to this option, a report consisting of the summary of applied loading and summary of support reactions, for each load case, will be produced in the STAAD output file. See section 3.10 for information on viewing this report). Figure 3. 97 Finally, click on the Add button followed by the Close button.
  • 414. 3-84 Tutorial 3 The Analysis dialog box in the data area with the newly added instruction will look as shown below. Figure 3. 98 Let us save the data once again using the File | Save option.
  • 415. Tutorial 3 3-85 3.6.9 Specifying post-analysis print commands Two types of element results can be requested: a) ELEMENT STRESSES at the centroid or any point on the element surface b) the element forces at the nodes. The former consists of stresses and moments per unit width, as explained in sections 1.6.1 and 3.41 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. The latter consists of the 3 forces and 3 moments at each node of the elements in the global axis system (see section 3.41 for details). We would like to obtain both these results. We will also set the units in which these results are printed to KN and Meter for element stresses and Kg and Meter for element forces. This requires the specification of the following commands: UNIT METER KN PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 3 UNIT KG METER PRINT ELEMENT FORCE LIST 6 These results will be written in the STAAD output file and can be viewed using the procedure explained in section 3.10. Steps: 1. Go to Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option. Set the length and force units to Meter and Kilo Newton respectively. 2. The dialog box for requesting element results is available in the Post-Print sub-page of the Analysis | Print page. Click on the Define Commands button in the data area on the right hand side of the screen.
  • 416. 3-86 Tutorial 3 Figure 3. 99 3. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, select the Element Forces/Stresses tab. Choose the Print Element Stresses option and click on the Add button followed by the Close button. Figure 3. 100
  • 417. Tutorial 3 3-87 4. Again, go to Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option. Set the length and force units to Meter and Kilogram respectively. Then, repeat steps 2 and 3. In step 3, select the Print Element Forces option and click on the Add button followed by the Close button. At this point, the Post Analysis Print dialog box will look as shown below. Figure 3. 101
  • 418. 3-88 Tutorial 3 5. To associate the PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES command with element 3, first select the command as shown in the previous figure. Then, using the Plates Cursor , click on element no. 3. As we select the plate, the Assignment Method automatically becomes Assign to Selected Plates. Click on the Assign button as shown below. Figure 3. 102 6. To associate the PRINT ELEMENT FORCE command with element 6, repeat step 5 except for selecting element no. 6 in the place of element no. 3. We have now completed the tasks of assigning the input for this model. Let us save the file one last time using the File | Save option.
  • 419. Tutorial 3 3-89 3.7 Viewing the input command file Let us now take a look at the data that has been written into the file that we just saved earlier. As we have seen in the previous tutorials, while the model is being created graphically, a corresponding set of commands describing that aspect of the model is being simultaneously written into a command file which is a simple text file. An abstract of those commands was also mentioned under the title “commands to be generated are . .” at the beginning of each section of this tutorial. The contents of that text file can be viewed in its entirety either by clicking on the STAAD Editor icon or, by going to the Edit menu and choosing Edit Input Command File as shown below. Figure 3. 103 Figure 3. 104
  • 420. 3-90 Tutorial 3 A new window will open up with the data listed as shown here: Figure 3. 105 This window and the facilities it contains is known as the STAAD Editor. We could make modifications to the data of our structure in this Editor if we wish to do so. Let us Exit the Editor without doing so by selecting the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor window). Instead of using the graphical methods explained in the previous sections, we could have created the entire model by typing these specific commands into the editor. This was one of the methods mentioned in section 3.1 of this tutorial. If you would like to understand that method, proceed to the next section. If you want to skip that part, proceed to section 3.9 where we perform the analysis on this model.
  • 421. Tutorial 3 3-91 3.8 Creating the model using the command file Let us now use the command file method to create the model for the above structure. The commands used in the command file are described later in this section. The STAAD.Pro command file may be created using the built-in editor, the procedure for which is explained further below in this section. Any standard text editor such as Notepad or WordPad may also be used to create the command file. However, the STAAD.Pro command file editor offers the advantage of syntax checking as we type the commands. The STAAD.Pro keywords, numeric data, comments, etc. are displayed in distinct colors in the STAAD.Pro editor. A typical editor screen is shown below to illustrate its general appearance. Figure 3. 106
  • 422. 3-92 Tutorial 3 To access the built-in editor, first start the program using the procedure explained in Section 3.3. Next, follow step 1 of Section 3.4 (also, see Figures below). Figure 3. 107 You will then encounter the dialog box shown below. In that dialog box, choose Open STAAD Editor. Figure 3. 108
  • 423. Tutorial 3 3-93 At this point, the editor screen will open as shown below. Figure 3. 109 Delete all the command lines displayed in the editor window and type the lines shown in bold below (You don’t have to delete the lines if you know which to keep and where to fill in the rest of the commands). The commands may be typed in upper or lower case letters. Usually the first three letters of a keyword are all that are needed -- the rest of the letters of the word are not required. The required letters are underlined. (“SPACE” = “SPA” = “space” = “spa”)
  • 424. 3-94 Tutorial 3 Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE SLAB SUPPORTED ALONG 2 EDGES Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame structure (3-D) and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z coordinates. UNIT METER KN Specifies the unit to be used for data to follow. JOINT COORDINATES 1000;2200;3202;4002 5400;6402;7600;8602 9 2 0 4 ; 10 0 0 4 ; 11 4 0 4 ; 12 6 0 4 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators. That enables us to provide multiple sets of data on one line. For example, node 6 has (X, Y, Z) coordinates of (4, 0, 2). ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL 1 1 2 3 4 ; 2 2 5 6 3 ; 3 5 7 8 6 ; 4 4 3 9 10 ; 5 3 6 11 9 ; 6 6 8 12 11 The incidences of elements are defined above. For example, element 3 is defined as connected between the nodes 5, 7, 8 and 6. UNIT CM KN ELEMENT PROPERTY 1 TO 6 THICKNESS 30 The length unit is changed from meter to centimeter. Element properties are then provided by specifying that the elements are 30 cm thick.
  • 425. Tutorial 3 3-95 UNIT METER KN CONSTANTS E 2.17185e+007 ALL POISSON 0.17 ALL DENSITY 23.5616 ALL ALPHA 1e-005 ALL Material constants, which are E (modulus of elasticity), Density, Poisson’s Ratio and Alpha, are specified following the command CONSTANTS. Prior to this, the input units are changed to Meter and KN. SUPPORTS 1 2 4 5 7 10 FIXED Joints 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 and 10 are defined as fixed supported. This will cause all 6 degrees of freedom at these nodes to be restrained. UNIT KG LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD Force units are changed from KN to KG to facilitate the input of loads. Load case 1 is then initiated along with an accompanying title. SELFWEIGHT Y -1 Load case 1 consists of selfweight of the structure acting in the global Y direction with a factor of -1.0. Since global Y is vertically upward, the factor of -1.0 indicates that this load will act downwards. LOAD 2 EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD Load case 2 is initiated along with an accompanying title. ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 6 PR GY -300
  • 426. 3-96 Tutorial 3 Load 2 is a pressure load on the elements. A uniform pressure of 300Kg/m2 is applied on all the elements. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction. The negative sign (-300) indicates that the load acts opposite to the positive direction of global Y. LOAD 3 TEMPERATURE LOAD Load case 3 is initiated along with an accompanying title. TEMPERATURE LOAD 1 TO 6 TEMP 40 30 Load 3 is a temperature load. All the 6 elements are subjected to a in-plane temperature increase of 40 degrees and a temperature variation across the thickness of 30 degrees. This increase is in the same temperature units as the Alpha value specified earlier under CONSTANTS. LOAD COMB 101 CASE 1 + CASE 2 1 1.0 2 1.0 Load combination 101 is initiated along with an accompanying title. Load cases 1 and 2 are individually factored by a value of 1.0, and the factored values are combined algebraically. LOAD COMB 102 CASE 1 + CASE 3 1 1.0 3 1.0 Load combination 102 is initiated along with an accompanying title. Load cases 1 and 3 are individually factored by a value of 1.0, and the factored values are combined algebraically. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK The above command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. A static equilibrium report is also requested with the help of the words PRINT STATICS CHECK. UNIT METER KN PRINT ELEMENT STRESS LIST 3
  • 427. Tutorial 3 3-97 The stresses and unit width moments are requested at the centroid of element 3 in KN and Meter units. UNIT KG METER PRINT ELEMENT FORCE LIST 6 The forces and moments for all 6 d.o.f at the corner nodes of element 6 are requested in KG and Meter units. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run. Let us save the file and exit the editor.
  • 428. 3-98 Tutorial 3 3.9 Performing the analysis and design In order to obtain the displacements, forces, stresses and reactions in the structure due to the applied loads, the model has to be analyzed. If the pass-fail status of the members and elements per the requirements of steel and concrete codes is to be determined, that involves a process called design. Both these processes are launched using the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu. Figure 3. 110 If the structure has not been saved after the last change was made, you should save the structure first by using the Save command from the File menu. When you select the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu, the following dialog box appears: Figure 3. 111 We are presented with the choice of 2 engines : the STAAD engine and the STARDYNE Advanced Analysis engine. The STARDYNE Analysis engine is suitable for advanced problems such as Buckling Analysis, Modal Extraction using various methods, etc. However, if the calculations call for steel or concrete design, UBC
  • 429. Tutorial 3 3-99 load generation, etc., we have to select the STAAD engine. For this problem, let us use the STAAD engine. Then, click on the Run Analysis button. As the analysis progresses, several messages appear on the screen as shown in the next figure. Figure 3. 112 At the end of these calculations, two activities take place. a) A Done button becomes active b) three options become available at the bottom left corner of this information window. Figure 3. 113
  • 430. 3-100 Tutorial 3 These options are indicative of what will happen after we click on the Done button. The View Output File option allows us to view the output file created by STAAD. The output file contains the numerical results produced in response to the various input commands we specified during the model generation process. It also tells us whether any errors were encountered, and if so, whether the analysis and design was successfully completed or not. Section 3.10 (also, see section 1.9) offers additional details on viewing and understanding the contents of the output file. The Go To Post Processing Mode option allows us to go to graphical part of the program known as the Post-processor. This is where one can extensively verify the results, view the results graphically, plot result diagrams, produce reports, etc. Section 3.11 explains the Post processing mode in greater detail. The Stay in Modelling Mode lets us continue to be in the Model generation mode of the program (the one we currently are in) in case we wish to make further changes to our model.
  • 431. Tutorial 3 3-101 3.10 Viewing the output file During the analysis stage, an output file containing results, warnings and messages associated with errors if any in the output, is produced. This file has the extension .anl and may be viewed using the output viewer. Section 1.9 of this manual contains information on viewing this file. In Sections 3.6.8 and 3.6.9, we had provided instructions to the program to write some very specific results in the output file. Let us examine those results. PRINT STATICS CHECK This instruction was provided so that we could view a report indicating if the structure is in equilibrium for the various load cases. If we scroll down the output file, we will see information which looks like the following: ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 1) SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = -17298.83 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN- MX= 34597.65 MY= 0.00 MZ= -51896.48 ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 1) SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 17298.83 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN- MX= -34597.65 MY= 0.00 MZ= 51896.48 MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING 1) MAXIMUMS AT NODE
  • 432. 3-102 Tutorial 3 X = 0.00000E+00 0 Y = -3.20681E-01 12 Z = 0.00000E+00 0 RX = 9.80406E-04 12 RY = 0.00000E+00 0 RZ = -6.49355E-04 9 For each primary load case, the report consists of: a. Summary of total applied loads for all 6 degrees of freedom, with moments calculated about the origin of the coordinate system (0, 0, 0) b. Summary of total reactions from the supports of the structure, with moments calculated about the origin of the coordinate system (0, 0, 0) c. Maximum displacements (3 translations and 3 rotations) in the structure induced by this load case Each of the 6 terms of item (a) must be equal and opposite to the corresponding term of item (b). A failure to meet this criteria would mean the analysis results (for a linear elastic analysis) may be erroneous. Factors such as instability conditions or improperly applied loads can cause the equilibrium check to fail. It is quite important to examine the maximum displacements since they tell us whether the deformations are within tolerable limits. Since the information presented above is for load case 1, and since load case 1 is the selfweight of the structure, we can conclude that the structure weighs 17298.83 Kgs.
  • 433. Tutorial 3 3-103 STRESSES FOR ELEMENT 3 This information consists of the stress and “moment over unit width” values at the centroid of element 3. A typical sample is presented below. ELEMENT STRESSES FORCE, LENGTH UNITS = KN METE ---------------- FORCE OR STRESS = FORCE/UNIT WIDTH/THICK, MOMENT = FORCE-LENGTH/UNIT WIDTH ELEMENT LOAD SQX SQY MX MY MXY VONT VONB SX SY SXY 3 1 -18.13 72.86 -3.96 -20.42 -3.35 1308.63 1308.63 0.00 0.00 0.00 TOP : SMAX= -220.33 SMIN= -1404.81 TMAX= 592.24 ANGLE= -11.1 BOTT: SMAX= 1404.81 SMIN= 220.33 TMAX= 592.24 ANGLE= -11.1 These terms are explained in Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual in elaborate detail. Example problem 18 of the Examples Manual explains the method involved in calculating the principal stresses SMAX, SMIN and TMAX.
  • 434. 3-104 Tutorial 3 FORCES FOR ELEMENT 6 This information consists of the force and moment values at each of the 4 corner nodes of element 6. A typical sample is presented below. ELEMENT FORCES FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KG METE -------------- JOINT FX FY FZ MX MY MZ ELE.NO. 6 FOR LOAD CASE 1 6 0.0000E+00 4.5323E+02 0.0000E+00 -1.1313E+03 0.0000E+00 7.9082E+02 8 0.0000E+00 5.0615E+02 0.0000E+00 -3.2047E+02 0.0000E+00 2.3981E+02 12 0.0000E+00 -7.2078E+02 0.0000E+00 1.0346E-03 0.0000E+00 -1.3733E-03 11 0.0000E+00 -2.3860E+02 0.0000E+00 -4.6697E+02 0.0000E+00 -6.0136E+02 The corner forces are in the global coordinate system. These values may be used to create a free body diagram of the element and verify that the element is in equilibrium. In this case for example, the FX and FZ forces are zero, and sum of the FY forces is also zero. The complete text of the output file is shown in the next few pages.
  • 435. Tutorial 3 3-105 **************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE SLAB SUPPORTED ALONG 2 EDGES 2. START JOB INFORMATION 3. ENGINEER DATE 4. END JOB INFORMATION 5. INPUT WIDTH 79 6. UNIT METER KN 7. JOINT COORDINATES 8. 1 0 0 0; 2 2 0 0; 3 2 0 2; 4 0 0 2; 5 4 0 0; 6 4 0 2; 7 6 0 0; 8 6 0 2 9. 9 2 0 4; 10 0 0 4; 11 4 0 4; 12 6 0 4 10. ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL 11. 1 1 2 3 4; 2 2 5 6 3; 3 5 7 8 6; 4 4 3 9 10; 5 3 6 11 9; 6 6 8 12 11 12. UNIT CM KN 13. ELEMENT PROPERTY 14. 1 TO 6 THICKNESS 30 15. DEFINE MATERIAL START 16. ISOTROPIC CONCRETE 17. E 2171.85 18. POISSON 0.17 19. DENSITY 2.35616E-005 20. ALPHA 1E-005 21. DAMP 0.05 22. END DEFINE MATERIAL 23. CONSTANTS 24. MATERIAL CONCRETE MEMB 1 TO 6 25. SUPPORTS 26. 1 2 4 5 7 10 FIXED 27. LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD 28. SELFWEIGHT Y -1 29. LOAD 2 EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD 30. UNIT METER KG 31. ELEMENT LOAD 32. 1 TO 6 PR GY -300 33. LOAD 3 TEMPERATURE LOAD 34. TEMPERATURE LOAD 35. 1 TO 6 TEMP 40 30 36. LOAD COMB 101 CASE 1 + CASE 2 37. 1 1.0 2 1.0 38. LOAD COMB 102 CASE 1 + CASE 3 39. 1 1.0 3 1.0 40. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S ----------------------------------- NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 12/ 6/ 6 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 8/ 5/ 36 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 3, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 72 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 3 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.1/ 3521.0 MB, EXMEM = 461.2 MB STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO. 1 DEAD LOAD ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 1 ) SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = -17298.83 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN- MX= 34597.66 MY= 0.00 MZ= -51896.48
  • 436. 3-106 Tutorial 3 ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 1 ) SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 17298.83 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN- MX= -34597.66 MY= 0.00 MZ= 51896.48 MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING 1) MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = 0.00000E+00 0 Y = -3.20681E-01 12 Z = 0.00000E+00 0 RX= 9.80406E-04 12 RY= 0.00000E+00 0 RZ= -6.49355E-04 9 STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO. 2 EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 2 ) SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = -7200.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN- MX= 14400.00 MY= 0.00 MZ= -21600.00 ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 2 ) SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 7200.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN- MX= -14400.00 MY= 0.00 MZ= 21600.00 MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING 2) MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = 0.00000E+00 0 Y = -1.33471E-01 12 Z = 0.00000E+00 0 RX= 4.08058E-04 12 RY= 0.00000E+00 0 RZ= -2.70270E-04 9 STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO. 3 TEMPERATURE LOAD ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 3 ) SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN- MX= 0.00 MY= 0.00 MZ= 0.00 ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 3 ) SUMMATION FORCE-X = -0.01 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.02 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN- MX= 0.00 MY= -0.10 MZ= 0.00
  • 437. Tutorial 3 3-107 MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING 3) MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = 2.01178E-01 12 Y = 8.97365E-01 12 Z = 1.66240E-01 11 RX= -3.51264E-03 12 RY= -2.41785E-04 11 RZ= 2.62398E-03 12 ************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 41. UNIT METER KN 42. PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 3 ELEMENT STRESSES FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KN METE ---------------- STRESS = FORCE/UNIT WIDTH/THICK, MOMENT = FORCE-LENGTH/UNIT WIDTH ELEMENT LOAD SQX SQY MX MY MXY VONT VONB SX SY SXY TRESCAT TRESCAB 3 1 -18.13 72.86 -3.96 -20.42 -3.35 1308.63 1308.63 0.00 0.00 0.00 1404.81 1404.81 TOP : SMAX= -220.33 SMIN= -1404.81 TMAX= 592.24 ANGLE= -11.1 BOTT: SMAX= 1404.81 SMIN= 220.33 TMAX= 592.24 ANGLE= -11.1 2 -7.54 30.33 -1.65 -8.50 -1.39 544.67 544.67 0.00 0.00 0.00 584.70 584.70 TOP : SMAX= -91.70 SMIN= -584.70 TMAX= 246.50 ANGLE= -11.1 BOTT: SMAX= 584.70 SMIN= 91.70 TMAX= 246.50 ANGLE= -11.1 3 96.73 -59.42 -30.45 -14.83 18.43 10779.68 5300.82 -5044.81 -2309.43 3890.01 10912.04 5585.51 TOP : SMAX= 269.79 SMIN=-10642.25 TMAX= 5456.02 ANGLE= -34.9 BOTT: SMAX= 624.74 SMIN= -4960.77 TMAX= 2792.75 ANGLE= -36.2 101 -25.67 103.18 -5.61 -28.92 -4.74 1853.30 1853.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 1989.51 1989.51 TOP : SMAX= -312.03 SMIN= -1989.51 TMAX= 838.74 ANGLE= -11.1 BOTT: SMAX= 1989.51 SMIN= 312.03 TMAX= 838.74 ANGLE= -11.1 102 78.60 13.44 -34.41 -35.24 15.08 10642.95 5713.09 -5044.81 -2309.43 3890.01 11074.45 6408.55 TOP : SMAX= -923.15 SMIN=-11074.45 TMAX= 5075.65 ANGLE= -37.3 BOTT: SMAX= 1848.83 SMIN= -4559.72 TMAX= 3204.28 ANGLE= -32.1 **** MAXIMUM STRESSES AMONG SELECTED PLATES AND CASES **** MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM MAXIMUM MAXIMUM PRINCIPAL PRINCIPAL SHEAR VONMISES TRESCA STRESS STRESS STRESS STRESS STRESS 1.989513E+03 -1.107445E+04 5.456020E+03 1.077968E+04 1.107445E+04 PLATE NO. 3 3 3 3 3 CASE NO. 101 102 3 3 102 ********************END OF ELEMENT FORCES******************** 43. UNIT METER KG
  • 438. 3-108 Tutorial 3 44. PRINT ELEMENT FORCE LIST 6 ELEMENT FORCES FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KG METE -------------- **NOTE- IF A COMBINATION INCLUDES A DYNAMIC CASE OR IS AN SRSS OR ABS COMBINATION THEN RESULTS CANNOT BE COMPUTED PROPERLY. GLOBAL CORNER FORCES JOINT FX FY FZ MX MY MZ ELE.NO. 6 FOR LOAD CASE 1 6 0.0000E+00 4.5323E+02 0.0000E+00 -1.1313E+03 0.0000E+00 7.9082E+02 8 0.0000E+00 5.0615E+02 0.0000E+00 -3.2047E+02 0.0000E+00 2.3981E+02 12 0.0000E+00 -7.2078E+02 0.0000E+00 1.0346E-03 0.0000E+00 -1.3733E-03 11 0.0000E+00 -2.3860E+02 0.0000E+00 -4.6697E+02 0.0000E+00 -6.0136E+02 ELE.NO. 6 FOR LOAD CASE 2 6 0.0000E+00 1.8864E+02 0.0000E+00 -4.7087E+02 0.0000E+00 3.2915E+02 8 0.0000E+00 2.1067E+02 0.0000E+00 -1.3338E+02 0.0000E+00 9.9813E+01 12 0.0000E+00 -3.0000E+02 0.0000E+00 8.9143E-05 0.0000E+00 1.6633E-05 11 0.0000E+00 -9.9306E+01 0.0000E+00 -1.9436E+02 0.0000E+00 -2.5029E+02 ELE.NO. 6 FOR LOAD CASE 3 6 -2.9880E+05 6.6190E+02 -3.0717E+05 6.3684E+03 2.7912E+03 -5.5444E+03 8 3.0633E+05 -9.9013E+02 -3.2773E+05 4.3052E+03 -3.7431E+03 4.3521E+03 12 3.2019E+05 4.6301E-03 3.2019E+05 -6.0036E+03 4.0162E-03 6.0036E+03 11 -3.2773E+05 3.2822E+02 3.1471E+05 -4.0135E+03 9.5183E+02 -2.8311E+03 ELE.NO. 6 FOR LOAD CASE 101 6 0.0000E+00 6.4187E+02 0.0000E+00 -1.6022E+03 0.0000E+00 1.1200E+03 8 0.0000E+00 7.1681E+02 0.0000E+00 -4.5385E+02 0.0000E+00 3.3963E+02 12 0.0000E+00 -1.0208E+03 0.0000E+00 3.8188E-04 0.0000E+00 -9.6018E-05 11 0.0000E+00 -3.3790E+02 0.0000E+00 -6.6133E+02 0.0000E+00 -8.5165E+02 ELE.NO. 6 FOR LOAD CASE 102 6 -2.9880E+05 1.1151E+03 -3.0717E+05 5.2371E+03 2.7912E+03 -4.7536E+03 8 3.0633E+05 -4.8398E+02 -3.2773E+05 3.9847E+03 -3.7431E+03 4.5919E+03 12 3.2019E+05 -7.2078E+02 3.2019E+05 -6.0036E+03 4.0162E-03 6.0036E+03 11 -3.2773E+05 8.9625E+01 3.1471E+05 -4.4804E+03 9.5183E+02 -3.4325E+03 45. FINISH *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= **** ************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com * * CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@odandetech.com * * CANADA +1 (604)629 6087 staad@dowco.com * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk * * GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 staad@edr.no * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com * * JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net * * * * North America support@reiusa.com * * Europe support@reel.co.uk * * Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************
  • 439. Tutorial 3 3-109 3.11 Post-Processing If there are no errors in the input, the analysis is successfully completed. The extensive facilities of the Post-processing mode can then be used to a) view the results graphically and numerically b) assess the suitability of the structure from the standpoint of safety, serviceability and efficiency c) create customized reports and plots The procedure for entering the post processing mode is explained in section 2.11.1 of this manual. Node results such as displacements and support reactions are available for all models. The methods explained in the first two tutorials – see sections 2.11.2 to 2.11.7 – may be used to explore these. If beams are present in the model, beam results will be available too (see sections 2.11.8 to 2.11.18 for information on these). For this example, we will look at the support reactions. We do not have any beams in our model, so no results will be available for this type of entity. For plates, the results available are stresses, and “unit width” moments. There are several different methods for viewing these results, as explained in the next few sections.
  • 440. 3-110 Tutorial 3 3.11.1 Viewing stress values in a tabular form From the View menu, select Tables (or click the right mouse button in the drawing area and select Tables). Choose Plate Centre Stress. Figure 3. 114 Figure 3. 115
  • 441. Tutorial 3 3-111 The following table will be displayed. Figure 3. 116 The table has the following tabs: Shear, Membrane and Bending: These terms are explained in Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. The individual values for each plate for each selected load case are displayed. Summary: This tab contains the maximum for each of the 8 values listed in the Shear, Membrane and Bending tab. Principal and Von Mises: These terms too are explained in Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. The individual values for each plate for each selected load case are displayed, for the top and bottom surfaces of the elements. Summary: This tab contains the maximum for each of the 8 values listed in the Principal and Von Mises tab. Global Moments: This tab provides the moments about the global X, Y and Z axes at the center of each element.
  • 442. 3-112 Tutorial 3 3.11.2 Printing the tables All of these tables may be printed by clicking the right mouse button in the table area and selecting the Print option. Figure 3. 117
  • 443. Tutorial 3 3-113 3.11.3 Changing the units of values which appear in the above tables The length and force units of the stresses and moments are displayed alongside the individual column headings for the terms. To view the values in a different set of units, go to the Tools menu and select Set Current Display Unit. Figure 3. 118
  • 444. 3-114 Tutorial 3 In the dialog box that comes up, click on the Force Units tab and specify the required unit from the Stress and Moment fields. Click on the Apply button for the changes to take effect immediately. Once you are sure that you have chosen the proper unit combination, click on the OK button. Figure 3. 119
  • 445. Tutorial 3 3-115 3.11.4 Limiting the load cases for which the results are displayed When we entered the post-processing mode, we chose all load cases in the Results Setup dialog box. The tables hence contain results for all the load cases. To change that load list, choose Select Load Case from the Results menu. Figure 3. 120
  • 446. 3-116 Tutorial 3 In the dialog box that comes up, select the load cases you want, and click on the single arrow , so they are transferred from the Available category to the Selected category. Then, click on the OK button. Figure 3. 121
  • 447. Tutorial 3 3-117 3.11.5 Stress Contours Stress contours are a color-based plot of the variation of stress or moment across the surface of the slab or a selected portion of it. There are 2 ways to switch on stress contour plots: a) From the left side, select the Contour sub-page under the Plate page. Figure 3. 122 or
  • 448. 3-118 Tutorial 3 b) From the top of the screen, click on the Results menu and select the Plate Stress Contour option. Figure 3. 123
  • 449. Tutorial 3 3-119 In each of the above cases, the following dialog box appears. Figure 3. 124 • From the Stress type field, select the specific type of stress for which you want the contour drawn. • From the Load Case selection box, select the load case number. • Stress values are known exactly only at the plate centroid locations. Everywhere else, they are calculated by linear interpolation between the center point stress values of adjacent plates. The Enhanced type contour chooses a larger number of points compared to the Normal type contour in determining the stress variation. • View Stress Index will display a small table consisting of the numerical range of values from smallest to largest which are represented in the plot.
  • 450. 3-120 Tutorial 3 Let us set the following: • Load case – 102 • Stress Type – Von Mis Top • Contour Type – Normal Fill • Index based on Center Stress • View Stress Index • Re-Index for new view Figure 3. 125 Click on the Apply button.
  • 451. Tutorial 3 3-121 The following diagram will be displayed. We can keep changing the settings and click on Apply to see all the various possible results in the above facility. Figure 3. 126 Let us keep the dialog box open to examine the feature (Animation) explained in the next section.
  • 452. 3-122 Tutorial 3 If some portion of the structure appears truncated, we can bring that portion into view by choosing one of the following methods: a. Click on the Zoom Out button to shrink the size of the region drawn. Before After Figure 3. 127 Figure 3. 128 b. Use the Pan button to physically shift the position of the structure away from the index. Before After Figure 3. 129 Figure 3. 130
  • 453. Tutorial 3 3-123 3.11.6 Animating stress contours The same dialog box shown in the previous section may be used to obtain the stress contours in an animated view. This is a method of getting a “dynamic” instead of static representation of the plot. After making the choices as explained in that section, click on the Animation tab of that dialog box. Switch on Stress followed by Apply. Figure 3. 131 To stop the animation, click on No Animation and click Apply again.
  • 454. 3-124 Tutorial 3 3.11.7 Creating AVI Files AVI files are a mechanism by which a dynamic result, such as, a deflection diagram in animation, may be captured and recorded. Presently, this facility is available in STAAD for node deflection, beam section displacement, mode shape and plate stress contour diagrams. The facility in STAAD for creating AVI files is under the Tools menu and is called Create AVI File. These files can then be viewed using tools such as the Windows Media Explorer. Figure 3. 132
  • 455. Tutorial 3 3-125 The following dialog box will appear. Figure 3. 133 In an animated view, the movement from one extremity to the other is captured as several frames. The number of frames that comprise such a movement is controlled by specifying a value for Total No. of Frames. The speed of motion is controlled by the Frame Rate /sec. The rest of the options in the above dialog box are for the type of diagram from which the AVI file is to be created. Certain items such as Mode Shape and Plate Stress contour do not become active (remain grayed out) if the required data of that type are not present in the STAAD file, such as a modal extraction, or finite elements.
  • 456. 3-126 Tutorial 3 After making the appropriate selections, click OK. Following this, another dialog box appears, where we are instructed to specify a file name for the .AVI file. Subsequently, we are prompted for the type of video compression. AVI files can be quite large, and compression is a technique by which one may reduce the size of these files. Figure 3. 134 Finally, a message indicating that the operation was successful will appear at the end of the file creation process as shown below. Figure 3. 135 As mentioned earlier, other tools like Windows Media Explorer may be used to view the AVI file. The file with the extension .AVI should be located in the same folder where the STAAD input file is present.
  • 457. Tutorial 3 3-127 3.11.8 Viewing plate results using element query Element Query is a facility where several results for a specific element can be viewed at the same time from a single dialog box. Let us explore this facility for element 4. Select element 4 and double click on it. Alternatively, select element 4, and from the Tools menu, choose Query – Plate. Figure 3. 136 The various tabs of the query box enable one to view various types of information such as the plate geometry, property constants, stresses, etc., for various load cases, as well as print those values.
  • 458. 3-128 Tutorial 3 Some typical screens are shown. Figure 3. 137 Figure 3. 138
  • 459. Tutorial 3 3-129 Figure 3. 139 Figure 3. 140
  • 460. 3-130 Tutorial 3 Figure 3. 141 The length and force units in which the values appear in the above tables can also be modified using the method explained in section 3.11.3.
  • 461. Tutorial 3 3-131 3.11.9 Producing an onscreen report Occasionally, we will come across a need to obtain results conforming to certain restrictions, such as, say, the resultant node displacements for a few selected nodes, for a few selected load cases, sorted in the order from low to high, with the values reported in a tabular form. The facility which enables us to obtain such customized on-screen results is the Report menu on top of the screen. Let us produce a report consisting of the plate principal stresses, for all plates, sorted in the order from Low to High of the Principal Maximum Stress (SMAX) for load cases 101 and 102. The first step to do this is to select all the plates using the Plates Cursor . Then, go to the Report | Plate Results | Principal Stresses menu option as shown below. Figure 3. 142
  • 462. 3-132 Tutorial 3 In the dialog box that appears, select the Loading tab. Make sure that load cases 101 and 102 are selected as shown below. Figure 3. 143
  • 463. Tutorial 3 3-133 Next, select the Sorting tab. Choose SMAX under the Sort by Plate Stress category and set the Sorting Order List from Low to High. (If we wish to save this report for future use, we may select the Report tab, provide a title for the report, and turn on the Save ID option.) Then, click on the OK button. Figure 3. 144
  • 464. 3-134 Tutorial 3 The following figure shows the table of maximum principal stress with SMAX values sorted from Low to High. Figure 3. 145
  • 465. Tutorial 3 3-135 To print this table, click the right mouse button anywhere within the table. A list of options will appear. Figure 3. 146 Select the print option to get a hardcopy of the report. To transfer the contents of this table to a Microsoft Excel file, click at the top left corner of the table with the left mouse button. The entire table will become highlighted. Click the right mouse button and select Copy. Then, open an Excel worksheet, click at the desired cell and click Paste.
  • 466. 3-136 Tutorial 3 3.11.10 Viewing Support Reactions Since supports are located at nodes of the structure, results of this type are available along with other node results like displacements. To view the reactions graphically, click on the Node page on the left side of the screen, and select the Reactions sub-page. Figure 3. 147
  • 467. Tutorial 3 3-137 The reactions at the supports will be displayed on the drawing as shown below. Figure 3. 148 The six values – namely, the 3 forces along global X, Y and Z, and the 3 moments Mx, My and Mz, in the global axis system are displayed in a box for each support node. The words N1, N2, etc. stand for the node numbers of the supports.
  • 468. 3-138 Tutorial 3 We may choose to “un-display” one or more of the 6 terms of each support node in the following manner. From the Results menu, choose View Value. Figure 3. 149
  • 469. Tutorial 3 3-139 In the dialog box that comes up, click on the Reactions tab. Let us switch off Global X and Global Z under the Direct category. Then, click on the Annotate button followed by the Close button. Figure 3. 150
  • 470. 3-140 Tutorial 3 The drawing will now contain only the remaining 4 terms (see figure below). Figure 3. 151 To change the load case for which the reactions are displayed, select the desired case from the load selection box. Figure 3. 152
  • 471. Tutorial 3 3-141 For better clarity in viewing the results in the drawing area (and for reducing the clutter on the screen), a variety of methods are available. For example, keep the mouse pressed on top of Zoom In button, and watch the drawing get progressively bigger. Use the Pan button to physically shift the drawing around. Other options like Dynamic Zoom and Zoom Window buttons may also be used. To restore the original view, click on the Display Whole Structure button. (Some of these options are explained in greater detail in the ‘Frequently Performed Tasks’ section at the end of this manual.) Icon Name Zoom In Pan Dynamic Zoom Zoom Window Display Whole Structure
  • 472. 3-142 Tutorial 3 The table on the right side of the screen contains the reaction values for all supports for all selected load cases. Figure 3. 153 This table can also be displayed from any mode by clicking on the View menu, choosing Tables, and switching on Support Reactions.
  • 473. Tutorial 3 3-143 The method explained in section 3.11.3 may be used to change the units in which these values are displayed. The summary tab contains the maximum value for each of the 6 degrees of freedom along with the load case number responsible for it. Figure 3. 154 This brings us to the conclusion of this tutorial. Additional help on using plates is available in Examples 9, 10 and 18 in the Examples Manual.
  • 474. 3-144 Tutorial 3
  • 475. 4-1 Tutorial Problem 4: Interoperability (using STAAD.Pro and STAAD.etc) Section 4 This tutorial is relevant only for users who have purchased the program called STAAD.etc. Since this tutorial is created using the Demo CD, the user will not have the ability to alter certain input items. This chapter provides a step-by-step tutorial on using the interoperability features between STAAD.Pro and the program called STAAD.etc. The structure created in Tutorial Problem 1 will be used as the basis for this tutorial. This tutorial covers the following topics: • Understanding STAAD.etc • Description of the tutorial problem • Using the Interactive Mode in STAAD.Pro • Designing a footing based on results from STAAD.Pro • Designing a base plate based on results from STAAD.Pro • Saving the Interactive Design information as a STAAD.etc file
  • 476. 4-2 Tutorial 4 4.1 Understanding STAAD.etc STAAD.etc is the “engineer’s structural toolkit” containing various component analysis and design module groups including foundations, masonry, timber, steel, concrete and general analysis. As a standalone product, STAAD.etc can be used to design small portal frames, continuous beams, footings, retaining walls one-way slabs, connections, shear walls and much more. STAAD.etc allows the engineer to complete the design cycle on the primary structure by analyzing and designing several structural components or accessories within the STAAD.Pro environment using STAAD.Pro’s results database.
  • 477. Tutorial 4 4-3 4.2 Description of the tutorial problem Using the structure created in Tutorial Problem 1 as the primary model, STAAD.etc will be utilized to analyze and design a footing and a base plate inside the STAAD.Pro environment for the model.
  • 478. 4-4 Tutorial 4 4.3 Using the Interactive Mode in STAAD.Pro Start the STAAD.Pro 2006 Program from your STAAD.Pro program folder, as explained in Section 1.2. From File | Open, open the file “Tut_01_portal.std” from the ../SPRO2006/STAAD/Examp/US directory as shown below (please note that the .. represents the drive or root directory the program was installed in) or from wherever the file was saved: Figure 4. 1 The picture in the preview pane is made possible by a file with the extension .emf. When a model is created using the graphical method, or when a model is saved from the graphical mode, the .emf file is created alongside the .std file. If you follow the procedure explained in Section 1.5 of this manual for creating tutorial 1, the Tut-01-portal.emf file will be produced, and if you re-open the Tut-01-portal.std subsequently, you will see the picture in the preview pane.
  • 479. Tutorial 4 4-5 If you have not performed the analysis and design for “Tut_01_portal.std”, please execute the following steps: 1. After opening the file in STAAD.Pro, go to Analyze | Run Analysis from the top menu bar as shown below. Figure 4. 2 2. A dialog box providing a choice of engines to run the file with will then popup. Select the STAAD Analysis engine as the default engine and click on the Run Analysis button. Figure 4. 3 3. If the analysis is successfully completed, a dialog box showing the different steps STAAD took to analyze the structure will come up. Click Done to proceed to the next step. If a message reporting errors in the input file were found, please refer to Tutorial 1 to rectify those problems.
  • 480. 4-6 Tutorial 4 Figure 4. 4 Starting the Interactive Mode in STAAD.Pro After “tut_01_portal.std” has been successfully analyzed and designed, click on Mode | Interactive Designs | Component Design from the top menu bar as shown in the next figure. If this menu item is “grayed-out”, the STAAD.etc program has not been installed properly or is missing. Please install or reinstall the STAAD.etc program from the STAAD.suite CD.
  • 481. Tutorial 4 4-7 Figure 4. 5 The STAAD.etc interface to STAAD.Pro is shown in the bottom right-hand corner of the screen. At the time of release of STAAD.Pro 2003 Build 1001, there are only three STAAD.etc modules interfaced with STAAD.Pro 2003. These modules are the footing, slab and base plate analysis/design as shown below. Figure 4. 6
  • 482. 4-8 Tutorial 4 Using the Drag and Drop Facilities To run any of the STAAD.etc modules, hold the left-mouse button down over a particular module and drag it to a specific joint or node in the main structure window. Figure 4. 7
  • 483. Tutorial 4 4-9 4.4 Designing a Footing based on results from STAAD.Pro In this section of the tutorial, a footing will be designed for node #1. The details of the input of the footing will not be discussed here. For further information about the input for the STAAD.etc footing module, please refer to the STAAD.etc HTML Help accompanied with the STAAD.etc program. To identify Node #1, click on Select | By List | Nodes… from the main menu bar. Select number 1 in the list box. Figure 4. 8 Figure 4. 9
  • 484. 4-10 Tutorial 4 Node #1 is now marked by a red dot in the main structure window as shown below. Figure 4. 10 Once Node #1 is identified, drag the footing icon from the Interactive Design dialog box and drop it over #1. The input for the footing pops up. Provide the name of the footing in the Job Name edit box.
  • 485. Tutorial 4 4-11 Figure 4. 11 If the Column Depth and Width are not provided under the Column Data box, obtain those data (either from the member query or from the property table) and provide them. STAAD.etc defines the Column Depth as the dimension of the supported column along the local Y axis of the column. The Column Width is defined as the dimension of the supported column along the local Z axis of the column.
  • 486. 4-12 Tutorial 4 Leave the Concrete Pedestal option unchecked. Switch to the Loading tab and select the Dead Load as Load Case 1 (the Selfweight load case) and the Live Load and Wind Load as None. Check the Reversal of Wind option off as shown below. Figure 4. 12 Keep all the other data as the defaults. Click on OK to begin designing the footing for Node #1. If the design completes successfully, the results for the footing will be displayed in a separate window. Each interactive design module produces a separate results window containing three tabs at the bottom. These tabs are Results, Calculations and Output Drawing.
  • 487. Tutorial 4 4-13 The different facets of the results output are as follows: Tab Description Sample Displays all results (analysis Results and design) in tabulated form Displays the step-by-step intermediate calculations Calculations explaining the derivation of all results. Output Detailed output drawing Drawing schematic Figure 4. 13
  • 488. 4-14 Tutorial 4 Editing and Viewing Interactive Designs All interactive design results for a particular STAAD file are listed in the Interactive Design dialog box which can be brought up by clicking on Mode | Interactive Design from the top menu bar. To view any interactive design result, select the design job and click on View Results. To edit any job, select the job and click on Edit Job to bring up the input dialog box with the existing data. Figure 4. 14 STAAD.Pro also has the ability to design group footings. This tutorial does not cover the basics of running a group footing inside of STAAD.Pro.
  • 489. Tutorial 4 4-15 4.5 Designing a base plate based on results from STAAD.Pro The base plate and other modules in the Interactive Design mode of STAAD.Pro are similar to the footing module explained previously. A brief description of the base plate input will be explained here. For a detailed description of the base plate module, please refer to the STAAD.etc HTML Help. Following the steps in the footing module tutorial in Section 4.4, the input for a base plate can be supplied after the base plate icon is dragged and dropped over a particular support joint. A base plate can be designed only for a member with a support. Figure 4. 15 To check the adequacy of an existing base plate for a specfic load case, provide the Plate Length, Plate Width and Thickness of that plate. However, to have the program design a base plate, set the Plate Length, Plate Width and Thickness to zero (0).
  • 490. 4-16 Tutorial 4 4.6 Saving the interactive design as a STAAD.etc file All interactive design jobs are saved with the STAAD.Pro “.std” input file as a separate file with the extension “.etc”. For example, in this tutorial, the STAAD file is named tut_01_portal.std . Thus, the name of the interactive design file will be tut_01_portal.etc and will be saved in the same directory as the “tut_01_portal.std” file. STAAD.Pro is capable of inherently reading STAAD.etc files without the need for importing or exporting the file. Similarly, any “.etc” file generated by STAAD.Pro can be read in STAAD.etc. This is particularly useful when the engineer wants to design other structural components on top of the ones already produced in STAAD.Pro.
  • 491. 4-17
  • 492. 4-18
  • 495. FPT-1 1. Selecting nodes, beams, plates, etc. The Selection Toolbar
  • 496. FPT-2 Frequently Performed Tasks Icon Corresponding Menu/Sub-menu Purpose Description options Select | Nodes Cursor Used to select First, select the Nodes nodes Cursor. Then, click on graphically the nodes you wish to select. To select multiple nodes, hold Nodes down the Control key Cursor while selecting, or create a rubber-band style window around the desired nodes. Select | Beams Cursor Used to select First, select the Beams beams Cursor. Then, click on graphically the members you wish to select. To select multiple members, hold Beams down the Control key Cursor while selecting, or create a rubber-band style window around the desired beams.
  • 497. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-3 Icon Corresponding Menu/Sub-menu Purpose Description options Select | Plates Cursor Used to select First, select the Plates plates Cursor. Then, click on graphically the plates you wish to select. To select multiple plates, hold Plates down the Control key Cursor while selecting, or create a rubber-band style window around the desired plates. Select | Surface Cursor Used to select First, select the surface Surface Cursor. Then, graphically click on the surface you wish to select. To select multiple Surface surfaces, hold down Cursor the Control key while selecting, or create a rubber-band style window around the desired surfaces.
  • 498. FPT-4 Frequently Performed Tasks Icon Corresponding Menu/Sub-menu Purpose Description options Select | Solids Cursor Used to select First, select the Solids solids Cursor. Then, click on graphically the solids you wish to select. To select multiple solids, hold Solids down the Control key Cursor while selecting, or create a rubber-band style window around the desired solids. Select | Geometry Cursor Used to select First, select the any geometry Geometry Cursor. graphically. It is Then, click on the a mechanism for entity you wish to selecting nodes, select. To select Geometry beams, plates multiple entities, hold Cursor and solids, or, down the Control key any combination while selecting, or of these, create a rubber-band simultaneously. style window around the desired entities.
  • 499. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-5 Icon Corresponding Menu/Sub-menu Purpose Description options Select | Load Edit Cursor Used to First, select the Load graphically Edit Cursor. Then, select a double-click on the component of an diagram of the load existing load component you wish to Load Edit case for edit. Cursor modification. Select | Support Edit Cursor Used to First select the Support graphically Edit Cursor. Then, select a support double-click on the whose support icon at the parameters one node where you wish Support Edit may wish to to modify the details of Cursor modify. the existing support.
  • 500. FPT-6 Frequently Performed Tasks Icon Corresponding Menu/Sub-menu Purpose Description options Select | Release Edit Cursor Used to First, select the graphically Release Edit Cursor. select and Then, double-click on modify an the member on which a existing member currently defined release START or END release Release Edit specification condition has to be Cursor modified. Select | Text Cursor Used to enter To edit any pre-created the mode for text, first, select the editing pre- Text Label Cursor. created text Then, double-click on labels the text that you wish to modify. Select Text
  • 501. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-7 Icon Corresponding Menu/Sub-menu Purpose Description options Enables the user Please refer to nd to select STAAD.Pro 2004 2 multiple types of Edition Release geometric Report. Filtered entities (nodes, Selection beams, surfaces, etc.) with specific attributes in one pass.
  • 502. FPT-8 Frequently Performed Tasks 2. Viewing the structure from different angles The Rotation Toolbar
  • 503. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-9 Icon Description Example Displays the structure as seen from the front. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the elevation view, as looking towards the negative direction View From of the Z-axis. +Z Displays the structure as seen from the back. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the elevation view, as seen looking towards the positive direction of the Z-axis. View From - Z Displays the structure as seen from the right side. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the side elevation, as seen looking towards the negative View From direction of the X-axis. +X
  • 504. FPT-10 Frequently Performed Tasks Icon Description Example Displays the structure as seen from the left side. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the side elevation, as seen looking towards the positive direction of the X-axis. View From - X Displays the structure as seen from the top looking down. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the plan view, as seen from the sky looking View From down. +Y Displays the structure as if one is looking up skywards. View From - Y
  • 505. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-11 Icon Description Example Displays the structure in the isometric view. The angle which defines isometric view is generally X = 30, Y = 30, Z = 0 Isometric View
  • 506. FPT-12 Frequently Performed Tasks 3. Switching on labels for nodes, beams, plates, etc. Labels are a way of identifying the entities we have drawn on the screen. To demonstrate this facility, let us open EXAMP01.std. The structure will look as shown below.
  • 507. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-13 1. To switch the node and beam labels on, we may utilize any one of the following methods: a. Click on the Symbols and Labels icon as shown below. b. Click the right mouse button anywhere in the drawing area. In the dialog box that appears, choose Labels (as shown in the figure below).
  • 508. FPT-14 Frequently Performed Tasks c. Select the View menu followed by the Structure Diagrams option from the top menu bar, and the Labels tab of the dialog box that comes up.
  • 509. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-15 2. In all of the above three cases, the following Diagrams dialog box will appear. Make sure that the Labels tab is selected. Then, switch the appropriate labels on and click on OK.
  • 510. FPT-16 Frequently Performed Tasks The following figure shows the structure with the node and beam labels displayed on it.
  • 511. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-17 3. To change the font of the node/beam labels, go to the View menu and select the Options command. Then, select the appropriate tab (Node Labels / Beam labels) from the Options dialog box. Choose the Font option and make the necessary changes.
  • 512. FPT-18 Frequently Performed Tasks 4. Displaying a portion of the model by isolating it from the rest of the structure Sometimes, the large number of entities that are drawn on the screen may make it difficult to clearly see the details at any particular region of the structure. In such cases, one is confronted with the task of de-cluttering the screen or looking at specific regions or entities while removing the rest of the structure from the view. There are different methods in STAAD.Pro by which the user can view a portion of the structure. The following pages demonstrate three different methods. Method 1 – View | New View Steps: 1. To demonstrate this method, let us open EXAMP08.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
  • 513. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-19 2. Let us say that we wish to view only the members which are at the midheight level. The first step to doing this is to select those members. The quickest way to select them is to bring up the View From + Z and creating a rubber-band around them, after making sure that the Beams Cursor is the active cursor. 3. To visually verify that the correct members have been selected, click on the Isometric View icon . The selected members will appear in one color and the rest of the structure in another.
  • 514. FPT-20 Frequently Performed Tasks 4. Next, either click the right mouse button and select the New View option or, pull down the View menu and select the New View option. 5. In either case, the following dialog box comes up. These radio buttons determine whether the selected view would be opened in a new (‘child’) window or whether it would replace the current (‘parent’) view window. Let us select the Create a new window for the view option and click on the OK button.
  • 515. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-21 The portion of the structure that we selected will now be displayed in a new window as shown below. We can create more than one ‘child’ view window this way. All sorts of operations can be performed inside the ‘New View’ such as adding and deleting members, assigning properties, loads, supports, etc. A new view of a selected portion offers the advantage of de-cluttering the screen and limiting the displayed objects to just a few chosen entities. 6. To return to the ‘parent’ view window, simply close the new view (‘child’) window.
  • 516. FPT-22 Frequently Performed Tasks 7. Next, let us try the Display the view in the active window option. Follow steps 2 to 4. Then, select the Display the view in the active window option and click on the OK button. The original structure will be hidden and, the portion of the structure that we selected will instead be displayed in the current (‘parent’) window as shown below.
  • 517. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-23 We may restore the original view of the structure by simply clicking on the Display Whole Structure icon. These new views may be saved by going to the View | View Management | Save View menu option. Provide a title for the new view. These saved views may later be opened by going to the View | Open View menu option. Method 2 – Tools | Cut Section Steps: 1. To demonstrate this method, let us once again open EXAMP08.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
  • 518. FPT-24 Frequently Performed Tasks We will once again try to view just the members at the mid-height level. 2. Click on the Symbols and Labels icon and in the Diagrams dialog box that comes up, switch the Node Numbers on. The reason for doing this will become evident in the next step.
  • 519. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-25 3. From the Tools menu, select Cut Section.
  • 520. FPT-26 Frequently Performed Tasks The following dialog box comes up. The Range By Joint method Since the beams of the mid-height level happen to contain joint # 10 (or any of the joint numbers from 7 to 12), it would be convenient if we could instruct the program to display the entities lying in the X-Z plane, and passing through any one of those joints 7 to 12. The facilities of the Range By Joint tab enable us to do that. 4. Let us select that tab (it happens to be the default). Here, we can select the plane of the section by clicking on one of the options – X-Y, Y-Z, or X-Z. We have to choose the X-Z plane for our example. Then, in the Node # drop down list, provide a joint that lies on the sectional plane. In our example, we may choose any one of the nodes between 7 and 12. Let us choose node # 10. Click on the OK button.
  • 521. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-27 The following figure shows the cut portion of the original structure displayed in the drawing area. 5. To restore the original view, simply click on the Display Whole Structure icon. Alternatively, go to the dialog box shown in step 4 and click on the Show All button.
  • 522. FPT-28 Frequently Performed Tasks The Range By Min/Max method Steps: Another convenient way of choosing the beams at the mid-height level is to specify that those beams lie in the X-Z plane between the Y range values of 12ft - a and 12ft + a, where, “a” is an arbitrary value such as say, 2ft. 6. To do this, let us select the Range By Min/Max tab. Here, we can again select the plane of the section by clicking on one of the options – X-Y, Y-Z, or X-Z. We have to choose the X-Z plane for our example. The Minimum and Maximum edit boxes represent the boundary distances along the axis perpendicular to the sectional plane. Every object lying between these two distances will be displayed. In our example, let us provide 10 as the Minimum and 14 as the Maximum distance. (Before doing so, make sure that the current input units of length, displayed at the bottom right corner of the STAAD program window, are feet.) Then, click on the OK button.
  • 523. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-29 The following figure shows the cut portion of the original structure displayed in the drawing area. 7. To restore the original view, again, click on the Display Whole Structure icon or click on the Show All button in the dialog box shown in step 6.
  • 524. FPT-30 Frequently Performed Tasks The Select to View method For demonstrating this method, instead of viewing specific beams, let us look at the nodes instead. Steps: Using this option, the portion of the structure we wish to view can be selected by specifying the objects which lie in that portion. The Window/Rubber Band option allows us to select the portion of the structure to view by specifying a rubber-band window around it. The View Highlighted Only option displays only the selected (highlighted) objects on screen and, the members and elements we wish to view must be selected before choosing this option. The Select To View option allows us to view only Beams, Plates, and/or Solids, depending on the corresponding check boxes that are activated. 8. For our example, let us choose the Select To View option and check the Nodes check box. Then, click on the OK button as shown below.
  • 525. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-31 The following figure shows the view of the structure with only the nodes displayed. 9. To restore the original view, click on the Display Whole Structure icon or click on the Show All button in the dialog box shown in step 8. These new views may be saved by going to the View | View Management | Save View menu option. Provide a title for the new view. These saved views may later be opened by going to the View | Open View menu option.
  • 526. FPT-32 Frequently Performed Tasks Method 3 – View | Zoom The Zoom menu option allows us to zoom in (magnify) or out (reduce) on a portion of the structure, as one would, using a telescope. Steps: 1. To demonstrate this method, let us open EXAMP09.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
  • 527. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-33 2. Say, we want to magnify the portion of the structure shown in the figure below. 3. To select the plates as shown in the above figure, click on the View From + Z icon. Then, using the Plates Cursor , select the plates by rubber-banding around them as shown below. By the way, looking at the model from View From + Y, or, View From - X, and using the rubber-band window methods can be just as effective in selecting these elements.
  • 528. FPT-34 Frequently Performed Tasks 4. To restore the original isometric view, click on the Isometric View icon. We do this only to make sure that we have selected the correct entities. 5. To magnify the selected portion of the structure, either click on the Zoom Window icon or, pull down the View menu and select the Zoom | Zoom Window menu option as shown below.
  • 529. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-35 The cursor changes as shown below. 6. Using the cursor, drag a window around the selected portion of the structure. The magnified view of the selected portion of the structure will now be displayed in the drawing area as shown below.
  • 530. FPT-36 Frequently Performed Tasks If we click on the Zoom In icon, it magnifies or enlarges the view of the structure even further by a pre-defined factor. You can keep the mouse cursor pressed over the Zoom In or Zoom Out icons, and the screen will continuously refresh to draw the structure larger or smaller. To display the enlarged view in a new window, use the Dynamic Zoom icon instead of the Zoom Window option. The region you wish to see will have to be selected by creating a rubber-band window around it. That region will now be displayed in a new window in the drawing area as shown in the next figure.
  • 531. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-37 7. To restore the view of the full structure, click on the Display Whole Structure icon. These new views may be saved by going to the View | View Management | Save View menu option. Provide a title for the new view. These saved views may later be opened by going to the View | Open View menu option.
  • 532. FPT-38 Frequently Performed Tasks 5. Creating Groups Group names are a means for easily identifying a collection of entities like Beams, Plates or Solids using a single moniker. By grouping these entities, we need to assign attributes such as member properties and material constants just to the group, a simple process, compared to the task of assigning them to the individual members. Steps: 1. To demonstrate this, let us open EXAMP01.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
  • 533. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-39 Let us classify the members of the topmost level of this structure into three groups – Top Chords, Bottom Chords and Transverse Truss. Top Chords: 2. Make sure that the Beams Cursor has been selected. Then, using the mouse, select the inclined members as shown in the figure below.
  • 534. FPT-40 Frequently Performed Tasks 3. From the Tools menu, choose Create New Group.
  • 535. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-41 4. In the Give Group Name dialog box, type _TOPCOR for Group name (Group Names must begin with the underscore ‘_’ character). Since group names can be assigned to Nodes, Beams, Plates, Solids as well as a general category called Geometry, it is very important that we choose the proper entity type. Hence, specify the Select Type as Beam. 5. Click on the OK button. Notice that the Assign Methods in the Create Group dialog box is presently set to Associate to Selected Geometry. Click on the Associate button. Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the highlighted members. This is necessary before we start selecting the members for the next group name.
  • 536. FPT-42 Frequently Performed Tasks Bottom Chords: 6. Using the mouse, select the bottom chords as shown in the figure below.
  • 537. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-43 7. Next, to bring up the Give Group Name dialog box, click on the Create button. Then, follow steps 4 and 5 and assign the Group Name _BOTCOR to these members. Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the highlighted members.
  • 538. FPT-44 Frequently Performed Tasks Transverse Truss: 8. Using the mouse, select the Transverse Truss members as shown in the figure below.
  • 539. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-45 9. Next, follow step 7 except for specifying the Group Name as _TRNTRUS. Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the highlighted members. Also, Close the Create Group dialog box. Three groups have now been created. If we now go to the Select menu, an option called By Group Name should be available. Let us click on that option, and the following dialog box comes up.
  • 540. FPT-46 Frequently Performed Tasks It is apparent that we can now select the members using the group name method. If the check boxes for Show Label are switched off, labels such as beam numbers will not be displayed for these specific members, even if the beam numbering icon is switched on for the entire structure.
  • 541. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-47 6. Displaying Loads on the screen Steps: 1. To demonstrate this feature, let us open EXAMP08.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
  • 542. FPT-48 Frequently Performed Tasks 2. The easiest way to display a load is to click on the Loads icon as shown below. To choose a specific load, we can click in the list box called Active Load and choose the one we want. Alternatively, we may pull the View menu down and select the Structure Diagrams menu option. In the Diagrams dialog box that opens, select the Loads and Results tab. Check the Loads check box and select the load case we want from the Load Case list box. Then, click on the Apply button. Drag the dialog box out of the way if it obstructs the view of the structure.
  • 543. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-49 The following figure shows load case 1 displayed on our structure.
  • 544. FPT-50 Frequently Performed Tasks 3. We can change the color in which load icons are drawn. Click on the color button alongside the Loads checkbox, and make a new choice from the color palette (see figure below). Let us assign say, blue color, as shown in the above figure. Select load case 2 from the Load Case list box.
  • 545. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-51 The following figure shows load case 2 displayed (in blue) on our structure.
  • 546. FPT-52 Frequently Performed Tasks 7. Displaying Load Values on the screen Steps: 1. In the previous exercise, we saw the method for turning on load icons, but not the numeric value of those loads. To view load values, let us open EXAMP01.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
  • 547. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-53 2. Let us first display the load by clicking on the Loads icon . After this, click the right mouse button and choose the Labels option. Alternatively, we may click on the Symbols and Labels icon or go to View | Structure Diagrams and select the Labels tab in the Diagrams dialog box.
  • 548. FPT-54 Frequently Performed Tasks 3. The dialog box shown below appears. Switch on the Load Values option under the Loading Display Options category as shown below.
  • 549. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-55 The following figure shows our structure with the load values displayed on it.
  • 550. FPT-56 Frequently Performed Tasks 4. To change the unit in which load values are displayed, go to Tools | Set Current Display Unit menu command.
  • 551. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-57 In the Options dialog box that comes up, select the Force Units tab. Then, change the selection under the Force, Distributed Force, etc. options as shown below. The following figure shows our structure with the load values displayed in KN/m.
  • 552. FPT-58 Frequently Performed Tasks 8. Structural Tool Tip Options Structural tool tips offer a facility for displaying any customized input or output information about a node, beam, plate or solid element when the mouse cursor is placed over the structural entity. The tool tips are similar to the ones displayed when the mouse cursor hovers over a toolbar icon. When the mouse cursor is moved away from that spot, the information displayed is switched off too. To activate the structural tool tips, go to View | Structural Tool Tip Options from the top menu.
  • 553. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-59 The dialog box shown in the figure below will prompt for the data to be displayed when the mouse hovers a particular structural entity. To turn the structural tool tips on or off, check the Show Tool Tip box in the upper left hand corner. The Tip Delay box signifies the amount of time it takes from when the mouse cursor first appears over an entity to when the tool tip actually pops up. This number is expressed in milliseconds (i.e. 1000 = 1 second). The options (items that can be displayed) for each entity are shown under the Options box. A check mark signifies that the particular data item will be displayed in the tool tip. An option with a “+” next to it signifies that further options can be enabled or disabled.
  • 554. FPT-60 Frequently Performed Tasks The figure below shows the options that can be turned on or off for Node Displacements. A red “X” indicates the data will not be shown in the tool tip. Simply click on the check box to turn an option on or off.
  • 555. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-61 The resulting tool tip that is displayed from the options chosen in the previous figure is shown in the figure below. The tool tips automatically display the results for the active load case. All values are reported in the current display units.
  • 556. FPT-62 Frequently Performed Tasks 9. Identifying Beam Start and End When assigning attributes like member releases or member offsets, one additional item of information which accompanies this information is whether that attribute is applied at the “START” node of a member or the “END” node. Hence, there has to be a way to quickly identify these two points without mistaking one for the other. Steps: 1. To demonstrate this, let us open EXAMP01.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
  • 557. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-63 2. There are two different ways to identify the start and/or end of a beam: a) simply place the mouse over a specific beam. The resulting tool tip will display the start node and end node of that beam in two distinct colors along with their corresponding coordinates. Of course, it is necessary to have the tool tips display turned on for this method to work.
  • 558. FPT-64 Frequently Performed Tasks b) Click the right mouse button anywhere in the drawing area and choose Labels.
  • 559. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-65 The following Diagrams dialog box will appear. Make sure that the Labels tab is selected. Then, switch the Beam Ends option on. To alter the color in which the start and/or end is displayed, simply click on the color palette next to the Start Color and/or End Color options and choose the color you want. Then, click on Apply for the changes to take effect immediately. Click on OK to close the dialog box.
  • 560. FPT-66 Frequently Performed Tasks The following figure shows the structure with the start and end of all beams displayed in two separate colors.
  • 561. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-67 10. Plotting from STAAD.Pro Explained below are 5 methods for plotting the drawing of the STAAD model and STAAD result diagrams. Method 1 : Using the Print Current View option 1. We shall use example problem 14 to illustrate this feature. Open the example. The model should appear as shown below.
  • 562. FPT-68 Frequently Performed Tasks 2. To plot this picture, click on the Print Current View icon as shown in the following figure. 3. The standard Windows Print dialog box will appear asking you to choose the printer to which you wish to plot the drawing.
  • 563. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-69 4. If you wish to catch a glimpse of the plot, as it would appear on paper, select the Print Preview Current View option. A preview screen similar to the one shown below will be displayed.
  • 564. FPT-70 Frequently Performed Tasks Method 2 : Using the Take Picture option 1. Bring up the diagram of the STAAD model you wish to print. On the Print toolbar of the STAAD screen, you will find an icon of a camera called Take Picture. Alternatively, this option can be accessed from Edit | Take Picture. 2. A dialog box will appear prompting you to provide a Picture ID and caption.
  • 565. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-71 3. Next, select Report Setup from the File menu, or click on the Report Setup icon as shown below. 4. A Report Setup dialog box will appear. In the Items tab, select Pictures from the available list of items.
  • 566. FPT-72 Frequently Performed Tasks 5. If more than one picture is available, select the one you wish to plot by pressing the button. Next, go to the Picture Album tab and switch on Full Page. Click OK. 6. From the File menu, select Print – Report. The diagram will be plotted. Alternatively, from the File menu, select Export Report | MS Word File.
  • 567. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-73 7. In the Save As dialog box, type in the name of the “.doc” file you want and click on the Save button. In the template dialog box, select the Normal template. Microsoft Word will now start building the file with the picture in it. Once this task is completed, Word will open this file, and program can be accessed from the Windows Taskbar. Browse the file, and if you are sure the image meets your needs, select Print from the File menu and follow the instructions.
  • 568. FPT-74 Frequently Performed Tasks Method 3 : Using the Export View option 1. STAAD.Pro has a facility to export the drawing to a graphic image file. The icon for this facility is called Export View and is available in the Print toolbar. 2. When the diagram that you wish to plot is displayed on the screen, click on the Export View icon. Select the graphic format in which you wish to save the file (i.e., .bmp, .jpg, .tif, .gif, etc.) Provide a file name and save the file.
  • 569. Frequently Performed Tasks FPT-75 3. Then go to a document publishing or graphic editing program such as Microsoft Word or Adobe Photoshop. Import the drawing from the file saved above. In Word, this can be done using Insert | Picture | From File. Once you are sure the image meets your needs, select Print from the File menu and follow the instructions. Method 4 : Using the Copy Picture option 1. Highlight the window containing the diagram that you wish to plot. This can be done by making sure the title bar of that window has the color which indicates that it is in focus. From the Edit menu, choose Copy Picture. 2. Next, run a graphics program which offers facilities for handling graphic images such as Microsoft Paint, Adobe Photoshop, etc. In the Edit menu of that program, select Paste. You will notice that the drawing from the STAAD window is now pasted in that program. Using the tools provided by the graphics program, you can modify the drawing if you wish. Once you are sure the image meets your needs, select Print from the File menu and follow the instructions.
  • 570. FPT-76 Frequently Performed Tasks Method 5 : Using the Windows Clipboard 1. When the diagram that you wish to plot is displayed on the screen, press the "Print Screen" key on your keyboard or “Shift-Print Screen", depending on how your keyboard is set up. The entire image currently in view will be copied to the Windows clipboard. Next, run a graphics program which offers facilities for cropping portions of a graphic image (such as Microsoft Paint, Hijaak, Full Shot, etc.). In the Edit menu of those programs, select Paste. You will notice that the entire STAAD screen including the diagram, menus, toolbar icons, tables, etc., which were in view, are part of the pasted image. Using the tools provided by the graphics program, crop the image so as to preserve just the drawing and eliminate unwanted portions. Using the File | Print option, print the drawing.
  • 572. FPT-78 Frequently Performed Tasks